Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Fox News Digital publishes an array of health pieces all week long to keep you in the know on key wellness topics: disease prevention, nutrition, medical research, health care and more. We also share personal stories of people and families overcoming great health obstacles.
Check out some of the top stories of the week in Health that you may have missed or have been meaning to check out.
These are just a few of what’s new. There are many more to see at Fox News Health.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Without further ado, dive right into these eight stories.
1. Service dog gives peace of mind to woman with epilepsy
Channing Seideman, 30 — who has lived with daily seizures since childhood — revealed that her life has been changed by her dedicated service dog, Bishop. “In addition to bringing peace of mind, the dogs make epilepsy approachable to the public,” she said. Click here to get the story.
Channing Seideman, pictured with her service dog, Bishop, said he’s given her peace of mind amid her daily epileptic seizures.(Channing Seideman)
2. Doctor shares 10 big ‘lies’ he says health care is telling
Dr. Robert Lufkin, a California physician, said he “woke up” to flaws in the medical system when he himself was diagnosed with four chronic diseases. He shares what he believes are the 10 biggest lies told to patients. Click here to get the story.
Dr. Robert Lufkin, pictured at left, was diagnosed with four chronic diseases, which inspired him to write a book, “Lies I Taught in Medical School.”(Dr. Robert Lufkin/iStock)
3. Sleep apnea patients could soon have solution
In a Finland study, a new breathing device showed promising results in reducing symptoms of sleep apnea, according to researchers. The device, called WellO2, uses resistance training to strengthen throat muscles and steam breathing to humidify airways. Click here to get the story.
In a Finland study, a new breathing device, shown at right, showed promising results in reducing symptoms of sleep apnea, according to researchers.(iStock/WellO)
4. Researchers announce progress against Parkinson’s
An experimental drug is showing promise in slowing the progression of Parkinson’s disease in clinical trials. Researchers and Parkinson’s experts discuss what this could mean for patients. Click here to get the story.
In a new study, Parkinson’s patients reported improved daily movement after being administered UB-312, an experimental drug. (iStock)
5. ‘Is it ever OK to take someone else’s prescription?’
In this week’s installment of Ask a Doctor, two pharmacists weigh in on whether it’s ever safe to share medications. Click here to get the story.
This week’s health stories included a story of a service dog helping a woman with epilepsy, a doctor’s take on 10 medical “lies,” an amazing kidney transplant, and more.(Channing Seideman/iStock/Northwestern Medical)
6. Good news revealed for diabetes patients
Most of the 38 million people living with diabetes in the U.S. use daily injections or insulin pumps to keep glucose at safe levels — but new research suggests that an inhaler could be just as effective. Researchers and doctors weigh the benefits and limitations. Click here to get the story.
An inhaled form of insulin worked just as well as injections or pumps to control type 1 diabetes in a recent study.(iStock/MannKind)
7. Chicago man gets kidney transplant while wide awake
John Nicholas, 28, called his organ transplant surgery “a pretty cool experience.” Surgeries without general anesthesia can increase access to care for patients who are considered high-risk or have phobias surrounding anesthesia. Click here to get the story.
John Nicholas, the patient, is pictured with his surgeons in the operating room after a kidney transplant.(Northwestern Medicine)
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
8. Daily multivitamins not shown to increase longevity, study finds
Researchers from the National Institutes of Health found that taking multivitamins did not reduce mortality risk, but a longevity doctor has questions. Click here to get the story.
Those who took daily multivitamins were actually found to have a 4% higher mortality risk, according to the study published in JAMA Network Open.(iStock)
Our diet plays a key role in our physical and mental health. There is plenty of research that has established a gut-brain connection, meaning what we eat can impact our minds. Some foods are loaded with healthy nutrients and can benefit our brain health. According to Medical News Today, some of these healthy foods include oily fish, dark chocolate, berries, nuts, seeds, whole grains, eggs, etc. While eating these foods can be good for the brain, there are certain foods and drinks that scientific research shows can mess with your concentration and focus.
Here Are 5 Foods You Should Avoid That Can Negative Impact Your Concentration Levels:
1. Pastries, Cakes And White Bread
While you might enjoy indulging in pastries, muffins, cakes, toasted white bread etc, higher glycemic index foods can have a detrimental impact on overall brain function, according to Great Lakes Functional Neurology. “It causes a spike in blood sugar (which can be good for immediate functioning), but it inevitably leads to a blood sugar crash that can leave the brain starved for more energy than before, and make you feel foggy, fatigued, and forgetful.”
2. Foods High In Salt
Too much salt can cause cognitive deficits, according to a study published in the journal Nature Neuroscience. Endothelial cells inside the cerebral blood vessels are responsible for regulating the vascular tone of the brain. The researchers found that a high dietary intake of salt has been associated with dysfunction of these cells. Excessive salt intake can cause inflammation in the brain, which can interfere with short-term memory and concentration.
3. Soda And Sugary Drinks
Most people love sipping on fizzy and sugary beverages, feeling refreshed after drinking a glass or two. However, excessive sugar intake can rapidly increase blood sugar which would follow with a crash, that can make it difficult to maintain focused concentration. According to Psychology Today, consumption of sugar-sweetened beverages is linked to a higher risk of metabolic dysfunction, stroke, dementia and depression. Also Read: Struggling With Inflammation? Try These 3-Nutritionist Approved Tips For Happy Gut
4. Coffee
While drinking some coffee can make you more alert, drinking too much coffee can make you feel jittery or anxious. For some people, even a little consumption of coffee can trigger anxiety. Mayo Clinic explains, “If you’re susceptible to the effects of caffeine, even small amounts may prompt unwanted effects, such as restlessness and sleep problems.”
5. Energy Drinks
Many people may resort to chugging energy drinks to drive sleep away and “get more focus.” However, this impact may only be temporary and worsen your brain health and concentration in the long run. Energy drinks often contain high levels of caffeine, which can increase urine production and lead to dehydration. According to Healthline, mild dehydration (fluid loss of 1-3 per cent) can impair energy levels, impair mood, and lead to major reductions in memory and brain performance. Also Read: Gut Feeling Off This Monsoon? This Humble Moong Water Recipe Is Your Answer
If you consume these foods, ensure you do so in limited quantities and eat an overall well-balanced and nutritious diet.
Disclaimer: This content including advice provides generic information only. It is in no way a substitute for qualified medical opinion. Always consult a specialist or your doctor for more information. NDTV does not claim responsibility for this information.
Lucie Lott said she knew she would marry Eladio Fabregas even before the two had spoken.
Their paths first crossed in September 2021 outside the cafeteria at Samford University in Homewood, Ala. Ms. Lott, now 22, was starting as a freshman, and Mr. Fabregas, 25, who goes by Lalo, was a junior.
“We did a triple take,” Ms. Lott recalled. “I remember telling my roommate right after that I had met my future husband.”
Mr. Fabregas, a native of Galicia, Spain, came to the United States on a tennis scholarship. During that brief encounter, Ms. Lott noticed he was wearing a shirt for Samford’s tennis team. She found his photo and name on the team’s roster and sent him a message on Instagram that same day.
“I asked if it was him who I had seen earlier,” she said.
“I replied, ‘Yes, I think you are the beautiful girl I noticed,” he said. “I hate texting and messaging and asked if I could call her.”
That first call led to a first date, during which ice cream and stargazing on a hilltop followed dinner at a local pizzeria.
The night almost didn’t happen. Mr. Fabregas said that he had toyed with the idea of canceling for fear of falling in love. “I was so taken with Lucie and knew that if we went out, we would get serious,” he said. “I was young, in the country on a scholarship and here to make it. Part of me thought that a relationship might be distracting.”
Despite his hesitation, Mr. Fabregas stuck to the plan, which had Ms. Lott picking him up in her car from Samford’s tennis center after practice.
“I gave him a hug when he came out and told him that I was excited to see him,” Ms. Lott said. “From then on, we talked nonstop and shared our goals and different upbringings.”
Ms. Lott grew up on a 250-acre horse farm, Augustus Hill, in Paris, Ky. The property hosts events and has been used for fashion shoots for brands like Peter Millar. She graduated from Samford with a bachelor’s degree in marketing and mass communications and now runs Augustus Hill’s events business remotely.
Mr. Fabregas has a bachelor’s degree in business and an M.B.A. from Samford. He is a financial analyst at the private equity firm Regent in Beverly Hills, Calif., where the couple currently resides.
After that night, the pair was inseparable. “We studied, ate, exercised and enjoyed every bit of free time together,” Mr. Fabregas said.
Early on in their relationship, he accompanied Ms. Lott to her family’s vacation home in Santa Rosa Beach, Fla., introducing him to her mother, Diane Lott.
“My mom made sangria and served Spanish olives to bring a little of Lalo’s background to the evening,” Ms. Lott said.
In the fall of 2022, Mr. Fabregas asked Ms. Lott to accompany him on a trip to Galicia to meet his family.
“I was overwhelmed and nervous,” she said. “They didn’t really speak English, and I don’t speak Spanish, and I wasn’t sure how all the translation would work out. But his parents greeted me with hugs and were genuine and warm.”
Mr. Fabregas’s and Ms. Lott’s courtship continued over the next few years. When Mr. Fabregas finished the M.B.A. program and got hired for the financial analyst job in California, Ms. Lott relocated with him and switched to Samford’s online program until she graduated.
Before moving, the couple made their annual trip to visit Mr. Fabregas’s parents in Spain.
“Lalo told me that he wanted to add on a weekend getaway to an island called La Toja for some sun and relaxation,” Ms. Lott said. “I knew that he was going to propose at some point, and when he mentioned the trip, I was sure that it would happen then.”
However, rain interfered with Mr. Fabregas’s plans. “I was going to ask Lucie in front of a church that’s made out of seashells,” he said. “But when the drops started coming, I postponed.”
The following morning, on June 1, 2023, Mr. Fabregas and Ms. Lott returned to the church and he presented her with a center-cut diamond ring embellished with two shield-cut diamonds.
[Click here to binge read this week’s featured couples.]
On June 15, the couple wed at Augustus Hill before 160 guests, including Ms. Lott’s grandfather, Trent Lott, the former Senate majority leader, as well as several members of Mr. Fabregas’s family from Spain.
Hunter Bates, a close friend of Ms. Lott’s family and a former chief of staff to Senate minority leader Mitch McConnell, officiated. He was ordained by Christian Global Outreach Ministries.
Ms. Lott, wearing a lace Monique Lhuillier dress, arrived at the altar with her father, Chet Lott, in an open-air, wicker horse carriage as a harpist played Pachelbel’s Canon.
Mr. Fabregas was dressed in a European morning suit from Stuart Mercer Gentleman’s Shoppe in Lexington, Ky.
At the reception, an alfresco sit-down dinner included Kentucky beef and Spanish paella. A dance party followed with an Ibiza nightclub theme.
“The day was a joining of two distinct cultures,” Mr. Fabregas said. “And a reflection of our relationship.”
In an interview with Pharm Exec Associate Editor Don Tracy, Leonard Mazur, Co-founder, CEO, Citius Pharmaceuticals, offers an update on the recently accepted Biologics License Application for Lymphir by the FDA and other candidates currently in the Citius pipeline.
If you’ve ever seen a Maine Coon in person, it might immediately take your breath away. These are massive, gorgeously stunning creatures. It is no wonder that you’re attracted to them in general, but the blue color is something spectacular!
If you have just witnessed one for the first time, you probably want to learn all you can about this feline. Here are all the details about this lovely blue and all the perks of the breed itself.
Breed Overview
Colors:
Blue, but also a wide range of other colors
Suitable for:
Virtually any cat-loving home
Temperament:
Docile, gentle, adaptable
The blue color in the Maine Coon is a diluted gene that produces a smoky lavender-gray color. Against their penetrating pair of eyes, you can imagine how the contrast could make the coat truly pop.
In this article, we’re not only going to be discussing the blue color, as it is not a breed itself, but merely one of the potential coat colors. We will also be exploring the Maine Coon breed entirely.
Blue Maine Coon Characteristics
Energy
+
A high-energy cat needs a lot of physical and mental stimulation to keep healthy and happy, while a low-energy cat needs minimal physical activity, but still needs mental stimulation. When choosing a cat, It’s important to ensure their energy levels match your lifestyle.
Trainability
+
Cats that are easy-to-train are more willing and skilled at quickly learning prompts and actions with minimal training. Harder-to-train cats are usually more stubborn or aloof and require a bit more patience and practice.
Health
+
Certain cat breeds are more prone to various genetic health problems, and some more than others. This doesn’t mean that every cat in those breeds will have these issues, but they do have an increased risk, so it’s important to understand and prepare for any additional needs they may require.
Lifespan
+
Due to their size or potential genetic health issues of a specific breed, some cats have shorter lifespans than others. Proper nutrition, exercise, mental stimulation, and hygiene also play an important role in your cat’s lifespan and quality of life.
Sociability
+
Some cat breeds are more social than others, both towards humans and other cats and animals. Cats that are more social have a tendency to rub up on strangers for scratches or jump on laps for cuddles, while cats that are less social shy away, hide, are more cautious, and even potentially aggressive. No matter the breed or gender, it’s important to socialize your cat and expose them to many different situations.
The Earliest Records of Blue Maine Coon in History
Maine Coons were said to have originated in the mid-19th century. You may be able to tell by the name alone that the Maine Coon originated in the state of Maine. These hardy cats were capable of withstanding even the most frigid temperatures of Maine winters.
These cats not only survived, but they also thrived, proving to be a versatile and adaptable animal. These kitties are naturally occurring, meaning no one really put effort into creating them.
The creation of the Maine Coon was a spontaneous one. Researchers seem to believe that the Maine Coon originated from long-haired Angoras that came overseas with travelers. Those cats mixed with domestic cats here, resulting in a massive, fiercely incredible breed.
Because of their size, it has often been rumored that these cats are mixed with some type of wildcat. Because of their pointy ears, size, and markings, they greatly resemble the North American bobcat. It has been long since rumored that the Maine Coon has true bobcat DNA.
Researchers definitively disagree with this ideology. However, it would be pretty cool to know that these massive beasts had wild lineage to match their overall appearance.
Image Credit: Nikola Cedikova, Shutterstock
How Blue Maine Coon Gained Popularity
How could you look at a beautiful blue Maine Coon and not think they would be the most popular pick around? These stunning animals are one of a kind with large bodies, tufted ears, and a presence that beats all others.
It is no wonder that Maine Coon cats are incredibly popular today. People are very attracted to their robust size, extremely calm, demeanor, and overall presence. The Maine Coon is an incredibly hardy cat, which means they adapt to many different types of environments. This helps the breed thrive and eliminate a lot of potential issues.
Formal Recognition of Blue Maine Coons
The American Cat Breeders Association recognized the Maine Coon cat breed in 1976. On the other hand, the Cat Fanciers’ Association informally recognized the Maine Coon in 1975, and then officially recognized them in 1976. Blue is one of the many recognized colors of Maine Coons according to the breed standard.
Since then, the breed standards have grown tremendously, creating the overall visual of the ideal Maine Coon we know and love today. There are breeders all across the United States, and even in some other parts of the world now. They are a favorite for many reasons, and it is no wonder that these associations took an interest in this self-developed breed.
Image Credit: pix-l passion, Shutterstock
The Top 6 Unique Facts About Maine Coons
So, what would you like most about Maine Coons? Let’s find out.
1. Maine Coons Hold a Record for Being the Longest Cat in the World
We already know that Maine Coons are a massive size. An adult Maine Coon can weigh as much as 25 pounds. On top of that, however, they have gotten actual awards for being the longest-domesticated cats in the world.
Image Credit: Nils Jacobi, Shutterstock
2. Maine Coons Are Widely Revered as Gentle Giants
They are widely known for their incredible and gentle demeanors. These cats are exceptional animals, being the Newfoundland dog of the cat world.
3. A Maine Coon Has a Waterproof Coat
One really interesting thing about a Maine Coon is that they have a waterproof coat. This feature protects them from inclement weather. Since these cats were developed to withstand the frigid environments of Maine winters, their coat helps them adapt accordingly.
Image Credit: Heidi Bollich, Shutterstock
4. Most Maine Coons Have Interesting Paws
Most Maine Coon cats are polydactyl, meaning they have extra toes.
5. There Are Over 75 Colors of Maine Coon Cat
When it comes to a Maine Coon, blue is certainly not the only variety. There are over 75 colors and patterns that exist in the Maine Coon breed alone.
Image Credit: Nils Jacobi, Shutterstock
6. Maine Coons Take a Long Time to Mature
What is interesting about this particular cat is that they take longer to grow than any other feline. A Maine Coon does not completely fully develop until they are at least 3 to 5 years of age. After the first year of life, growth does slow down significantly, but they continue to add length and weight over time.
Does a Blue Maine Coon Make a Good Pet?
A blue Maine Coon, or any Maine Coon, for that matter, would make a tremendous pet for virtually any lifestyle. These cats are highly adaptable and extremely agreeable in almost any setting. They can easily make friends with children, seniors, folks with disabilities, other cats, and even dogs!
Granted, you should never leave your Maine Coon alone around your gerbil because they are vicious predators. But when it comes to your average everyday household, these cats fit the mold perfectly.
Something to consider is that the Maine Coon does have an overabundance of hair. This can cause an uptick in shedding, which can trigger even folks with mild allergies. So, even if you’re highly attracted to the breed itself, it might be extremely irritating if you suffer from cat allergies.
A Maine Coon tends to be an adventurer and loves exploring the outdoors. So, if you thought about getting a cat you’re able to leash train, these cats would be ideal candidates. Their protective coats also keep them insulated in extreme temperatures. We never recommend keeping your cat outdoors full time.
Conclusion
Now you know a little bit more about the Maine Coon breed. The blue color is absolutely exceptional, but certainly not the only one that exists. If the Maine Coon sounds like a cat that’s right up your alley, you can look for local breeders in your area.
Keep in mind that rescues and shelters also get purebred cats or mixes thereof. You could always check in to see if you could find a beautiful blue kitty to call your own.
Property registrations in Mumbai in June rose over 12 per cent on year but fell 3.6 per cent sequentially with around 11570 units being registered in the financial capital, the biggest property market in India.
The state government earned more than ₹1000 crore in revenue from the registrations, data on its website showed.
With this the property registrations in the first quarter of the fiscal year crossed 35,000 units, but around 5.6 per cent down from the March quarter, which had the highest sales in the last four quarters. Monthly sales have been consistently above 10,000 units from December onward, the data showed.
Also read: Mitsui O.S.K Lines’ Daibiru Corporation enters India’s real estate sector, invests $123.5 mn in Delhi’s Atrium project
Data analysis by Knight Frank India showed that average monthly registration in the first half of 2024 was 12,044 units, up from 10,578 units in the same period in 2023.
Despite rising property prices and higher mortgage rates, people in Mumbai have been buying houses especially in the higher income brackets.
“The continuous year-on-year growth in property sale registrations underscores the resilience of Mumbai’s real estate market,” said Shishir Baijal, Chairman & Managing Director, Knight Frank India.
“In the backdrop of higher property prices, home registrations have maintained their momentum, reflecting the market’s strong appetite and confidence buyers have in the country’s economic trajectory,” he added.
Around 46 per cent of the sales were of homes with sizes of 500 to 1000 square feet. This was 300 basis points higher from year ago. There were also more people buying larger sized apartments of over 1000 square feet. But those buying homes of size up to 500 square feet saw a dip in share, indicating a diminished home affordability at low income levels.
Mumbai-based developers such as Godrej Properties, Oberoi Realty, Macrotech Developers, and others have lined up an impressive pipeline of launches this year expecting the demand momentum to sustain.
Also read: Mumbai, Bengaluru drive office leasing in H1; Chennai, Pune, Delhi see dips
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
AKO planirate danas ići u kupovinu, provjerite radno vrijeme trgovina, šoping-centara i pekara. Većina ih ne radi nedjeljom, no postoje iznimke. Evo popisa trgovina i centara koji su otvoreni danas, 30.6.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Saturday was a planned “bullpen game” for the San Francisco Giants, whose rotation sports just two healthy established starters in Logan Webb and Jordan Hicks and has five pitchers — Blake Snell, Kyle Harrison, Keaton Winn, Robbie Ray and Alex Cobb — on the injured list.
It turned into an impromptu bullpen game for Dodgers, which was both surprising and disappointing considering they had ace Tyler Glasnow, who was 8-5 with a 2.88 ERA and a National League-leading 135 strikeouts and had thrown five innings or more in each of his first 16 starts, on the mound.
Glasnow was rocked for five runs and seven hits in an abbreviated three-inning start, leaving Dodgers relievers to cover the final six innings.
Not only was the bullpen up to the task, it worked overtime and got contributions from every arm, with eight pitchers combining to limit the Giants to one earned run over the final eight innings of a wild 14-7, 11-inning victory in front of a crowd of 39,663 at Oracle Park.
“It was all hands on deck, really,” veteran right-hander Daniel Hudson said after the grueling 3-hour, 45-minute game. “We had to go get that one once we tied it up and took the lead [in the fourth inning]. We were all just focused on getting to the next guy.”
The Dodgers blew the game open with a seven-run rally in the 11th, but they wouldn’t have gotten there if Hudson hadn’t escaped a bases-loaded, one-out jam in the 10th.
The Dodgers had scored in the 10th off 6-foot-11 right-hander Sean Hjelle when Jason Heyward grounded out to first base, advancing automatic runner Chris Taylor to third, and Miguel Rojas blooped an RBI single to shallow right-center for a 7-6 lead.
Hudson, who gave up a two-run homer to Matt Chapman in Friday night’s loss, got Nick Ahmed to ground out to shortstop to open the bottom of the 10th, with automatic runner Brett Wisely holding at second, but pinch-hitter David Villar ripped an RBI double off the left-field wall to tie the score 7-7.
LaMonte Wade Jr. was intentionally walked, and Heliot Ramos dribbled a grounder to third for an infield single — the Dodgers thought the ball hit Ramos’ foot and should have been ruled foul but were out of replay challenges — to load the bases with one out. The Dodgers brought Taylor in from center field for a five-man infield.
“I don’t,” Dodgers manager Dave Roberts said, when asked if he could remember the last time he employed a five-man infield. “It has been that long. It’s not a strategy I love to pull out of my hat, but it just seemed like the right time given the situation.”
Will Smith hits a two-run double in the 11th inning during the Dodgers’ win over the Giants on Saturday.
(Godofredo A. Vásquez / Associated Press)
Hudson then escaped the jam by striking out Patrick Bailey with a nasty 88-mph slider and, with Taylor back in the outfield, getting Matt Chapman to pop out to catcher Will Smith, sending the game to the 11th.
“That guy has done everything in this game,” closer Evan Phillips said of Hudson, who was on the mound when the Washington Nationals clinched their World Series title in 2019. “There’s just nobody better to handle that, no one we trust more in those situations, and I don’t think anyone batted an eye when he got out of it.”
The Dodgers, who scored seven runs in the ninth inning for an 11-9 come-from-behind win at Colorado on June 18, then broke out the heavy lumber in the top of the 11th.
Shohei Ohtani, who hit his NL-leading 26th home run to straight-away center field in the third, giving him nine homers in 12 games, was intentionally walked to open the inning, and Smith drove a two-run double to left-center field for a 9-7 lead.
Freddie Freeman followed with a bloop double to left to score Smith for a 10-7 lead. Teoscar Hernández blooped a single to right, moving Freeman to third, and Taylor grounded an RBI single to right for an 11-7 lead. Heyward roped a two-run triple into the right-field corner to make it 13-7, and Rojas hit a sacrifice fly to left to make it 14-7.
The seven runs in the 11th were the most by the Dodgers in an extra inning since they moved to Los Angeles in 1958, and, according to MLB researcher Sarah Langs, the seven-run win was baseball’s second-largest extra-inning win since 1901, behind the Milwaukee Braves’ 12-4, 11-inning win over the Brooklyn Dodgers on Aug. 29, 1954.
“We needed every bit of that,” Roberts said of the seven-run outburst. “We were down to our last arm, and I was thinking about having Miggy Ro pitch that last inning. That’s kind of where we were at. Exhausting all of our arms feels a lot better when you win.”
Rojas, who also hit RBI singles in the second and fourth innings, was ready and willing to take the mound.
“I was telling Mark [Prior, Dodgers pitching coach] to give me the ball,” Rojas said. “I’ve been waiting to pitch this year, to be honest with you. We’ve been up by nine runs, but I think we need to be up by 10 to pitch in a game that we’re winning.”
Rojas might not have fared much worse than Glasnow, who limited opponents to a .179 average in his first 16 starts, the third-best mark in the league, but was tagged for seven hits in 14 at-bats on Saturday. The Giants batted around in the third, an inning in which Glasnow threw 37 pitches after throwing only 24 pitches in the first two innings.
The inning began with Glasnow’s walk to No. 9 hitter Ahmed and Jorge Soler’s RBI double to right field. Soler tried to advance on Wade’s grounder to shortstop but was thrown out at third by Rojas.
Dodgers pitcher Tyler Glasnow walks to the dugout after the third inning Saturday.
(Godofredo A. Vásquez / Associated Press)
But Ramos singled to center, Bailey hit an RBI single to right, and Dodgers third baseman Cavan Biggio couldn’t get the ball out of his glove after charging Chapman’s chopper, a play that was generously ruled an RBI infield single.
Michael Conforto walked to load the bases, and Luis Matos grounded into a run-scoring fielder’s choice for a 5-2 lead before Wisely flied to left to end the four-run inning.
“The feel [for my pitches] was completely lost today from my warmups to the game,” Glasnow said. “It was just one of those days where I had no command of anything. … From pitch one, I’d think my release point was at one place, and it’s at another place. It was just kind of all over the place today.”
How does Glasnow cope with such an impediment?
“I didn’t today,” he said. “I think it’s more about just trying to eliminate thought and just go out there and compete. A lot of stuff got away from me, and I’m just glad the team could come back and win the game.”
The Dodgers answered San Francisco’s four-run third with four runs of their own in the top of the fourth, batting around against relievers Spencer Howard and Randy Rodriguez, a rally that Andy Pages sparked with a one-out walk.
Heyward singled to right, advancing Pages to third, and Rojas grounded an RBI infield single to the shortstop hole. Lux followed with an RBI single to right. Biggio popped out on a bunt attempt, but Ohtani walked to load the bases. Smith beat out a slow roller for an RBI single, and Freeman walked with the bases loaded for a 6-5 lead.
San Francisco evened the score in the bottom of the fifth when Chapman hit a one-out single off right-hander Yohan Ramírez, Conforto walked against left-hander Alex Vesia, and Wisely, who won Friday night’s game with a walk-off two-run homer in the ninth, hit an RBI single to center for a 6-6 tie.
“That was a long one, a tough one, because of everything that happened, but the team effort was remarkable,” Rojas said. “I feel like that’s the team that we have. We’re always going to fight, and we’re always going to be in games.”
Infinix on Saturday launched a new laptop — the Zero Book Ultra AI PC, with generative artificial intelligence (GenAI) capabilities to create an ecosystem of future-forward laptops in India.
The Infinix Zero Book Ultra AI PC will be available in three variants — Ultra 5 (16GB+512GB) at Rs 59,990, Ultra 7 (16GB+512GB) at Rs 69,990, and Ultra 9 (32GB+1TB) at Rs 84,990 — starting from July 10 on Flipkart.
“With India’s rapid adoption of AI, this laptop will be a game-changer, striking a chord with consumers through its affordability, user-friendly interfaces, and future-forward features, perfectly aligned with their demand for advanced AI capabilities,” Anish Kapoor, CEO, Infinix India, said in a statement.
The new device comes powered by Intel’s Core Ultra Processor, the first truly ready AI processor that combines exceptional performance with revolutionary AI capabilities, the company said.
The laptop features a 15.6-inch display that boasts a peak brightness of up to 400 nits, ensuring exceptional visuals with vibrant colours and deep contrasts.
In addition, the Zero Book Ultra AI PC offers unparalleled connectivity options, including the latest WiFi 6E protocol with 6GHz support, providing up to an astonishing 9.6 Gbps throughput and seamless Bluetooth 5.2 connectivity.
Furthermore, the laptop also includes “PC Connection” that enables Android to Windows features.
Chinese visitors will be allowed up to 15,000 yuan ($2,064) of duty-free shopping in Hong Kong and Macau starting next week, around twice the current limit, as authorities try to help the cities still struggling to fully recover from Covid’s fallout.
Chinese tourists enjoy higher duty-free allowances in Hong Kong and Macau starting July 1 (Photographer: Raul Ariano/Bloomberg)
The cap will be raised to 12,000 yuan from a current 5,000 yuan, while an existing tax waiver on 3,000 yuan worth of shopping at duty-free stores at the borders will remain, according to statements on Friday by Hong Kong, Macau and China’s Ministry of Finance.
The new measure is expected to bring Hong Kong as much as HK$17.6 billion ($2.25 billion) in spending each year, injecting up to HK$5.4 billion to its economy, the government said in its statement. The change will be effective from July 1, when Hong Kong celebrates the 27th anniversary of the city’s handover to Beijing from the UK.
Hong Kong and Macau have seen a slowdown in the post-pandemic recovery of their retail and tourism industries — a pillar for both cities’ economies — amid a slowdown in spending by Chinese visitors. Hong Kong in particular has seen fewer tourists compared with 2019 levels. That’s added to pressure on the financial hub, which has also suffered from an exodus of expatriates and local professionals wary of political turmoil and Covid closures.
Meanwhile, Macau, the world’s biggest gambling market, is increasingly shifting its focus to the mass-tourist market after Beijing’s crackdown on high-rollers. The city has required its six casino operators to invest more in non-gaming activities.
Sa Sa International Holdings Ltd., Hong Kong’s biggest cosmetics retailer chain, rose as much as 3.7% Friday. Shares in Chow Tai Fook Jewellery Group Ltd. also rose.
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / Chinese tourists enjoy higher duty-free allowances in Hong Kong and Macau starting July 1
Summer is officially here and for many of us that’s a time to get out into the sunshine. It can be a great time to get some reading done but is quite tricky when you’ve popped on your gardening gloves or are taking a minute to sunbathe in the garden to actually do it.
However, there’s a solution that allows you to reach your reading goals without having to even touch a book – letting you read all summer without lifting a finger. Audible, Amazon’s audiobook service, has recently launched an offer that lets Prime members enjoy not just their first month for free, but their first three months. After this period, the service costs £7.99 per month on a rolling contract until you decide to cancel.
Each month, subscribers receive one credit, which can be used to purchase any book on the site. If you start a book and realise it’s not to your liking, you can get a full refund of the credit and immediately use it to buy another book.
But it’s not just one book per month that you can add to your library. The Plus Catalogue, available to subscribers, offers countless hours of books, from classics to modern options that you might expect to see on Kindle Unlimited.
Additionally, there are numerous podcasts and Amazon Originals exclusive to the platform. Some book series are even bundled together for the price of a single credit – allowing you four for the price of one.
Our in-house bibliophile, Jada Jones, recently took a summer vacation to France, where she swapped found herself putting down her Kindle for the sake of an audiobook. She said: “I listened to Yellowface on a trip this month and it was great. When it was time to tan my back I didn’t have to worry about pausing my reading and it meant I flew through the book.
“I’d been telling my friend all about it and we listened along to some of the later chapters in our hotel room – it was so fun having live reactions with someone else who was experiencing the book with me in the same way. It’s a great way to read when you’re travelling.”
For those still mulling over whether to try out the service, now’s a great time as there’s a 90-day no-charge window where you can cancel at any point if it doesn’t suit you. You can join Audible here, with a monthly fee of £7.99 after your complimentary trial. Alternatively, offers a combined reading and listening package at £11.99 per month.
If you had to name the hottest automotive trends going around right now, chances are SUVs and electric vehicles (EVs) would top the list.
Mash them together while keeping prices affordable, and you get a segment that’s growing by the day.
One of the most important considerations for electric SUV buyers is driving range – after all, the less time spent at charging stations, the better!
We’ve collated the electric SUVs under $70,000 in the VFACTS sales charts to see which can travel the furthest on a single charge. Premium options at a higher price point will be covered in a separate article.
For this list we’ve ranked cars by the range figure published on the Australian Government’s Green Vehicle Guide (GVG), which uses figures based on the European NEDC testing cycle.
We’ve also included figures from the more stringent WLTP test cycle used in Europe for context.
We’ve also only listed the sub-$70k variant of each model with the longest claimed range, though there is further information throughout the article and at the links below.
Click on the links below to jump to your chosen car, or scroll through the story.
You can get behind the wheel a Hyundai Kona Electric Premium Extended Range for $68,000 before on-road costs, which has a NEDC claimed range of 557km, more than any rival in this bracket.
However, the stricter WLTP standard quotes a significantly lower 444km range, shifting the Kona down to the middle of the pack.
Extended range examples of the Kona Electric have a 64.8kWh battery, with a single front-mounted motor producing 150kW of power.
The Hyundai Kona Electric is covered by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty, while its high-voltage battery pack is covered by an eight-year, 160,000km warranty.
Hyundai Kona Electric
Range (GVG)
557km
Range (WLTP)
444km
Battery capacity
64.8kWh
Power
150kW
Charging (claimed @ max. DC)
45 minutes (10 to 80 percent)
BUY: Get in touch with a dealer about a Hyundai Kona MORE: Everything Hyundai Kona
The Tesla Model Y Long Range comes in third with a NEDC tested range of 533km, but it brings some advantages over the other two podium getters.
No car on this list has a better WLTP range than the Model Y (533km), and only the Hyundai Ioniq 5 can beat the Tesla’s claimed 27-minute charge time from 10 to 80 per cent.
While no official power figure is quoted by Tesla, the Model Y comfortably offers the most performance bang-for-buck based on its 100km/h sprint time.
Long Range models are priced at $69,900 before on-road costs, and Tesla quotes a wait period of one to three weeks from sale to delivery.
Tesla Model Y
Range (GVG)
533km
Range (WLTP)
533km
Battery capacity
80kWh
Power
366-378kW
Charging (claimed @ max. DC)
27 minutes (10 to 80 percent)
BUY: Get in touch with a dealer about a Tesla Model Y MORE: Everything Tesla Model Y
Thanks to pre-launch price cuts, the Subaru Solterra AWD qualifies for this list with a price tag of $69,990 before on-road costs.
Based on the same platform as the Toyota bZ4X, NEDC testing quotes a range of 485km for the Solterra – 71km more than the WLTP claim.
Dual electric motors send 160kW and 337Nm to all four wheels, and the Solterra is equipped with a 71.4kWh lithium-ion battery.
As this is the base variant in the range, you miss out on leatherette upholstery, a panoramic glass roof, larger alloy wheels, a power-adjustable passenger seat, and an upgraded sound system.
Subaru Solterra
Range (GVG)
485km
Range (WLTP)
414km
Battery capacity
71.4kWh
Power
160kW
Charging (claimed @ max. DC)
30 minutes (10 to 80 percent)
BUY: Get in touch with a dealer about a Subaru Solterra MORE: Everything Subaru Solterra
The Renault Megane E-Tech comes in just one flavour – the Techno EV60 – and it’s priced at $64,990 with a claimed range of 454km.
All 160kW and 300Nm are sent to the front wheels, with energy sourced from a 60kWh lithium-ion battery.
DC charging time is a brisk 30 minutes, and the E-Tech has a maximum DC charge rate of 130kW.
The 2024 Renault Megane E-Tech is covered by a five-year, 100,000km warranty. The high-voltage battery is covered by an eight-year, 160,000km warranty.
Renault Megane E-Tech
Range (GVG)
454km
Range (WLTP)
454km
Battery capacity
60kWh
Power
160kW
Charging (claimed @ max. DC)
30 minutes (10 to 80 percent)
BUY: Get in touch with a dealer about a Renault Megane E-Tech MORE: Everything Renault Megane E-Tech
A new generation of Mini Countryman is here and although six electric variants are available, only two meet our price criteria.
Countryman SE ALL4 shown
Both the Mini Countryman E Core and Classic fit the budget, each powered by a single electric motor, producing up to 150kW of power and 250Nm of torque, delivering drive to the front wheels.
Electric Mini Countryman models are powered by a 64kWh battery, delivering up to 422km of driving range, tested against NEDC protocols.
While a maximum charging rate isn’t quoted, Mini claims a DC fast charge can top up the Countryman’s battery from 0 to 80 percent in 29 minutes.
Mini Countryman E
Range (GVG)
422km
Range (WLTP)
462km
Battery capacity
64kWh
Power
150kW
Charging (claimed @ max. DC)
29 minutes (10 to 80 percent)
BUY: Get in touch with a dealer about a Mini Countryman MORE: Everything Mini Countryman
Berkshire Hathaway Chairman Warren Buffett attends the Berkshire Hathaway Inc annual shareholders’ meeting in Omaha, Nebraska, U.S., May 3, 2024. (Reuters/File Photo)
Buffett announced that he has updated his will to halt donations to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation after his death.
Investor Warren Buffett, 93, is making a major shift in his philanthropic plans. In a recent interview with the Wall Street Journal, he revealed he’s revising his will to direct his vast wealth after death through a new charitable trust managed by his three children. This means his significant donations to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation will cease upon his passing.
“The Gates Foundation has no money coming after my death,” Buffett told the Wall Street Journal.
In an exclusive interview with the Journal, Buffett announced that he has updated his will to halt donations to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation after his death. Instead, his fortune will be redirected to a new charitable trust managed by his three children.
In a recent interview with the Journal, Warren Buffett revealed he has revised his will multiple times. His latest decision reflects his strong faith in his children’s judgement and their ability to responsibly distribute his fortune. Notably, each of Buffett’s offspring leads their philanthropic organisation.
“I feel very, very good about the values of my three children, and I have 100% trust in how they will carry things out,” Buffett told the Journal.
Previously, Buffett had indicated that his will allocated over 99% of his estate to philanthropic purposes, specifically to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and four family-affiliated charities: the Susan Thompson Buffett Foundation, the Sherwood Foundation, the Howard G. Buffett Foundation, and the NoVo Foundation.
For the time being, however, Buffett appears to be planning to continue his donations to the Gates Foundation during his lifetime.
On Friday, Berkshire Hathaway announced that Buffett converted around 9,000 Class A shares into over 13 million Class B shares. Of these, approximately 9.3 million shares will be donated to the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation Trust, with the remainder distributed among the four Buffett family charities.
In his original pledge to the Gates Foundation in 2006, Buffett stated his intention to include the foundation in his will.
“I will soon write a new will that will provide for a continuance of this commitment — by the distribution of the remaining earmarked shares or in some other manner — after my death,” he wrote then, referring to the annual gifts of Berkshire Hathaway stock that he was pledging.
In a Friday statement, Buffett clarified that his initial donation pledges only apply during his lifetime.
Howard Buffett, who currently serves on Berkshire’s board, is expected to assume the role of chairman following his father’s passing. However, Buffett’s children are not expected to be involved in the company’s day-to-day operations.
Namit Singh Sengar
Namit writes on personal finance, economy and brands. Currently contributing to News18.com as a Senior Sub Editor in the business vertical. Prior to t…Read More
The crypto market is on the verge of concluding the month of June on a bearish note, highlighting a rising bearish sentiment in the crypto space. Moreover, top tokens have entered into a consolidated phase, suggesting uncertainty in future price action.
However, mid-cap and low-cap memecoins have gained significant attention from the cryptocurrency market over the past few days, indicating a switch of interest among investors towards these memecoins to maximize their profits in the short-term prospect.
Let’s go, as in this article, we have covered the top 5 memecoins that have the potential to dominate the cryptocurrency market during the upcoming month.
BABYTRUMP (BABYTRUMP):
Built on the Solana chain, the BabyTrump is the latest release of the Trump-themed digital cryptocurrencies. Designed to integrate the world of memes with the robustness of blockchain technology.
With a trading price of $0.007829 and a circulating supply of 1.6 Billion BABYTRUMP tokens, this memecoin has secured the 3,725th position in the global crypto-list with a self-reported market capitalization of $12.59 Million.
Notably, the memecoin has jumped 34.31% within the past 24 hours with a change of -061% in its trading volume. Moreover, it has surged 11,814.85% within the past seven days and has added 9,612.32% to its portfolio since its inception.
Mother Iggy (MOTHER):
This Solana-based memecoin has gained significant attention from the cryptocurrency market over the past few days by recording a massive price surge within a short period.
Positively, the MOTHER price has surged 277.46% over the past month. With a market cap of $59.79 Million, this memecoin has secured the 2,556th position with a circulating supply of 990 Million MOTHER tokens.
SOL ETF (SOLETF):
With the rebound in the price of Solana crypto and the rising speculations of the Solana ETF, SOL-based tokens have recorded increased price action. SOL ETF (SOLETF) is one such project with the slogan “The fun way of Financial Freedom.”
The SOLETF price has recorded a jump of 125.70% within the past 24 hours with a change of -2.27% in its trading volume. Moreover, the memecoin has surged 378.55% since its launch, highlighting a strong bullish outlook during the upcoming time.
At the time of writing, the SOLETF had a circulating supply of 42,000 T SOLETF tokens. With a trading price of $0.000000000007484 and a market capitalization of $321,163 thousand, this memecoin currently stands at 3,510th position in the global cryptocurrency market list.
Hoppy (HOPPY):
Based on the famous book “The Night Riders” which was published in 2012 by artist and illustrator Matt Furie. The Hoppy is an anthropomorphic Frog character and one of the few characters of Matt, that can truly be considered unique.
Despite recording a correction of approximately 26% within the past 24 hours, the Hoppy memecoin has surged 27.83% within the past seven days and has recorded a 10X surge since its inception. Further, with a market cap of $32.53 Million, the Hoppy price has secured the 658th position.
WHY (WHY):
Built on the Binance Smart Chain (BEP20), the WHY project is a bipolar elephant, rampage, after FOMO. it is a playful token inspired by the memes of the internet and has gained a significant following following its launch.
With a trading price of $0.0000001349, and a circulating supply of 420 T WHY tokens, it has secured the 508th position in the memecoin category with a market capitalization of $56.66 Million.
The WHY memecoin has added 7.14% in valuation within the past 24 hours and 26.33% over the past week. Furthermore, the WHY price has surged 619.01% since its launch, indicating a strong bullish sentiment for the WHY crypto in the market.
Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras) made history on Friday by launching the World’s First MBA in digital maritime and supply chain management. This groundbreaking 24-month program, developed by IIT Madras Departments of Management Studies and Ocean Engineering along with industry partner i-maritime Consultancy, is designed to cater to the needs of working professionals worldwide. It aims to equip global professionals with the skills necessary to navigate the rapidly evolving digital landscape of maritime trade and supply chain management, as per a release from the institute.
Those with a Bachelor’s Degree having secured at least 60 per cent marks and a minimum of two years of full-time work experience are eligible to apply. The admission process includes an online IIT Madras Admission Test followed by personal interviews for shortlisted candidates. Applications are already open for this program with the first batch commencing in September 2024.
Read: IIT Madras introduces BTech in AI & data analytics
The program offers a unique blend of online learning and on-campus immersion modules, providing flexibility while ensuring a comprehensive educational experience. Over two years, the participants will engage with cutting-edge digital technologies such as IoT, AI, ML, and Blockchain, enhancing their ability to tackle modern maritime challenges and drive career advancement.
The MBA program, extendable to four years, features a comprehensive curriculum of 900 hours of classroom sessions and project work, totalling 192 credits. Participants benefit from a rigorous curriculum that includes six on-campus immersion modules and extensive access to IIT Madras’ learning resources, including the Digital Maritime Library.
The program fee is ₹9 lakh, payable in instalments. Scholarships covering up to 50 per cent of the course fee are available, and the program is eligible for bank loans.
How to explain the disparity? India’s economy is growing astonishingly fast, Bangalore and Mumbai have become destinations for bosses of global financial firms and Narendra Modi trumpets the country’s appeal in his electoral campaign. Given the enthusiasm, surely foreign money is flooding into the country.
Not quite. In April foreign investors dumped $1bn-worth of Indian shares. In May they dumped another $4.2bn. This is a sliver of the roughly $900bn of Indian shares in foreign hands, but it is a striking move given the mood music—and one that has pushed the share of the Indian stockmarket held by foreigners to just 18%, its lowest in a dozen years.
Consolidating federal student loans that aren’t currently eligible for forgiveness programs could help you qualify for debt relief.
You must apply to consolidate by end of day on June 30 to be eligible for this one-time benefit.
You can consolidate your loans online. The process takes about 30 minutes.
If you have federal student loans that aren’t eligible for debt relief programs, today’s your last chance at increasing your forgiveness amount.
The Department of Education is reviewing past student loan payment counts as part of a one-time adjustment. This adjustment could increase your payment counts to make you eligible for forgiveness sooner under a qualifying income-based repayment plan or another program, like Public Service Loan Forgiveness. Consolidating before June 30 can help apply these benefits to federal loans that were previously ineligible for student forgiveness programs.
There’s a lot of confusion around student loans in the news right now. With parts of the Biden administration’s SAVE repayment plan on hold, you may be wondering if it’s still worth consolidating your student loans.
Experts say yes.
“The consolidation deadline for the one-time IDR adjustment is not impacted by the court decision,” said Elaine Rubin, a higher education finance and policy expert and director of corporate communications for Edvisors. “The US Department of Education will still be counting eligible payments to qualify borrowers.”
Although consolidation will benefit most borrowers, it’s not the right move for everyone. Here’s how to know if this one-time consolidation option could maximize your debt relief and if you should consider it.
Student loan debt consolidation is similar to refinancing — it lets you combine your existing federal student loans into a new loan with a fixed interest rate.
Why would you want to do this? If you hold FFELP, Perkins and other nondirect federal student loans, they may not be eligible for forgiveness programs. By consolidating them into a new Direct Loan and enrolling in an income-driven repayment plan, you may be eligible for automatic loan cancellation, interest forgiveness or other debt relief benefits.
“Consolidation increases the number of payments that count toward forgiveness and synchronizes your forgiveness date.”
If you qualify for an IDR plan and have been making payments for 20-25 years, your entire balance could be forgiven automatically.
And there are other benefits to loan consolidation. Having one student loan to keep track of, rather than many, can also make it easier to manage payments. Depending on the payment plan you choose, a consolidation loan could lower your monthly payments but also extend your repayment period. But if you’re eligible for forgiveness after consolidating, this might not be much of a concern.
Even if you already have Direct Loans, you might benefit from consolidating if you have more than one with different repayment start dates, said Mark Kantrowitz, a financial aid expert and member of CNET Money’s Expert Review Board.
Private student loan companies also offer debt consolidation for student loans. Even if these programs offer lower interest rates or other perks, converting your federal student loan into a private loan rarely makes sense. Private student loans are not eligible for federal income-driven repayment programs or federal debt relief.
Will my interest rate go up if I consolidate my student loans?
If you currently have low interest rates on your federal student loans, you won’t have to worry about your new consolidated rate spiking — in most cases.
Your new Direct Consolidation Loan’s interest rate will be based on a weighted average of the loans you consolidate and it will be rounded up to the next 1/8th of 1%, according to Federal Student Aid, the Department of Education’s official student loan website.
There’s one exception, though. If you have a FFELP loan, you might lose some benefits when consolidating. “The main issue is borrowers who have a big interest rate reduction from the FFELP lender,” said Kantrowitz. “These discounts are provided by the lender and will disappear if you consolidate the loans.”
You don’t have to consolidate all of your loans, so you might exclude your FFELP loans if you want to keep your current discount. You’ll need to weigh whether you qualify for forgiveness and how consolidating might affect your monthly student loan payment to decide if consolidating is right for you.
If you have unpaid interest on a student loan, it will be capitalized when you consolidate the loan and could increase your principal balance. Factor that in when deciding how much your new monthly payment would be and how much you may qualify for in forgiveness.
I don’t know if I’m eligible for student loan forgiveness. Should I still consolidate my loans?
For many borrowers, consolidating your federal student loans will help lower your monthly payment and could maximize your potential debt relief. If you currently hold federal student loans that are not Direct Loans, it can be particularly beneficial. Consolidating can also help you lock in a fixed interest rate if any of your federal student loans have a variable rate.
The latest student loan forgiveness program takes into account the date of your first student loan payment. Consolidating your loans helps ensure you get credit for your new Direct Loan starting with your earlier loan payment date.
So, let’s say you graduated from college and made your first federal student loan payment in 2004. Later, you went back to school for a second degree and started paying those loans in 2010. Under an income-driven repayment plan with a 20-year path to forgiveness, you might be eligible to have your loans from 2004 forgiven this year. But by consolidating your more recent loans with your older ones into one new Direct Loan, your entire balance could be wiped out this year.
Even if you graduated more recently, consolidating your federal loans and enrolling in an IDR can help you get access to forgiveness sooner. And if you only have one student loan, if it’s not a Direct Loan, you may also benefit from consolidating.
But if you don’t qualify for debt relief, it may not make sense to go through this step. “If you are not currently pursuing any kind of forgiveness (e.g., not even IDR forgiveness) and expect to never pursue forgiveness, then you don’t need to do it, ” said Kantrowitz.
Will the June 30 deadline be extended?
Although the Department of Education extended the loan consolidation deadline from April 30 to June 30 this spring, experts don’t anticipate it will be pushed back again.
“The extension for consolidation has not changed, and it’s not anticipated it will change or be extended any further,” said Rubin. If you can benefit from consolidation your loans, you’ll want to apply soon.
How to consolidate your student loans
You can consolidate your federal student loans online at StudentAid.gov. You’ll need to submit your application before midnight local time on June 30 to meet the deadline. You can consolidate after this date, but would miss out on some benefits.
To fill out the application, you’ll need your Federal Student Aid ID, some personal information, financial information and loan information to fill out the application. The FSA website says it takes approximately 30 minutes to complete the application for consolidating your loans.
Once you apply, it can take up to 60 days to process your consolidation, said Kantrowitz. In the meantime, you might see your student loan payment count drop to zero. Don’t panic if this happens. It just means your adjustment count is being worked on.
What happens if you miss the deadline?
If you consolidate your loans after the June 30 deadline, you can still get credit for past payments made on direct loans. But you might not get as much credit. Instead, your payment count would be based on a weighted average or may reset to zero. But, you could still gain access to a debt relief program.
Recommended Articles
Another 277,000 Borrowers Received Student Loan Forgiveness Last Week. Here’s How You Can, Too
Another 277,000 Borrowers Received Student Loan Forgiveness Last Week. Here’s How You Can, Too
25 Million Americans Could Have Student Loan Debt Wiped Out Under Biden’s Latest Plan
25 Million Americans Could Have Student Loan Debt Wiped Out Under Biden’s Latest Plan
Do You Qualify for the New Student Loan Forgiveness Plan?
Do You Qualify for the New Student Loan Forgiveness Plan?
CNET Money brings financial insights, trends and news to your inbox every Wednesday.
By signing up, you will receive newsletters and promotional content and agree to our Terms of Use and acknowledge the data practices in our Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe at any time.
Here’s all of the excitement headed to your inbox.
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
The first presidential debate of 2024 left many Americans and even some traditional Democratic allies wondering about President Biden’s mental fitness for office based on what appeared to be his unclear train of thought at times and his raspy voice on Thursday night.
The White House responded to these concerns, claiming that the president, who is 81, was fighting a cold, but some doctors said they perceive the health issues go beyond the sniffles — with one noting that “it is an issue of fitness, not of age.”
Dr. Brett Osborn, a Florida neurosurgeon who specializes in cognitive function, told Fox News Digital on Friday about his concerns.
IN ALZHEIMER’S BREAKTHROUGH, RESEARCHERS IDENTIFY ‘PROTECTIVE GENE’ THAT DELAYS DISEASE IN HIGH-RISK FAMILY
“President Biden’s performance in [Thursday] night’s debate reignited longstanding discussions about his cognitive abilities and his overall leadership capacity,” Osborn told Fox News Digital.
“Throughout the evening, Biden struggled to maintain a coherent narrative, often losing his train of thought mid-sentence, and providing vague, rambling and undecipherable answers to highly critical questions,” said Osborn, expressing his professional opinion.
Joe Biden is shown on Friday, June 28, the day after the debate, at a rally in Raleigh, North Carolina. Dr. Marc Siegel, inset left, and Dr. Brett Osborn, inset right, weighed in on President Biden’s performance during the Thursday night presidential debate, sharing concerns about his health from their point of view.(Fox News; Getty Images; Dr. Brett Osborn)
“His frequent pauses, stumbling over words and reliance on notes underscored concerns about his mental acuity,” Osborn added.
“Biden struggled to maintain a coherent narrative, often losing his train of thought mid-sentence.”
These seeming signs of cognitive decline highlight a “growing inability” to manage the complexities required by the job of the presidency, according to the neurosurgeon.
“His difficulty in articulating clear, concise responses and his apparent disorientation during the debate were seen by many – including his own constituents – as very troubling indicators of his overall health and an obvious decline in his cognitive function,” Osborn said.
Former President Donald Trump and President Joe Biden are shown during the first presidential debate of the 2024 election at CNN’s studios in Atlanta, Georgia, on Thursday, June 27, 2024.(Jabin Botsford/The Washington Post)
“President Biden lacks the mental sharpness required for the highest office in the land … especially amid [today’s] current national and international crises.”
The neurosurgeon, who has not treated Biden personally, also mentioned the 46th president has undergone multiple surgeries for brain aneurysms.
EXPERIMENTAL ALZHEIMER’S DRUG GETS FDA ADVISORY PANEL’S THUMBS-UP: ‘PROGRESS IS HAPPENING’
There is a famous saying in neurosurgery, Osborn noted: “When the air hits your brain, you’re never the same.”
The surgeon surmised, “The odds have been stacked against him for years, long before his presidency.”
Joe Biden reacts as supporters greet him at his debate watch party at Hyatt Regency Atlanta on June 27, 2024, in Atlanta, Georgia.(Derek White/Getty Images for DNC)
Dr. Marc Siegel, physician, clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Medical Center and a Fox News medical contributor, also spoke with Fox News Digital about concerns from his end.
“The debate is, in a way, a psychiatric or cognitive stress test,” he told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Although Biden was able to respond to questions and seemed to be spatially aware, according to Siegel, the president did display “frequent disorientation” and had “problems with spontaneity or redirecting,” the doctor said.
He has not personally examined Biden.
Dr. Marc Siegel, at right, joined “Fox & Friends” on Friday, June 28, to discuss the presidential debate on Thursday evening. (Kevin D. Liles for The Washington Post via Getty Images; Fox News)
Siegel described Biden’s speech as “meandering,” noting that he ended sentences in different places than intended, and “often mixed up ‘trillions’ and ‘billions’ and ‘millions.’”
Siegel confirmed that a physical illness, even with a cold, can bring out cognitive issues “even more.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Even so, it’s hard to believe this is all from a cold,” Siegel told Fox News Digital. “Either way, we need someone who is sharp despite a cold.”
The NYU Langone physician noted that cognitive issues “wax and wane,” so they won’t always present the same way.
President Joe Biden looks over at former President Donald Trump during the first presidential debate of the 2024 election season on June 27, 2024. (Andrew Caballero-Reynolds/AFP via Getty Images)
While the age of both candidates has been raised as a concern, Siegel countered that what’s important is a president’s physical and mental fitness.
“It is an issue of fitness, not of age,” he said. “It is an issue of mental acuity, which is especially important if there is a crisis.”
While Biden is 81 (he turns 82 in November), Trump is 78 years old.
During an appearance on “Fox & Friends” on Friday morning, Siegel also spoke about the possibility of cold medications impacting Biden’s performance.
“It is an issue of fitness, not of age. It is an issue of mental acuity.”
“None of the medications that he would be taking for a cold, except something that might make him drowsy, would be relevant here,” he said.
“And I don’t think they would give him something that would make him drowsy before a debate,” he said.
He added, “We’ve been watching this a long time. This is something progressive.”
Fox News Digital reached out to the Biden campaign and to the White House press office for comment.
Earlier this year, concerns emerged about Biden’s age and memory after the release of a special counsel’s report. (AP Photo/Damian Dovarganes)
Earlier this year, concerns emerged about Biden’s age and memory after the release of a special counsel’s report. The report described the Democrat’s memory as “hazy,” “fuzzy,” “faulty,” “poor” and having “significant limitations,” the Associated Press noted at the time.
The report indicated that Biden could not recall certain milestones in his own life, such as the date his own son Beau died of brain cancer, as Fox News Digital reported at the time. (Beau Biden passed away on May 30, 2015.)
“My memory is fine,” Biden responded afterward from the White House.
“A person with growing problems of memory and judgment is frequently the last to acknowledge it.”
The New York Times editorial board and others have called on Biden to step out of the race after his debate performance.
Vice President Kamala Harris acknowledged that Biden had a “slow start” to the debate, but she defended his performance overall and his record during his time in the White House.
Said Dr. Siegel in a New York Post opinion piece that ran in the publication on Saturday morning, “This isn’t a question of age. Cognition varies widely with age, and it isn’t fair to say that executive function is automatically impaired at a certain point in life. But it’s a sad medical fact that a person with growing problems of memory and judgment is frequently the last to acknowledge it.”
A Phoenix, Arizona resident got more than just her Chipotle order when Erica Hernandez opened her delivery bag. Tucked inside was a handwritten note from her delivery driver, Paul Slobodzian, explaining his side hustle. Slobodzian was working extra shifts to save for his dream wedding with his fiance, Aly Perkins. The heartfelt note read: “I’m driving for (a food delivery service) on the side to give my fiance the wedding she deserves. Any additional tip through the app or Venmo is greatly appreciated!”
Touched by Slobodzian’s dedication, Hernandez posted a picture of the note on social media with the caption, “Hopefully this reaches the right people.” What started as a kind gesture on Hernandez’s part, quickly snowballed into something much bigger. Despite her modest following, the video went viral, amassing over 33 million views!
“I just wanted to see if my friends or followers would be willing to help out,” Hernandez told Fox News. The power of social media took hold. Slobodzian’s Venmo account overflowed with donations from touched viewers. Even Chipotle and a wedding planner joined the giving spirit, contributing to the couple’s dream wedding.
By far the craziest thing that’s ever happened to me. The outpouring of love for our story truly fuels my faith in humanity!! Thanks for all the support 🤍 https://t.co/uEglKgef37— Aly Perkins (@PerkinsAly) June 25, 2024
In less than a week, the couple had received enough money to throw the perfect celebration for them and Aly. Overwhelmed with gratitude, Slobodzian took to social media, expressing his heartfelt thanks to everyone who donated.
Also Read: Hyderabad Man Complains Of Bugs In Chicken Biryani Ordered From Mehfil Biryani, Swiggy Responds
“We’re incredibly grateful for the outpouring of support,” Slobodzian said. “It’s been overwhelming, but in the best way possible.”
The happy couple, who are planning their wedding soon, haven’t forgotten Hernandez’s role in their heartwarming story. They surprised her with a $1,000 donation and an invitation to their special day! This story proves that a little kindness can go a long way, and the power of the internet can turn a simple delivery into a dream come true.
She sees her garden as a reflection of herself. “I’m a Scorpio, so I’ve always been spooky,” said Ms. Hurst, a 29-year-old graphic designer. She said she began reconnecting with her earlier emo days through landscaping after purchasing her home in Ottawa, Canada, six years ago.
Many of her plants are dark red or purple. Ms. Hurst also has a potted vegetable garden with the darkest varieties of eggplants, bell peppers and not-so-green beans.
Between Billie Eilish’s jet-black locks to the success of “Wednesday” on Netflix and the forthcoming “Beetlejuice” sequel in September, all things gothic are in the air — and in the ground. Searches for “goth garden” nearly doubled on Google this month from last, and the marketing firm Garden Media Group clocked “goth gardening” as a trend in its 2024 trends report. On TikTok, gardeners like Ms. Hurst rack up hundreds of thousands of likes when sharing theirgoth gardens and offering tips on how to grow one.
Over the last few years, so-called gothic seeds have appeared to become more popular, too. In 2018, Ed Hume Seeds introduced a gothic vegetable packet with spiky artichokes and bull’s blood beet that remains a top seller, according to the company. Hudson Valley Seed Company, which began selling a goth flower mix with Dracula celosia and black knight scabiosa in 2020, said they had noticed an increase in sales of the product this year.
“There’s a renewed interest in making one’s garden fit one’s personality and vibe,” said Kelsea Hume, who manages Hume Seeds’ social media accounts. “It’s wonderful to watch new generations of gardeners express themselves.”
Just as there may be no one type of “goth” person, there is more than one interpretation of what a gothic garden entails.
In Wichita Falls, Texas, Felicia Garza says her garden is an extension of her “darker soul.” Ms. Garza, a 39-year-old social media manager, weaves eerie plants into her otherwise colorful garden. “I wasn’t feeling it at first,” said Ms. Garza of her foray into gardening. “Then I came across all these other darker plants and I just fell in love with them.”
Ms. Garza added other goth elements to her garden’s décor: Black vintage lamps hang from wrought iron-adorned trellises, which are also black and surround raised beds in the center of the garden. But she said she also had “girlie” elements, like sun catchers and a pink flamingo lawn ornament.
When Shannon Crosby, 39, began planting her backyard garden six years ago, she had to work with the humid, hot climate of Plant City, Fla. She couldn’t rely on black plants alone in the subtropical climate, so instead she incorporated a variety of macabre elements. One section of her yard is dedicated to poisonous plants like angel trumpets, cassava and foxgloves. (That section is fenced in to prevent wildlife from eating the plants; she also noted that she did not have children or pets.)
Then there are spiky plants, such as the silk floss tree, which Ms. Crosby, who owns a plant nursery, described as “super punk rock.”
An angel statue, which she purchased broken from a secondhand shop, adds to the overall effect. “It’s like an old, decrepit Victorian garden that’s in ruin,” Ms. Crosby said. “I call it beautiful decay.” Other items include skulls, a flying witch spinner and solar-powered spider lights.
These types of gardens can set the stage for moody gatherings. In Ms. Hurst’s Ottawa garden, she occasionally wheels out a cart with teapots for an evening tea party with friends. “You never think to see those colors in nature, so having that element makes it more mysterious,” she said.
When it comes to planting a gothic garden, Daryl Lindsey, a landscape designer in Salt Lake City, urged gardeners to use as many native plants as possible: “The ecological benefits of native plants are massive for the health of the soil, for water conservation and for the benefit of wildlife.”
Shannon Crosby, who lives in Plant City, Fla., maintains a poison plant section in her garden — fenced in so wildlife doesn’t eat it — along with some classically goth decor.Credit…via Shannon Crosby
Something like black mondo grass — a purple-black grass with thin blades that sprout out like a spider — might be aesthetically pleasing, but it can take over a garden, she said. “I would recommend, in those cases, that somebody puts them in some cool Victorian topiary pot,” Ms. Lindsey added.
She also suggested planting white flowers beside a dark shrub like black lace elderberry for contrast: “Then you actually can appreciate how moody and goth-y those dark plants even are.”
In gardens, as in life, there’s a natural push and pull between life and death.
“I love day and night, life and death,” Ms. Crosby said. “I feel like it’s all kind of a metaphor — everything that once was returned to the ground creates new life.”
We give Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box a rating of 4.9 out of 5 stars.
Quality: 5/5
Functionality: 4.9/5
Ease of Use: 4.9/5
Value: 4.8/5
There are so many joys that come with owning a cat, including plenty of free cuddles and lots and lots of silliness. There are also some downsides, most specifically, the dreaded litter box.
If you loathe cleaning the cat box, I have a product for you. The Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box was made to handle stinky litter so you don’t have to. But it does much more than that, including reporting your cat’s potty habits, tracking the box’s litter levels, and notifying you when the waste bin is full.
There is no doubt that this automatic litter box is talented, but is it worth the money?
I had a chance to test the Neakasa self-cleaning litter box with the help of my one-year-old kitty, Makoa. As an auto-cleaning litter box newbie, I wasn’t quite sure what to expect. Now, after having this talented gadget in my home for a couple of weeks, I’m not sure how I ever lived without it!
About Neakasa
Neakasa got their start in 2017 with a line of highly innovative automated cleaning products for the home. Since then, they have expanded their lineup to include everything from kitchen composters to pet grooming vacuums. And they do it all in the name of simplifying and elevating people’s lives with smart cleaning solutions.
Who Makes Neakasa Cat Boxes and Where Are They Produced?
Neakasa is a global company that serves over 60 countries. They have offices located in the US, China, and Hong Kong. Most of their products are made in China.
Which Type of Cat is the M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Box Best Suited For?
This Neakasa self-cleaning litter box is a great option for cats of all ages. The open-top design makes it more appealing to cats used to a traditional litter box, but even those who desire more privacy are likely to acclimate well to this setup.
This cat box is fairly high off the ground so it may not be the best option for cats with mobility issues. The weight sensors can detect cats who weigh between 2.2 and 33 pounds. For kittens lighter than this, it does have a “kitten setting” that ensures pint-sized users stay safe.
M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box Overview
Here is an overview of the many features and functions of the M1 self-cleaning litter box. We’ll take a look at the setup, settings, safety features, phone app, and specifications.
Setup
The Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box consists of three main parts that work together to keep your cat’s litter box clean.
At the bottom of this intelligent machine, you’ll find a collapsable silicon waste bin. This 11-liter bin can hold up to 14 days’ worth of waste. The included waste bags fit perfectly inside and are easy to close, tie, and toss for hassle-free cleaning.
The base of the litter box consists of four tall legs, an intuitive control panel, and a motor that makes all the magic happen.
Tucked into this base is the ingenious, half-cylinder litter box. When ready for use, this rounded box sits at a slight angle, allowing cats to use the litter just as they would in a traditional litter box.
Once they’ve finished their business, the box cleans itself by slowly rotating and dumping the clean litter into a screened compartment. The box continues to turn, dropping the clumped waste into the bin underneath. Once it completes the rotation, the remaining litter is released back into the box and leveled so it’s ready for the next use.
General Settings
This Neakasa cat box comes with many different settings so you can customize it to your cat’s needs.
You can choose to have the unit clean automatically after each use, cyclically after a set number of hours, or only when started manually. You can also choose to turn on automatic coverage (to fully cover any poo in cat litter) and auto-leveling (to level whenever new cat litter is added).
You also have the option to set do-not-disturb periods and reminders for cleaning, litter ordering, and more.
Safety Features
Each of these litter boxes features five infrared laser sensors and four weight sensors to help keep your cat safe. The box will not engage in cleaning if your cat is inside or next to the box.
Even when cleaning has already begun, if any of these sensors are triggered, cleaning will pause and the litter box will stop moving. This prevents cats from getting stuck or pinched as the litter box rotates.
My inquisitive cat tested these safety features thoroughly by trying to jump inside the litter box every time it moved for the first few days. Each time, the box would freeze and patiently wait for him to move on to something else.
Phone App
While the basic premise behind this auto litter box is pretty neat, it’s the phone app and wifi connectivity that elevates it above other self-cleaning options.
Once connected to wifi, Neakasa will record every time your cat uses the litter box, including how long they were there and the time of day they entered. If you have multiple cats, you can create separate profiles for each and the box will track them separately based on weight.
With the app, you can also track how much litter is in the box, how full the waste bin is, and look back on the cleaning record from previous days. You can also kick off cleaning from the app, level the litter, and shop for accessories.
Specifications
This litter box is a bit on the chonky side compared to your typical self-clean box. It’s just over 20 inches tall, 23 inches wide, and 20 inches from front to back. The litter box itself is about 17 inches wide and 15 inches across.
This is plenty of room for even big cats to get in. But do note that the size of the litter area is a bit smaller than the opening.
When empty, this hoss weighs about 23 pounds but does have carrying handles, which makes it easy enough to move around.
The phone app is compatible with both iOS and Android.
The starter kit for this litter box comes with two rolls of waste bin bags and a very effective litter mat.
In Summary
Pros
Hands-off cleaning
Holds up to 14 days of waste
Tracks usage for multiple cats
Tracks litter amount
Multiple cleaning settings
9 sensors to ensure safe operation
Cons
Large footprint
Fairly high off the ground
Pricey
Key Features
Self Cleaning Options
With this intelligent self-cleaning solution, you can choose the right cleaning settings for your cat and lifestyle. The “smart clean” mode automatically cleans the litter 5 minutes after your cat leaves the box. Or you can choose to have it clean every set number of hours or only when you tell it to.
You can also set do-not-disturb periods that will prevent the cat box from cleaning itself during the night or other times of the day.
Tracks Potty Habits for Multiple Cats
This smart litter box tracks how often your cat uses the potty throughout the day and night. It records not only when they entered, but also how long they stayed and their weight at the time of using the bathroom.
If you have multiple cats, you can set up different profiles for each. Using each individual cat’s weight, the Neakasa will differentiate between who uses the potty each time.
Intelligent Phone App
In addition to helping you keep track of your cat’s potty habits, the connected phone app also gives you full control of all the features of this box. You can scroll through previous usage records, set cleaning preferences, auto-clean with the touch of a button, track how much litter is inside, and set reminders for manual cleaning, refilling, and more.
Is the Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box a Good Value?
The average self-cleaning litter box costs around $200. But if you want one with wifi connectivity like the Neakasa, you have to up your budget to between $400 and $750.
With a list price of $600, the Neakasa M1 sits comfortably within this average range. Considering its unique open-top design and many extra features, I would say it is well worth that price.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Do you need a special litter for this self-cleaning box?
No, any standard clumping, scoopable litter with pieces smaller than 3mm in diameter and 10mm in length will work. Non-clumping, loosely clumping, and nontraditional (such as wood grain) litters will not work with this box.
Do cats take to this litter box easily?
Yes, in general, cats have no issue transitioning to this litter box, especially if you use litter they are already accustomed to. For scaredy cats, it can be helpful to turn off auto-cleaning until they are readily using the box.
How often do I need to empty the waste bin?
The large waste bin of this litter box typically lasts 2 weeks before it gets filled up. However, you may want to clean it more often than this to avoid odor or if you have multiple cats.
Is this litter box safe?
Yes, this self-cleaning box features 9 different sensors to ensure it only cleans when your cat is well out of the way. If your cat comes near it during cleaning, the box will stop moving and wait until they leave to continue cleaning.
Our Experience With Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box
I’m not averse to cleaning the litter box (I’ve been doing it since it landed on my chore list at the age of eight), but finding the time to get it done is a challenge. That’s one of many reasons why I was excited to try out this intelligent self-cleaning box from Neakasa.
Right off the bat, I was impressed with the litter and waste capacity of this thing. I was a little less impressed with how big it was as a whole, though. I ended up having to rearrange my entire laundry room to get it to fit.
On the plus side, it was super easy to unbox and get set up.
I wasn’t worried at all about my cat, Makoa, using this new contraption—he will happily relieve himself in anything that holds a litter-like substance. But just to be sure, I added the clean litter from his old litter box to the unit.
Makoa spent quite a while exploring the new box and was especially taken with the fact that it moved on its own. In fact, he interrupted the first cleaning cycle about thirty times. Luckily, all the safety features of this litter box ensured that no matter how often he tried to crawl inside while it was working, he never once got pinched or stuck.
Getting the box connected to wifi and the app set up was also exceptionally easy. Once this was done, I added Makoa’s profile and set my cleaning preferences.
One feature that I really appreciate is the do-not-disturb setting. Because Makoa has pica and can’t be trusted to roam freely throughout the house at night, he sleeps in the laundry room where the litter box is.
I was worried that the box would never be able to complete a cleaning if he was locked up with it. Him constantly bugging it could lead to the box getting stuck upside down for hours, leaving him no place to potty. Luckily, with the do-not-disturb setting, I’m able to turn off auto cleaning at night and have it resume in the morning.
The other really great thing about this cat box is how it tracks your cat’s usage. The first sign Makoa has eaten something he shouldn’t is a disturbance in his normal bathroom routine. By looking through his potty log on the app each day, I can be sure everything is running smoothly.
I can even tell when he sleeps in the litter box!
This smart box also does a pretty decent job of sealing in odors. I typically clean the cat box twice a week. But with the Neakasa, I don’t notice any smells until about seven days have passed (and this is when using fragrance-free clay litter without any odor absorbers).
As an automatic litter box newbie, I am more than impressed with how easy the Neakasa M1 has made litter box cleaning. But what really sets this option apart from others is the smart app, unique open-top design, and the many customizable options.
Conclusion
Whether you have one cat or a whole pride of them, cleaning the litter box is a chore better left to the robots. If you’re considering a self-cleaning option, I highly recommend the Neakasa M1 Open Top Self-Cleaning Litter Box.
Not only does this intelligent system take all the hassle out of cleaning up after your cat, but it also helps you track their health. The in-depth usage logs tell you when your cat uses the box and for how long. For multi-cat households, it can even differentiate between different users.
This functionality combined with an extra-large waste bin, open-top design, and customizable cleaning options puts this auto-cleaning litter box high above the competition.
Two sets of data that came out last week on the real estate sector showed some indications of a slowdown in demand, both in homes sales and office leasing though property analysts put it down to a temporary blip rather than a trend.
Higher homes prices could be hurting residential sales and companies may have temporarily put their leasing plans in pause mode due to the general elections, they said.
Property consultant Anarock issued a report that showed home sales declining sequentially in the second quarter of 2024 and rising by a modest amount on year.
According to its data residential sales at in the June quarter at 1.2 lakh units was 8 per cent down on the quarter compared to 1.3 lakh units in the March quarter.
Also read: Mumbai June property registrations up 12% YoY but down 3.6% MoM
The second report by Colliers on office leasing in the top six cities showed that though it showed an overall growth in the second quarter as well as the first half of 2024, the figure was skewed by the high leasing numbers in Mumbai, Hyderabad and Bengaluru, which together accounted for nearly 70 per cent of the total leasing across all the cities.
“For both the residential and commercial sectors, Q1 2024 saw all-time best performance, and this created a high base,” said Prashant Thakur, Regional Director & Head – Research, Anarock.
“We therefore cannot say that the drop in leasing and housing sales is any sign of a slowdown, but more of a high base effect. Moreover, as far as office real estate is concerned, the elections could have had an impact as many corporates hold on to their expansion plans in anticipation of the new government.”
Residential
Anarock Chairman Anuj Puri attributed the quarterly decline in home sales to the high base effect in the first quarter and higher home prices. “…this drop is also due to the significant hike in property prices over the last one year, which in turn has prompted many investors to take a breather,” he said.
The data provided by Anarock on the sales in the June quarter showed that with the exception of the National Capital Region, all other major cities showed a decline in sales sequentially ranging from 3 to 23 per cent, with Hyderabad having the most fall.
Property prices were 4-10 per cent higher in the June quarter from the March quarter.
Thakur pointed out that high prices can prompt investors to take a pause and added, “However, demand remains high and if prices are kept in check henceforth, housing sales may not be majorly impacted in the upcoming quarters.”
He said Anarock has projected an 8-10 per cent yearly growth in homes sales in 2024.
Office
“Although the demand and supply of office space in few cities have seen an annual dip in Q2 2024, there is no suggestive trend of a slowdown in the office market of the country,” said Vimal Nadar, Senior Director & Head of Research, Colliers India.
While leasing across the top six cities saw an uptick of 8 per cent in Q2 buoyed by Mumbai, Hyderabad and Bengaluru, the other three cities Chennai, Delhi-NCR and Pune saw a decline in the 39-41 per cent range. In the first half too leasing in these three cities fell 17-31 per cent.
Nadar said office market activity was usually stronger in the second half of the year and “demand base diversification will continue and play a critical role in leasing activity breaching 50 msf for the third consecutive time in 2024.”
Also read: Landeed raises funds from Paradigm Shift VC
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
VEĆ od sredine lipnja nagađa se kada će Inditex grupacija, posebno Zara, započeti svoje ljetno sniženje. Nedavno se na forumima raspravljalo zašto sniženje u Hrvatskoj još nije ni nagoviješteno iako je u susjednim zemljama već krenulo.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Danas su Zara i ostali brendovi Inditex grupacije na svojim web stranicama konačno objavili informaciju kada sniženje kreće. U Zari sniženje počinje sutra, 30. lipnja – prvo u aplikaciji u 20 sati, zatim na webu u 21 sat, a u trgovinama u ponedjeljak, 1. srpnja.
Cijene su snižene više od 40 posto, a na popustu se može pronaći gotovo sve – od odjeće, obuće, parfema i nakita do predmeta za dom. Kao i prošlih godina, možete pregledati cijelu ponudu na sniženju, napuniti košarice i sutra se prijaviti u aplikaciju u 20 sati ili na web u 21 sat kako biste kupili proizvode po sniženim cijenama.
Evo kada kreće sniženje kod drugih Inditex brendova:
Massimo Dutti: sniženje kreće sutra u 19 sati online za korisnike pretplaćene na e-letak, a od 1. srpnja u trgovinama
Bershka: popusti do 50 posto počinju sutra, 30. lipnja, prvo u aplikaciji u 20 sati, a na webu u 21 sat
Pull&Bear i Stradivarius: ljetno sniženje kreće 30. lipnja u 20 sati u aplikaciji
Oysho: sniženje počinje također u nedjelju, 30. lipnja u 19 sati u aplikaciji, od 20 sati na webu te od ponedjeljka, 1. srpnja u trgovinama.
Sretno šopingiranje svima!
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Russell Westbrook has picked up his player option for $4 million and will return to the Clippers for the 2024-25 season, a person not authorized to speak on the matter confirmed to The Times on Saturday.
The nine-time All-Star averaged 11.1 points, 5.0 rebounds and 4.5 assists per game last season. He shot 45.4% from the field, but just 27.3% from three-point range.
But in a first-round playoff series against the Dallas Mavericks, he averaged just 6.3 points and shot 26% from the field, 23.5% from three-point range.
After the Clippers acquired James Harden in late October, Westbrook went to the bench and was productive in that role, which he did not oppose unlike when he played for the Lakers.
Forward P.J. Tucker opted into his player option for $11.5 million on Friday and will return to the Clippers.
Forward Paul George, who has been negotiating a contract extension, has a player option worth $48.7 million on his contract.
Also, according to a person not authorized to speak publicly on the matter, the Clippers signed Trentyn Flowers to a two-way contract. Flowers, an athletic 6-7 wing player, played last season in Australia.
Meta said that it took down over 15.6 million pieces of bad content across 13 policies for Facebook and more than 5.8 million pieces of objectionable content across 12 policies for Instagram in India in May.
In May, Facebook received 22,251 reports through the Indian grievance mechanism and said that it provided tools for users to resolve their issues in 13,982 cases.
These include pre-established channels to report content for specific violations, self-remediation flows where they can download their data, avenues to address account hacked issues, etc, Meta said in its monthly report in compliance with the IT (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021.
“Of the other 8,269 reports where specialised review was needed, we analysed content as per our policies and took action on 5,583 complaints in total. The remaining 2,686 grievances were reviewed but may not have been actioned,” Meta added.
On Instagram, the company received 14,373 reports through the Indian grievance mechanism.
“Of these, we provided tools for users to resolve their issues in 7,300 cases,” it said.
Of the other 7,073 reports where the specialised review was needed, Meta analysed the content and took action on 4,172 complaints in total.
The remaining 2,901 reports were reviewed but may not have been actioned.
Under the new IT Rules 2021, big digital and social media platforms, with more than 5 million users, have to publish monthly compliance reports.
“We measure the number of pieces of content (such as posts, photos, videos or comments) we take action for going against our standards. Taking action could include removing a piece of content from Facebook or Instagram or covering photos or videos that may be disturbing to some audiences with a warning,” said Meta.
From drought alerts at the airport to innovative water-saving technologies in hotels, Barcelona’s tourism industry is being reshaped in the midst of its worst drought in centuries.
More than 85 million visitors came to Spain in 2023 — and they used a lot of water. (Noppasin Wongchum/Zoonar/picture alliance )
The beach, the sun and even the festive street atmosphere are likely among the first things travelers want to see when they visit Barcelona. However, their reception has been a bit different for the past few weeks. As tourists land in the city, a different kind of message greets them at the airport:
“Drought alert. Save water during your stay.”
ALSO READ: Spanish tourism industry under pressure amid record drought
Catalonia has been in a critical situation for three years and has seen its worst drought in 200 years. Although the rains of the last few weeks have helped ease the situation, the region remains alert to what the future may bring.
In the context of climate change, where rain will become less frequent in the Mediterranean basin, many hotels have already started to think of ways to cope with the situation.
One towel at a time, please
In this respect, the outlook is more positive for those who have already done their homework.
One such place is St. Christopher’s Inn, a hostel just a few meters from Plaza Catalunya. Since its construction, this site, which welcomes thousands of travelers from around the world each year, has had a recycling system that reuses water from showers and sinks for cleaning and toilet flushing.
Additionally, to reduce water consumption by guests, the hotel charges €1 ($1.07) for each towel change and have replaced traditional showerheads with timed push buttons. These are effective solutions, although not easy to implement.
“The biggest challenge is the cost. We are a building with 450 beds and 35 showers. Initially, it was a bit complicated to justify the investment and we had to convince the company to approve our budgets,” explained Alex de Luca, marketing manager at St. Christopher’s Inn.
Beyond this place, other establishments in Barcelona are also taking measures to confront the drought and be more sustainable.
The Hilton Diagonal Mar has opted to use seawater in its pool, which prolongs the water’s useful life. Meanwhile, the Majestic Hotel & Spa Barcelona has revamped its shower systems to reduce water consumption from 40 liters (10.5 gallons) per minute to just nine liters, by mixing more air with the water.
Hotel guests have reduced water use
Sometimes the efforts of these businesses need to be accompanied by a change in attitude among visitors. Many are unaware of what is happening until they encounter the signs and see the various measures.
“We are gradually reeducating them. Although the response has been more positive than we expected, occasionally some customers complain that the shower water doesn’t last long,” said de Luca. Although these measures are proving effective in saving water, the truth is that it’s not known with certainty how much visitors use.
According to a study published in May 2023 by the Barcelona Hotel Guild, hotel guests in the city have reduced their daily water consumption by 40% over the last seven years. The study also revealed that hotels now account for 9% of the total water consumed in the city.
Furthermore, the average water consumption per tourist stands at 163.5 liters per day, only slightly higher than that of a Barcelona resident when considering the water consumed outside the home.
Changing mindsets in Catalonia
The Water Research Institute at the University of Barcelona has no data to support these findings, but estimates that tourists use around twice as much water per day compared with the rest of society. It’s a significant number, but one that does not seem likely to have any repercussions.
Jose F. Garcia, director of the university’s Chemical Institute, doesn’t believe the model will change in the short term. “In Barcelona, the economy has a very important tourist component that also affects the locals,” he said.
Indeed, more than 85 million visitors came to Spain in 2023 and contributed 12% of the country’s GDP.
Nevertheless, Garcia believes that in the medium term, there could be a change, as the need to do so becomes bigger and bigger. However, this will not happen until the local mindset changes, too.
“The moment we all realize that water is a limited resource and that we can’t use as much as we want, we will all use less. This will also lead to a change in the economic model,” he said.
In some places like St. Christopher’s Inn, this seems to be starting to happen already.
As Alex de Luca put it: “Every action counts when it comes to water conservation. From the management decisions we make to the behaviors we encourage in our guests, we all have a role to play.”
Glastonbury Festival performances by Keane, Corrine Bailey Rae, Bloc Party and Kasabian were marred for some fans by the constant presence of Palestinian flags – and even an inflatable dinghy carrying “asylum seekers”. Political clashes loomed large at the event, prompting one fan to take to Twitter and exclaim: “#Glastonbury festival isn’t being held on stolen land, as far as I’m aware…”
Another fan complained of “flags in front of stages [and] Idles leading pro-Pally chants.” Meanwhile, others argued that the political content was imbalanced, pointing out that there appeared to be no tributes to the hundreds of Israelis who were murdered at a music festival during the terror attacks of October 7.
“I wonder if the Palestinian flag waving people at #Glastonbury 2024 give a thought to the young people massacred at #Nova,” one festival-goer quizzed. Another agreed: “Crazy that people would be allowed to brandish the same flag that was brandished during a festival where people were shot dead. @glastonbury #bbc.”
A third chimed in: “Like pigs to the slaughter. #Glastonbury, they massacred people just like you in #Nova, and you’re waving that flag?” Then a fourth tweeter added: “Hey @glastonbury terrorist supporters, just remember the people you support crowded around the pickup truck carrying the body of Shani Louk who was raped, murdered and her body mutilated then paraded for Palestinians to spit and hit her body #Glastonbury #Glastonbury2024.”
A leaflet-making class held on the premises, allowing those who were protesting for peace to create and distribute their own material, also sparked concern. One music fan lamented that Glastonbury was “no longer a music festival”, arguing that there’d been a cultural shift since Labour’s Jeremy Corbyn was invited there, and that it had become a “cult” to “poison minds”.
Another fan made his frustrations clear when he announced: “I think it’s time to boycott #Glastonbury .. full of Hamas loving flags. Absolute disgrace!”
Meanwhile, band the Idles made their feelings about abolishing the monarchy clear when they invited audiences to join them in a chant of “F*** the King” during their set.
Corrine Bailey Rae also turned her set political, when she launched into a passionate speech about beauty ideals, offering her stance on them as a black woman.
Pride flags and Hamas-affiliated flags could be seen in the crowd, while an inflatable dinghy appearing to show asylum-seekers on a boat, which was attributed to Banksy, was passed around.
One astonished viewer accused it of “glorifying” illegal immigration, adding: “The heavily fenced & guarded compound of Glastonbury, surrounded by security, to ensure no one can illegally break in… is celebrating illegal migrants in dinghies, illegally breaking into the UK. You couldn’t make this s*** up!”
Meanwhile, fans called for Somerset Council to revoke Glastonbury’s licence on the grounds that it was “celebrating” terrorism.
Other complaints included references to the sound quality and the acts themselves, with one unamused listener comparing Corrine Bailey Rae’s sax solo to the sounds of a “strangled cat”.
Meanwhile, presenter Jo Whiley also struggled with speech, appearing to have almost lost her voice when she spoke on the televised BBC highlights.
Positive comments posted on social media mainly related to Kasabian, after the rock group’s set went down a storm – and Cyndi Lauper lightened the mood with ‘Girls Just Wanna Have Fun’.
The venerable Volkswagen Golf is still one of the best small cars that money can buy – it’s just a shame you need a fair bit more money to buy one these days than in years gone by.
The ‘base’ model tested here is just under $40,000 before on-road costs, and a bit more than that to get it into your driveway.
In fact, at the time of publication, this 2024 Golf 110TSI Life is a $41,990 drive-away proposition, and we’ve even got a white one with no options, so this is exactly the car you get at that promo price.
So, in a world where you could instead get a fully electric hatchback for less money, or maybe choose a petrol-electric hybrid, does the VW Golf still stack up?
You bet it does – read on to find out why.
How does the Volkswagen Golf compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Volkswagen Golf against similarly sized vehicles.
Volkswagen
Golf
How much does the Volkswagen Golf cost?
On test here is the entry-level Golf Life – currently advertised for $41,990 drive-away.
Model Variant
$RRP
2024 Volkswagen Golf 110TSI Life
$39,190 or $41,990 D/A
2024 Volkswagen Golf 110TSI R-Line
$42,290
2024 Volkswagen Golf GTI
$56,090 or $59,990 D/A
2024 Volkswagen Golf R
$70,590
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the Volkswagen Golf like on the inside?
Classic VW Golf. Premium, elegant and mostly simple.
Well, apart from the media system, which I still struggle to get to grips with even after being exposed to this setup for a few years now.
As with most anyone who has driven a current Golf, the bits that take some learning include the haptic volume and temperature controls, and annoyingly there is no dial or button for fan speed (if you’re a fan fiddler like me, you’ll hate that).
You can jump into the climate screen by using the little temp display, and or hitting the ‘Clima’ control button below the screen – but it’s all stuff that buttons and dials did better in the last gen.
At least there’s a set of actual buttons on the steering wheel, instead of haptics. Those are welcome!
Beyond those controls being a little less than perfect, the screen has a heap of menus and info panels, including built-in sat nav, as well as multiple displays to adjust settings and driving features.
There’s also wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto, and even this base model has a wireless phone charger, too.
Plus there’s a fully digital instrument panel which is crisp and looks smart, and has manageable and learnable controls by way of the steering wheel buttons.
The cabin has good storage up front, including a pair of cupholders between the seats (adjustable to turn into an open stowage hole instead, if you wish) and there’s a little tiny storage pocket under the centre armrest.
Front doors have large pockets with bottle holsters moulded into them, and they are lined for rattle-free driving.
The seats are great. Super comfortable and supportive, and though they are manual and not heated, there is ample height adjustment and bolster adjust.
This is a weird comment, but I’ve made it to VW execs in the past — my Mum has really short legs, and finds the seat base too lengthy for her to get comfy. That may or may not factor into your decisions if you’re more than 4’11” (just under 150cm)!
In the back there’s ample room for two adults to fit, and three in a squeeze. That’s mainly due to the huge transmission tunnel intrusion that eats into foot space, because otherwise it’s wide enough to fit three regular-sized adults.
I can fit behind my own 182cm/6’0” driving position, but my knees brush the seat ahead and I have a limited amount of foot space.
I think it’s great to see VW offer three-zone climate control in this entry model, with directional vents for rear riders. And of course there are ISOFIX points in the window seats and three top-tethers.
There’s impressive stowage in the back with map pockets on both seat backs, and a pair of upper pockets for devices or tissue packs or lollies – neat!
There are also lined door bins for bottles, a flip-down armrest with cup holders, and a ski port even on the base model!
Some of the back door plastics are a harder variety than up front but at least the ambient light strips flow to the second row.
The boot is a good size for a little car, with 374 litres of cargo capacity on offer with the seats up, which expands to 1230 litres with the seats folded down.
They don’t go totally flat but with the boot floor in its highest position there is a flat enough space for an IKEA run, or you can lower that boot floor down to maximise room if you’re using the back seat.
There’s a space-saver spare wheel under the boot floor, and shopping bag hooks to stop things flying around in the boot.
Dimensions
Volkswagen Golf 110TSI Life
Length
4284mm
Width
1789mm
Height
1456mm
Wheelbase
2636mm
Boot capacity
374-1230 litres
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
The entry-level Golf runs a 110TSI powertrain, and in this instance it’s a 1.4-litre four-cylinder turbo-petrol engine.
As you may have guessed, the power output is 110kW (5000rpm) and there’s 250Nm of torque (from 1500-4000rpm). This model has an eight-speed torque-converter automatic as opposed to a dual-clutch DSG auto that is employed in other Golf variants. It’s front-wheel drive.
Towing capacity is 660kg unbraked and 1500kg braked, which is good for a small car like this (better than some small SUVs, in fact!).
It requires 95 RON premium unleaded petrol, and has an official combined cycle fuel use figure of just 5.8 litres per 100km.
On test, I’ve seen an impressive return of 6.3L/100km, including a few longer highway stints that saw the display drop to 4.6L/100km, so it may be a great choice for those who do distance commuting.
How does the Volkswagen Golf drive?
It’s such a comfortable and stress-free drive experience.
Because this version of the Golf doesn’t have a DSG dual clutch auto – instead it has an eight-speed torque converter – it’s less fussy to take away from a standstill, and there’s less potential for concern about picking a gap in traffic as a result.
The downside of this auto is when you ask a bit more of it in open road situations, it can feel a bit confused. It’s not terrible, just not as snappy as a DSG when you go to overtake or suddenly need more from the powertrain. There’s also no Auto Hold button so you have to keep your foot on the brake at a stop.
The engine is a good one, too, with easily enough zest and grunt to get things moving with a full load of family, and it’s zippy in urban driving if you’re on your lonesome too.
While it might not be a GTI, it has a great road manner to it as well.
The suspension is well calibrated and offers a comfortable and controlled ride, with predictable handling and accurate steering making this an easy daily car, but also handles itself well if you need or want to ask a little more of it.
Even this base model has independent rear suspension, so it can handle itself, and while the Nexen NFera Sport tyres aren’t the last word in performance rubber, it really is a predictable and likeable thing to drive.
The brakes however might take some acclimation. They are a bit grabby and also quite loud – like, you can hear the brakes over anything else at lower speeds.
You only get a reversing camera, but it’s a good one, and there’s a wide-view display as well. There are also front and rear parking sensors as standard, as well as an auto parking system if you want to use it.
There’s an excellent Manoeuvre Braking system which can detect obstacles or people and hit the brakes if the system thinks you won’t. It did that for me with a passing pedestrian, and boy was that a relief.
Another plus is that the safety aids in this car aren’t overbearing, with none of that beeping-bonging nonsense that other cars have.
The adaptive cruise control is good, but if you’re in a left or middle lane and trying to maintain pace, it won’t go faster than the car in the right lane, even if it’s a slowpoke.
I understand there’s a German “you don’t hog the fast lane” level of good intent from this tech, but the reality is that lane discipline is not an Aussie strong suit, and it can be frustrating because you can’t turn that ‘safety’ feature off.
Another criticism common to this generation of Golf models is there’s quite a bit of road noise on the highway, especially on coarse-chip surfaces.
What do you get?
On test here is the entry-level Golf 110TSI Life variant.
Golf Life highlights:
17-inch alloy wheels
Automatic LED headlights
LED tail lights
Rain-sensing wipers
Power-folding side mirrors
10-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
7-speaker sound system
Wireless phone charger
Satellite navigation
Tri-zone climate control
10-colour interior ambient lighting
Keyless entry and start
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Cloth upholstery
Comfort front seats with lumbar adjustment
Luggage partition
Ski port
Space-saver spare wheel
Puddle lights
Illuminated exterior door handles
Is the Volkswagen Golf safe?
The Golf range has a five-star ANCAP safety rating from 2019 tests.
It scored 95 per cent for adult occupant protection, 89 per cent for child occupant protection, 76 per cent for vulnerable road user protection, and 80 per cent for safety assist.
Standard safety equipment includes:
9 airbags incl. front-centre airbag
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Pedestrian, Cyclist detection
Multi-collision brake
Applies brakes if you’re in a crash, preventing further chaos
Lane keep assist
Travel Assist
Front cross-traffic alert
Rear cross-traffic alert
Blind-spot monitoring
Adaptive cruise control with stop/go
Driver fatigue monitoring
Park Assist
Reversing camera
Front, rear parking sensors
Emergency Assist
Safe exit warning
How much does the Volkswagen Golf cost to run?
Like all Volkswagen models sold in Australia, the Golf comes with a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
Logbook servicing is required every 12 months or 15,000km.
2024 Volkswagen Golf 110TSI service pricing:
Service Interval
Price
12 months/15,000km
$520
24 months/30,000km
$763
36 months/45,000km
$506
48 months/60,000km
$1176
60 months/75,000km
$506
That might seem pricey, but Volkswagen offers a prepaid service package for three or five years, which reduces the cost by a bit. The three-year plan is $1610 (saving of $177), and the five-year plan is $2950 (saving of $518).
There’s one year roadside assistance included for free, which will renew when you service with the brand. Also, if you finance through VW Australia, you have the option of setting a guaranteed future value for your car – could be a nice fallback, if you’re planning to take out a loan anyway.
CarExpert’s Take on the Volkswagen Golf
It mightn’t be electric, or even hybrid, but the VW Golf is still a modern and compelling choice for a hatchback buyer who wants something that feels a bit special inside and drives really, really nicely.
Personally I’d spend a little bit more to get into the R-Line, but if you’re cool with this more comfortable, less audacious choice, then you’ll be happy with it, I reckon.
Click the images for the full gallery
MORE: Buy a Volkswagen Golf MORE: Everything Volkswagen Golf
The digital transformation in India has reached its rural frontiers, significantly increasing the use of laptops, mobile phones, and digital payment systems among its rural population. However, this rapid digitisation brings with it an expanded threat landscape, particularly in cybersecurity. Rural areas, traditionally underserved in terms of financial and digital literacy, are becoming vulnerable to cyber threats, creating a pressing need for cyber insurance solutions tailored to their specific circumstances.
Cybersecurity Challenges in Rural India
As rural India embraces digital technology, cybersecurity emerges as a critical concern. The penetration of smartphones and internet access has facilitated the rise of digital payments, but it has also exposed rural users to risks such as phishing, online fraud, and data breaches.
According to a report by the Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In), rural areas are not immune to cyber attacks, contributing to a small but growing percentage of the total cyber incidents reported nationwide. Though specific data on the percentage of rural populations affected by cyber attacks are scarce, it is estimated that about 10% of cyber incidents reported involve victims from these areas, a figure that is rising with increased digital adoption.
The concept of cyber insurance in rural India is still in its infancy, primarily because the idea of digital risk management itself is quite new to these areas. Despite its nascent stage, the importance of cyber insurance is becoming increasingly apparent. As digital technology penetrates deeper into rural landscapes—facilitated by initiatives like Digital India which promote internet and smartphone usage—the exposure to cyber risks among rural businesses and individuals grows.
More residents of rural areas are now participating in online financial transactions, utilizing digital banking services, and engaging in e-commerce activities, thereby exposing themselves to the potential threats of the digital world.
Cyber insurance serves as a critical tool in this setting. It is designed to mitigate the risks associated with digital activities, such as identity theft, data breaches, operational disruption due to malware, and other cyber threats that could severely disrupt the economic activities of individuals and businesses alike. For rural settings, where such disruptions can mean significant financial setbacks, cyber insurance could act as a financial buffer, providing essential recovery support.
Coverage typically includes the direct costs associated with the recovery from cyber attacks, such as forensic investigation expenses, data restoration costs, and customer notification expenses following a data breach. More comprehensive policies might also cover legal fees, settlement costs, and even regulatory fines. Importantly, some policies offer business interruption coverage, compensating for lost income during periods when a business is unable to operate normally due to a cyber incident.
However, the adoption of cyber insurance in rural India faces several challenges. First and foremost is the lack of awareness; many small business owners and individuals are unaware of the existence of cyber insurance, let alone its benefits. Digital literacy rates in rural areas, although improving, still lag behind urban areas, which complicates the efforts to disseminate information about cyber risks and the importance of insurance.
Moreover, the cost of insurance premiums can be a barrier. Many rural businesses operate on thin margins and may view insurance as an unnecessary expense rather than a necessary investment into their long-term sustainability. To address this, insurance providers and policymakers must work together to design affordable and accessible cyber insurance products tailored to the needs and economic realities of rural businesses and consumers.
Education plays a pivotal role in overcoming these challenges. By integrating cyber risk education into broader digital literacy campaigns, stakeholders can enhance understanding of both the risks associated with digital activities and the protective solutions offered by cyber insurance. Government bodies, in collaboration with private sector partners and educational institutions, can conduct workshops, seminars, and outreach programs to educate rural populations about cyber threats and the critical role of insurance in mitigating these risks.
In conclusion, as rural India continues to integrate more deeply with the digital economy, the role of cyber insurance will become increasingly critical in safeguarding not only the economic stability of individuals and businesses but also the broader developmental goals of rural digitization.
Obstacles to Cyber Insurance Adoption in Rural India
Several barriers hinder the adoption of cyber insurance in rural regions:
Awareness: There is a significant lack of awareness about cyber risks and the benefits of cyber insurance. Many rural citizens and businesses are not aware that insurance solutions for cyber threats exist, nor do they fully understand the implications of cyber attacks.
Affordability: Cost is a critical factor in rural India. Affordable cyber insurance products are needed to attract rural businesses and individuals who often have limited financial resources.
Digital Literacy: Low levels of digital literacy contribute to the vulnerability of rural populations to cyber fraud. Educating these users about safe online practices is as crucial as providing them with insurance products.
Infrastructure: Insufficient cybersecurity infrastructure and support services in rural areas make it difficult to assess risks and enforce policies effectively.
Future Prospects
There is a clear opportunity for both the government and private sectors to collaborate in developing and promoting cyber insurance as a mainstream solution in rural India. Initiatives could include:
Education Campaigns: Increasing awareness about cyber risks and the importance of insurance through community programs and local languages.
Tailored Insurance Products: Designing affordable and accessible cyber insurance policies that cater specifically to the needs and challenges of rural users.
Enhancing Digital Literacy: Implementing programs that improve understanding of digital tools and safe online practices.
As India progresses, the integration of cyber insurance into the rural economy will be crucial for securing the digital advancements that are currently transforming these communities. Without adequate protection and awareness, the digital divide could widen, leaving rural India vulnerable to the darker aspects of digitisation.
Investors are optimistic about Ethereum’s future, expecting its value to possibly double. Meanwhile, Solana’s recent ETF application has sparked discussions about how it might move in price. Adding to the excitement is Furrever Token, a cute new cryptocurrency offering a 50% bonus code, FURR50, to early buyers. With its charming cat-themed features and strong referral program, Furrever Token is set to attract both new and experienced investors. Explore this dynamic crypto world where opportunities for growth are plentiful.
Unlocking Ethereum’s Potential: ETFs and a Bullish Outlook
Ethereum’s Ether has been moving sideways like Bitcoin recently. It went up by 1.5% in the last day, now priced at $3,450. Experts say ETH might double in value, like in early 2021 when it went from $1,000 to nearly $4,900. A bullish pattern on the Ether chart suggests the uptrend will continue, backed by Fibonacci signs.
Looking ahead, the imminent launch of spot exchange-traded funds (ETFs) could significantly impact Ether’s price trajectory. Following the success of Bitcoin ETFs in the U.S., numerous firms have applied for ETH ETFs, expected to be approved and operational by July. The introduction of these ETFs as a new investment vehicle for Ether could mirror the positive impact seen with Bitcoin, driving considerable market interest and potentially pushing ETH towards the $7,500 mark, a 161.8% Fibonacci extension level.
Solana (SOL) ETF Filing: Catalyst for Altcoin Surge Amid Legal Battles and Market Dynamics
The cryptocurrency market is witnessing pivotal developments as VanEck files for the first Solana Exchange Traded Fund (ETF) in the U.S., potentially reshaping perceptions of Solana (SOL) and other altcoins among institutional investors and regulators. This move signifies a significant step towards mainstream adoption, similar to Bitcoin and Ethereum’s ETF journeys.
Meanwhile, Coinbase’s lawsuit against the SEC and FDIC underscores ongoing regulatory tensions in the crypto space. The legal challenge seeks to address regulatory overreach and improve transparency, potentially setting precedents that could benefit the entire industry.
Against this backdrop, the Sealana token presale is generating considerable interest, highlighting strong investor demand within the Solana community. With the presale closing soon, market dynamics around SOL are poised for potential shifts.
Despite SOL’s recent price stabilization around $142, indicators like growing active addresses and robust on-chain transaction values suggest underlying strength. Technical analysis points to key support levels at $115-$127 and recent highs near $200-$210, indicating critical price zones for traders.
Looking ahead, approval of a Solana ETF could catalyze renewed market interest and price momentum, akin to past trends seen with major cryptocurrencies. Analysts speculate on SOL’s potential for substantial market cap growth, potentially reaching $500 billion in the next bullish cycle.
Furrever Token: A Delightful Crypto Revolution
Introducing Furrever Token, a cryptocurrency project designed to revolutionize the crypto space with an irresistible dose of cuteness. Furrever Token goes beyond traditional use cases, offering a delightful and charming experience for users. The mission is to provide a unique and enjoyable experience centered around the universal appeal of cute kitties, creating a whimsical and heartwarming crypto ecosystem.
Furrever Token’s tokenomics are well-structured with the symbol FURR, operating on the BNB-20 blockchain. The total supply consists of 9 billion tokens, with 65% available during the presale, 25% allocated for decentralized exchanges (DEXs), and 10% reserved for the team, locked for a year. This strategic allocation aims to ensure stability and growth.
The features of Furrever Token are designed to captivate users by integrating cute cat-themed stickers, emojis, and visuals into everyday interactions. The platform encourages community engagement through regular challenges, launches, and growth activities. Future surprises featuring exclusive cute cat content are planned to continuously reward and delight the community. Despite its playful nature, the security and compliance of the Furrever Token platform are paramount, with audits and safety measures ensuring a secure and enjoyable experience for all users.
Furrever Token has already raised over $1.4 million in nearly three months, with stage 9 of the presale currently ongoing and a goal to raise $1.9 million. The launch on PancakeSwap is eagerly anticipated, and the token accepts various payment options, including USDT, BNB, ETH, and MATIC. Investors are attracted by the potential for up to 15X returns, with the current price at $0.000732. Purchases can only be made on the official website, furrevertoken.com.
Regarding legitimacy, the smart contract has been audited by Securi Lab, and while the team is not doxxed, this is not uncommon in the crypto market. There are no buy and sell taxes when trading Furrever Token, and the team has locked their tokens for a year to reassure the community of the project’s longevity. The community has grown organically, with early members serving as moderators, and the smart contract is visible to all community members. The active admins and mods on Telegram, with over 5k organic members, ensure a responsive and supportive environment.
Recent updates include reaching the $1,400,000 milestone and the approaching end of stage 9, with stage 10 bringing a price increase. The bonus code FURR50 offers a 50% bonus from June 25, 2024, 12:00 UTC to June 30, 2024, 23:59 UTC. Additionally, a 10% referral bonus is available on deposits made using a referral link from the official website.
IIM Kozhikode has created history this year, by admitting 59 per cent female students to its flagship PGP, which is now into its 28th year.
Arun Kohli, Managing Director and Country Head of India, Morgan Stanley, was the Chief Guest for the inauguration ceremony, which was presided over by Debashis Chatterjee, Director IIM Kozhikode.
Kohli recounted his corporate journey from humble origins and encouraged students to never let go of opportunities that are bound to come their way owing to a resurgent India making giant global strides. He inspired students to be the best versions of themselves by aiming high and focusing on learning with an open mind, as education is a lifetime process.
Debashis Chatterjee said the institute this year yet again achieved a significant milestone: close to 60 per cent female students, the highest ever in our history. The decade-long initiative not only transformed IIMK but has also raised the stake of women in management across the country, paving the way for a more inclusive and equitable future in business leadership.
Considerably bettering its own record among older IIMs in the country and further bolstering its credentials as Diversity Leaders among B-Schools of the country, IIM Kozhikode had first broken the glass ceiling, when PGP-17 batch recorded 54 per cent women in the year 2013. 2021 was another landmark year in terms of Gender Diversity as IIMK again breached the 50 per cent mark in admitting women students.
The latest inductees are for its flagship Post-Graduate Programme (PGP), PGP-Liberal Studies and Management (PGP-LSM), PGP-Finance (PGP-F) and Doctoral Programme in Management (PhD). The new inductees comprise a total of 631 students into regular, full-time programmes: 28th batch of PGP (497 students), 5th batch of PGP-LSM (53 students), 5th batch of PGP-F (53 students), and 18th batch of DPM (Ph.D) (28 students).
For 2024, PGP-LSM 05 has a batch strength of 53 students with 58 per cent female students. PGP-Fin has also registered an intake on 53 students this year. The PhD Programme (DP) is now into its 18th batch and has inducted 28 students, 13 of whom are female.
As many as 15 international students from the USA, UK, Nepal, Sri Lanka, Qatar, Germany, and Canada joined through GMAT and CAT. This is the highest number of international students inducted into IIMK for its two-year full-time MBA programmes.
Summer is an ideal time to take a road trip, go camping and spend time outdoors. Taking a power station with you is a smart way to make sure your devices never run out of juice. Right now the Vtoman FlashSpeed 1000 portable power station is $540 off at Amazon. That makes this handy gadget only $460. Amazon deals like this one tend to fluctuate in price quickly, so keep that in mind.
This power station features 14 ports, including USB-A, USB-C, DC, electrical outlets, a car slot and a jumper cable slot. It has a capacity of 828 to 1,000 watts. The estimated charging time is roughly 70 minutes. You can also expand the capacity by attaching the power station to another Vtoman and increasing output power.
Hey, did you know? CNET Deals texts are free, easy and save you money.
The power station was designed to last up to 3,000 life cycles, and it includes its own storage compartment so you can keep your charging cables organized. You can also add a solar panel, but you’ll have to buy that separately. If you’re interested in more power, the Vtoman FlashSpeed 2,376-watt battery two-pack and 110-watt solar panel are now available in a bundle for $400 off at Amazon and will cost you only $1,200 when you use the on-page coupon.
If you’re looking for ways to keep your devices charged, we have a list of the best solar panels and an explainer on portable power stations and home batteries. We’re also keeping track of Fourth of July sales and helping you take advantage of upcoming Amazon Prime Day sales.
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has issued a fresh warning about an increased risk of dengue virus infections as a “record-breaking number” of cases are being reported in the Americas.
From January 1 to June 24 of this year, more than 9.7 million dengue cases were recorded among countries in the Americas, which is more than double the 4.6 million infections recorded throughout 2023, according to the CDC.
“Global incidence of dengue in 2024 has been the highest on record for this calendar year; many countries are reporting higher-than-usual dengue case numbers,” it also said. “In 2024, countries in the Americas have reported a record-breaking number of dengue cases, exceeding the highest number ever recorded in a single year.”
The CDC describes the dengue virus as the “most common” mosquito-borne disease in the world. In the U.S., Florida has reported the most cases so far this year with 197, followed by New York with 134, Massachusetts with 50 and California with 40.
TIGER MOSQUITOES BLAMED FOR SPREAD OF DENGUE FEVER
The CDC says there is a “record-breaking” number of dengue virus infections being recorded in the Americas so far this year.(iStock)
“Six U.S. territories and freely associated states are classified as areas with frequent or continuous dengue transmission: Puerto Rico, American Samoa, the U.S. Virgin Islands, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of Marshall Islands, and the Republic of Palau,” the CDC adds.
The health agency says one in every four dengue infections are symptomatic, with effects including fever and “nausea, vomiting, rash, muscle aches, joint pain, bone pain, pain behind the eyes, headache, or low white blood cell counts.”
“Severe disease, with associated severe bleeding, shock or respiratory distress caused by plasma leakage, or end-organ impairment, develops in 1 in 20 people with symptomatic dengue,” according to the CDC.
PUERTO RICO HEALTH OFFICIALS DECLARE DENGUE FEVER A PUBLIC HEALTH EMERGENCY
Tiger mosquitoes are being blamed for the recent spread of the dengue virus in Europe.(iStock)
It said infants under the age of one, pregnant women and adults over the age of 65 carry an “increased risk of severe dengue” and that “transmission peaks during the warmer and wetter months in many tropical and subtropical regions.”
There is not currently a medication to treat dengue, the CDC says.
A worker is seen releasing smoke during a fumigation campaign against the Aedes aegypti or Aedes albopictus mosquito, which is the transmitter for the dengue virus, on June 24, in San Salvador, El Salvador. (Aphotografia/Getty Images)
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Infected people are advised to rest, take acetaminophen for pain and fever, stay hydrated and see a doctor.
Fox News’ Melissa Rudy contributed to this report.
Marshmallow is a fascinating snack. It is sweet and has a chewy texture that also melts in your mouth. However, people new to marshmallows may struggle to understand this snack. Some people dislike eating marshmallows directly as they could feel too sweet or the texture confusing. Don’t give up on marshmallows yet! We have got some simple recipes to try at home that incorporate marshmallows. Give these a try and you will instantly call marshmallows your favourite snack. Let’s check these out.
Here Are 5 Yummy Marshmallow-Dishes To Make At Home:
1. Classic S’mores
S’mores and not complicated and you do not need a bonfire and a night camp to make them. Enjoy s’mores from the comfort of your home. First toast marshmallows by popping them into an oven. Now take two graham crackers and sandwich the hot and toasted marshmallows in between. You can also sandwich a piece of chocolate, on spread some chocolate sauce on the graham crackers. Enjoy!
2. Marshmallow Hot Chocolate
One of the simplest and classic ways to enjoy marshmallows is to start small. Small but luxurious with a rich and velvety cup of hot chocolate! Use small marshmallows or chop the big ones. Add these on top of your marshmallows, which will melt in the hot beverage. Yummy!
3. Marshmallow French Toast
Upgrade your French toast by hiding marshmallows inside for a yummy surprise. Take two slices of bread, spread chocolate sauce, place chopped marshmallows and close the sandwich. Dip it in egg mixture and fry in butter from both sides. Cut the toast in two and bite into the soft and crispy French toast. Also Read: Incredible! Man Makes Giant Soft Marshmallow, Shocks The Internet (Watch Video)
4. Marshmallow Milkshakes
Upgrade your marshmallows with the yummy flavour and texture of toasted marshmallows. Take a blender and add vanilla ice cream, milk, and toasted marshmallows. Blend well till you get a smooth and creamy shake. You can garnish it with chopped marshmallows.
5. Marshmallow Stuffed Cookies
Making cookies? Make them with marshmallows! Simply wrap a surprise marshmallow filling in your cookie dough. Once baked, you will get a gooey marshmallow centre that will elevate your cookies to the next level. For a chocolate chip cookie recipe, click here. Also Read: Quick & Chocolaty Delight: Easy Air Fryer Brownies You Can’t Resist!
Try these delicious marshmallow recipes and you will never forget this yummy sweet treat. For those looking to make marshmallows at home from scratch, click here.
About Jigyasa KakwaniJigyasa finds her solace through writing, a medium she is exploring to make the world more informed and curious with every story published. She is always up for exploring new cuisines, but her heart comes back to the comforting ghar-ka-khana.
To the political strategy that might in the future be called “transparent efforts to change the narrative and repair the damage done to Joe Biden in the first presidential debate,” add the dress that Jill Biden wore to accompany her husband to his next-day rally in Raleigh, N.C.
As President Biden attempted to address some of the concerns about his age and energy on Friday, his wife, a political spouse who often seems to choose clothes that recede into the background, took her place by his side in a navy blue crepe dress plastered with one word over and over again: “Vote.”
Given the many post-debate reaction stories that focused on viewers’ anxious feelings about Mr. Biden’s shaky performance, that could not have been a coincidence.
Especially given the fact that Dr. Biden has often seemed reluctant to engage in the game known as first lady fashion diplomacy, largely wearing clothes by designers she feels comfortable with rather than ones with any obvious tactical connection to an event. For her to choose a dress so guaranteed to call attention to itself, and to do so at a time when any attention that is not about her husband’s age is probably good attention, is a statement in itself.
After all, there could be no doubting that all eyes would be on the president in his first rally after the debate, in part to judge whether his weak showing the night before would be repeated. Or that the pictures of that rally would be disseminated far and wide. And that, as a result, what his wife wore, as with every detail of his performance, would send a signal not just to the general audience, but also to the political pundit class that has been calling for Mr. Biden to step aside. The one that has noted that the key influencer would be his wife.
He might have been speechifying, but that dress did the talking.
It was by Christian Siriano, a designer known for his inclusive approach to fashion and who created the iconic blue dress Michelle Obama wore at the 2016 Democratic convention. In an email, Mr. Siriano said the first lady’s team had reached out to him about a month ago to request a new version of a “vote” dress he had made for his spring 2021 collection.
Rebecca Feinglos, the founder of @grieveleave, a grief support platform, said she was wearing one of the original Siriano “vote” dresses when she met Dr. Biden at an event a few months ago. The first lady “asked me where I got my dress,” Ms. Feinglos wrote in an Instagram post, “and I was so excited to tell her its story.”
Mr. Siriano said that when Dr. Biden’s team called, he “came up with this shape that felt classic but modern and hopefully tasteful for this event today.”
He added, “I think we all knew after the first debate that it was going to be an important one that could send a message to the world.”
This is the third time in the last four years that Dr. Biden has worn a garment with a message written atop it.
In 2020, before the last presidential election, Dr. Biden wore a pair of Stuart Weitzman knee-high boots that also read “vote.” And in 2021, at the first Group of 7 meeting in Britain after the president took office, she wore a jacket with the word “love” on the back. The choice was widely interpreted as a riposte to the jacket Melania Trump notoriously wore during her husband’s administration with the words “I Really Don’t Care, Do U?” scrawled on the back.
Now the matchup is back, and so are words on clothing. It is, perhaps, only to be expected. Dr. Biden is an English teacher. She knows exactly how much succinct language matters — even if it is on a dress.
The Persian cat has long impressed onlookers with its regal appearance and stunning coat. They are one of the oldest cat breeds to exist, coming in a variety of colors, including black. When exactly did the black Persian become a thing? Since the very beginning, it is still a pretty rare color compared to colors like gray and white!
In this article, we’re going to go over the Persian breed, how they came to be, and where they are today! Maybe you will get to the end of the article and decide it’s time for you to bring home one of your very own.
Breed Overview
Colors:
Black, but they also come in any other color you can think of
Suitable for:
Apartment living, multi-pet households, homes with children
Temperament:
Gentle, agreeable, good-natured
Docile, gentle, and good-natured, the Persian will definitely steal anyone’s heart. These floppy cats are cephalic, they have short, pus and snout and shallow globes. This gives way to the classic appearance, appearing much like the pug version of the cat!
They are interesting. They are what draws people in, and their personality is what makes people stay. When a Persian comes in the stunning black color, it looks absolutely gorgeous against their vibrant eyes!
Black Persian Characteristics
Energy
+
A high-energy cat needs a lot of physical and mental stimulation to keep healthy and happy, while a low-energy cat needs minimal physical activity, but still needs mental stimulation. When choosing a cat, It’s important to ensure their energy levels match your lifestyle.
Trainability
+
Cats that are easy-to-train are more willing and skilled at quickly learning prompts and actions with minimal training. Harder-to-train cats are usually more stubborn or aloof and require a bit more patience and practice.
Health
+
Certain cat breeds are more prone to various genetic health problems, and some more than others. This doesn’t mean that every cat in those breeds will have these issues, but they do have an increased risk, so it’s important to understand and prepare for any additional needs they may require.
Lifespan
+
Due to their size or potential genetic health issues of a specific breed, some cats have shorter lifespans than others. Proper nutrition, exercise, mental stimulation, and hygiene also play an important role in your cat’s lifespan and quality of life.
Sociability
+
Some cat breeds are more social than others, both towards humans and other cats and animals. Cats that are more social have a tendency to rub up on strangers for scratches or jump on laps for cuddles, while cats that are less social shy away, hide, are more cautious, and even potentially aggressive. No matter the breed or gender, it’s important to socialize your cat and expose them to many different situations.
The Earliest Records of Black Persians in History
You would think that if you hear the name Persian, you would assume that they came from Persia (present-day Iran). While that is the most popular theory, the truth is that the exact origins aren’t known.
Persian cats are also thought to be the result of breeding Turkish Angoras and other long-haired cats. The modern-day version of the Persian cat began to be established in the 1800s. But recently, research has found that modern-day Persian cats are more genetically related to Western European cat breeds, such as British Shorthairs and Chartreux, which makes sense when you look at their similar facial structure.
Black has always been one of the standard colors of Persians. It isn’t its own particular breed, but rather just a color scheme in the Persian’s versatile lineup.
How Persians Gained Popularity
It is thought that Persian cats eventually made their way to Europe through the spice trade in spice caravans. And what better way to gain popularity than to be favored by the queen? That’s right! Queen Victoria favored the Persian, giving way to its increasing popularity over the years. The breed has encountered decreases in population at certain points throughout history, but they’ve always maintained fairly decent prevalence.
Today, many cat lovers welcome Persians into their homes. Other people go gaga for these kitties, and they’re taking the internet by storm. Since they are ranked in the top 5 most popular cat breeds, you can imagine how abundant the breed is today.
Image Credit: Yardfon Tipbumrung, Shutterstock
Formal Recognition of Black Persian
The Cat Fanciers’ Association was the first to formally recognize this ancient breed in 1906. Since then, the Persian has made the registry with a list of criteria for the breed standard. The International Cat Association (TICA) also recognizes the breed, as do other prominent cat organizations.
The Top 5 Unique Facts About Persian Cats
Persians are terrific for several reasons—no matter the color. These cats are one of the oldest breeds in kitty history, so it’s no wonder they have so many interesting facts! Here we go!
1. Persians are brachycephalic.
One of the things you like most about the Persian is likely their interesting appearance. On top of having a beautiful long coat, Persians also have slightly pushed-in noses. This gives the Pug-nose appearance people adore, but it means that they are brachycephalic.
Unfortunately, this may lead to these cats having breathing issues associated with the breed itself. It might even put a cat at a greater risk for other health issues.
So, even though it’s not necessarily positive, it is certainly a characteristic of the breed that most people adore.
Image Credit: Maheshprasad K R, Shutterstock
2. Persians are stars on the set.
While the color black doesn’t really lend to any specific star Persian on TV, many Persians in general have made their appearance in movies and TV. A gray Persian played the role of Duchess in the hit movie Babe. The new hit movie Lyle, Lyle Crocodile also features a beautiful silver Persian named Loretta.
But that’s not all! There are several other Persian cats that have been in films throughout history.
3. Persians can have health issues attributed to their appearance.
As mentioned previously, Persians are prone to several health issues. A study showed that 64.9% of Persian cats had at least one health issue. Kidney disease was the most common cause of death, while a coat disorder was the most common specific issue. Dental problems were also common. Persian cats can also suffer from breathing and eye problems due to their facial shape.
Image Credit: Eric Isselee, Shutterstock
4. Persian cats are very chill.
One of the things that many people seem to love about the Persian breed is their easy-going, relaxed nature. These cats tend to be extremely agreeable and get along with all sorts of creatures, like dogs and animals of their same size. These cats tend to be extremely good with children and make awesome pets for seniors, since they are so easy to make happy.
5. Persians require extensive grooming.
A Persian is not the kind of cat you can have if you expect them to take care of all of their grooming needs a hundred percent of the time. In fact, in order for your Persian to stay mat-free, they will require regular brushing.
Does a Persian Make a Good Pet?
A Persian can make an absolutely extraordinary pet! If you’re a cat lover, you can appreciate their wonderful nature and enjoy brushing their long coats to avoid having shed hair all over your things!
These cats are wonderful additions to bring to virtually any situation. They make great apartment cats, companions for multi-pet situations, and they can make one heck of a good emotional support animal.
If you are thinking about getting a Persian cat, you can find them from local breeders or rescues and shelters. Because this is a decently popular purebred cat, you shouldn’t have a lot of trouble locating one in your state. Definitely look around for different options and don’t be afraid to check to see if kitty needs a second chance at a beautiful life.
Conclusion
Now you understand a little bit more about the black Persian. You know that coat color does not determine anything about personality and it is up to the individual breed to display the traits. Black is among the most beautiful of all Persian colors, and relatively rare to find.
If you want a black Persian in particular, you can reach out to a local reputable breeder to see availability of upcoming kittens. Remember, purebreds end up in shelters too! You can always check local rescues and shelters, or sites like Petfinder, to find the cat of your dreams.
Japanese shipping major Mitsui O.S.K. Lines, Ltd’s group company, Daibiru Corporation, has forayed into India’s real estate business with an investment of $123.5 million to join the Atrium Place Project, an office building development project near Delhi. This will be along with Hines, a global real estate investment, development, management, and operation company. This will be through Daibiru Hines Trust, which was established in Gujarat International Finance Tec-City (GIFT City).
As part of its expansion plan in India, Daibiru is actively pursuing more investment opportunities in India, including in cities like Mumbai and Bengaluru, in addition to Delhi/Gurugram. Daibiru will also continue to actively invest overseas by leveraging the global network of Mitsui O.S.K. Lines, Ltd., its 100 per cent shareholder, according to the company statement.
The project, Daibiru’s first in India, involves the construction of four A+ grade office buildings with a leased floor area of about 3 million sq ft and a parking lot on 11.76 acres of land in the Central Business District of Gurugram, near Delhi. Construction is underway, and the building is scheduled to be completed in 2025, according to a release from the shipping major.
In the “BLUE ACTION 2035”management plan launched in March 2023, the MOL Group is working to diversify its business portfolio by increasing the weight of non-shipping, stable revenue businesses that counter-balance the volatile shipping market. The group is also following a regional strategy as a key to driving overseas investment, including business development in emerging countries with promising economic growth prospects, drawing upon its overseas network. India, with its promising economic growth prospects, is a key pillar of the MOL Group’s strategy. This investment follows other recent major investments, such as the formation of a rapidly growing shipping business through MOL India.
Daibiru possesses 100-plus years of expertise in the office building business in Japan, and has participated in overseas building development projects in Vietnam and Australia Daibiru and MOL’s regional organizations, which develop businesses globally, will continue to cooperate and proactively engage in real property business overseas.
The investment takes advantage of the new investment platform created by the Government of India through GIFT City, which offers regulatory, tax and other benefits, the release said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
OBOŽAVATELJI Melanie Martinez izrazili su nezadovoljstvo zbog visoke cijene njezinih mirisnih svijeća koje su izdane u sklopu promocije njezinog albuma “Portals” iz 2023. godine. Svijeće su postale predmetom rasprave na društvenim mrežama nakon što su obožavatelji saznali da svaka svijeća košta 75 dolara (70 eura).
Jedan od glavnih kritičara bila je tiktokerica @grecias0fi, koja je u viralnom videu s više od 470.000 pregleda nazvala svijeće “potpunom prevarom”. U svom videu ona je izrazila razočaranje nakon što je saznala da svijeće imaju običan dizajn u obliku jaja, umjesto umjetničkog ili unikatnog dizajna koji bi možda opravdao visoku cijenu.
Web-stranica privremeno je nedostupna
Rasprava je odjeknula na platformama poput Reddita i TikToka, gdje su se obožavatelji također osvrnuli na ranije poslovne poteze Melanie Martinez, uključujući neuspješno financiranje i prikazivanje njezinog filma “K-12”, koji je navodno izgubio milijune dolara.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Kada je lansirala svijeće, brzo su se rasprodale. Sada je njezina web-stranica privremeno nedostupna, s obaviješću da će uskoro biti ponovno dostupna. Jedan korisnik na TikToku je napisao: “Vjerujem da ili obnavljaju zalihe ili možda mijenjaju cijene jer se web-stranica trenutno sređuje. Nadamo se promjeni cijena.”
Tiktokerica @marcellagflowers, koja isto pravi svoje svijeće, također se uključila u raspravu, objašnjavajući da bi troškovi materijala i izrade svijeća takve veličine mogli biti znatno niži od prodajne cijene od 75 dolara (70 eura).
Ovo nije prvi put da se njezini fanovi žale na cijene
Ovo nije prvi put da je Martinez izazvala negodovanje zbog cijena svojih proizvoda. Ranije je izazvala kritike fanova na platformama kao što je Reddit zbog visoke cijene seta parfema iz kolekcije “Portals”. Njezina kolekcija parfema Portals, objavljena prošle godine, koštala je 275 dolara (256 eura) za set od četiri mirisa od 15 ml.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Lakers guard D’Angelo Russell, an oft-mentioned player in trade talks, has decided to opt into the final year of his contract, according to people with knowledge of the decision not authorized to speak publicly. The deal is worth $18.7 million.
Russell averaged 18 points and 6.3 assists on 45.6% shooting from the field and 41.5% from three-point range. His 226 made threes last season was a franchise record.
Friday was “D’Angelo Russell Day” in Louisville, Ky. in recognition of his philanthropy in his hometown.
Russell‘s name has been part of trade rumors during most of his time back with the Lakers after uneven postseason performances.
Russell, 28, and Christian Wood aren’t the only Lakers who are exercising their player options. According to the Athletic, Jaxson Hayes is opting in to his deal. Cam Reddish and LeBron James have until Saturday to make decisions on their options.
The decisions have left the Lakers with a close-to-full roster heading into free agency. The team added four players during the NBA draft, including two on two-way deals. The Lakers have been expected to re-sign restricted free agent Max Christie, 21, who is said to have interest from rival teams, though the Lakers can match any offer he receives.
The Lakers’ roster crunch could lead them to explore trades in an effort to both improve and unclutter the roster heading into JJ Redick’s first season as coach.
The Lakers originally picked Russell second overall in the 2015 NBA draft. The team traded him to Brooklyn, then reacquired him from Minnesota in 2021 at the trade deadline in the Russell Westbrook deal.
Google Translate Languages Available: Google Translate has announced its largest expansion as it has added 110 new languages. The good thing is that out of 110, 7 are Indian languages.
“Now, we’re using AI to expand the variety of languages we support. Thanks to our PaLM 2 large language model, we’re rolling out 110 new languages to Google Translate, our largest expansion ever,” it said in a blog post.
Earlier in 2022, the company added 24 new languages using Zero-Shot Machine Translation. It has already announced the 1,000 Languages Initiative, under which it will build AI models that will support the 1,000 most spoken languages around the world.
From Cantonese to Qʼeqchiʼ, these new languages represent more than 614 million speakers, opening up translations for around 8% of the world’s population.
The list includes 7 new Indian languages – Awadhi, Bodo, Khasi, Kokborok, Marwadi, Santali, and Tulu.
Japan has never seen so many tourists flood into the country so quickly. The yen’s historic collapse, meaning a cheaper traveling experience for those with tourist dollars to spend, coupled with the post-pandemic surge in global tourism, has sparked interest in the nation like never before. More than 14.5 million people arrived in the country in the first five months of this year, according to the Japan National Tourism Organization’s latest figures. That’s 70% up on the same period last year, and on track to beat 2019’s record 31 million visitors.
Japan is experiencing an unprecedented tourism boom, fueled by a historic yen collapse and a surge in global travel. (Unsplash)
The island nation — famed for its dining, cleanliness and mix of futuristic and traditional experiences — currently feels more like a low-cost travel haven than one of the world’s most advanced economies, thanks to extraordinary currency exchange rates. The yen has been stuck at a three-decade low in recent months, making everything from an omakase sushi lunch to premium A5 wagyu steak much more affordable.
Here are six charts to unpack Japan’s unprecedented travel boom:
Lasting momentum
Japan welcomed more than 3 million visitors for a third straight month in May, with the majority coming from South Korea, China and Taiwan. More than a million Americans made the long-haul trip from the US in the first five months of the year — a 50% jump on the same period in 2019. Tourist numbers from 19 markets — including all Group of Seven nations — this year broke their records for May. Chinese tourists have lagged their global counterparts since the beginning of the year, although the gap is closing. Japan has proved to be the top pick for Chinese tourists this summer.
Based on a Bloomberg Intelligence analysis, Japan is set to receive a record 34 million visitors this year, beating by a year a government target for exceeding 2019 visitor numbers. Prime Minister Fumio Kishida has stuck by a longer-term goal of 60 million inbound visitors a year by 2030. In contrast, a lack of overseas purchasing power has discouraged Japanese travelers, and the number heading abroad has still only reached about 60% of its pre-Covid peak.
Spending surge
As the number of visitors increases, so too does the amount of cash they’re spending on their travels. The tourist dollar is going that much further thanks to the weak yen, which has slumped to the lowest level since 1986, and people haven’t been afraid of opening their wallets to snap up bargains from hotels and luxury goods to theme park trips.
Tourists spent a record ¥1.75 trillion in the first quarter of the year, and that figure is likely to surge as the number of Chinese visitors rises. They spend twice as much as the average tourist, according to the Japan Tourism Agency.
Hotel prices
Hotel prices in Japan are rising, but they’re still cheaper than their global peers. The weak yen and the hugely popular cherry blossom season lifted national hotel prices to a near-three decade high in March. The average daily room rate was about ¥20,986 ($136), the highest level since 1997, according to CoStar Group
While Tokyo’s rate was higher, sitting at an average of $177 for the year ending March 2024, the city was a bargain compared to the likes of New York, where the average room cost more than $300 a night, or Singapore, where rates exceeded $250.
Flight demand
More tourists means more transport. Some 37 million flights are scheduled to take off globally this year, according to industry data compiled by BloombergNEF. And a million of those are expected to have landed in Japan by the end of 2024. That’s not been all good news for Japan, with the spiraling number of tourists putting a major strain on local transport and infrastructure.
So, if you’re planning a trip soon, you’re certainly unlikely to be alone. But if you’re hunting for a bargain it could be the perfect moment to take that trip of a lifetime.
From drug overdoses and a raging gunman to a mammoth backlash over headlining acts and backstage civil wars, Glastonbury Festival has had an at times colourful and chaotic history. The first Glastonbury ever to take place was back in 1970, just a day after Jimi Hendrix died.
Back then, it was called The Pilton Pop, Folk and Blues Festival, carrying a minuscule admission fee of just £1, while camping – and milk – were both completely free. A far cry from today’s ticket prices, which have had thousands of fans vocally fuming, the bargain deals quickly gained popularity, and the festival was renamed the Glastonbury Fayre the following year.
The date was changed to coincide with summer solstice, so that visitors to nearby Stonehenge could also attend the festival – and performers like David Bowie stole the show. Over the years, it became heavily involved with political causes, with proceeds in 1981 going towards the Campaign for Nuclear Disarmament – but Glastonbury was also battling to continue due to interference from the local council.
It successfully defended five prosecutions in 1984 alone – but no sooner than council tensions were resolved, there was a furious clash with on-site travellers, leading to petrol bombs being thrown. The horrifying scenes involved new age travellers who’d reportedly been told they could camp on the site for free coming to blows with security over scavenging festival-goers’ left-overs.
Then in 1994 – the year that Oasis, Blur and Pulp all made their festival debuts – the Britpop explosion was marred by an ugly shoot-out. The Pyramid Stage had burnt down, prompting a last-minute replacement, followed by a man with a pistol volleying bullets at the stage.
Five people were injured, and founder Michael Eavis made the admission that, despite the previous petrol bombs of 1990, “there has been more violence this year than we’ve ever had before”.
However, he vowed: “I’m not going to stop the show because there’s one crazy guy with a pistol” – and the celebrations continued.
That year also saw tragedy when a 23-year-old drug overdose victim became the first person ever to die during the festival.
Peace followed for a while, but then the traditionally rock heavy festival descended into civil war in 2008 when it was announced that rapper Jay-Z was headlining.
Oasis star Noel Gallagher fought back, declaring that hip-hop didn’t belong at the festival, only to be enraged when Jay made his entrance by breaking into a rendition of Oasis’s ‘Wonderwall’.
The set opened with Noel’s voice adamantly stating: “Jay Z headlining Glastonbury? No f*****g chance”, while an estimated 150,000 revellers sang ‘Wonderwall’ along with Jay.
While the argument back then centred around diversity of musical genres, by 2023, it had switched to gender wars, with some complaining that there weren’t nearly enough females high up on the bill.
Past female acts such as Beyonce, Adele, Florence and the Machine and Billie Eilish have gone down a storm, and co-organiser Emily Eavis vowed to get on board with trying to change the gender ratio to include more females.
Some fans have been hoping Taylor Swift might headline in 2025 – but for the time-being, according to BetVictorCasino, the 2024 line-up has been declared the worst in the festival’s 54-year history.
A poll of 2,000 music fans saw 61% vote 2024 as the year with the worst line-up, while 73% argued the festival has become too pop-focused in recent years.
Another huge bug bear has been ticket prices, amid a cost of living crisis, with fees now soaring to 360% more than the original 1970 costs.
Mazda Australia is expanding its SUV range later this year to include a new pair of new large SUVs.
That will make Australia the only market to offer all four vehicles on the brand’s rear/all-wheel drive Large Architecture.
The two-row CX-60, aimed at markets like Europe and Japan, was launched here last year, followed by the three-row CX-90 developed for markets like North America.
They’ll be joined before the end of the year by the CX-70, a two-row companion to the CX-90; and the CX-80, a stretched, three-row version of the CX-60.
Mazda Australia has only released limited information on the local-market CX-70 and CX-80. There’s no pricing yet, while we only know a handful of specification details.
Even with the CX-9 gone and the CX-8 in runout, Mazda’s local SUV range will still be larger than it was 12 months ago.
You may be confused as to just how these similarly sized, styled and named SUVs sit alongside each other. We’ve therefore assembled available technical specifications to help you make sense of Mazda’s new range of more premium SUVs.
Pricing
Mazda Australia has yet to confirm pricing for the CX-70 and CX-80, but CX-60 and CX-90 pricing is below:
CX-60
The CX-60 range opens at $60,550 before on-road costs for the petrol-powered Evolve, topping out at $88,800 before on-road costs for the plug-in hybrid Azami when equipped with either the SP or Takumi packages.
Model
Price
CX-60 G40E Evolve
$60,550
CX-60 D50E Evolve
$62,550
CX-60 P50E Evolve
$73,600
CX-60 G40E GT
$68,550
CX-60 D50E GT
$70,550
CX-60 P50E GT
$81,600
CX-60 G40E Azami
$73,750
CX-60 D50E Azami
$75,750
CX-60 P50E Azami
$86,800
All prices exclude on-road costs.
An available Vision package adds $2000 to the price of Evolve and GT variants, while SP and Takumi packages add $2000 to the price of the top-spec Azami.
CX-90
The CX-90 range opens at $74,550 before on-road costs for the petrol Touring, topping out at $101,130 before on-roads for the petrol Azami when equipped with either the SP or Takumi packages.
Model
Price
CX-90 G50E Touring
$74,550
CX-90 D50E Touring
$76,550
CX-90 G50E GT
$85,530
CX-90 D50E GT
$85,550
CX-90 G50E Azami
$94,630
CX-90 D50E Azami
$93,515
CX-90 G50E Azami SP/Takumi
$101,130
CX-90 D50E Azami SP/Takumi
$100,015
All prices exclude on-road costs.
Dimensions
The CX-60 and CX-80 share the same width, while all bar the CX-60 ride the same 3120mm wheelbase.
CX-60
CX-70
CX-80
CX-90
Length
4740mm
5100mm
4995mm
5120mm
Width (excl. mirrors)
1890mm
–
1890mm
1994mm
Width (incl. mirrors)
2134mm
2157mm
2134mm
2157mm
Height
1675-1680mm
1736mm
1710mm
1745mm
Wheelbase
2870mm
3120mm
3120mm
3120mm
Ground clearance
176-182mm
204-206mm
165-170mm
203-206mm
Powertrains
All vehicles on the rear/all-wheel drive Large Architecture feature an eight-speed automatic transmission and either a mild- or plug-in hybrid system.
Thus far, all models in this family introduced to Australia have come here exclusively with rear-biased all-wheel drive, though rear-wheel drive CX-60s are available in some markets.
CX-60
Petrol
Diesel
PHEV
Engine
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
2.5L four-cylinder PHEV
Engine power
209kW @ 5000-6000rpm
187kW @ 3750rpm
138kW @ 6000rpm
Engine torque
450Nm @ 2000-3500rpm
550Nm @ 1500-2400rpm
250Nm @ 4000rpm
Electric motor power
12kW
12kW
129kW
Electric motor torque
153Nm
153Nm
270Nm
Total system power
–
–
241kW @ 6000rpm
Total system torque
–
–
500Nm @ 5000rpm
Battery
0.33kWh li-ion
0.33kWh li-ion
17.8kWh li-ion
Fuel economy (combined)
7.4L/100km
4.9L/100km
2.1L/100km
Fuel type
91 octane regular unleaded
Diesel
95 octane premium unleaded
Braked towing capacity
2500kg
2000kg
2500kg
CX-70
While Mazda Australia hasn’t released full specifications for the local-market CX-70, it has confirmed it will offer 3.3-litre turbocharged e-Skyactiv inline six-cylinder petrol and diesel engines.
The plug-in hybrid offered in North America has yet to be confirmed, though we’re getting the diesel engine that that market misses out on. It’s likely to be the same tune as the CX-90 detailed further below.
The CX-70 is currently offered in North America with the following powertrains:
Petrol
High Output petrol
PHEV
Engine
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
2.5L four-cylinder PHEV
Engine power
209kW @ 5000-6000rpm
254kW @ 5000-6000rpm
141kW at 6000rpm
Engine torque
450Nm @ 2000-3500rpm
500Nm @ 2000-4500rpm
260Nm at 4000rpm
Electric motor power
12kW
12kW
129kW
Electric motor torque
153Nm
153Nm
270Nm
Total system power
–
–
241kW at 6000rpm
Total system torque
–
–
500Nm at 4000rpm
Battery capacity
0.33kWh li-ion
0.33kWh li-ion
17.8kWh li-ion
CX-80
The CX-80 will be offered here with a choice of petrol, diesel and plug-in hybrid powertrains.
As with the CX-70, Mazda Australia hasn’t released complete local specifications, leaving us to look at the European-market CX-80 in this case to fill in some gaps.
A petrol-powered CX-80 isn’t offered in Europe, but it seems likely the petrol model here will use the same powertrain as the CX-60 detailed above.
Diesel
PHEV
Engine
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
2.5L four-cylinder PHEV
Engine power
187kW
141kW
Engine torque
550Nm
260Nm
Electric motor power
12kW
129kW
Electric motor torque
153Nm
270Nm
Total system power
–
241kW
Total system torque
–
500Nm
Electric range
–
60km
CX-90
The CX-90 is also offered with the same PHEV powertrain as the CX-70.
Mazda Australia has yet to announce launch timing for the PHEV powertrain, but intends to offer it here.
Australian-market CX-90 specifications are below:
Petrol
Diesel
Engine
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
3.3L inline-six 48V mild-hybrid
Engine power
254kW @ 5000-6000rpm
187kW @ 3750rpm
Engine torque
500Nm @ 2000-4500rpm
550Nm @ 1500-2400rpm
Fuel economy (combined)
8.2L/100km
5.4L/100km
Fuel type
95 octane premium unleaded
Diesel
Braked towing capacity
2500kg
2000kg
MORE: Everything Mazda CX-60 • CX-70 • CX-80 • CX-90 MORE: 2025 Mazda CX-70: Australian timing confirmed for new large SUV MORE: 2025 Mazda CX-80 revealed, Australian timing confirmed
With the gaming and blockchain communities brimming with anticipation, DigiHorse Empires is set to launch the presale of its $DIGI token, marking a pivotal opportunity for early adopters to engage with a platform that’s poised to revolutionize Web3 gaming in 2024.
Market Trends
Pepe and Floki: These meme coins have rebounded impressively from recent market downturns, demonstrating strong price action that underscores the high volatility and potential returns of innovative digital assets. Over the past week, Pepe’s price increased from a low of $0.0023 to $0.0035, while Floki surged from $0.000011 to $0.000018.
Bitcoin Dominance and Altcoin Potential: Recently, Bitcoin dominance has shown notable fluctuations, which often signal impending significant movements in the altcoin market. As Bitcoin’s relative market share adjusts, altcoins appear to be gearing up for a monumental push to the upside. This trend suggests a shift in investor interest towards more speculative, yet potentially lucrative, digital assets within the GameFi and broader Web3 sectors.
This transition is evident as whale money moves from traditional meme coins to engaging presales in the Web3 gaming sector. With its state-of-the-art approach, DigiHorse Empires stands out as one of the most eagerly awaited presale launches of 2024.
DigiHorse Features
– AI-Powered Customization: Equip your horses with AI-powered NFT wearables that enhance their natural attributes and provide unique aesthetic enhancements for competitive races.
– Profitable Gaming: Innovative play-to-earn ecosystem where every digital asset holds tangible value, enabling significant earnings through gameplay.
– Vibrant Marketplace: Dynamic NFT marketplace filled with items that not only improve performance but also offer considerable trading opportunities.
Presale Details
Structured in 10 stages, the presale aims to progressively increase token prices, incentivizing early participation and rewarding early investors with returns expected to exceed 2000% by time of listing.
Innovative Referral Program
DigiHorse Empires is launching an innovative referral program designed for fairness and inclusivity. This program allows participants to earn DigiHorse tokens and other prizes without investing capital. By referring friends and family, participants can win rewards, enabling less affluent investors to share in the gains. This approach ensures everyone has a chance to benefit from the exciting opportunities offered by DigiHorse Empires.
How To Participate
By visiting the DigiHorse website, investors can secure their early involvement in one of 2024’s most promising GameFi launches.
Conclusion
DigiHorse Empires is not just setting the stage for a game but is emerging as a major investment opportunity in the future of GameFi. With robust community support and a strategic vision, DigiHorse is preparing to be one of the significant presale events in the Web3 gaming space next year.
For more details and to participate in the presale, please visit:
Gold Rate Today: Check gold prices today in different cities on June 29, 2024
Gold Rate Today In India: On June 29, the price of 10 grams of gold was approximately Rs 72,300. Pure 24-carat gold rose to Rs 72,280 per 10 grams, while 22-carat gold was priced at Rs 66,250 per 10 grams. At the same time, the price of silver dropped to Rs 90,000 per kilogram.
Gold rate today in India: Retail gold price on June 29
Check gold rates today in different cities on June 29, 2024; (In Rs/10 grams)
City
22 Carat Gold Price
24-Carat Gold Price
Delhi
66,400
72,420
Mumbai
66,250
72,280
Ahmedabad
66,300
72,320
Chennai
66,850
72,930
Kolkata
66,250
72,280
Gurugram
66,400
72,420
Lucknow
66,400
72,420
Bengaluru
66,250
72,280
Jaipur
66,400
72,420
Patna
66,300
72,320
Bhubaneshwar
65,250
72,280
Hyderabad
66,250
72,280
Multi Commodity Exchange
The Multi Commodity Exchange (MCX) remains closed on Saturdays and Sundays.
India’s reliance on imported gold largely influences domestic prices, which closely mirror global trends. Additionally, the cultural importance of gold in India, particularly during festivals and weddings, can impact demand levels.
Retail Cost of Gold
The retail price of gold in India, which represents the final cost per unit weight for consumers, is influenced by various factors beyond the metal’s intrinsic value.
Gold carries significant cultural importance in India, acting as a major investment and playing a crucial role in traditional weddings and festivals.
Amid continuous market fluctuations, investors and traders closely watch these dynamics. Stay tuned for further updates on this evolving story.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
Even though the controversy over paper leaks continues, the National Testing Agency (NTA)) has announced revised dates for conduct of UGC – NET, Joint CSIR – UGC NET and NCET 2024. All three exams will be computer based.
The UGC – NET, cancelled a day after it was held on June 18 following a paper leak, will be conducted afresh from August 21 – September 4. This will be the June exam. There are two UGC – NET exams conducted during the year – one in June and another in December – for assistant professors and junior research fellows.
Also read: Opposition insists on discussion on NEET exam scandal, Parliament adjourned for the day
The Joint CSIR – UGC NET – postponed as a pre-emptive measure — will be held from July 25 to July 27; while the previously postponed National Common Entrance Test (NCET) will take place on July 10.
The CSIR UGC – NET is accepted for PhD admissions in Chemical Sciences, Earth, Atmospheric, Ocean and Planetary Sciences, Life Sciences, Mathematical Sciences and Physical Sciences.
The NCET is for a four-year integrated teacher education program. It too was postponed as a pre-emptive measure in view of paper leak allegations.
Sixteen years ago American stockmarkets reached their modern nadir. During the early 2000s European and emerging-market equities went on a bull run. By March 2008 America had entered recession and its financial crisis was under way. The country’s stocks accounted for less than 40% of the world’s total stockmarket capitalisation.
Fast-forward to today and things look rather different. America’s share of the world’s stockmarket capitalisation has climbed pretty consistently over the past decade and a half, and sharply this year. It now stands at 61%. That is astonishing dominance for a country which accounts for just over a quarter of global GDP. The extent of market concentration is all the more extreme given what is happening within the American stockmarket itself. Just three companies—Apple, Microsoft and Nvidia—make up a tenth of the market value of global stocks.
What is the best internet provider in Hayward, California?
AT&T Fiber is the best internet provider in Hayward, offering the fastest internet speeds and best value. AT&T Fiber doesn’t have equipment fees or data caps, and your price won’t automatically go up after a promotional period ends. That’s why the internet provider has the best customer satisfaction scores in the country.
If you’re looking for the cheapest internet plans, Xfinity is the cheapest internet service provider in Hayward. You’d be hard-pressed to find internet plans cheaper than Xfinity’s $20 monthly plan for 150 megabits per second. That said, Xfinity increases prices on all of its plans after one or two years (or both).
Another good option in Hayward is wireless internet. T-Mobile and Verizon offer wireless home internet service in the city, and you can get significant discounts by bundling with one of their cell phone plans.
Best internet in Hayward, California
Hayward internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Read full review
DSL
$55
Up to 140Mbps
None
1.5TB on some plans
None
7.4
RobinsonHSS
Fixed wireless
$25-$55
10-100Mbps
None
None
None
N/A
Starlink Read full review
Satellite
$120
25-220Mbps
$499 upfront
None
None
6.5
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($40-$50 with mobile plans)
72-245Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Tekify
Fixed wireless
$65
100-400Mbps
None
None
One year
N/A
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 for eligible Verizon Wireless customers)
100-300Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Xfinity Read full review
Cable
$20-$120
150-2,000Mbps
$15 (included in most plans)
1.2TB (unlimited in most plans)
Optional
7
Show more (4 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Hayward?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
RobinsonHSS Basic
$25
10Mbps
None
Xfinity Connect Read full review
$20
150Mbps
$15 (optional)
Xfinity Connect More Read full review
$30
300Mbps
None
RobinsonHSS Medium
$40
20Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
100Mbps
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Unlimited Read full review
$50 ($40 with eligible mobile plans)
245Mbps
None
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Sundry Photography / Getty Images
How to find internet deals and promotions in Hayward
The best internet deals and top promotions in Hayward depend on what discounts are available during a given time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Hayward internet providers, such as Xfinity and Verizon 5G Home Internet, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, however, including AT&T Fiber, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
Fastest internet plans in Hayward
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Internet 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Internet 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit X2 Read full review
$120
2,000Mbps
200Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
Xfinity Gigabit Extra Read full review
$80
1,200Mbps
200Mbps
None
Cable
Xfinity Gigabit Read full review
$75
1,000Mbps
100Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines — and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics — browsing the internet, sending and receiving email, streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one person sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two people to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more people to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Hayward
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. So what’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
But it doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, though we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
Internet providers in Hayward FAQs
What is the best internet service provider in Hayward?
AT&T Fiber is the best internet service provider in Hayward, offering the fastest speeds by far. You’ll also get unlimited data and no equipment fees.
Is fiber internet available in Hayward?
Yes, fiber internet is available to 35% of Hayward households, according to FCC data. AT&T Fiber is the only fiber provider in the city.
What is the cheapest internet provider in Hayward?
Xfinity is the cheapest internet provider in Hayward, offering plans that start at just $20 a month for 150Mbps download speeds.
Which internet provider in Hayward offers the fastest plan?
AT&T Fiber offers the fastest internet plan in Hayward, with upload and download speeds up to 5,000Mbps.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Mothers might know best, but it’s not always easy to separate fact from fiction when it comes to health advice.
A new report from University of California San Francisco (UCSF) Health has broken down several common wellness myths that children often hear while growing up.
Fox News Digital spoke with experts who revealed the truth behind common medical misconceptions.
PSYCHOLOGISTS REVEAL 7 WAYS PARENTS CAN DRIVE HAPPINESS BY HELPING KIDS FIND THEIR PURPOSE
Here are five.
Myth 1. Ginger ale relieves stomach aches
While actual ginger can help ease a stomach ache, most commercial ginger ales don’t actually contain the real thing, Michelle Jaelin, a registered dietitian practicing in Ontario, Canada, told Fox News Digital.
A new report from University of California San Francisco (UCSF) Health reveals the truth about several common wellness myths that children often hear while growing up.(iStock)
This childhood myth persists as parents give ginger ale to children because it’s sweet and bubbly, she said.
“It makes parents feel better that they are doing something for their child when they aren’t feeling well, and the myth persisted as a drink that helps a stomach ache,” Jaelin said.
The carbonated beverages could actually make the stomach pain even worse by increasing gas in the digestive tract, according to Healthline’s website.
Chicken soup has been viewed as a popular cold remedy since at least the 12th century, according to the National Institutes of Health (NIH).(iStock)
Drinks with real ginger also tend to contain excess added sugar, experts said – essentially the equivalent of soda that may worsen stomach pain.
Myth 2. Gum stays in your stomach for seven years
“Swallowed gum does not stay in your stomach for [seven] years, as the myths suggest,” Su-Nui Escobar, a registered dietitian based in Miami, Florida, told Fox News Digital.
“While swallowing gum is not recommended, if you do so accidentally, you will likely pass it like any other indigestible food.”
ASK A DOCTOR: ‘IS IT DANGEROUS TO SWALLOW GUM?’
The gum will pass through the stomach within two hours and be excreted in the stool after approximately two to five days, just like other foods, according to the recent UCSF report.
Although chewing gum can stick to many surfaces — including walls or desks — it travels mostly intact through the gastrointestinal tract without sticking to the intestinal walls, the report notes.
“Swallowed gum does not stay in your stomach for [seven] years, as the myths suggest,” an expert told Fox News Digital.(iStock)
But experts still caution against children swallowing gum, because substantial amounts might cause an intestinal blockage, Escobar warned.
This is a particular concern among children who have underlying constipation, according to Mayo Clinic’s website.
“If you suspect a blockage, seek immediate medical attention,” Escobar advised.
Myth 3. You shouldn’t swim for 30 minutes after eating
As summer kicks into high gear, there is good news for any swimmer itching to get in the water after lunch. Yes, it is usually OK to swim right after you eat.
The myth that you shouldn’t swim immediately after eating stems from a theoretical concern that blood flow will be diverted away from the arms and legs to help digest food, potentially leading to an increased risk of drowning.
“Based on current research, eating before swimming is not affiliated with a risk of drowning, and can be dismissed as a myth.”
But a comprehensive American Red Cross scientific review on the effects of eating before swimming showed no effect on performance in the water after a meal.
“A recent literature review did not provide any information related to an increased risk of drowning due to consuming food before swimming,” Jodi Jensen, PhD, member of the American Red Cross Scientific Advisory Council in Virginia, told Fox News Digital.
AS DROWNING DEATHS INCREASE, EXPERTS OFFER WATER SAFETY TIPS
“There is no supporting evidence from a major medical or safety organization that recommends refraining from eating before engaging in aquatic activities such as swimming,” added Jensen, who is also an assistant professor and aquatics director at Hampton University in Hampton, Virginia.
“There is no supporting evidence from a major medical or safety organization that recommends refraining from eating before engaging in aquatic activities such as swimming,” an expert told Fox News Digital.(iStock)
“Based on current research, eating before swimming is not affiliated with a risk of drowning, and can be dismissed as a myth.”
Although study participants experienced “minimal” side effects at different time intervals after eating, some outside experts do recommend waiting a bit after a meal if you plan to swim laps or compete to avoid any stomach cramping or digestive issues.
Myth 4. Chicken soup cures a cold
Chicken soup has been viewed as a popular cold remedy since at least the 12th century, according to the National Institutes of Health (NIH).
ASK A DOCTOR: ‘DOES CHICKEN SOUP REALLY HELP CURE A COLD?’
“Chicken soup is warm and comforting when you’re sick, but it’s not a cure,” Jaelin told Fox News Digital.
“Chicken soup is warm and comforting when you’re sick, but it’s not a cure.”
“Drinking any hot broth when your sinuses are stuffed can help to clear them out.”
The steam from the chicken broth may relieve a sore throat and congested sinuses, the NIH noted.
When battling a cold, get plenty of clear fluids to help regulate body temperature and promote improved immune system function, said Jaelin.
“Chicken soup counts toward overall fluid intake,” she added.
It also helps prevent dehydration and clear out mucus, the NIH noted.
Myth 5. You will ruin your eyes if you sit too close to the TV
Sitting too close to the TV will not damage your eyes, though it may cause eye strain, according to the American Academy of Ophthalmology.
NEBRASKA BABY BORN WITH CATARACTS HAS 3 EYE SURGERIES TO SAVE HER SIGHT: ‘I JUST KEPT PRAYING’
To prevent eye strain while watching television, experts recommend keeping the room well-lit and taking occasional breaks from the screen.
Sitting too close to the television will not damage your eyes, but may cause eye strain, according to the American Academy of Ophthalmology.(iStock)
“Children can focus at very close distances better than adults, and may not develop the same eye strain symptoms,” Nishika Reddy, M.D., assistant professor of ophthalmology at Moran Eye Center’s Midvalley Health Center at University of Utah in Murray, Utah, told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
It may be a red flag, though, if children are watching television too closely, experts warned.
The behavior may indicate an underlying vision issue that should be addressed, the UCSF report noted.
The American Academy of Pediatrics says high-quality digital media can be introduced to children between 18 and 24 months of age (only when supervised by parents or caregivers). The academy also recommends limiting screen time to one hour a day for children ages 2 to 5.(iStock)
“See an eye care provider to perform an eye exam for your child,” Reddy recommended.
A more concerning issue is the indirect effect of too much screen time, according to the report.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Although experts say there is no one-size-fits-all guideline when it comes to children and screen time, the American Academy of Pediatrics says high-quality digital media can be introduced to children between 18 and 24 months of age (only when supervised by parents or caregivers).
The academy also recommends limiting screen time to one hour a day for children ages 2 to 5.
Fox News Digital reached out to UCSF for additional comment about its new study.
College life is hectic. Whether it’s assignments, project submissions, or research deadlines, there’s always something demanding your attention. Amidst such a busy schedule, finding time to cook a meal that’s not only delicious but also quick and easy seems nearly impossible. But what if we told you that with a few simple tips and tricks, you could enhance your culinary skills and make the most out of your university days? Here are 10 food and kitchen hacks that will help you save money and still enjoy wholesome, delicious meals.
Here Are 10 Life-Saving Kitchen Hacks Every College Student Needs To Know:
Food Hacks
1. Microwave – Your Best Friend
Don’t just use your microwave to reheat leftovers. There’s a huge variety of simple, easy-to-make mug recipes you can whip up quickly, from eggs to mac n’ cheese and even pizza! Want a meal in minutes? Microwave it!
Microwave recipes are easier and quicker. (Photo: iStock)
Also Read: 9 Best Indian Microwave Recipes | Easy Microwave Recipes
2. One-Pot Meals
This is a lifesaver for busy students. Pasta, soups, or stir-fries—just throw all your ingredients into one pot and let it work its magic! This not only saves time but also spares you from extra dishes.
One-pot meals are comforting and saves time. (Photo: iStock)
3. Revamp the Ramen
Instant noodles are a staple for college students, but having them plain can get boring and unhealthy. Add lots of veggies, eggs, and meat to upgrade your noodles into a filling and satisfying meal.
Ramen is filling and satisfying. (Photo: iStock)
4. Smoothies
Need a quick and healthy breakfast? Smoothies are your answer! Blend a few frozen fruits with milk or yogurt for a super-filling and healthy option that saves precious morning time before classes.
Smoothies are a quick breakfast option. (Photo: iStock)
Also Read: Healthy Diet: 3 Delightful Smoothie Bowl Recipes For An ‘Insta-worthy’ Nutritious Meal
Kitchen Hacks
5. Label Everything
Organise your groceries and label everything. This helps you keep track of what you have and reduces food wastage by making sure you use pantry items before they go bad.
Use empty jars for storage and as food containers. This sustainable option can be used for storing fresh fruit juice, on-the-go salads, and much more.
Jars come in handy to store leftovers as well. (Photo: iStock)
7. DIY Spices
Make your own spice mixes like Italian seasoning or curry powder by combining individual spices. This saves time and money, and you can make them in advance.
Spice mix (Photo: iStock)
8. Tortillas and Breads
This versatile food item is a favourite for many! Customise your tortillas and use them in multiple ways—wraps, tacos, quesadillas, or even as a pizza base! Get creative with minimal effort.
Tortilla wrap (Photo: iStock)
Also Read: How to Make Corn Tortillas
With these food and kitchen hacks, you can manage your diet more efficiently and navigate college life on a budget with minimal resources. College is survivable, and even enjoyable, with a little culinary creativity!
But “it wasn’t the puppies that made us get back together,” Ms. Lal said. “It was spending that time together, talking and getting really vulnerable with each other.” Lives built around travel, Mr. Riglin said, “can sometimes keep things surface level.” In Bali, they went deep. By early June, the puppies had been adopted and they were a couple again.
This time, Mr. Riglin felt a sense of urgency. “I was like, we’re back together,” he said. “Let’s move this train forward.” On Aug. 31, at the Burning Man festival, he proposed. “The moment felt timeless,” Ms. Lal said.
On May 22, Ms. Lal and Mr. Riglin were married in their West Hollywood home by William Concoff, a Universal Life Church minister, with only their friend Masha Maltsava in attendance; family members watched via Zoom.
On June 17, they exchanged vows in front of 85 guests at Villa Balbiano, a resort in Lake Como, Italy, during an outdoor ceremony led by Ms. De Los Rios.
Binge more Vows columns here and read all our wedding, relationship and divorce coverage here.
To honor her central European heritage, Ms. Lal wore a custom taffeta wedding gown gifted by Milla Nova, a Ukrainian designer who keeps a store in Warsaw. The dress required a dozen workers, took 350 hours to craft and weighed 30 pounds. The designer gave it a name: “Her Majesty the Queen Aggie.” Mr. Riglin wore a black tuxedo by Zegna.
At the ceremony, under a handcrafted tree built to evoke a magical fairy tale, the couple read handwritten vows. “If you are down to travel the world, make babies, raise a family, jump out of planes, heal your inner child, buy dream homes all over the world and give back to the community, I am so down to be your wife,” Ms. Lal said.
The inclusion of Vaxelis in the CDC’s preferential recommendations is expected to influence vaccine administration strategies and public health policies in high-risk populations moving forward.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Hi, I’m Dr. Karyn! Read my introduction to learn more about me and meet my five hilarious cats: Clutch, Cyril, Alex, Zelda, and Zazzles.
Whether it’s a worming tablet, flea treatment, or a course of antibiotics, trying to medicate your cat is not always easy, and when I set out to create this guide, I thought I’d have the ideal model in my easygoing feline, Clutch. Boy, was I wrong! On the plus side, however, he did provide us with some great examples of how to cope with an uncooperative patient!
Some things I have learned about medicating cats, both my own, and my patients:
Trim claws first – at least if they do object, they’re doing it with short talons!
Make them feel comfortable and secure – choose a location they feel happy in and place a towel or non-slip mat underneath them.
Cats aren’t stupid – if the medication tastes awful, they won’t eat it in their food.
4 hands are better than 2 – if possible, get someone to help you.
Confident handling is essential – check out my previous post on How To Safely Restrain Your Cat for more tips and tricks.
Eye Drops
Zazzles being very cooperative for her eye drops
The trick with giving eye drops is to come from behind the head rather than front on – this is much less confrontational for your cat. Use the heel of the hand holding the drops to pull the lower eyelid down whilst using the other hand to steady the back of the head.
Clutch really let the team down on this one! He, like many cats, was not tolerant of eye drops at all. But, it gave me the chance to use the technique I developed for my Chihuahua, Ned. I use a tiny bit of cotton wool and wet it with the eye drops, enough to ensure that the drops will drip into the eye as I wipe the cotton wool over the eyelids. Clutch may not have loved this either, but it allows you to get the drops right into the eye rather than trying to ‘point and shoot’. Just be aware that you will go through your eye drops more quickly with this technique.
Spot-ons
Alex’s ginger fur is ‘spot-on’!
A lot of people get preoccupied with parting the fur and making sure they can see the skin before applying flea products. Yes, it is important that the product be applied to the skin, but as long as you get the nozzle through the fur to the skin, you can be quite sure it’s reaching the right place. You will always get some of the liquid on the fur, so be aware that this stuff can leave permanent oily marks on clothes, walls, and furniture!
Liquids and Pastes
Though I am loath to use towel wrapping on cats, Clutch once again proved to be the most difficult patient! Although he keeps his claws sheathed, he is very good at pushing me away and wriggling free, so he became our towel-demo boy.
When giving liquids and pastes to your cat, you need to tip the head back as far as you can, as this takes a lot of the strength away from the lower jaw. You need to direct the syringe towards the back of the tongue, but don’t shoot the liquid out too quickly.
Tablets
*Groan*
We all hate giving our cats tablets. Even the ones that claim to be palatable, rarely are. Here are my hot tips for giving tablets:
If they taste awful, food is probably not going to hide them, and crushing them into food will only make them reject a larger amount of food.
Hiding medication in food only works if the tablets are flavorless or not bitter.
Gelatine capsules (vegan alternatives are available) are a great way to turn multiple tablets into a single medication, and come in a range of different sizes.
If you need to get a tablet down your cat’s throat, you need to get it over the back of the tongue. I can guarantee that anything short of that will result in a failure, even if you don’t realize it at the time. Holding their mouth closed or rubbing their throat will just mean that the tablet that gets spat out later is more sticky.
Here’s The Real Tip
If you really struggle with medicating your cat, speak to your veterinary practice. You’ll be amazed at how helpful they can be, from showing you different ways to get those medications in, looking for alternative formulations, or even giving your cat the medication for you.
Don’t be shy – we’re here to help!
To see these tips in action – along with Clutch making me look foolish – check out the video.
State Industries Promotion Corporation of Tamil Nadu (SIPCOT) has formed a Special Purpose Vehicle – Tamil Nadu Industrial Housing Private Limited (TNIHPL) – and jointly with Tamil Nadu Infrastructure Fund Management Corporation (TNIFMC) aims to provide affordable and sustainable housing for industrial workers.
TNIHPL is developing an 807-bedded working women’s hostel in SIPCOT Industrial Park, Siruseri. According to the Tamil Nadu Industries, Investment Promotion and Commerce Department’s Policy Note 2023-24, it is also identifying suitable industrial housing projects across the state for development.
SIPCOT is also directly developing an Industrial Housing facility with 18,720 beds at a project cost of ₹706.50 crore at Vallam-Vadagal. The project is being implemented with a Government of India grant of ₹37.44 crore under the Affordable Rental Housing Complex (ARHC) Scheme and a term loan of ₹498 crore from the State Bank of India. Civil works are in progress and nearing completion, the note said.
Details of SIPCOT and its SPV establishing dedicated dormitory facilities at the following industrial parks:
Industrial Park
Estimated cost (in cr.)
No of beds
Perundurai (women)
7.91
222
Thoothukudi (women)
6.92
252
Shoolagiri (men and women)
49
1,495
Irungattukottai (men)
26.69
801
Cheyyar (men)
13.54
441
Also read: Delhi-NCR comes to a standstill after torrential rain
Earlier, SIPCOT has constructed three hostels – (i) Irungattukottai for women (330 persons), (ii) Sriperumbudur for men (400 persons) and (iii) Sriperumbudur for women (600 persons), which are currently operational.
SIPCOT has also constructed a hostel for women (600 persons) at a cost of ₹8.58 crore at Nerupperichal village in Tiruppur District as part of its CSR activity, which is operational. In addition, a hostel at Nerupperichal Village in Tiruppur District at a cost of ₹10.18 crore for 400 persons for socially & economically backward groups under CSR was completed and was inaugurated by the Chief Minister on 06.07.2022.
Plug and Play Facilities
Modern manufacturing has shifted its focus from building the infrastructure from scratch to a plug-and-play model where plant and machinery are installed in pre-built factory spaces with all basic provisions for starting commercial operations at the earliest. SIPCOT is establishing a Plug & Play facility at Perundurai (50,000 sft.), Vallam Vadagal (1,50,000 sft.) and a warehousing facility at Oragadam (1,00,000 sft.) at a total project cost of ₹85.20 crore to promote the fast-paced industrial development. These facilities are being established with a grant of ₹34.45 crore under the Trade Infrastructure for Export Scheme (TIES) of the Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Government of India.
SIPCOT has achieved a turnover of Rs.1,493.02 crore and earned a profit of Rs.232.45 crore (unaudited) during the Financial Year 2023-2024, the Note said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
EMMA Chamberlain, popularna youtuberica poznata po modnim blogovima s pariškog Tjedna mode, iznenadila je svojim neobičnim stilom na ovogodišnjim couture revijama. Na reviji Jeana Paula Gaultiera nosila je jednostavan, ali upečatljiv outfit koji je privukao pažnju.
Ovaj outfit je bio dio proljetne kolekcije Jeana Paula Gaultiera iz 2003.
Umjesto uobičajenog nošenja košulje s rukavima i zakopčanim ovratnikom, Emma je košulju nosila obješenu preko prednjeg dijela tijela, s bijelim trakama preko leđa koje su je držale na mjestu.
Njezina frizura, s jednim dijelom zalizanim na stranu i pletenicom koja je padala niz leđa, dodala je sofisticirani dodir njezinom izgledu. Šminka je bila suptilna, s malo bronzera i highlightera na licu te naglašenim smeđim usnama, stvarajući skladan i elegantan dojam.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ovaj outfit je bio dio proljetne kolekcije Jeana Paula Gaultiera iz 2003., a Emma ga je nosila na isti način kao i model s piste.
Iako su mnogi pohvalili kreativnost brenda, drugi su se našalili: “Ja ne mogu više s današnjom modom”, “Ja dok držim majicu uz tijelo u trgovini da vidim sviđa li mi se”, “Nosit ću ovo na sljedećem poslovnom sastanku”, “Sada kada sam trudna 6 mjeseci, nijedna majica mi ne pristaje. Tako mi je drago što sam našla rješenje da ih i dalje nosim”, “Svi su tako kreativni…”, “Ja kad ne želim ići u svlačionicu”, “Definicija kada vam košulja ne pristaje, ali je stvarno želite nositi”, “Kad mi košulja koju naručim online bude premala”, neki su od komentara.
Ako volite ležerne bijele košulje poput ove, evo nekoliko odličnih komada koje smo pronašli.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Evan Phillips has seen this movie before, and the reason it looks so familiar is because the Dodgers closer starred in it himself.
The script goes like this: Struggling reliever is cast off by one and often multiple teams. Reliever is acquired by Dodgers, who suggest mechanical tweaks to his delivery, a new pitch, a different grip, a change in pitch sequencing and perhaps a new mental approach. Reliever becomes a high-functioning member of the Dodgers bullpen.
Phillips was that reliever in 2021 when, with an ERA of 7.36 in 44 games for Baltimore, he was released by the Orioles, signed with Tampa Bay, designated for assignment by the Rays and claimed off waivers by the Dodgers within a 15-day span in August.
Assistant pitching coach Connor McGuiness suggested Phillips tweak the grip on his slider to give it more spin and sweeping action, pitching coach Mark Prior encouraged Phillips to add a cut-fastball and sinker to his repertoire, and Phillips transformed himself from castoff to closer by 2023.
Ryan Brasier was that guy last season, when the veteran right-hander was released by Boston with a 7.29 ERA in June, signed a minor league deal with the Dodgers, added a cut-fastball to his repertoire and went 2-0 with an 0.70 ERA in 39 games, ending the season as the team’s primary setup man.
Right-hander Yency Almonte (2022), left-hander Adam Kolarek (2020) and right-hander Brandon Morrow (2017) experienced similar career transformations with the Dodgers.
The latest in the line of reliever redemption stories is Yohan Ramírez, who bounced through seven organizations in nine years and was designated for assignment six times — three by the New York Mets — in the past year before the Dodgers acquired him on May 20.
The 29-year-old right-hander from the Dominican Republic was a hot mess in his second and third games, hitting four of eight Cincinnati batters on May 24 and 26, when manager Dave Roberts came to the mound, put his arms around Ramírez’s neck and told him that he believed in his talent and to trust his stuff.
Dodgers pitcher Yohan Ramírez pitches in relief in the fifth inning against the Royals at Dodger Stadium on June 15.
(Gina Ferazzi / Los Angeles Times)
In his next 14 appearances entering Friday night’s game against the San Francisco Giants, Ramírez allowed three earned runs and 12 hits over 16⅓ innings for a 1.65 ERA, with 15 strikeouts and four walks, earning a promotion from mop-up man to a higher-leverage role.
Anthony Banda, a 30-year-old left-hander who had a 6.43 ERA in 10 games for the Washington Nationals in 2023 and was pitching for Cleveland’s triple-A team when he was traded to the Dodgers on May 17, could be another of those hidden gems, with a 1.06 ERA in his first 14 games.
And 30-year-old right-hander Michael Petersen has shown the potential to be a find in a small sample size, with a 2-0 record and 1.80 ERA in three games, but he has the requisite back story — he was pitching in a San Jose adult rec league in 2020 and missed the 2021 and 2022 seasons because of Tommy John surgery.
“When we sign a guy like Michael Petersen to a minor league deal, it’s always with a plan, that there’s something there to like, and if we can get that in line, then maybe add something else, give them some runway, it’s a lets-see-what-we-got kind of thing,” Phillips said.
Dodgers relief pitcher Michael Petersen, left, and Will Smith congratulate each other after the Dodgers defeated the Angels.
(Mark J. Terrill / Associated Press)
“I was out of options in 2022, and the team gave me time to figure some things out. What I’ve noticed with the Dodgers is that we have a willingness to give guys some opportunity. I think that’s a unique thing in the game right now, a wonderful thing, and it sets up guys like Yohan, Michael and Anthony for success.”
Ramírez nearly fumbled that opportunity with his late-May meltdown in Great American Ball Park. He had given up a two-out single and hit Luke Maile and Stuart Fairchild with pitches to load the bases in the eighth inning of a 4-1 loss on May 26 when Roberts came to the mound to deliver some love and a pep talk.
Ramírez got Jacob Hurtubise to line out to right field and has been a different pitcher ever since.
“That was one of the best things that has ever happened to me on a baseball field,” Ramírez said through an interpreter. “I think it awakened something in me that I didn’t really know I had. It kind of revitalized my whole career, and my focus and my confidence has grown ever since that moment.”
Ramírez didn’t need to overhaul his four-pitch mix, which features a 94.5-mph sinker with 25 inches of vertical movement and 17 inches of left-to-right break and an 81-mph sweeper with 38.5 inches of drop and 18 inches of right-to-left break.
“He’s got really nasty stuff,” Dodgers second baseman Gavin Lux said. “When he’s in the zone, it’s not a comfortable at-bat.”
Left-hander Anthony Banda pitches during his Dodgers debut on May 19 against the Reds at Dodger Stadium.
(Gina Ferazzi / Los Angeles Times)
The Dodgers worked with Ramírez to adjust his pitch sequencing and attack different parts of the zone with different pitches.
“My agent told me that this was going to be a good organization to come to, that they were gonna give me a lot of information, so it’s been very helpful to kind of open my mind to what they’ve offered me, to be more creative with the ideas that they have,” Ramírez said. “I’m very thankful to the coaches and Dave Roberts for instilling that confidence and showing me how to use my pitches in a different way.”
Ramírez hit a low point in May when he was designated for assignment by the Orioles and Mets after giving up 11 earned runs in 14⅓ innings (6.91 ERA) of a combined 10 big-league appearances.
“You always believe in yourself and your abilities and talent, but sometimes it’s very difficult to bounce around, it gets a bit demoralizing,” Ramírez said. “You kind of walk around with your head low because you don’t know how long you’re gonna be here, you don’t know how long you’re gonna stay with the team from place to place.”
Now look at him: Ramirez entered in the eighth inning of a tie game against the Angels on June 21 and struck out the side. He entered in the seventh inning against the Chicago White Sox on Monday and struck out one in a scoreless inning of a 3-0 win. And Tuesday night, he was one of six relievers who combined for seven scoreless innings of a 4-3 win over the White Sox.
“He’s got a role,” Roberts said of Ramírez’s ascension on the bullpen depth chart. “The stuff has always been good enough; it just wasn’t in the zone enough. But he’s been in the zone. He gets some funky swings, some soft contact. I just love his energy. He’ll do anything I ask of him. He’s very resilient, so he bounces back really well.”
Resilience has been a strength for the 6-foot-7 Petersen, who toiled for eight years in the minor leagues before making his memorable major league debut at Colorado on June 18.
Petersen, who had a 1.61 ERA in 23 games with 31 strikeouts in 22⅓ innings for triple-A Oklahoma City, entered in the seventh inning with the Dodgers trailing the Rockies 8-4, and he gave up one run in two innings.
The Dodgers then staged a dramatic seven-run rally in the ninth, riding Jason Heyward’s grand slam and Teoscar Hernández’s three-run homer to an 11-9 come-from-behind win.
Dodgers reliever Michael Petersen during a June 18 game against the Rockies in which he became the winning pitcher when the Dodgers rallied for seven runs in the ninth inning.
(David Zalubowski / Associated Press)
“Everything about that day was absurd,” Petersen said. “I was joking with my parents that when you’re in a relief situation, you never dream of getting your first win, you dream of maybe getting a game finished or a save. Then J-Hey hit the grand slam, and I was like, ‘The game would be tied if I didn’t give up that run! I blew it. This is on me.’
“Then Shohei [Ohtani] got a hit, [Freddie Freeman] was intentionally walked, Teo hit the home run … it took a couple of minutes for it to dawn on me that I’m in line for the win.”
Petersen spent five seasons (2015-19) in the Milwaukee farm system without rising above the Class-A level, but when COVID wiped out the 2020 minor league season, Petersen, who grew up in the Bay Area, found a level he could dominate.
“A friend said he had a buddy running a rec-league team out of San José and they’d be happy to have you,” Petersen said. “I was like, ‘Hey, baseball is baseball.’ I think I went three or four innings before a guy made contact, and that contact was a bunt.”
Petersen signed with the Rockies in 2021 but blew out his elbow in spring training, had surgery and missed two seasons. He went 2-2 with a 3.46 ERA in 41 games for Colorado’s double-A and triple-A teams in 2023 before signing with the Dodgers in January.
“Literally a week into the spring, I already saw how they work,” Petersen said. “They sent me some slow-mo videos of my fingers on grips, they’re talking about how they can change this and that, and in the month span of spring training, my pitching style had changed for the better, by like a very large amount.”
The changes were subtle for Petersen, who throws a 97-mph four-seam fastball, an 88-mph cut-fastball and an 85-mph slider. The results were immediate.
“My old slider-curveball, I didn’t have my hands on the seam, and I kept falling off, I just wasn’t gripping it,” Petersen said. “They were like, ‘OK, we can work with this baseball, let’s get your hand comfortable.
“Rather than trying to change everything, we’ll change how I was throwing it. If you just change the grip, and your fingers do what they naturally do, they’ll still be on the seam. It was amazing.”
Ramírez, Banda and Petersen have helped ease the loss of injured relievers Brusdar Graterol, Joe Kelly and Brasier. Ramírez has established the strongest foothold of the three, and Banda has climbed what Roberts likes to call his “trust tree.”
Petersen hasn’t pitched enough to solidify a big-league spot, and because he has minor-league options, he’ll probably be sent back down if the Dodgers need a fresh arm or if an established reliever comes off the injured list. But Petersen still feels like he’s in the right spot for long-term success.
“I played with a guy in Colorado who played here last year, [left-hander] Justin Bruihl, and he always talked about how great the Dodgers were,” Petersen said. “You don’t hear many guys coming to a new team talking about how much they loved their old team. Most guys will bash their old team and say, ‘Oh, it sucks.’
“But he was adamant that the Dodgers are a great spot for you and if you get a chance to sign with them, you’ll love it. Thankfully, I did.”
Tech Mahindra on Friday announced launch of Project Indus, a large language model (LLM) designed to converse in a multitude of Indic languages and dialects.
The first phase of Indus LLM is designed for the Hindi language and its 37+ dialects.
“Project Indus is our seminal effort to develop an LLM from the ground up. Through Makers Lab, our R&D arm, we created a roadmap, collected data from the Hindi-speaking population, and built the Indus model.Our collaboration with Dell Technologies & Intel will help deliver cutting-edge AI solutions that enable enterprises to scale at speed. We will redefine the GenAI landscape, driving innovation and operational excellence,” Nikhil Malhotra, Global Head Makers Lab, Tech Mahindra, said.
This collaboration aims to redefine AI-driven solutions in various industries by leveraging Tech Mahindra’s unique capabilities to develop localized and verticalized industry-agnostic LLMs with Dell and Intel’s robust infrastructure, a company statement said.
It said it will create multiple tailored use cases and enable customers to leverage various applications, including customer support, experience, and content creation across healthcare, rural education, banking and finance, agriculture, and telecom, among other industries.
“The Indus model will initially focus on key use cases and pilot projects, such as providing infrastructure and computing as a service, and offering scalable AI solutions to enterprises,” the statement said.
Madrid city hall said Wednesday it will offer free flamenco shows at air conditioned museums during the hottest hours of the day to encourage tourists to seek shelter from the heat.
Madrid: Air conditioned museums host free Flamenco shows for tourists to beat the heat (Photo by Twitter/piccavey)
Spain endured its second-hottest year on record in 2023 and temperatures in Madrid regularly top 40 degrees Celsius (104 Fahrenheit) during the summer months, when tourists from around the world flock to the city. Over 1.6 million tourists visited the Spanish capital last July and August.
While temperatures in the morning are bearable, even Madrid’s central Retiro Park “is hot at 3:00 pm. The best places to take refuge are air conditioned, and that means museums, cinemas and libraries,” said Madrid’s city councillor for culture and tourism, Marta Rivera de la Cruz.
To draw tourist indoors, Madrid’s three main museums — the Prado, the Reina Sofia and the Thyssen — as well as the Royal Collections Gallery next to the royal palace will offer free flamenco shows every day from 3:00 pm until 5:00 pm during July and August, she added.
The shows will features internationally renowned performers such as Yolanda Osuna and Eduardo Guerrero.
Public libraries will also offer humorous monologue shows and concerts in the early afternoon, while cinemas will offer reduced rates for screenings before 5:00 pm.
The measure “will not involve any additional energy expenditure” since these venues were already air conditioned, said Rivera de la Cruz.
Spain experienced seven heatwaves last year. since 1975, heatwaves have lengthened by three days per decade…and increased in temperature by 2.7C per decade, according to Spain’s AEMET weather agency.
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / Madrid: Air conditioned museums host free Flamenco shows for tourists to beat the heat
Every year at Graceland, Elvis Presley fans descend on the mansion and its grounds for Elvis Week.
The King of Rock and Roll’s celebrations occur in the days leading up to August 16, when the star died at just 42 in 1977.
Since the pandemic, the estate has offered virtual Elvis Week tickets for fans who cannot get to Memphis, Tennessee in person.
Graceland teased: “Virtual Elvis Week brings all the excitement of Elvis Week 2024 right to your home. You’ll have a front row seat at the concerts, tribute contests, and panel discussions that make Elvis Week the best week of the year for Elvis fans round the world. And for you Super fans out there, you can even take a virtual tour of Graceland Mansion and all the major exhibits here at Graceland.
“PLUS, new for 2024, enjoy a show & tell with Graceland’s VP of Archives and Exhibits, Angie Marchese. It’s the next best thing to being here. Plus, again for 2024, every event is rewatchable for 10 days after its conclusion. Relive your favourite moments again and again.”
The Elvis Super Fan Pass costs $225 and gives you full virtual access to every major event:
Ultimate Elvis Tribute: Salute to the 50s (Aug 9) Ultimate Elvis Tribute Artist Contest Semifinal Round (Aug 10) Elvis Gospel Show (Aug 11) Ultimate Elvis Tribute: Salute to the 70s (Aug 11) Ultimate Elvis Tribute Artist Contest Final Round (Aug 12) Elvis: Back in Memphis (Aug 13) Elvis Fan Choice Awards (Aug 14) Conversations on Elvis (Aug 15) Elvis: Return to Vegas (Aug 16)Pre-recorded Virtual Tour of Graceland Mansion and Elvis Presley’s Memphis Pre-recorded Archives Show & Tell hosted by Angie Marchese
But if you only want to do the first or second half there’s also the Elvis Fan and Tribute passes for $130.
As for this year’s guest speakers during Conservations on Elvis, Graceland shared: “Hosted by Tom Brown, enjoy an intimate and heartfelt celebration of Elvis’ life with friends, co-stars, musicians, singers, and more sharing their cherished memories and stories. Confirmed segments include Linda Thompson, along with her brother Sam Thompson, who will share their favourite family memories of spending time with Elvis, as well as each of their personal remembrances; Shirley Dieu, Joe Esposito’s girlfriend and Elvis’ friend from 1974-1977; Jerome Stump Monroe, drummer for the Sweet Inspirations who opened nearly every Elvis show from 1969-1977; Larry Geller, Elvis’ hairstylist and spiritual advisor; and Lisa Marie co-pilot Ron Strauss. In addition, enjoy a special awards presentation to The Jordanaires, who will be inducted into Graceland Legends.”
To find out more about each event and book tickets for Virtual Elvis Week 2024, click here.
The Maserati GranTurismo is back after five years in the wilderness.
The last GranTurismo died in 2019 after 12 years and more than 40,000 sales worldwide, and it took one of the world’s sexiest engines to the grave in the process.
Forget the dated cabin or slightly wobbly drive, the sound of the naturally aspirated V8 engine made up for it all.
The new car takes a very different approach. For starters, there’s an electric Folgore coming to Australia later in 2024… and even the petrol Modena and Trofeo have subbed the sonorous V8 for a version of the Nettuno turbo V6 debuted in the MC20 supercar.
For all the changes though, the fundamental formula underpinning the GranTurismo hasn’t been messed with.
Long and low with curves in all the right places, you still get space for four people inside, and a properly usable boot down back for all their kit. It’s a grand tourer, after all.
Rather than a cross-country road trip, our first taste of the new GranTurismo came on track at The Bend in South Australia.
How does the Maserati GranTurismo compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Maserati GranTurismo against similarly sized vehicles.
Maserati
GranTurismo
How much does the Maserati GranTurismo cost?
The price of the new GranTurismo has risen compared to the old car, although it’s been five years since it went off sale.
The base price has increased by $80,000 in the case of the Modena, and $105,000 when it comes to the Trofeo.
Model Variant
$RRP
2025 Maserati GranTurismo Modena
$375,000
2025 Maserati GranTurismo Trofeo
$450,000
To see how the Maserati GranTurismo lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the Maserati GranTurismo like on the inside?
This is better.
The last GranTurismo was born in the era of fiddly little buttons and blocky touchscreen graphics; the new one has a properly modern tech suite, integrated neatly into a handsome and well-finished cabin. Welcome to 2024.
This isn’t designed to be a track star, it’s designed to take four passengers long distances in style and comfort. That means the seats don’t have rock hard bolsters to climb over, and there’s plenty of headroom up front for tall drivers.
Although we didn’t have all that long to poke and prod things, quality generally felt excellent. The seats are trimmed in supple leather, the sculptural paddles behind the wheel are made of real metal, and real thought has gone into the stitched door panels and speaker covers.
With that said, the wheel-mounted starter and drive mode dial don’t have the same hewn-from-granite solidity of the switches in a Porsche 911, and anyone who’s driven an Alfa Romeo Tonale will recognise the little plastic air vent flow controllers.
The fact we’re whinging about minor controls shows how far this car has come. Based on our first taste, the idea of spending serious time behind the wheel is pretty damn appealing.
Maserati’s new infotainment technology is built on a version of the Android Automotive bones that also underpins the tech in the latest Jeep and RAM products, albeit with some unique graphics, pages, colours, and fonts.
It’s easy to use and worked well in our drive to The Bend in the Grecale, with a clean Apple CarPlay integration that hooked up reliably. The climate touchscreen below it is fiddly at first acquaintance but gets better with time, and can be navigated with minimal hands-off-wheel time with practice.
It would be nice if the GranTurismo had a bit more differentiation from the Grecale though, perhaps with bespoke dials or expensive-feeling buttons for the climate controls to impart a classic Italian feeling. Maybe we’re asking too much.
As for the rear seats. Well, they’re significantly better than what’s on offer in a Porsche 911, and Maserati claims they put a Bentley Continental in the shade for occupant space. The front seats tilt and slide with power assistance, and it’s actually reasonably easy to clamber back there.
Kids and short adults will genuinely be able to get comfortable back there, ensconced in the leather seats. The bench itself is nicely scalloped, and headroom is solid under the longer rear windscreen. USB ports, air vents, and cupholders round out the amenities.
The boot holds a claimed 310 litres, and there’s a port between the rear seats that allows two sets of skis to be loaded. It’s a much bigger space than you get in a 911, although the Bentley Continental GT packs another 50L.
I’m not sure it’d take a set of golf clubs, but it wouldn’t be far off the mark – and relative to the tiny space in a Lexus LC 500, it’s a far more practical setup.
Dimensions
Maserati GranTurismo
Length
4966mm
Width
1957mm
Height
1353mm
Wheelbase
2929mm
Luggage capacity
310L
To see how the Maserati GranTurismo lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
Goodbye V8 engine, hello turbocharged V6.
The engine in the new GranTurismo is shared with the MC20 supercar (where it makes more power) and the Grecale (where it makes less), and is mated with all-wheel drive on the Modena and Trofeo.
Along with their different power outputs, the Modena and Trofeo feature different hardware on the rear axle. Where the former has a mechanical limited-slip differential, the latter has a more sophisticated electronically controlled diff to put its power down.
Technical Specs
Modena
Trofeo
Engine
3.0L twin-turbo V6
3.0L twin-turbo V6
Transmission
8-speed auto
8-speed auto
Power
365kW
410kW
Torque
600Nm
650Nm
Drive type
AWD
AWD
0-100km/h
3.9 seconds
3.5 seconds
Top speed
301km/h
320km/h
Fuel type
98 RON
98 RON
Fuel tank capacity
70L
70L
Fuel economy (claimed)
10.2L/100km
10.2L/100km
Kerb weight
1790kg
1790kg
To see how the Maserati GranTurismo lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
How does the Maserati GranTurismo drive?
Before we go too deep, the GranTurismo is a road car first and a track car second. But given we drove it on track first, and will get the chance to enjoy it on the road second… that’s what we’ll focus on here.
Although it can’t match the bombastic old V8 for aural character, it’s impossible to complain about how the turbo V6 in the new GranTurismo performs. Smooth, torquey, and seriously fast, it’s an impressive engine in Modena and Trofeo guises.
It also has a distinctive flat-plane bark when you’re really pushing, and the ignition cut on full throttle upshifts is vicious.
Shifts from the eight-speed automatic when you grab one of the sculptural metal paddle shifters are whip-crack fast in manual mode, but it’s smart enough to leave in automatic and just let it go to work.
It’s more than just a lumbering grand tourer with a rocket under the bonnet, too.
Braking from 250km/h at the end of The Bend’s long main straight, the Trofeo in particular feels rock solid. At almost 1800kg it’s not a light car, but the pedal is rock solid and there’s no uncomfortable sense the rear wants to overtake the front end.
It’s keen to rotate as you bleed off the brakes, and once it’s turned you can lean on the all-wheel drive traction to drag you out without any real drama. The system is clearly rear-biased under power, but there’s an extra helping hand there to make it more approachable.
Through the higher-speed corners it’s nicely balanced, without the persistent push at the front end you often get in big, heavy vehicles on the track.
A peek under the bonnet reveals most of the engine is behind the front axle line rather than hanging out over the front, which no doubt aids agility, and the air suspension system does a good job keeping all 1800kg in check.
Where Porsche and Bentley lean on 48V anti-roll systems to actively prop up their heavy four-seat cars, Maserati hasn’t taken the same step with the GranTurismo.
In Corsa mode, with the suspension at its firmest and the steering at its heaviest, it’s not something you really miss.
Is this a track car? That’s what the MC20 is for, so the answer is “not really”.
But it does a good enough job to scratch that itch if you’re an owner keen to go faster than you’ll ever be able to on Australian roads, and our time at The Bend revealed the new GranTurismo is more than a long-legged cruiser with a big engine.
What do you get?
There are currently two petrol-powered variants of the Maserati GranTurismo range offered in Australia.
GranTurismo highlights:
12.3-inch infotainment touchscreen
Wireless Apple CarPlay, Android Auto
Satellite navigation
DAB+ digital radio, AM, FM
12.2-inch digital instrument cluster
8.8-inch climate control screen
860W/14-speaker Sonus Faber sound system
Leather-trimmed sports steering wheel with power adjustment
18-way powered sports seats
Extended leather trim with Campidoglio Stitching
Adaptive air suspension
20-inch front wheels
21-inch rear wheels
380mm front, 350mm rear brake discs
Is the Maserati GranTurismo safe?
The Maserati GranTurismo hasn’t been crash tested by Euro NCAP or ANCAP, nor will it likely ever be.
Standard safety equipment includes:
6 airbags
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Forward, reverse
Pedestrian detection
Blind-spot assist
Lane keep assist
Rear cross-traffic alert
Surround-view camera
Front, rear parking sensors
How much does the Maserati GranTurismo cost to run?
Maserati backs its range with a three-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
That’s in line with what you get in a Porsche 911 or a Bentley Continental, but lags behind what’s on offer in Mercedes-Benz and BMW alternatives to the GranTurismo.
Ownership Program
Maserati GranTurismo
Warranty
3 years, unlimited kilometres
Service intervals
12 months or 20,000km
3-year prepaid service plan
$5185
CarExpert’s Take on the Maserati GranTurismo
It’s taken its sweet time getting to Australia, but the new GranTurismo is an impressive take on the classic Maserati formula.
The way it looks will no doubt be enough for some buyers, but based on our first Australian taste this is more than just a pretty face.
There’s no replacing the way the V8 sounded, but it’s impossible to ignore the performance on offer from the Nettuno V6 engine – and it has plenty of character, which isn’t always the case when it comes to the downsized powerplants in modern sports cars.
For a car named after grand touring, it’s impressively capable around the track. We’re looking forward to seeing how it handles a weekend away as well.
Click the images for the full gallery
MORE: Buy a Maserati GranTurismo MORE: Everything Maserati GranTurismo
Maharashtra’s Mahayuti government on Friday presented an eye-popping Rs 612,293 crore (around $73 billion) budget, which is more than Pakistan’s $67.84 billion and Bangladesh’s $68 billion for the fiscal year 2024-25. Deputy chief minister and Nationalist Congress Party leader Ajit Pawar, who also holds the finance portfolio in the state, presented the interim budget in the assembly’s ongoing monsoon session. This is the last legislative session before the state assembly polls, which will be in the next four months.
The ruling alliance of Bharatiya Janata Party, Shiv Sena, and NCP, which faced unflattering results in the recent Lok Sabha elections, went all out to appease key sections of the state’s population through budgetary allocations. Pawar, for instance, announced the Mukhyamantri Majhi Ladki Bahin scheme for women as well as a bonus, crop insurance, and electricity bill waivers for farmers. He also slashed the tax on petrol and diesel in Mumbai, Thane, and Navi Mumbai from 24% to 21%.
For women
Based on neighbouring BJP-ruled Madhya Pradesh’s popular Ladli Behna Yojana, under the Mukhyamantri Majhi Ladki Bahin scheme, eligible women in the age group of 21 to 60 will get an allowance of Rs 1,500 per month from the state government. The interim budget allocated Rs 46,000 crore per year for the plan.
The state government has also made it mandatory for those born after May 2024 to add their mothers’ names to all official government documents in a bid to empower women.
Also, under the Pink E-Rickshaw scheme, 10,000 women from 17 cities will be financed to buy these vehicles. For this, the government has made a provision of Rs 80 crore.
It has also increased the subsidy from Rs 10,000 to Rs 25,000 for the Shubhamangal Samuhik Nondanikrut Vivah scheme (mass marriages) for women.
The government has also provided big relief, particularly to women of the state by providing three free gas cylinders to eligible households under the Mukhyamantri Annapurna Yojana. A total of 52,16,412 families are expected to benefit from this.
Ajit Pawar also announced that girls from backward and economically weaker classes will get 100% reimbursement of education and examination fees up to Rs 8 lakh. The government feels that this decision will benefit 2,05,499 girls with a provision of about Rs 2,000 crore.
Farmers in focus
The Mahayuti suffered setbacks in rural Maharashtra during the Lok Sabha polls. With a large section of farmers not being happy with the state government’s policies, many top leaders of the ruling alliance faced defeat. Keeping that in mind, the state government has made significant allocations for the agricultural community. Now farmers from the state will get crop insurance for just Re 1. The state government also fulfilled a long-pending demand of many farmers and farm associations, that the system for e-panchanama should be implemented to help conduct panchanamas quickly and help farmers get compensation within a short time.
Under the Mahatma Jotirao Phule Shetkari Karjmukti Yojana, 14.33 lakh farmers who regularly repaid their crop loans have been paid Rs 5,190 crore as an incentive amount, with the rest of the amount to be distributed expeditiously. The second phase of the Nanaji Deshmukh Agricultural Sanjeevani Project, worth Rs 6,000 crore, will be implemented in 21 districts. The Balasaheb Thackeray Agribusiness and Rural Transformation Project approved 767 sub-projects worth Rs 1,561.64 crore, benefiting about 9 lakh farmers. The state government also announced a new scheme called Gaon Tethe Godam (godown in every village). In the first phase, the construction of 100 new godowns and the repair of existing ones will be undertaken.
Onion farmers of Maharashtra, who were not happy with the export policy of the Centre and didn’t vote in favour of the Mahayuti in the general elections, have been somewhat pacified by the announcement of a subsidy. An amount of Rs 851.66 crore at a rate of Rs 350 per quintal for the year 2023-24 has been allocated, and a revolving fund of Rs 200 crore each is being created for the assured purchase of onion and cotton.
The state government also announced the launch of a new scheme, Dairy Business Entrepreneurship Project, to create new entrepreneurs in the fields of animal husbandry, dairy farming, animal fodder, and animal feed production. The state has also been running a special campaign to complete irrigation projects. By the end of this financial year, 61 projects are expected to be completed, creating an irrigation potential of 3.65 lakh hectares.
Under the Maharashtra Irrigation Improvement Programme, the state government aims to improve the canal distribution systems of 155 projects, benefiting about 4.28 lakh hectares of area from direct irrigation. The state government intends to make all government irrigation schemes solarised, including the Janai-Shirsai and Purandar lift irrigation schemes, to achieve the goal of clean and green energy at an expected cost of Rs 4,200 crore.
Youth and employment
The state government has also announced various schemes for the youth of the state. Under the Mukhya Mantri Yuva Karyaprashikshan Yojana, training will be given to 10 lakh youths every year, who will also receive a stipend of up to Rs 10,000 per month from the government. For this, the state government will bear an expenditure of Rs 10,000 crore annually.
Every year, 50,000 youths will be trained to disseminate information about government schemes to the people, with a Rs 100 crore fund allocated for financial assistance to self-employment.
Fuel tax cut
In the municipal areas of Brihanmumbai, Thane, and Navi Mumbai, the tax on diesel has been reduced from 24% to 21%. Also, the tax on petrol is down from from 26% + 5.12 rupees per litre to 25% + 5.12 rupees per litre. This provides relief to common citizens as well as industry and trade.
Due to this proposal, the price of petrol per litre in the municipal areas of Thane, Brihanmumbai, and Navi Mumbai will be cheaper by approximately 65 paise per litre and that of diesel by approximately Rs 2.07 per litre.
Exemption for paramilitary forces
The state government also announced an exemption from professional tax for five Central Armed Forces: Assam Rifles, Central Industrial Security Force, Indo-Tibetan Border Police, National Security Guard, and Sashastra Seema Bal. The government believes this will benefit approximately twelve thousand soldiers.
MSME push
An India Gems and Jewellery Park will be set up on 25 acres of land at Mahape in Navi Mumbai. It will include 2,000 micro, small, and medium enterprises with an investment of Rs 50,000 crore, which will generate one lakh jobs. An integrated and sustainable textile policy for 2023-2028 has been announced, envisaging a substantial investment of Rs 25,000 crore and generating 5 lakh jobs in the next five years.
The Captive Market Scheme will generate large-scale employment in the spinning, loom, processing, packing, and transportation sectors. The government has decided to set up small-scale textile industry complexes and technical textile parks to increase private investment.
A scuba diving centre of international stature will be set up in the Sindhudurg district, which will have coral sighting on a sunken ship as a special attraction. The project is expected to cost Rs 20 crore and will provide employment to 800 local people.
Infra boost
In this budget, Ajit Pawar also focused on big-ticket infrastructure projects. Metro lines of 449 km have been sanctioned in Mumbai, Pune, and Nagpur, out of which 127 km is operational. Another 37 km of metro lines will be made operational in this financial year. The work of the Shivdi-Worli link road under the Shivdi-Nhava Sheva Project is 57% complete and is expected to be completed by the end of December 2025. The proposed Thane coastal road from Balkum to Gaymukh, with a length of 13.45 km, costing Rs 3,364 crore, is expected to be completed by May 2028. The work of the Dharmaveer Swaraj Rakshak Chhatrapati Sambhaji Maharaj Mumbai Coastal Road is almost complete and both lanes are partially opened for traffic.
The PM E-Bus Seva Scheme will be implemented in 19 municipal corporations to improve transport services and reduce air pollution. The scheme includes providing electric buses, constructing bus shelters, and charging infrastructure. A proposal has been sent to UNESCO to get World Heritage nomination for 12 forts of the Shiva period. Proposals will also be sent for Katal Shilpe in Konkan, Pandharpur Vari, Dahihandi Utsav, and Ganeshotsav. The government has decided to celebrate the Shivarajyabhishek ceremony at Raigad fort every year and necessary funds will be provided for it. A submarine project of international stature will be developed at Vengurla, Sindhudurg district, at an estimated cost of Rs 66 crore. An integrated tourism development plan worth Rs 381.56 crore has been approved for the development of tourist spots in the Western Ghat area of Satara district. This includes Sri Kshetra Mahabaleshwar development, Pratapgad fort conservation, Sahyadri tiger tourism, and Koyna Helwak forest Tourism.
An outlay of Rs 18,165 crore has been proposed under the district annual plan for the year 2024-25. This outlay is 20 per cent more than the previous year. An outlay of Rs.1.92 Lakh crore has been proposed under the Scheme expenditure in the Annual Plan 2024-25. It includes an outlay of Rs 15,893 crore for the Scheduled Caste Plan and Rs 15,360 crore for the Tribal Development Sub Plan. An outlay of Rs 6,12,293 crore is proposed for the total expenditure in the year 2024-25. The revenue receipts are proposed as Rs 4,99,463 crore and the revenue expenditure as Rs 5,19,514 crore. The revenue deficit is estimated at Rs 20,051 crore. The government has been successful in keeping the state’s fiscal deficit and revenue deficit within the limits set by the Fiscal Responsibility and Fiscal Management Act. The fiscal deficit for the year 2024-25 is Rs 1,10,355 crore.
A close consolidation after a steep rise or drop has become the new normal for the Bitcoin (BTC) price rally. Following a similar trend, the token continues to accumulate within a range, suggesting a major move could be nearby; however, the direction of the rally could depend on the volume induced. This has raised the possibility of a major trend reversal that could trap the bears at the bottom for a prolonged timeframe.
The quarterly BTC candle close is just around the corner and the token is successfully retesting an old major resistance as new support. Currently, the price remains stable between $60,800 and $61,500, despite minimal movement following the latest US economic updates. The PCE index, which reported core inflation at 2.6% year-on-year, did not significantly impact the BTC price.
Presently, there are concerns over the support at $60,000, which is getting weaker as the bid liquidity also grows weak. This is signalling potentially volatile days coming ahead, which could either maintain the levels above $60,000 or face further downside.
The price has remained stagnant within a narrow range for over a couple of days, due to which the crypto remains in a decisive phase. The bears are constantly keeping the pressure on the token as the candle is constantly forming a thick upper wick. The RSI is also in an uncertain phase, as it displays both the possibility of a bullish breakout and a bearish pullback. Therefore, this may heavily impact the BTC price, which also possesses a similar trend. However, the price does hold a hidden bullish divergence.
The MACD displays a drop in selling pressure, which suggests the bulls may soon overtake the rally. With this, the possibility of a fresh upswing emerges, which may uplift the levels above $64,000 or close to $64,500 too. Therefore, the upcoming monthly close may be consolidated but the start of the year’s second half could be bullish. However, until the Bitcoin (BTC) price does not secure levels above $65,500, the bullish reversal may not be validated.
In 2023, total revenue for the 30 biggest agency companies in the world rose 5.6%. The forecast for this year? It’s between 2% and 3%.
The Too Big Five (as CMI’s Robert Rose calls them) — WPP, Publicis, Omnicom, Interpublic, and Dentsu — have collectively grown revenue by a whopping 2.7% to date.
What gives? Are agencies doing fewer projects? Do brands need agencies as much? Where is the agency world headed?
Since Robert is our chief strategy advisor, we posed those questions to him but not before wishing him a happy birthday. Watch this video or read on for what he had to say:
Revenue growth drops precipitously for big agencies
Ad Age’s 2024 Agency Report takes the marketing market’s temperature by looking at the performance of the largest agencies.
It’s been doing it for 79 years, and only four agencies from the first report remain, at least in name. BBDO, McCann, FCB, and Campbell Ewald are all now part of giant holding companies. It’s worth noting that some of the largest agencies, such as Accenture and Accenture Song, show up more than once on the list.
This health of the world’s giant agencies is a big “meh.”
The five biggest legacy firms saw organic revenue grow 1.3% in 2023, down from 7.5% in 2022. That’s a 6-percentage-point drop in revenue growth in one year. Talk about burying the lead. An almost 83% drop in revenue growth in one year is amazing.
The forecast for 2024? Somewhere between 2% and 2.8%.
Agencies’ budgets are growing, but barely, especially considering inflation was most recently 3.3%. The report also finds that the number of agency employees edged up 1.6%, which is in line with revenue growth.
The metrics all indicate a flat or slight decrease in agency value in the broader marketplace.
Small agencies aren’t exempt from difficulties
It’s also been a challenging year for small, independent agencies. They’re left struggling to compete with larger agencies on projects those bigger organizations would never have touched in better times.
Specialization of marketing at larger companies also has an impact on the agency marketplace. Demand generation, sales enablement, customer experience, and even customer-enablement programs increasingly lead to a greater need for niche specialists. Companies are more likely to engage with these specialists, from data to technology, content creation to influencer marketing, and measurement to media buying. It’s not unlike the medical industry, where general practitioners have given way to specialists.
I see agencies jettisoning their agency title and rebranding themselves (subscription required) as creative solutions companies, content studios, growth incubators, or accelerators.
Marketers should do this in 2024 and beyond
What should you make of all this?
The world of agencies is complicated. One reason for their slowdown is the absorption of all the change that was mapped out for companies over the last two years. Many of the bigger companies decided to pivot in a big way in 2021 and 2022. In 2023, they said, “Welp, we better stop strategizing and start executing against all this change.” And, in 2024, it continues.
That, too, will change. In the meantime, looking for agencies or consultancies that can help you accelerate the changes you have on your plate should be key in whatever specialized vertical challenge you may have.
That’s the pivot that’s real for me.
The next episode of What’s New? returns on July 12, after a one-week break for the U.S. holiday weekend.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Attempting to corner the government, the Opposition on Friday demanded a discussion on irregularities in the conduct of the NEET-UG medical examination in both Houses of Parliament, with the Leader of the Opposition and Congress MP Rahul Gandhi saying we should send a message to the students that we are with them at this hour of crisis.
Congress MP B Manickam Tagore wrote to the Lok Sabha Secretary-General, giving a notice for suspension of business of the House for discussion of a definite matter of urgent importance on “unprecedented cases of paper leaks in the conduct of exams, including the NEET-UG and UGC-NET, and the failure of the National Testing Agency (NTA)“.
Similar notices were served in the Rajya Sabha by Congress MPs, Dr Syed Naseet Hussain and Ranjeet Ranjan, seeking a discussion on the irregularities in the NEET-UG exam. Other opposition parties also joined in raising the issue.
Before the discussion began at 11 am in Parliament, Rahul Gandhi told the media that the leaders of the INDIA bloc partners had met and decided that the Opposition and the government should come together to send a message from Parliament that all the parties are concerned about students, who are worried about their future.
“We should discuss the issue calmly. Both, the Opposition and ruling alliance should send a common message to students from Parliament,” Gandhi said.
The Chief Ministers of Kerala and Tamil Nadu called for scrapping NEET.
The government is open to a discussion on the exam paper leak, but it wants the Opposition leaders to speak on the issue during the discussion on the presidential debate, Lok Sabha Speaker Om Birla said.
“I have received 22 notices on the NEET paper leak case. The President has already indicated in her speech in paragraph 20 that there would be a fair investigation into irregularities in NEET,” Speaker Om Birla said, and adjourned the house till 12 pm, after Rahul Gandhi sought to press the Opposition demand for a discussion.
Also read: 74 students scored centum in NEET UG since inception, 91% of them cleared the exam in 2024
Meanwhile, the Congress general secretary in-charge of communications alleged that the Modi government is offering “patronage” to an Ahmedabad-based exam conducting company, despite it being implicated in several paper leaks, including the infamous UP Police Constable Recruitment Exam that affected 49 lakh candidates.
“The NET and NEET are just the latest examples – the last ten years have seen rampant paper leaks and malfeasance around competitive exams across the country. At last count, 2.26 crore youth across the country have been impacted by these paper leaks,” Ramesh posted on X.
“It’s reflective of the Modi Government’s incompetence, but also of its corruption. An Ahmedabad-based exam conducting company, implicated in several paper leaks, including the infamous UP Police Constable Recruitment Exam that affected 48 lakh candidates, has been receiving repeated patronage from the Modi Government and BJP State Governments across the country. The UP and Bihar Governments have blacklisted the firm, but even as of October 2023, the Modi Government continued giving them contracts, to the tune of 80 crores,” he alleged in his post.
“Why? Because the firm’s proprietor is an ideological and political supporter of the BJP. Pictured here are the एक तिहाई Pradhan Mantri with the accused,” he said.
The Union Education Ministry has already sought a CBI inquiry to carry out a country-wide investigation into the NEET paper leak and other irregularities in the conduct of the exam by the NTA. It has also instituted a high-level inquiry into the functioning of the NTA, given reports of wide-scale compromise of the examination procedure. As of now, the CBI is investigating six such cases and has arrested two persons from Bihar for their alleged involvement in leaking the NEET paper.
Queues of idle trucks trying to enter America are standard fare at Mexico’s border. Recently, however, vehicles at the Otay Mesa crossing, which separates California and the city of Tijuana, have been lining up to get into Mexico. The trucks do not travel far—they offload their shipping containers in newly built warehouses just 15km south of the border. The goods are then separated into thousands of small packages and driven back to America. Although such imports are made in China and purchased in America, no tariffs are paid. Call it the Tijuana two-step.
A Quiet Place: Day One’s noise-targeting monsters are starring in a spin-off prequel set in New York City. Before you head to the theater (preferably side-stepping your squeaky tennis shoes), you may want to revisit the first two films in the suspenseful horror franchise.
The prior Quiet Place movies, 2018’s A Quiet Place and 2020’s sequel, Part II, follow the Abbott family as they try to survive in a world crawling with aliens that hunt by sound. The new installment, Day One, introduces new characters to tell a terrifying about “the day the world went quiet.”
2020’s A Quiet Place: Part II continued the Abbott family saga.
Paramount Pictures
Day One’s cast includes Lupita Nyong’o, Joseph Quinn, Alex Wolff and a (hopefully silent) cat named Frodo. Additionally, Djimon Hounsou is returning to his Part II role. You may want to rewatch that film for a refresh on his character listed in the credits as “Man on Island.”
Unlike the first movies, Day One is directed by Michael Sarnoski (2021’s Pig) rather than John Krasinski. The story is by Sarnoski and Krasinski. You can find tickets to Day One in theaters here, but if past entries in the franchise are what you’re after, you can view streaming methods below.
How to watch A Quiet Place and the Sequel
Interested in streaming A Quiet Place and A Quiet Place Part II? Paramount Plus carries both of the post-apocalyptic horror films. If you have Hulu, you’re partially in luck, as the streamer offers Part II.
Outside of those streaming services, the initial A Quiet Place movies are available to rent digitally for around four bucks each at Amazon and Fandango at Home (formerly Vudu).
James Martin/CNET
Paramount Plus just announced a price increase kicking in later this summer, but you can currently get the ad-supported version of the service for $6 a month or $60 a year. Paramount Plus’ mostly ad-free plan with Showtime programming costs $12 a month or $120 a year. The streamer offers free trials for new customers.
On top of offering A Quiet Place and Part II, Paramount Plus will get A Quiet Place: Day One after its theatrical run.
Sarah Tew/CNET
Hulu may not have A Quiet Place, but it does have the nail-biting follow-up to that flick: A Quiet Place: Part II. The ad-supported version of the streamer costs $8 a month or $80 a year, and the ad-less version runs $18 a month with no annual payment option. Eligible subscribers can take advantage of a free trial.
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Approximately one-third of U.S. adults report taking multivitamins, data shows — but a new study suggests that the daily practice won’t extend longevity.
Researchers from the National Institutes of Health (NIH) analyzed more than 20 years’ worth of data from 400,000 healthy U.S. adults, concluding that taking multivitamins did not reduce mortality risk.
“The analysis showed that people who took daily multivitamins did not have a lower risk of death from any cause than people who took no multivitamins,” the researchers wrote in a press release from NIH.
FISH OIL SUPPLEMENTS LINKED TO GREATER FIRST-TIME HEART ATTACK RISK IN STUDY: ‘NOT UNIVERSALLY GOOD OR BAD’
“There were also no differences in mortality from cancer, heart disease or cerebrovascular diseases.”
Approximately one-third of U.S. adults report taking multivitamins, data shows.(iStock)
Those who took daily multivitamins were actually found to have a 4% higher mortality risk, according to the study, which was published in JAMA Network Open on Wednesday.
The average age of participants was 61-½, and 164, 762 deaths occurred during the follow-up period.
“People who use multivitamins may have healthier lifestyles in general, and sicker patients may be more likely to increase their use of multivitamins.”
Results were adjusted for factors including race, ethnicity, education and nutrition.
The study followed a 2022 analysis from the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force, which concluded that there was “insufficient evidence” to determine whether multivitamin use improved mortality.
Those who took daily multivitamins were actually found to have a 4% higher mortality risk, according to the study, which was published in JAMA Network Open on Wednesday.(iStock)
By including larger numbers of participants and extending the follow-up for longer periods of time, the researchers aimed to account for potential biases that could have influenced the findings.
“For example, people who use multivitamins may have healthier lifestyles in general, and sicker patients may be more likely to increase their use of multivitamins,” they wrote in a press release from NIH.
IMPROVING MEMORY MAY BE AS EASY AS POPPING A MULTIVITAMIN, STUDY FINDS: ‘PREVENTS VASCULAR DEMENTIA’
Pieter Cohen, associate professor of medicine at the Cambridge Health Alliance in Massachusetts, was not involved in the study but offered his feedback.
“This study provides further evidence that taking multivitamins, even for 20 years or more, won’t extend your life,” he told Fox News Digital.
“For healthy adults, there’s no reason to add on a multivitamin unless your doctor specifically recommends it.”
Doctor points out limitations
Dr. Brett Osborn, a Florida neurologist and longevity expert, was also not involved in the study but weighed in on the findings.
Dr. Brett Osborn, a Florida neurologist and longevity expert with Senolytix, is a proponent of daily multivitamins.(Dr. Brett Osborn)
“Key aspects of the study include its observational nature, the absence of a control group, and the variability in multivitamin formulations used by participants,” he said in an email to Fox News Digital.
(The researchers also acknowledged these limitations in their discussion of the study results.)
“Most multivitamins contain a broad spectrum of vitamins and minerals, but the concentrations can vary widely across brands and formulations,” a doctor said. (iStock)
“Observational studies like this one can suggest associations or correlations, but cannot prove causation due to the potential for confounding variables influencing both multivitamin use and mortality outcomes,” Osborn said.
While the researchers noted that they had adjusted for factors such as demographics, lifestyle behaviors and health status, Osborn said, “residual confounding remains a concern.”
The doctor also noted that lack of a control group makes it difficult to compare outcomes.
CANCER IMMUNITY GETS A BOOST FROM ONE COMMON NUTRIENT, STUDY FINDS: ‘INTRIGUE AND OPTIMISM’
“Without a control group, it’s challenging to separate the effects of multivitamins from those of other health behaviors or baseline health conditions that could influence mortality,” Osborn said.
The study also does not include controls for the specific formulation or dosage of multivitamins taken by participants, the doctor noted.
The study highlights the importance of “rigorous scientific inquiry” into the health benefits of multivitamins, a doctor said.(iStock)
“Most multivitamins contain a broad spectrum of vitamins and minerals, but the concentrations can vary widely across brands and formulations,” he said.
“Many commercially available multivitamins may not provide optimal levels of nutrients required for health benefits, potentially diluting any potential effects on longevity.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
In his practice, Osborn said, he recommends a multi-capsule daily multivitamin to his patients.
Vitamin usage is just one aspect of longevity, the doctor pointed out, along with genetics, lifestyle, socioeconomic status and access to health care, among other factors.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“The multifactorial nature of longevity means that isolating the impact of multivitamins alone is complex and challenging, if not impossible,” Osborn said.
“There are just too many potentially confounding variables.”
The study highlights the importance of “rigorous scientific inquiry” into the health benefits of multivitamins, according to the doctor.
Vitamin usage is just one aspect of longevity, a doctor pointed out, along with genetics, lifestyle, socioeconomic status and access to health care.(iStock)
“In my opinion, multivitamins should be taken, as most Americans are malnourished — certainly not calorically, but in the context of vitamins and minerals.”
Looking ahead, the researchers emphasized the importance of measuring multivitamins’ impact on mortality in more diverse populations with different medical conditions and dietary habits.
“It is important to evaluate multivitamin use and risk of death among different kinds of populations, such as those with documented nutritional deficiencies, as well as the potential impact of regular multivitamin use on other health conditions associated with aging,” they wrote.
Fox News Digital reached out to the study researchers for comment, as well as the vitamin manufacturers PharmaVite (NatureMade), Nestlé Health Science (Garden of Life and Nature’s Bounty) and Life Extension.
Pool parties make for a fun and exciting way to spend time with your loved ones. Imagine playing games, chatting, and enjoying the beautiful weather – all while being in the pool. However, a pool party would be incomplete without delicious food and drinks. Since everyone is in the pool, it may not be practical to have extremely indulgent foods. But what you can certainly have on your menu are light and easy-to-eat snacks – something that doesn’t create a mess. If you’re planning to host a pool party soon and looking for snack ideas, we’ve got you covered. Here, we’ll be sharing five such lip-smacking snacks that will surely wow your guests.
Here Are 5 Lip-Smacking Snacks You Can Serve At Your Pool Party:
1.Rajma Kebab Sliders
Sliders are basically small burgers, popular for eating on the go. Prepare these tasty rajma kebab sliders for your pool party and impress your guests. They feature rajma kebabs stuffed in butter buns and topped with cheese, pudina chutney, and vegetables. They may seem small in size, but they offer a burst of flavour in every bite. Click here for the complete recipe for Rajma Kebab Sliders. Also Read: 5 Refreshing Drinks That You Can Serve At Your Pool Party
Photo Credit: iStock
2. Tandoori Chicken Nuggets
Chicken nuggets are an all-time favourite. Now, take a break from the regular version and try this one infused with tandoori flavours. They offer an irresistible crunch and are oh-so-flavourful. Easy to binge on, they make for a stellar snack to serve at your pool party. Don’t forget to serve them with a cheesy dip. Find the complete recipe for Tandoori Chicken Nuggets here.
Photo Credit: iStock
3. Cheesy Chips Chaat
Do you love chaat as much as you love chips? This recipe combines the goodness of both to make a lip-smacking snack. All you have to do is spread your favourite chips on a plate and top them with onions, capsicum, tomato, coriander, and chaat masala. Drizzle cheese sauce all over and indulge in heavenly goodness. Click here for the complete recipe for Cheesy Chips Chaat.
Photo Credit: iStock
4. Paneer Popcorn
Another delightful snack you can serve to your guests is paneer popcorn. Soft paneer cubes are coated in a masaledaar batter and then deep-fried until golden brown and crispy. It’s quite indulgent and ready in just under 20 minutes. Your guests are sure to love it and will come running to you to ask for the recipe. Click here for the complete recipe for Paneer Popcorn.
Photo Credit: iStock
5. Peri Peri Chicken Rolls
These chicken rolls give a spicy twist to the classic recipe. To make them, boneless chicken pieces are marinated with a blend of spices, including peri-peri. They are then cooked and wrapped in a paratha to create a wholesome roll. Pair these rolls with spicy pudina chutney and enjoy! Click here for the complete recipe for Peri Peri Chicken Rolls. Also Read: Going For Swimming Session? 5 Foods To Avoid Before Hitting The Pool
Photo Credit: iStock
Serve these delicious snacks at your pool party and let us know how your guests liked them. For more interesting recipes, keep visiting our website.
Approval of Epkinly was based on results from the Phase I/II EPCORE trial in patients with relapsed or refractory follicular lymphoma who have already completed two or more lines of systemic therapy.
We give the Boxiecat litters an overall rating of 5 out of 5 stars.
Variety: 5/5
Cleanliness: 5/5
Cat Appeal: 5/5
Value: 5/5
Boxiecat is a revolutionary cat litter brand started in 2009 by cat lover Josh Wiesenfeld. Wanting a better litter box experience for both himself and his cat, Josh had an idea to improve the typical dusty litters that offer poor odor control while also exposing their users to harsh chemicals. Those typical litters, Josh knew, could not only have a negative impact on a cat’s health over time, but could also discourage kitties from using the litter box, resulting in frustrating behavioral problems that are often hard to rectify.
So, Josh started with the basics, creating a litter with absorbent clay and a proprietary blend of probiotics that effectively eliminate odor-causing bacteria in the litter box. But he didn’t stop there – Boxiecat’s founder also designed a litter with UV crystals, invisible to the human eye, but extremely inviting to kitties, helping prevent litter box aversion. Today, the Boxiecat line of cat litters consists of a variety of options to meet every cat’s and human’s needs, but the Boxie Pro and Boxie Glo lines continue to excel at what cat owners need most – a clean fuss-free litter that kitties like using.
At a Glance: What We Reviewed
About Boxiecat
Where is Boxiecat made and what is their mission?
This California-based business set out with a mission to “be a force for good – for animals, people and the planet,” and did so by creating not only a cleaner litter for the house and the planet, but also one that would attract cats to use it when all else had failed. All products by Boxiecat are manufactured in the United States and utilize natural ingredients like bentonite clay, silica gel, corn, and wheat, with no added perfumes or dyes. This makes their line of cat litters eco-friendly, pet-friendly, and people-friendly. Furthermore, this small family-owned business led by founder and CEO Josh Wiesenfeld is committed to doing its part to help homeless animals and does so by regularly donating litter to shelters.
Which Types of Cats is Boxiecat Best Suited For?
Every indoor cat can benefit from using Boxiecat litters. Because it is designed to be almost 100% dust-free, it is unlikely to be irritating to the cat’s (or cat guardian’s) respiratory system. And because it does not contain any harsh chemicals that could be inhaled or ingested, it is a safe product for long-term use. Where this line of cat litter really shines though is the instances when it’s used to introduce former outdoor cats to the litter box, or as a reintroduction to appropriate litter usage by cats that have become litter box avoidant. This is due to the revolutionary Glo segment of the brand, which is designed to appeal to three of the cat’s major senses – vision, smell, and feel.
Key Features
When it comes to cat litter, there really is no “one-size-fits-all.” Every cat owner knows how particular kitties can be, not to mention, cats view the world very differently than we do. Something that may seem appealing to us can be utterly revolting to our whiskered friends. For example, consider a covered litter box. To us, it may look cozy for the cat, and we enjoy that it prevents us from seeing a messy mound in the litter box. But a cat may very well view that covered box like we view a porta-potty – YUCK! That’s why Boxiecat has provided us pet parents with so many options, all of which are extremely affordable. Now we can find the right litter to make us and our cats happy.
Scent-free Clumping Clay with Probiotics
Clay cat litter, specifically, the clumping kind, is the gold standard of cat litter. Most clay litters do a good job at absorbing moisture and clumping into one solid lump that can easily be removed from the litter box. But most clay litters also have added perfumes to mask the scent of urine and feces, which can irritate a cat’s nasal passages, resulting in respiratory issues, and even dissuade the cat from visiting the litter box as often as they need to, if at all. This litter box avoidance can in turn cause urinary tract infections or result in urination/defecation on inappropriate surfaces in the house.
Boxie Pro clay clumping litters are different. Formulated with naturally absorbent bentonite clay and a proprietary blend of probiotics to eliminate odors, not mask them, there is no need for harsh chemicals or added scents in these litters. And they are nearly completely dust-free, meaning almost no airborne particles to be inhaled by you or your cat.
Clumping Clay with Cat Attractants
The Boxie Glo version of Boxiecat’s basic clay clumping litter takes bentonite clay and makes it extra attractive to fussy kitties in three ways:
Glo Light Attractant – UV sparkles similar in appearance to urine proteins that tell Kitty “this is the place to go”
Glo Outdoor Attractant – a mild scent reminiscent of the great outdoors, therefore especially useful for cats previously accustomed to living outdoors
Glo Paw Feel Attractant – special granules designed to feel like desert sand from where our domestic house cats originated in Africa
Boxie Glo clumping clay litter has proven vastly effective in redirecting litter-avoidant kitties back to the litter box and is great for introducing feral or outdoor cats to the litter box for the first time.
Clump-free Scent-free Crystals with Probiotics
Although clay clumping litter is generally the most popular litter of any brand, there are legitimate reasons why it may not be the ideal litter for your household. Sometimes, lightweight, clump-free crystal litter is the way to go. This unusual-looking litter is generally white in color and made of silica beads derived from quartz sand. It works by absorbing and evaporating liquids and dehydrating solid waste, and does not clump, meaning the cat owner only has to scoop solid waste from the box. This can be a benefit for a disabled person, or a person that is away from home a lot and unable to scoop the box frequently. Crystal litters are also lightweight, which some cats prefer, particularly those with arthritis. And finally, crystal litters are naturally very low dust, contributing to a cleaner litter box experience.
Boxie Pro crystal litter provides all the usual crystal litter benefits but goes the extra mile by featuring probiotics to ensure odors and bacteria are eliminated from the litter box after the cat has used it.
Clump-free Crystals with Cat Attractants
Cats that have never used crystal litter before may not immediately recognize it as an acceptable litter box substrate. That’s where Boxiecat’s magical sensory attractants come into play again. The Boxie Glo version of Boxiecat’s crystal litter has the typical low-dust silica beads which absorb and evaporate moisture and eliminate odors, with the added benefit of the same sight, smell, and feel attractants found in the Glo clay litter.
Clumping Barley with Probiotics
Another great option for picky kitties is the 99.9% dust-free Boxie Pro Air litter, a probiotic-rich, plant-based clumping litter derived from barley and especially great for cats with arthritis that may find digging in heavy litter painful. It’s also great for declawed cats, which often experience long-term pain or tenderness around their missing toe tips. Boxiecat’s lightweight barley litter is likely to produce more tracking outside the litter box, but this is easily addressed by using a litter mat. Barley litter is also biodegradable and made from a renewable resource, making it more eco-friendly than clay litter.
Clumping Corn with Cat Attractants
Another eco-friendly, biodegradable cat litter, Boxie Glo Clumping Corn litter is a great choice for people concerned for our planet’s future. It is also 99% dust free and great at stopping odors. And because it is part of the Glo line of Boxiecat products, it of course contains the three proprietary cat attractants that address sight, smell, and feel to help guide kitties to the litter box. Corn litter is also considered one of the safest litters for humans and cats alike.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
What are probiotics and how do they work?
Probiotics are harmless living microorganisms that digest bacteria and eliminate odors. By adding these probiotics to their litters, Boxiecat has ensured their Pro line of products provides chemical-free deodorization of the litter box 24/7.
I read bentonite clay sometimes contains heavy metals like arsenic, lead, and mercury. Are there heavy metals in Boxiecat clay litters?
Bentonite clay is a natural product from our environment, and as such, can naturally contain some levels of these heavy metals. It is important to note that this is a potential concern in virtually all clay cat litters, of any brand, and just one important reason why we must reduce toxins where we can. The Boxiecat brand has avoided adding harmful chemicals and fragrances to their clay litters for exactly this purpose. It’s also the reason they offer other types of litter besides clay, so that every cat guardian can choose the right litter for their household.
Do the Boxiecat crystal litters contain harmful silica dust?
Crystal litters are naturally very low dust, but furthermore, Boxiecat crystal litters do not contain harmful crystalline silica, which is a carcinogen. Instead, their litters are formulated with silica gel, which is generally safe for humans and animals.
How expensive are Boxiecat litters?
Not expensive at all! In general, a 30-day supply of any litter from their website costs between $20 and $26. Keep in mind that this is for one cat – a multi-cat household will obviously go through a bag of litter quicker.
What if my cat doesn’t like the Boxiecat litter that I choose?
Boxiecat provides a 100% Satisfaction Guarantee on all their cat litters and will replace or refund one bag purchased through their website. If your purchase was made through a 3rd party retailer, and that retailer will not refund or replace the bag, Boxiecat will provide a replacement item, but is unable to accommodate cash refunds.
Do make sure, however, that you are following best practices when attempting to switch your existing cat litter to Boxiecat. Some cats will not appreciate a sudden change, and may need a transitional period, during which a layer of the new litter is applied to the bottom of the box and covered by an inch or two of their old litter. This gradual approach should help your cat accept the change without difficulty.
Reviews of Boxiecat’s Pro and Glo Clay Litters
1. Boxie Pro Clumping Clay Litter
This bentonite clay litter features a proprietary blend of probiotics formulated to eliminate bacteria from the litter box. Bacteria tracked from the litter box by your kitty could end up on other surfaces that your cat comes into contact with, so the fact that this litter is essentially self-cleaning is a big step towards a cleaner household, not just a cleaner litter box. Bacteria are also responsible for odors in and around the litter box, making this probiotic-rich litter great at minimizing or eliminating these smells at the source. Since the probiotics are handling the dirty work, there’s no need for harmful added sanitizing or deodorizing chemicals. And Boxie Pro’s clay litter transforms urine into solid clumps that are easily scooped and removed from the litter box.
Pros
Natural bentonite clay
Hard clumping
Self-cleaning
40-day odor control
Tracking resistant
9% dust free
No added fragrance
No cheap fillers
Cons
Heavy litter
Not biodegradable
2. Boxie Glo Clumping Clay Litter
This cat litter takes hard-clumping bentonite clay and adds something special – three special things in fact, which can be found in the ingredient list on the back of the bag. The first is silica gel, which comprises the special silica bead granules engineered to feel like desert sand on Kitty’s feet. The second is an olfactory attractant, which is great for attracting cats to the box as it replicates the smell of the outdoors where cats instinctually want to do their business. And the third is a special UV coating which creates sparkles only your cat can see. Why are special kitty sparkles important? Because something else that sparkles are urine proteins. So when your cat sees the UV sparkles in the box, it thinks, “Yep, this is where I go to the bathroom.”
Managed workspace platform Smartworks has raised ₹168 crore this year from investors, including Keppel, Ananta Capital Ventures Fund I, Plutus Capital, family trusts, and certain high networth individuals in private funding rounds.
The promoters continue to hold majority shareholding in the company. Keppel., Mahima Stocks Pvt Ltd and Deutsche Bank A.G. London Branch are among its prominent investors.
Neetish Sarda, Founder, Smartworks, said, “Capital from the latest fund raising will be used for growth and expansion and to meet general corporate expenses. We remain committed to our growth.”
Louis Lim, CEO, Real Estate of Keppel said, “Since Keppel’s initial investment in 2019, Smartworks has grown to become India’s leading managed workspace platform. Keppel remains committed to supporting Smartworks’ growth. This investment maintains our long-term involvement in India’s commercial office market as we look to expand Keppel’s office portfolio in the country and support its rapid urbanisation through our innovative urban space solutions.” Keppel has invested $29 million in the company to date.
In FY24, Smartworks added new centres such as Golf View Corporate Towers in Gurgaon, Logix Cyber Park in Noida, Amar Tech Center and 43EQ in Pune and Olympia Pinnacle in Chennai. Some of the large campuses in the company’s portfolio include Vaishnavi Tech Park in Bengaluru, M Agile, 43 EQ and AP81 in Pune.
As of March 31, 2024, Smartworks had a presence in 13 cities and its portfolio comprised 41 centres spanning across 8 million sq ft.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PRETRAŽILI smo Index Oglase u potrazi za zanimljivim nekretninama i ovaj put našu pažnju privukao je stan od 60 kvadrata u centru Splita, koji se prodaje po cijeni od 6500 eura po kvadratu.
Nalazi se na četvrtom katu zgrade
Stan se nalazi na četvrtom katu zgrade, a uskoro se planira ugradnja lifta, navedeno je u oglasu. Nekretnina je kompletno adaptirana 2024. godine i od tada nitko nije boravio u stanu. U oglasu je naglašeno da su prilikom renovacije korišteni materijali najviše kvalitete dostupni na tržištu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogled na more
U oglasu je istaknuto da stan u vlasničkom listu ima 60 kvadrata, no stvarna površina iznosi 68 kvadrata zbog pregrađenog balkona. Sastoji se od predsoblja, dnevnog boravka s kuhinjom, dvije spavaće sobe, kupaonice te ima i ostavu u podrumu veličine oko 8 kvadrata.
Stan ima pogled na more, na grad i na Marjan. U oglasu je naglašeno da je ovaj moderni stan idealan ne samo za život već i za iznajmljivanje. Besplatan parking je dostupan u krugu zgrade.
Oglas možete vidjeti OVDJE.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
He shed the bulky knee brace strapped around his right leg, stuck his vault cold to open one of the biggest competitions of his life, and Brody Malone still didn’t crack a smile as he scurried off the mats at Target Center on Thursday.
Malone’s mission is far from done.
In second place after the first day of Olympic trials, the three-time U.S. champion is in a strong position to earn his second Olympic team berth with 85.100 points in the all-around. He trails 2023 world all-around bronze medalist Frederick Richard, who surged into the top spot in the final two rotations and finished with an 85.600.
The top all-around finisher locks in a coveted Olympic berth on the five-man team that will be announced Saturday (2 p.m. PDT, NBC). Malone, third-place finisher Shane Wiskus (84.300 points) and Yul Moldauer, who is tied for fifth (83.700), are vying for their second Olympic berths.
Brody Malone talks about his performance, including how he’s handling the nerves of the U.S. Olympic gymnastics trials. (Thuc Nhi Nguyen / Los Angeles Times)
An encore Olympic performance seemed improbable for Malone when he was on an operating table in Germany in March 2023.
Competing in the event finals at the DTB Pokal Team Challenge, Malone peeled off the high bar on his dismount and mangled his right knee. He was rushed to surgery, one of three procedures he needed to repair ligament tears, cartilage damage and a fractured tibial plateau. Brett McClure, USA Gymnastics men’s high performance director, was on the floor in the arena and didn’t think he would see Malone perform again.
Then the former Stanford star won his third U.S. championship this month in his first all-around performance in 17 months.
“Absolutely incredible,” McClure told reporters Wednesday. “It’s mind-blowing. Obviously from my position, high performance director, I want to just see him safely get through Olympic trials. That’s not good enough for him. He wants to go out there and win.”
Malone started with a triumphant vault in the first rotation, sticking his routine while competing without his knee brace for the first time. The brace is designed to push the joint inward while on floor and vault to reduce pain. But it was pushing against his shin and affecting his run. Competing without it marked another major milestone in his comeback.
“Sticking it was the cherry on top, for sure,” Malone said, finally smiling.
Malone’s only misstep came on pommel horse when he nearly slipped off the apparatus, but he muscled through the traveling element to stay on as the crowd exhaled. The slip-up allowed Richard and Asher Hong to jump briefly into a tie for first place over Malone, passing the veteran by just five-hundreths of a point after four rotations.
Brody Malone competes on the still rings at the U.S. Olympic trials on Thursday.
(Abbie Parr / Associated Press)
Hong, who won the all-around national championship in 2023 during Malone’s absence, bounced back from a 10th-place finish at the U.S. championship to finish Day 1 tied with 2023 world championships teammate Moldauer in fifth place (83.700). Moldauer slipped off the pommel horse in his opening routine but rallied with the night’s second-best parallel bars score of 15.150.
Stanford star Khoi Young, who won silver medals on vault and pommel horse at the world championships — a breakthrough event for the U.S. men, who claimed the bronze team medal — struggled on high bar and pommel horse and slipped to 12th.
The mistakes were uncharacteristic for the 21-year-old, who was the first American man to win multiple event medals at a world championships since 1979. Stanford coach Thom Glielmi said he’s never seen Young make those mistakes in practice, let alone competition.
But the trials are no normal meet.
“For a lot of us, it’s the biggest competition of our lives,” Malone said. “All the guys out there that haven’t made the Olympics before, this is their ticket to go. So I mean, of course the nerves are going to be going crazy. Even us that have been to the Olympics before, we want to go again, so the nerves are there for sure.”
Wiskus turned the nerves into energy, thanks to his home court advantage. The Spring Park, Minn., native is competing just 20 miles from his hometown. After a floor routine that pushed him from fourth to second in the standings, Wiskus held one hand to his ear to soak up the adulation from the fans. When he completed his final routine, finishing his rings performance with a small hop on the dismount, Wiskus clapped up a cloud of chalk dust, pumped his fist at the crowd and pounded his chest.
Normally the mild-mannered Midwesterner wouldn’t play to the crowd as much. Maybe when he was younger, an atmosphere like this would rattle him, Wiskus said. Hearing the roar from the crowd when he was introduced helped him let loose.
“I allowed myself to have some fun considering what could potentially be the last meet of my career,” the 25-year-old said.
With another strong performance Saturday, Wiskus could extend his career all the way to Paris.
Google Chrome has launched five new features for Android and iOS systems that are supposed to offer an improved search experience to users across smartphone devices and tabs. The popular web browser has recently rolled out various new features such as “Listen to this Page” and “Minimized Custom Tabs” which are recent additions to it.
Now, Google has introduced more Chrome actions for search inquiries, a remodelled search bar for select devices, new shortcut ideas, and more. New features allow more Chrome Actions for local search queries. While searching queries for local businesses, like information regarding a nearby restaurant, users will now have three new selections- Call, Directions, and Reviews. This feature is already available on the Android platform and soon it will be accessible on the iOS platform as well.
The Google Chrome address bar available on tablets has also been restyled in assent with Google’s Material You design language. While searching, the website will still be available to the user located in a new drop-down menu. It is said that Google Chrome has also enhanced its shortcut suggestions considering users’ varied typing practices. The tech giant has said that it will assist users to sail across to a website depending on what they usually search to get there.
Google has also introduced Trending Searches for the iOS platform. This feature is already accessible on Android devices since 2023. Users will be able to simply click on an empty address bar to know the trending searches being listed and choosing a trending search will highlight other searches linked to that subject. Google Chrome has also launched live sports cards on the Discover feed, which will help users receive automatic updates and know how their favourite sports teams are performing if earlier they have searched for the same. As per the report, this feature can also be modified by navigating to the three-dot menu.
India has strengthened its position as a land of contrasts with a rich and diverse culture, stunning scenery and vibrant festivals. India promises an unforgettable experience for travellers so, are you planning a trip to India this summer?
India in summer: 5 travel tips to ensure memorable and enjoyable trip (Photo by Third Eye Traveller)
The Indian subcontinent experiences extremes in temperature throughout the year but summers are a different phenomenon altogether. In these times, visitors/travellers who are travelling to India can have a hard time, provided that they don’t get properly guided in terms of making the most out of their trip.
This is why it is important to plan carefully and be aware of the potential challenges you may face. In an interview with HT Lifestyle, Harish Khatri, Founder and MD at India Assist, suggested a few tips for travellers visiting India during the summer months –
1. Travel without worries with medical assistance: Ensuring your health is a top priority while travelling. India’s geography coupled with the lively cities present a number of opportunities for exploration. However, the intense Indian summer may require more than just being hydrated and protected. Travellers can get access to a travel assistance provider and get prompt medical assistance, support — in case they experience any health issues or medical concerns.
2. Be prepared with lost and found services: Travellers may give way to new unexpected occurings or instances when they travel to a new place or country. Keep an account of your belongings, and be as alert & proactive when heading into uncharted territories. It is generally a good practice. However, in the event of losing your belongings or facing other unforeseen challenges, travel assistance providers can offer all round lost and found services to help locate and recover your items swiftly.
3. Overcoming language barriers with 24×7 help desk: India is a goldmine for travellers looking to dive deep into the rich amalgamation of cultures and traditions. As a traveller, you get the chance to engage with locals, savour regional cuisines, and participate in vibrant festivals. For travellers pulled down by communication challenges, owing to language barriers posing a hurdle — getting access to a 24×7 help desk by a reliable travel assist company can be a smart move, as languages & the cultures keep changing with every mile in India.
4. Emergency transit for the safety: There are travellers who like moving around bustling markets or hovering through high footfall tourist spots, without breaking a sweat. However, things can go haywire or take turns for a chaotic encounter, so it is important to hope for the best and prepare for the worst. Emergency transit assistance gives you that extra bit of liberty to be carefree when travelling across a country like India that’s an amalgamation of various cultures and diversities. Knowing that you can have transit help available is a different boon altogether and thus, comes in handy.
5. Police support for peace of mind: Travellers often attract unwanted attention as well, and there can be times that it can get bothersome for you. Police support can be handy for a foreign travellers coming to India during summers, because this way — they may travel freely knowing that they are protected. An ideal travel assistance company can be the bridge between you and the police, providing necessary support when you need the most.
Harish Khatri said, “The aforesaid tips, alongside making the most out of a travel assistance company in India can enable you to set yourself on an amazing journey to the beautiful country even during the hottest months of the year. Travellers can book high quality travel assistance service by contacting tour and travel operators or get the help of travel agents to do the same for them. An able travel assistance partner can help you pack your bags and set yourself up on a journey that is worth the time and resources.”
The wait is finally over as the first full day of Glastonbury Festival kicks off, boasting a stellar lineup of top-tier and fan-favourite artists. Whether you’re braving the mud at Worthy Farm or soaking up the atmosphere from your sofa, this year’s diverse roster promises something for everyone.
Big-name headliners like Dua Lipa are primed to get festival-goers moving later in the day, but with over 200,000 people descending on the festival this year, there’s a wealth of other acts performing throughout the day across the entire festival site. From a nostalgic trip with Sugababes to a heavier set from Bristol rock band IDLES, there’s plenty to choose from.
Attendees will be pleased to hear that despite some morning drizzle, the quintessential British summer sunshine is expected to make an appearance later in the day, just in time for some of the biggest acts. But whether you’re a die-hard Arlo Parks fan or keen to discover someone new, it’s crucial to know exactly when and where they’re playing – navigating the festival site can take some time.
Below is a list of all the acts gracing the five main stages at Glastonbury today, but remember, there are more stages, acts, and performances happening across the site throughout the day. For a comprehensive look at the full line-up, check out the Glasto website.
Right, so it’s time to figure out which SUV has the biggest chops in a straight line.
But, these aren’t just any SUVs – thee are some of the fastest SUVs on the road, but each of them have a trick up their sleeves. We have a Rolls-Royce Cullinan with Mansory gear, a Mercedes-AMG G 63 with Brabus kit and finally a limited-edition, invite only Lamborghini Urus Performante Essenza SCV12.
The winner goes up against the all-electric Korean missile: the 2024 Hyundai Ioniq 5 N.
Thanks again to Hyundai for helping cover the cost of putting this series together – it’s MEGA expensive to do, so without support it wouldn’t have happened, you can read more about that here.
The cars
‘Man, I’m Sorry’ – it’s what it sounds like when you say Mansory ten times fast… It’s also what a lot of people say when they see a Mansory-fettled car. This time the kit is fitted to a Rolls-Royce Cullinan, the last car on earth you’d think would need some Mansory work done to it.
This particular car has a full Mansory body kit (along with interior enhancements), as well as a new exhaust system designed to help the V12 engine breathe, and of course, it sits on 24-inch alloy wheels and is lowered.
It uses a 6.75-litre twin-turbocharged V12 petrol engine that produces 420kW of power and 850Nm of torque. It has eight on the tree – an eight-speed automatic transmission with column shifter – and has an official 0-100km/h time of 5.2 seconds.
One of the rarest SUVs on the market is the green missile we have here. It’s the Lamborghini Urus Performante Essenza SCV12 – only available to purchase if you’ve already purchased 1 of 40 $3.5 million Essenza SCV12 race cars.
It uses a 4.0-litre twin-turbocharged V8 that produces 490kW of power and 850Nm of torque. It’s mated to an eight-speed automatic transmission and has a claimed 0-100km/h time of 3.3 seconds.
But, given this car is brand new, the launch control function doesn’t work just yet, which should even up the playing field.
The SUV with three exhaust pipes on each side, that’s the Mercedes-AMG G 63. It’s priced at $363,561 before on-road costs, but it’s not quite stock – this one has a carbon Brabus body kit and a Stage 1 engine tune.
It uses a twin-turbocharged 4.0-litre V8 engine and sounds absolutely incredible. It’s also mated to a nine-speed automatic transmission.
In stock form it cranks out 430kW of power and 850Nm of torque, its Stage 1 tune adds an exhaust system (explains the extra exhaust pipe on each side…) as well as bumps to power and torque.
The attainable challenger
Priced from $111,000 before on-road costs, the fully electric Hyundai Ioniq 5 N uses a dual-motor all-wheel drive electric powertrain producing 448kW of power and 740Nm of torque.
Those outputs increase to 478kW and 770Nm with the N Grin Boost function – which can be mated to the launch control function as well. It has a claimed 0-100km/h time of 3.4 seconds with the N Grin Boost function active.
It also has a bunch of other functions like the ability to destroy tyres, make engine sounds, and even pulse fictional gear shifts to make it feel like an internal-combustion car with a DCT.
The results
We were expecting the G 63 to walk both the Lamborghini and Rolls-Royce, but it didn’t quite end up that way.
Even with the launch control function not working in the Lamborghini, it was incredibly fast across the quarter mile.
But, none were quite fast enough to beat the Hyundai Ioniq 5 N!
Vehicle
0-100km/h
80-120km/h
1/4 mile
Mansory Rolls-Royce Cullinan
5.44s
3.15s
13.29s @ 173.78km/h
Brabus Mercedes-AMG G63
4.51s
2.74s
12.59s @ 176.85km/h
Lamborghini Urus Performante Essenza SCV12
4.48s
2.63
12.43s @ 188.88km/h
Hyundai Ioniq 5 N
3.52s
1.86s
11.32s @ 195.92km/h
MORE: Drag race | Countach v 812 Competizione v SF90 v Hyundai Ioniq 5 N MORE: Drag race | 1800hp blown Holden v 650hp Hyundai EV MORE: Drag race | Hyundai v Lamborghini v Ferrari v Porsche v Brabus Mercedes-AMG MORE: Drag race | McLaren Elva v KTM X-Bow MORE: Everything Hyundai Ioniq 5
While Stanley Lifestyles’ IPO listing is positive, it falls short of pre-listing expectations that likely anticipated an even higher premium due to the overwhelming investor response, says Shivani Nyati, head of wealth at Swastika Investmart.
On the BSE, Stanley Lifestyles’ shares started the trade at Rs 499, reflecting a jump of 35.23 per cent; later, they soared 38.21 per cent to Rs 510
Stanley Lifestyles IPO Listing: Shares of luxury furniture brand Stanley Lifestyles Ltd on Friday listed with a premium of over 35 per cent at Rs 499 on the BSE, against the issue price of Rs 369. On the BSE, the stock started the trade at Rs 499, reflecting a jump of 35.23 per cent. Later, it soared 38.21 per cent to Rs 510.
On the NSE, shares of Stanley Lifestyles it listed at Rs 494.95, up 34.13 per cent.
“While this performance is undoubtedly positive, it falls short of pre-listing expectations that likely anticipated an even higher premium due to the overwhelming investor response,” said Shivani Nyati, head of wealth at Swastika Investmart.
The Stanley Lifestyles IPO received a 96.98 times subscription on the last day of subscription on June 25.
She added that the strong listing signifies investor confidence in Stanley Lifestyles’ established brand, diverse product portfolio, and consistent financial performance. However, the high IPO valuation and identified risks, such as dependence on sofa and recliner sales and geographical concentration, warrant careful consideration.
“Existing investors may HOLD their shares with a suggested stop loss of 450,” Nyati said.
The Rs 537-crore initial share sale had a fresh issue of up to Rs 200 crore and an offer for sale of up to 91,33,454 equity shares. The initial share-sale had a price range of Rs 351-369 per share.
The net proceeds from the fresh issue to the tune of Rs 90.13 crore will be used by the company towards expenditure for opening new stores, Rs 39.99 crore expenditure for opening the anchor stores and Rs 10.04 crore expenditure for renovation of existing stores.
Funds to the tune of Rs 8.18 crore for funding the capital expenditure requirements for the purchase of new machinery and equipment by the company and its material subsidiary, SOSL (Stanley OEM Sofas Ltd) and for general corporate purposes.
Bengaluru-based Stanley Lifestyles is among the few Indian companies operating in various price categories, including super-premium, luxury, and ultra-luxury, through its multiple brands.
The company operates two manufacturing facilities in Bengaluru.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
Tokenomics is one of the indicators of a successful project, as the token distribution shows the developers’ plans for development and community engagement. Shiba Inu’s token supply has been a major downside to the SHIB price growth, and Notcoin (NOT) might need a token burn soon, given its huge supply.
Raboo ($RABT) has taken notes from current meme coins, and apart from profits and fun, there are many plans that contribute towards longevity too. There is a total supply of 1.8 billion $RABT tokens, and 1,134,000,000 of them are allocated to its current ongoing presale
We also have news on the ongoing RABT presale.
Shiba Inu: Token burns to keep the SHIB price alive
Meme coins launch with typically large token supplies, which is to ensure the token is available to everyone. However, the mass of tokens can end up preventing the price from spiking.
An example is the Shiba Inu project that launched with about 1 quadrillion tokens in 2020. The vast supply has come back to haunt, as the SHIB price readily backs down upon encountering resistance levels. Shiba Inu has also not been able to reach a new ATH since 2021, as selling pressure and the crypto winters affected the platform’s development.
Shiba Inu has made a strategic move by burning tokens in an attempt to boost its price by fostering scarcity. As of June 25th this year, over 410 trillion tokens have been burnt.
Notcoin: Launch, airdrops… burning next?
Notcoin recorded one of the biggest launches in the crypto-verse this year, as users rallied to get a slice of what it has to offer. NOT started its campaign in December 2023, and its earliest investors were rewarded with the highest returns by May when Notcoin hit the charts.
Since the launch, we have seen more Notcoin offerings too, especially the recent airdrops. These events deliver more NOT tokens in circulation, however, the project should be considered profit-taking and selling pressure. Already, Notcoin has experienced the aftereffects of a token dump.
The NOT price fell by 11% last week after its airdrop, indicating profit-taking. Even now, most of the holders are simply waiting for more surges on the NOT charts before swapping their holdings for other altcoins.
It’s a lot of experience on tokenomics from the existing memes and gaming tokens, and, as usual, Raboo has been taking notes.
Raboo: Tokenomics to ensure long-term gains
Unlike the typical meme project, Raboo has kept its token supply under two billion, typically because it intends to see the $RABT token price maintain an upward trend. With a tight grip on its supply and the majority of the tokens with the community, Raboo is safe and secure for the future.
Firstly, 63% of the total 1.8bn supply is dedicated to its presale ensuring the $RABT users have the advantage in decision-making. Still, on distribution to the users, 7.5% of the token supply has been set aside for rewards that’ll boost Raboo users’ wallets, providing they participate in fun-packed games and competitions.
Their contributions come in the form of posting GIFs and pictures for meme creation. As the users post their meme-worthy content, the platform rewards them with $RABT tokens in return.
For marketing and branding, the Raboo developers dedicated 17% of the tokens to contribute towards campaigns across media platforms. Lastly, Raboo’s token burn event (2.5% of the token supply) is in place to keep the $RABT price in check at all times. 1.8 billion tokens is still a lot to circulate, and the deflationary measures ensure that user assets are safe from price manipulation.
Conclusion
While Raboo is concerned with changing the quality of memes in the market, the project’s token distribution depicts clear-cut plans for the future. Plus, the community is at an advantage in decision-making already, as they will hold a large part of the $RABT supply.
And with a 100x pump pending when Raboo gets listed on top-tier exchanges, an investment in $RABT is almost a no-brainer. But you have to hurry–the presale token supply won’t last forever.
Get your Raboo tokens at $0.0048 today, and settle in for dream profits.
Tamil Nadu Assembly on Friday unanimously adopted a resolution passed by the Chief Minister urging the Centre to scrap NEET at the national level and exempt the State from using it for medical education.
Moving the resolution, Chief Minister MK Stalin said that the NEET examination system severely affects the medical education opportunities of poor rural students. It makes schooling redundant and deprives state governments of the right to admit students to State Government Medical Colleges, and thus, it should be abolished.
The Tamil Nadu Legislative Assembly unanimously urges that the Centre should immediately provide its assent to the NEET Exemption Bill, which was unanimously passed by this Legislative Assembly, to exempt Tamil Nadu from this examination and to provide medical admissions based on the 12th standard marks obtained by students in school education and considering the repeated irregularities in the NEET examinations, he said.
He said the Union Government should also amend the National Medical Commission Act to abolish the NEET system at the national level.
From some angles it seems as if thermal coal, the world’s dirtiest fuel, is having a tough year. Prices are down a bit. China, which gobbles up over half the world’s supply, is in economic trouble; a surge in hydropower generation there is squeezing out the fuel. In May G7 members agreed to phase out coal plants, where emissions are not captured, by 2035. Mining stocks are trading at a huge discount.
Toys “R” Us released a video made with a new artificial intelligence tool at the Cannes Film Festival on Monday, but not everyone wants to be a Toys “R” Us-AI kid. The toy retailer said in a statement that this was the first brand video created using Sora, which is a text-to-video tool from ChatGPT creator OpenAI. Sora isn’t yet available publicly, but the company was given special early access.
The 1-minute AI-generated video shows a young boy representing Charles Lazarus, the late founder of Toys “R” Us. He falls asleep and wakes in a dream world filled with toys of all types, including an animated version of store mascot Geoffrey the Giraffe. A wistful version of the store’s I Wanna Be a Toys ‘R’ Us Kid jingle plays, and a photograph of the real Lazarus posing with a costume version of Geoffrey is shown.
A teaser was released on YouTube, but you need to go to the Toys “R” Us Studios site to watch the full video.
Toys “R” Us closed its last US stores in 2021 but later opened toy departments inside of Macy’s department stores, keeping the nostalgic name alive.
But some now-grown Toys “R” Us kids weren’t comfortable with their childhood icon diving into the world of artificial intelligence.
More than 9,500 people liked a tweet on X from writer and comedian Mike Drucker, who wrote, “Love (that) this commercial is like, ‘Toys R Us started with the dream of a little boy who wanted to share his imagination with the world.’ And to show how, we fired our artists and dried Lake Superior using a server farm to generate what that would look like in Stephen King’s nightmares.”
Videos, music and dialogue using AI continue to stir controversy in the entertainment world, with concerns ranging from fears of AI replacing human workers to how easy it is to pass off AI images or sounds as real. Sometimes the reaction to AI is positive, as in 2023, when former Beatle Paul McCartney said an AI program was used to pull the late John Lennon’s voice off an old tape to make what’s been called the final Beatles song.
But last month, Sony Music Group and its affiliates spoke out against the use of music from its artists to train AI systems. A song that used AI to mimic singers Drake and The Weeknd was submitted for two Grammy Awards in 2023, forcing the musical academy to hastily set rules regarding AI and its awards. And singer Taylor Swift and President Joe Biden are among those who’ve had their voices imitated by people trying to scam others. Every new venture into the world of AI brings more questions, it seems, and with a brand name as well-known as Toys “R” Us, backlash seemed inevitable.
‘We weren’t going to hire a giraffe’
When asked by NBC News about criticisms about the potential of AI to replace human workers, Toys “R” Us Studios President Kim Miller Olko said there was a lot of “fear out there” about AI. Miller Olko said about a dozen humans worked on the video over three months, the same amount of people that would work on a non-AI job.
“Geoffrey is an animation. He’s a cartoon,” Miller Olko told NBC. “We weren’t going to hire a giraffe, you know what I mean? This was an animation.”
Representatives for Toys “R” Us and OpenAI didn’t immediately respond to requests for comment.
What is Sora?
“Sora” means sky in Japanese, and as CNET’s Connie Guglielmo wrote in February, the AI tool has earned attention for the photorealistic videos it can create.
“Sora is able to generate complex scenes with multiple characters, specific types of motion, and accurate details of the subject and background,” the company says on its site. “The model understands not only what the user has asked for in the prompt, but also how those things exist in the physical world.”
Open AI also says on its site that the company is building tools to help detect misleading content, such as a detection classifier that can tell when a video was generated by Sora, and plans to include C2PA metadata to indicate that Sora was used in an OpenAI product.
For more news, tips and reviews on artificial intelligence, check out CNET’s AI Atlas hub.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
A new solution may be on the horizon for the 30 million people in the U.S. who suffer from sleep apnea.
In a Finland study, a new breathing device showed promising results in reducing symptoms of the disorder, according to researchers.
The device, called WellO2, uses resistance training to strengthen throat muscles and steam breathing to humidify airways.
UNTREATED SLEEP APNEA PRESENTS ‘DISRUPTIVE’ DANGERS TO PEOPLE’S LIVES, INCLUDING HEART ISSUES, SAYS EXPERT
In the small study conducted by University of Turku’s Sleep Research Center, 25 participants with mild to moderate sleep apnea used the device at home twice a day for three months, breathing in and out 30 times per session.
At the end of the study period, the participants reported increased respiratory muscle strength, reduced nighttime breathing interruptions, improved sleep quality and decreased insomnia, according to a press release.
In a Finland study, a new breathing device, shown at right, has shown promising results in reducing symptoms of the disorder, according to researchers.(iStock/WellO)
Snoring occurrences were also reduced.
The findings were presented on June 5 at the Nordic Lung Congress 2024 in Helsinki, Finland.
SLEEP DEPRIVATION DANGERS: HOW PULLING AN ALL-NIGHTER AFFECTS YOUR PHYSICAL AND MENTAL HEALTH
The study will now be peer-reviewed by the scientific congress, then will be published later this year, according to the researchers.
The device, called WellO2, uses resistance training to strengthen throat muscles, plus steam breathing to humidify airways.(WellO2)
“Currently, there are no available technologies or medications to treat sleep apnea,” lead author Dr. Usame Al-Rammahi, a doctoral researcher of pulmonary diseases and clinical allergology at the University of Turku, told Fox News Digital.
“Our first data suggest that respiratory muscle training may be the answer that not only alleviates symptoms, but also addresses the underlying cause of OSA by strengthening muscles.”
IS ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE THE SECRET TO BETTER SLEEP?
CPAP (continuous positive airway pressure) is currently the most common treatment for sleep apnea — but about a third of patients struggle to adapt to it, Al-Rammahi noted.
WellO2 is designed to be used as an add-on therapy with CPAP.
CPAP (continuous positive airway pressure) is right now the most common treatment for sleep apnea, yet about a third of patients struggle to adapt to it.(iStock)
“Even though CPAP should be used as needed, WellO2 training can be used as an additional therapy, since it addresses underlying reasons and may lessen CPAP adverse effects by moistening the airways,” Al-Rammahi told Fox News Digital.
“There is no quick fix for respiratory rehabilitation.”
“Nonetheless, given that the study compared their results to each participant’s personal findings, those persons were the controls,” Al-Rammahi said.
“Despite the lack of a control group, the findings remain important. Qualified questionnaires were used, and polysomnography (PSG) was a thorough and trustworthy procedure that provided substantial results.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Dr. Chelsie Rohrscheib, a neuroscientist and sleep specialist at Wesper in New York, was not involved in the study but commented on the device’s potential.
“Sleep apnea is primarily caused by obstructions in the upper airway that block the flow of oxygen into the lungs,” she said.
Approximately 30 million people in the U.S. suffer from sleep apnea.(iStock)
“This device is designed to strengthen the muscles of the upper airway and reduce these obstructions from occurring,” she also told Fox News Digital.
While the device was shown to offer “some improvement” when tested in a small population of patients, Rohrscheib noted that use of the device was only correlated with “moderate improvement” in the number of respiratory events.
“That means it’s not guaranteed to work for every patient or to completely eliminate your sleep apnea symptoms,” she said.
“Further, the device was not tested in patients with severe sleep apnea — thus, patients should not rely on this device alone for treatment for their sleep apnea without the guidance of a sleep physician.”
“Patients should not rely on this device alone for treatment for their sleep apnea without the guidance of a sleep physician,” a sleep expert said.(WellO2 )
Katri Lindberg, a respiratory specialist nurse in Finland who works with WellO2 as a breathing expert, said she recommends WellO2 training regularly for individuals who want to stop snoring or for whom CPAP devices are not suitable for treating sleep apnea.
“The research results are only preliminary findings from a small study, but they provide strong indications that we have found a rehabilitation tool that can now rehabilitate the symptoms of a large group of people worldwide, rather than merely alleviating them,” Lindberg told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“The study also indicates that there is no quick fix for respiratory rehabilitation. To remove symptoms and keep them at bay, regular, although relatively small, amounts of respiratory training are needed.”
India, a land known for its tradition, culture, and diversity, showcases stark differences in languages, festivals, attire, and most importantly, food. With an incredibly vast and rich landscape, our street foods serve as incredible culinary delights for everyone. Whether in the hustle and bustle of metropolitan cities or the tranquillity of small towns, street food is a treat for both locals and tourists alike. With a rise in veganism, people have become more health-conscious regarding their dietary preferences. Plant-based foods are gradually gaining more and more popularity. But does our country, a melting pot of flavours, have something for vegans craving street food?
Here Are 7 of The Best Vegan Street Food Options For Anyone Who Wants To Enjoy A Conscious Indulgence:
1. Aloo Tikki
A crispy potato patty full of different spices and topped off with sweet and spicy chutneys is an all-time favourite. This mouthwatering delicacy is often stuffed with peas, making for a delicious snack.
Aloo Tikki Photo Credit: iStock
2. Golgappa or Panipuri
Anyone who comes to India and does not try this absolute crowd favourite is missing out! Hollow, crispy puris filled with spicy, tangy water, tamarind chutney, and a mixture of potato and chickpeas, panipuri is sure to put a smile on the face of anyone who eats it.
Street Foods Like Golgappa And Sev Puri. Photo: iStock
Also Read: Gujarat Street Vendor Introduces “Rainbow Panipuri” With Unique Ingredients
3. Bhel Puri
This spicy and crunchy delight is a burst of flavours in one’s mouth. A mixture of puffed rice, spices, chopped vegetables, and tangy chutneys makes for a delicious and healthy vegan snack option.
Bhel Puri Photo Credit: iStock
4. Sev Puri
If you want something savoury and spicy, this street food is for you. Crisp, flattened puris topped with onions, potatoes, chutneys, and a generous amount of sev (crunchy chickpea noodles), sev puri is an absolute treat.
Sev Puri Photo Credit: iStock
5. Idli
Travelling to the south of the country, one is most likely to indulge in idli, a small, steamed cake made of rice and lentil flour, usually served with savoury coconut chutney and hot, steaming sambhar, a flavorful vegetable stew. This is a personal favourite of any South Indian.
Idli Photo Credit: iStock
6. Momo
A steamed dumpling stuffed with flavorful vegetables and served with spicy red chutney, momos are an ultimate joy for any foodie out there. Although their fillings may vary, a steamed vegetable momo makes for an amazing vegan snack.
Momos Photo Credit: iStock
Also Read: Momo Mania: 7 Best Street-Style Momo Places In Delhi
7. Kanda Bhaji
If you want a fried option, these onion fritters made with chickpea flour and spices are truly delectable. Kanda bhaji, also known as onion pakoda, served with chutneys, will definitely leave you wanting more.
Vegan Indian Street Food Dishes. Photo: iStock
These vegan street foods are a clear example of the diverse and absolutely mesmerising flavour palette of the country. Regardless of your food preferences, India offers a wide spectrum of street food that will surely satisfy all your cravings.
The internet celebrities Kouvr Annon and Alex Warren married over the weekend on a bright, sunny day in California. Their guest list was laden with content creators, including Charli D’Amelio, which wasn’t surprising given their history. The pair, who began dating in 2018 and got engaged on New Year’s Eve in 2022, were once members of the social media collective Hype House and have more than 30 million TikTok followers collectively.
One of the creators in attendance, Lilah Gibney, has since received blowback after posting several videos taken during the wedding on June 22 at the Ethereal Gardens, a wedding venue in Escondido, Calif. On TikTok, Ms. Gibney posted a teaser video the next day, featuring intimate moments from the couple’s ceremony, including their first kiss and Ms. Annon walking down the aisle. In her TikTok post, Ms. Gibney directed viewers to her YouTube channel, where they could watch a longer vlog she had made using clips she filmed during the event.
Online, some social media users were quick to criticize Ms. Gibney for sharing content from such a personal moment, particularly given that Ms. Gibney had posted her video before the couple had a chance to put up their own wedding video. “Did you even ask if you could vlog her wedding?,” read one comment on Ms. Gibney’s TikTok account. (Ms. Annon and Mr. Warren have since posted their official wedding video.)
Neither the bride nor groom responded to a requests for comment, but Ms. Annon reposted a video from another influencer, @mattiesbasement, which called out people who vlog at weddings. “Why would you do that? It’s a wedding, it’s not a theme park,” the creator said in the video. “Maybe be in the moment like a little bit.”
“Period,” Ms. Annon commented on the video. Mr. Warren also responded: “This is a very VALID take,” he wrote.
Ms. Gibney, who initially agreed to discuss the situation, was not available for an interview on Thursday afternoon. She has since deleted her YouTube video and posted a video on TikTok addressing the situation. In her response, Ms. Gibney explained that vlogging is her way of showing affection. “It is very, very, very tragic that people, you guys, millions of people can’t understand that my way of showing gratitude and love for anybody is showing my experiences,” she said in the clip.
She also stated that she had not noticed any signs at the ceremony or reception location, nor had she been asked not to share wedding-related content online. (On TikTok, social media users have shared an image of Ms. Annon holding a sign from the wedding requesting guests put their phones and cameras away for the ceremony.)
Meredith Bartel, a wedding planner and the owner of Plus One Planning in Wisconsin, said that having signs like these are a good step if couples want to ensure a phone-free wedding. She also suggested that couples include a section on their wedding website detailing phone rules for the event, and that the officiant make a verbal announcement just before the ceremony begins.
“Then the guests have either been told three times, or at least they’ve just been told one time that they can’t deny. The officiant said it, put it away,” Ms. Bartelsaid. If a couple knows a wedding guest might not comply with the rules, she suggested having a designated person — like a trusted relative or an event coordinator — on duty to keep an eye out and intervene if necessary.
“It should be socially understood that we shouldn’t be taking photos during the ceremony,” she added. “It’s disruptive and what does the couple want with an iPhone photo that’s taken between two people’s heads when they’ve hired a photographer.”
Couples who want social media content to post on their wedding day might consider hiring a professional wedding content creator. Lauren Ladouceur, a New York-based wedding content creator and the founder of Plan With Laur, works with couples to capture their wedding day and edit photos and videos specifically for social media.
“In more traditional wedding media, you are paying a photographer or videographer for a service,” Ms. Ladouceur said. “However, you may not see those deliverables for a couple of days. Could be a week, could be a couple of weeks. This allows you to start reliving your wedding day instantly.”
As for rules for guests about what and when to post, Cameron Forbes, a New York-based event planner and the founder of Forbes Functions, suggests taking cues from the couple. “Wait for them to start sharing any imagery or posting before you do,” Ms. Forbes said. “You don’t want to beat the bride and groom for the punch.”
The Complete Response Letter was issued as a result of inspection findings at a third-party manufacturing facility, unrelated to patritumab deruxtecan’s efficacy or safety in patients with advanced or metastatic EGFR-mutated non-small cell lung cancer.
We give the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail a rating of 4.95 out of 5 stars.
Quality: 5/5
Ease of Setup: 4.9/5
Ease of Use: 4.9/5
Value: 5/5
When my nephew was born in the ‘90s, I was amazed the first time I saw my sister change his diaper. It wasn’t because I had never seen a diaper changed – it was because of the Diaper Genie. That unassuming-looking pail next to the changing table that the dirty diaper disappeared into. Out of sight, out of mind! Never would I have guessed that one day I would be enjoying that same technology next to the litter box. But thanks to a long line of innovators, the Litter Genie is now a real option for cat owners everywhere. The story of today’s Litter Genie surprisingly started in the UK with a similar product for baby diapers, the precursor to today’s Diaper Genie. In 1999, American brand Playtex purchased Diaper Genie, and would later collaborate with baby-centric Canadian brand Angelcare to bring a similar product for cat litter to market, naming it, appropriately, the Litter Genie.
So why would brands normally focused on women and children start making pet products? Well, to put it simply, it would be pretty silly to keep that Diaper Genie technology out of the rest of the home. In fact, Angelcare recently introduced the Compost Genie for the kitchen, and the Pet Genie for disposing of dog waste inside or outdoors. Angelcare is now selling their Genie line of self-contained disposal systems globally to make household dirty jobs a breeze. Anyone wanting a cleaner home with less effort should be adopting these air-tight, odor-locking pails into their lives.
About the Litter Genie
Litter Genie’s owner, the Quebec-based Angelcare, got its start way back in 1997 with new father Maurice Pinsonnault. His first product was a baby monitor, and the company only grew from there. In 2012, Angelcare teamed up with Diaper Genie’s manufacturer Playtex to introduce the kitty waste disposal pail known as the Litter Genie. Made in North America, the Litter Genie is available for purchase through multiple retail websites globally, as well as many brick-and-mortar locations. Today, the Genie brands are all owned by Angelcare, and the Litter Genie line features six convenient styles depending on your needs, including two extra-large versions for homes with multiple cats.
Every pail is neutral in color and small enough to fit in a corner or under a countertop, making them unobtrusive and convenient to use. This innovative pet product is a must-have for cat owners everywhere, whether you have one sweet kitty or several. The simple yet genius design traps smelly waste products inside an odor-locking interior liner, while a sliding insert at the top seals the bag from the room air. No more searching for a plastic bag when it’s time to scoop the litter. No more frequent trips to the garbage can outside. And no more unpleasant odors around the litter box either. Whenever you see a lump in your cat’s litter: scoop, dump, and seal – you’re done!
Easy Roll Pail Overview
Pricing
The cost of any model of Litter Genie, as well as the bag refill cartridges, is shockingly affordable. Of course, prices will vary depending on which retailer you purchase from, but in general, a pail can be purchased for less than $40, and a refill insert is less than $20. There is certainly nothing cost-prohibitive about these products, further proof that every cat owner should have one. In fact, if you have litter boxes in multiple areas of your home, there’s no reason you can’t have a Litter Genie sitting next to each one. The current Amazon price as of June 2024 for the Litter Genie Easy Roll pail is $34.98, with its appropriate refill (which should last a single-cat household 6 months) costing just $18.10.
Contents
When you receive your Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail, you will not only receive the main canister, but also a litter scoop with a convenient holder that mounts to either side of the pail. Also included is a single roll of perforated liners, 24 bags in all, that is estimated by Litter Genie to last a single cat up to six months. And to help get you started, you will find an informational booklet with thorough instructions of how to assemble and use your new Litter Genie. There are detailed photos to go along with each step, but if you have difficulty with any part of the process, check out the brand’s official YouTube channel for easy-to-follow instruction videos.
Warranty
Litter Genie offers a 1-year warranty on all their pails, refills, and accessories. If you have an issue with any of their products within one year of purchase, click the HELP button on the brand’s website and submit your information for review. If the Litter Genie team accepts your warranty claim, they will issue a replacement part or product. This warranty only applies to items used under normal conditions and according to the manufacturer’s guidelines. It is also only applicable to customers in the USA and Canada. Replacement items will only be protected under the original warranty from the initial purchase date.
Pros & Cons
Pros
Convenient size
Neutral color
Affordable
Air-tight
99% recycled plastic
Attached litter scoop holder
Odor-locking liner
Easy bag removal
Perforated liner refills
One bag lasts up to 8 days
One refill roll lasts up to 6 months
1-year warranty
Cons
No carry handle
No wheels on bottom
Limited color options
Warranted only in USA and Canada
Key Features
Air-tight pail: On the front of this plastic pail is a sliding handle that pulls out to allow waste to fall into the interior plastic liner, then slides shut to effectively seal the bag from the room air. A hard plastic lid closes on top to further seal in any odors produced by the bag’s contents.
Perforated, Odor-locking liner: The multi-layer interior liner bag is not only sturdy enough to resist rips and tears, but also incredible at locking in odors. The Easy Roll refill also has an important feature not available in Litter Genie’s other refill rolls – perforated segments. No more cutting, twisting, and tying when it comes time to replace the bag. Just tear at the perforated line and you’re good to go.
Attached litter scoop holder: The Easy Roll Pail, like all Litter Genie models, comes with its own litter scoop, as well as a handy scoop holder that attaches to either side of the pail. This feature further ensures the cleanliness of the litter box area, as the dirty end of the scoop never has to touch anything besides the litter box contents and the inside of the scoop holder.
Convenient size: The small size of the Easy Roll Pail makes it easy to store anywhere, even in tight spaces. At right about 17.5” tall, this pail can slide under a desk or countertop, or sit next to the litter box or in a corner without getting in the way. Whether you live in a large house or a small apartment, this Litter Genie pail is sure to be a perfect fit.
Over 1-week waste capacity: For single-cat households, one Easy Roll bag should be able to hold up to eight days of waste, locking in odors for the duration. This makes the entire process of cleaning the litter box a breeze. You can scoop the litter box every time you notice a clump without worrying about what you’re going to do with the bag. Waste is stored until you’re ready to dispose of it. The 8-day timeline means you can address disposal whenever your normal cleaning day is for that area, whether it’s on your day off from work or on the weekend.
Is the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail a Good Value?
At less than $40 to get started, and up to six months before a refill purchase is needed, the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail is an incredible value. This time-saving litter disposal system not only makes litter box cleaning a much easier process for the human in the room, but it also encourages daily scooping compliance, meaning a cleaner box for your cat. Kitty will thank you for your investment!
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
How easy is the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail to use?
Very easy! The Easy Roll Pail comes with a detailed instruction booklet, but if you have any initial difficulty with the setup process, daily use, or learning how to remove the bagged waste from the pail, Litter Genie’s YouTube channel has a great instructional video. Once you’re all set up, just scoop the litter box, drop the soiled litter in the pail opening on top, and pull the handle on the front of the pail to let the waste fall into the bag. Pushing the handle back seals the bag until next time. When it comes time to change the bag, simply open the top to access the mouth of the bag, pull the bag out, and tear at the perforation underneath. Once you secure the new bag to the lip around the top of the open pail, you’re all set for the next eight days.
Does it really lock in odors?
Yes! The multi-layer plastic liner does a great job of locking in odors, but on top of this, the pail itself has an airtight design. No smells are getting out once the sliding handle seals the bag off and the outer lid is closed.
How difficult is removal of the waste bag once full?
Not difficult at all. Simply press the button on the front of the lid to open the pail and access the bag, then loosen the mouth of the bag from the lip of the pail opening and pull the full bag straight up. Once you remove the bag, the next bag is attached at the bottom via a perforated line – just tear it off and secure the mouth of the next bag to the lip of the pail.
Our Experience With the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail
A Litter Genie is the cat accessory I never knew I needed, and now can’t imagine living without. For the last 20 years, I’ve been using plastic grocery bags for my soiled kitty litter. Find a bag, inspect for holes, discard two or three bags before finding one with no tears, then on to the litter box. Once scooped, I find myself with a bag full of stinky clumps, and there’s no letting that sit around, so now I’m headed outside to the garbage can – something else that’s very stinky because it already has a pile of grocery bags inside it that are each full of a day’s worth of kitty clumps.
Since getting the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail, life has been different for both me and my cat, Luna! Instead of a cabinet full of crumpled plastic grocery bags, I now have a convenient way to keep the litter box clean – a sleek, unassuming contraption that sits next to Luna’s litter box in my guest bathroom. Setup was pretty straightforward using the included instruction manual. It took me a moment to correctly load my first refill cartridge of liners in the underside of the pail, as the rectangular box has to be positioned a certain way to be able to close the compartment. I also wasn’t initially attaching my scoop holder correctly to the side, so every time I opened the top of the pail, the holder fell off. I thought this was a design flaw until I watched Litter Genie’s YouTube video about the Easy Roll Pail – now I have the scoop holder attached correctly and it does not fall off at any time. The one missing feature I feel would improve the Easy Roll Pail would be wheels on the bottom or a convenient carrying handle for when I want to move the pail to a different location.
Not only is the entire process of scooping the litter box super simple for me now as a kitty caretaker, but my cat Luna gets to enjoy a spotless litter box nearly 24/7. Every time I walk in the bathroom and see a clump in the box, or my cat’s footprints in the litter, I grab my Litter Genie scoop off the side of the pail and get to scooping! There’s no searching for a plastic bag, I just dump the soiled litter in the opening on top of the Litter Genie and pull out the sliding handle. Once the clumps drop into the bag, I slide the handle back to seal it off, and then close the lid. It really could not be any easier! And I love that I don’t have to immediately take the bag of my cat’s soiled waste outside. Old grocery bags do not lock in odors, but the Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail does. Now I can wait to take the full bag of soiled litter out to the garbage when I am doing my normal weekly cleaning of the bathroom.
Conclusion
The Litter Genie Easy Roll Pail makes human and cat lives better by ensuring cleanliness in and around the litter box. Not only does this clever waste disposal system save kitty guardians time and effort, but it is also reducing plastic waste around the planet. The pail is made of 99% recycled plastics, and the Easy Roll refill produces less plastic waste than other Litter Genie refills, an estimated 80% less! So the next time you go to the grocery store, make sure to take your reusable cloth grocery bags because you won’t need those plastic bags anymore.
Godrej Capital, the lending arm of the Godrej Industries group, is planning to enter the affordable housing loan segment even as the total assets under its management are seen growing 59-68 per cent to ₹17,000-18000 crore in the current fiscal.
“This year, we will be incubating the affordable housing business,” Managing Director Manish Shah told businessline. Currently, it lends home loans with an average ticket size of ₹68 lakh. In the affordable segment, it would likely be looking at loans in the range of ₹10-30 lakh, but the company is still deciding on that.
The non-banking lender ended FY24 with assets of ₹10,700 crore, with around 45 per cent of it accounting for home loans and 55 per cent lending to small and medium enterprises. In the current year, the split is likely to be 40 per cent for home loans and 60 per cent for small businesses, Shah said.
The lender has a long-term aim of reaching ₹50,000 crore by the end of FY28.
Housing segment
Getting into the affordable segment is part of the company’s strategy to further homeownership. “Everybody in the country cannot buy a 50-lakh-and-above home,” pointed out Shah.
The government thrust on affordable housing, refinance availability from the National Housing Bank and opportunities in the segment were some factors instrumental in pushing the company into the affordable category. When the Modi administration took charge for the third term, almost the first announcement made was on providing assistance to build three crore more homes under the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana.
Shah added that in the mid-income category, where it is at currently, there are already plenty of options for homebuyers. On the company’s entry into affordable home loans, he said, “This is our incubation year.”
In the current year, the company expects its home loan portfolio to be at around ₹6,000-7,000 crore. Its home loans are priced at 8.55 per cent onward.
SME loans
The SME loan book is seen rising to ₹11,000 crore this year, as it sees more small businesses integrated into the formal economy.
Last year, it incubated the unsecured business loans segment, which has assets of ₹1,450 crore now. Loans in this segment are priced from 14 to 19 per cent. It is also planning to grow its MSME secured loan business to ₹1,000 crore this year.
“When we look at small businesses, the opportunity we see is large and the progress we are seeing now is in a one-size-fits-all type approach to small business financing,” Shah said. It has also made a start with dairy farmer financing, leveraging on the ecosystem within the group, Creamline Dairy Products, which buys milk from farmers.
The advent of the Goods and Services Tax and being part of the supply chain had brought more companies into the formal economy, ensuring that they had books of accounts that can be assessed for their creditworthiness. Digitisation of land records has also made it easier to get documents that can authenticate ownership of collaterals.
Most of Godrej Capital’s loans are to companies with a turnover in the range of ₹5-50 crore. Shah said that over time it might lend to companies with revenue lower than ₹5 crore.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LJETO je savršeno vrijeme za osvježenje vaše kolekcije parfema. Kada je riječ o muškim mirisima, ove sezone su popularni bogati citrusni tonovi poput sicilijanskih naranči i bergamota, uz note ambera, mošusa i pačulija, idealne za složenije mirisne doživljaje.
Donosimo vam popis najboljih ljetnih mirisa za muškarce prema mišljenju W Magazinea. Bez obzira na vaš stil ili priliku, ovi parfemi će obogatiti vaše ljetne dane i noći, ostavljajući snažan dojam gdje god se pojavite.
Louis Vuitton Afternoon Swim
Luksuzan i osvježavajući, s notama bergamota i đumbira, ovaj miris je idealan za cijelu godinu, a posebno za ljetne dane.
Creed Aventus
Ovaj sofisticirani miris kombinira note limuna, ananasa, ružičastog papra i jasmina, pružajući dojam luksuza i elegancije.
Hermès H24 Herbes Vives
“Ako bismo trebali zamisliti što bi savršeni muškarac nosio ovog ljeta, lako je zamisliti da odabere ovaj energičan i neosporno muževan miris”, navodi W Magazine. Može se pohvaliti savršeno odmjerenom mješavinom biljnih nota, u sredini ima notu kruške, a baza je molekula Physcool.
Acqua di Parma Blu Mediterraneo Mirto di Panarea
Za ovaj parfem W Magazine ističe da bi ga bolje polovice lako mogle ukrasti od partnera za sebe. Mješavina je prekrasno kreativna, s notama mirte, bosiljka, smreke, talijanskog limuna i jasmina koji stvaraju osvježavajuću energiju.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Costa Azzurra Tom Ford
Posljednji parfem Toma Forda savršen je za samopouzdane muškarce. Ovaj miris miješa ekstrakte hrastovog drveta i cedra s nježnim dodatkom ambera.
Jo Malone Cypress & Grapevine
Ovaj novi miris spreman je postati klasik”, navodi ovaj američki časopis. Intrigantna kombinacija čempresa i vinove loze daje ovom mirisu drvenast, ali svjež karakter.
Bulgari Pour Homme
Za ljubitelje prirode, ovaj miris nudi spoj zelenih i drvenastih nota. Tako u sebi kombinira note čaja, bergamota, lavande, mandarine, papra, irisa, ciklame te mošusa, cedra, hrastove mahovine i ambera. Odličan izbor za muškarca koji voli ljetna večernja druženja na otvorenom.
By Kilian Blue Moon Ginger Dash
Ovaj miris je dobio ime po poznatom party piću iz 1990-ih. Parfem sadrži arome đumbira i votke, obavijene bijelim mošusom za dodatak topline. Savršen za ljetne zabave.
Jo Malone London Wood Sage & Sea Salt
Inspiriran britanskim obalama, miris spaja tople note ambrete s osvježavajućim tonovima morske soli i kadulje, čineći ga savršenim izborom za sofisticiranog, ali istovremeno muškarca sklonog avanturama.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
It was scorching hot the other day at Angel Stadium. Scott Boras did not need to be there, chatting up players several hours before a game between two of the three worst teams in the American League. He did not need to be there the previous day, when he did the same thing.
And he certainly did not need to be in Modesto over the previous three days, perspiring even more, as he looked at minor league players. Boras, the most famous agent in baseball, employs about 150 people. No doubt one of them could have checked out the Nuts. (No, really, the Modesto team is called the Nuts.)
Boras is 71. The rebellious young agent who repeatedly ferreted out million-dollar loopholes in baseball’s draft system is no longer young, in an era his rivals are more likely to run on Red Bull than red wine. He could be taking a bow and winding down, not gearing up for yet another winter of staring down major league owners.
What else would he do? He tells the story of how he could not enjoy a summer vacation in Paris because, as much as he loved art and museums, he loved baseball even more, maybe too much.
“I had to leave two days early because I didn’t sleep,” he said, “because every night at 3 o’clock I was watching all the games on the iPad.”
Boras is the agent fans love to hate, the face of blame for fans who believe players make too much money or exhibit too little loyalty, or both.
He steals the spotlight at the winter meetings simply by holding an extended press conference, talking baseball without divulging any major news, firing off puns and metaphors — some funny, others cringeworthy — and grabbing headlines at an event where most team executives prefer to hide in their hotel suite.
No other major agent is so readily available. He is not beloved among rival agents, but most of them do not mind that Boras willingly absorbs all the slings and arrows from the “players are greedy and agents are ruining the game” crowd.
His list of accomplishments includes: first agent to negotiate a $100 million contract (Kevin Brown, 1998); first to negotiate a $200 million contract (Alex Rodriguez, 2000); first to negotiate $1 billion worth of contracts in a winter (2019-20, and twice more since then).
Yet he is proudest of his work in the draft, even if major league owners have closed the multiple loopholes Boras has exploited. In 1996, one of the loopholes Boras uncovered turned a first-round draft pick — a high school pitcher named Matt White — into a free agent.
The first pick in that draft, pitcher Kris Benson, signed for $2 million. White signed for $10.2 million, and that was 28 years ago.
Scott Boras, right, talks to the media at baseball’s winter meetings in Lake Buena Vista, Fla., in 2013.
(Phelan M. Ebenhack / Associated Press)
“Do you understand that, in today’s draft, no one gets $10 million?” Boras said.
The first pick in last year’s draft, Pittsburgh Pirates pitcher Paul Skenes, signed for $9.2 million. (The league-recommended bonus for the first pick in this year’s draft is $10.6 million; for the majority of the 30 teams, the league-recommended bonus total for all 20 drafted players is less than $10.6 million.)
The league and most of its owners, of course, much prefer a draft to the prospect of the Dodgers and Yankees staging bidding wars for the very best prospects. However, White signed with the Tampa Bay Devil Rays. The lesson — at least for Boras — is that owners have successfully devalued amateur players in part by forcing them to negotiate with one team instead of all 30.
That point — and many of the points Boras makes every year — are not well received by fans. He gets it.
“Be a parent,” Boras said. “What do you want for your son?”
Huh?
“You want the best for your son,” he said. “You want him to have the best medical care. You want him to have the best information. You want him to have the best legal team behind him. This is what we provide.
“You go to the hospital, you’re going to want the best doctors. When you go into this, when you’re a parent, we expect you to think that way.”
And the point is?
“As a fan,” he said, “I want you to love your team. I want you to come to the ballpark. I want you to be that person.
“And I fully expect that, by you feeling you want the best for your team, you’re not going to particularly like that I want the best for the players that are on your team. And that dynamic should never change. It should always be there. We’re happy about it. We think it’s great.
“When you’re a parent, I fully expect you to change course. That’s all I ask.”
It is possible that, if the World Series extends to a full seven games, Boras would turn 72 on the day of Game 7.
The Yankees’ Juan Soto warms up in the on-deck circle as his agent Scott Boras, lower left, talks on the phone during a game at Angel Stadium last month.
(Mark J. Terrill / Associated Press)
He has been a baseball agent for 41 years, never representing players in other sports, never entertaining the idea of running a team. His agency has a succession plan, involving a family trust and the retention of key executives.
He must have friends or family members who have suggested he consider retiring, or at least slowing down.
“I actually don’t,” he said. “They don’t say that to me.”
He thought back to one of his mentors, a labor lawyer who offered him congratulations, and advice, on winning his first salary arbitration case.
“He said, ‘Kid, I’m going to tell you something,’ ” Boras said, “ ‘If you’re representing your client correctly, 95% of what’s said about you will be negative. And don’t ever forget that. But, remember, your clients will love you.’
“He laid it out exactly how it is.”
Boras told me this because the labor lawyer lived — and worked — into his 90s.
“He was writing books to the end,” Boras said.
Also working into his 90s: Ted Lerner, the founding owner of the Washington Nationals, with whom Boras negotiated deals for Bryce Harper, Stephen Strasburg, Anthony Rendon, Max Scherzer and Jayson Werth. Lerner died last year at 97.
“The thing I got from him,” Boras said, “was how to handle that 60 to 95 bracket of your life. He always told me, ‘The mind is a muscle. Keep going, keep going, keep going. Take the time physically to be in shape. Eat right. And never quit.’ “You know what? He lived a great life. Good model to follow.”
WhatsApp to stop working on these iPhones: Reports suggest that WhatsApp has upgraded its minimum system requirements, which will impact WhatsApp functionality on 35 older smartphone models. Considering the new minimum system necessities, phones that still run on older Android versions than 5.0 and older iOS versions than 12 will not be able to receive security and other updates.
It means that any smartphone running on operating systems older than these will not get security updates and will be susceptible to security risks. Users who have older smartphone models will need to upgrade their phones to be able to access new features and security updates of WhatsApp.
As per the report, older devices from brands like Samsung, Apple, Sony, Huawei, and Motorola will be affected by the new minimum system requirements of the popular messaging app. This move will improve the performance and security of the messaging application, at the same time will require users to upgrade their handsets to be able to use WhatsApp services.
List of handsets that are likely to lose WhatsApp services
The list of impacted smartphone devices consists of various prevalent models. Samsung customers who have phones such as the Galaxy S3 Mini, Galaxy Note 3, and Galaxy S4 Mini might need to opt for other alternatives. People with phones like Motorola’s Moto G and Moto X will also be affected by WhatsApp’s move. Apple users having older iPhones like the iPhone 6 and iPhone SE will no longer receive WhatsApp support. Huawei, Lenovo, Sony, and LG users having older smartphone models will also be affected. Here is the list of all affected devices that will no longer receive WhatsApp support
The popular messaging device has announced new system requirements to make sure that users have maximum benefits from the latest security features and app services.
What users can do if their handsets are on the list?
People who are using devices that fall on the list should consider buying or upgrading to a new model. People who continue to use WhatsApp on older models will not have access to new WhatsApp features and will be exposed to major security threats. Upgrading their phone models will help secure their messages, calls, and other sensitive data and ensure a seamless user experience.
Touted among the most spirited and colourful countries around the world, the Republic of Korea, or South Korea, effortlessly fuses its unique culture, immersive experiences, and innovative technology with great balance.
Why South Korea should be your next travel destination for business and leisure (Photo by Twitter/BaSnorkel)
Bustling city streets aglow in neon hues, dramatic landscapes dotted with hills and forested trails, a burgeoning food scene, and deep artisanal culture that takes you 5,000 years back in time–South Korea is every intrepid traveller’s dream come true. Add to it hypermodern architecture dominating the glittering skylines, safe and sustainable convention locations, global connectivity and an impressive range of government-led initiatives for smooth operations together make this East Asian nation an exceptional destination for meetings, incentives, conferences, and exhibitions (MICE).
Get ready to catch the final stages of the World Cup only on Crickit. Anytime, Anywhere. Explore now!
“Korea offers a unique blend of modern infrastructure and rich cultural heritage, making it an ideal destination. From state-of-the-art convention centres to historical venues, the nation caters to all your MICE needs with exceptional facilities and seamless connectivity. The Korea Tourism Organization (KTO) is committed to providing unparalleled support to Indian companies. We offer comprehensive assistance before, during, and after your visit, ensuring a smooth and successful MICE experience,” assures Myong Kil Yun, Regional Director, India & SAARC Countries, KTO.
When it comes to business travel, the country’s strategic location, state-of-the-art infrastructure, unique venues, and vibrant K-culture make it an irresistible choice for Indian companies seeking to host MICE events. So, wherever work takes you in South Korea, expect pleasure to tag along! Here’s why:
* Strategic Location and Connectivity
South Korea’s geographical positioning is enough, for starters, to place it high on the MICE travel map. Situated at the crossroads of Northeast Asia, it offers convenient access to major Asian markets–thanks to a total of eight international airports nationwide, five cruise terminals, and seven domestic airports. Incheon International Airport, which is only a 45-minute train ride away from Seoul, has flight connections to 58 countries and 189 cities across the globe. Flights from India to South Korea are available from multiple cities with several airlines. The airport is well-connected through direct flights from Delhi as well as has numerous one-stop flight options on offer, ensuring seamless travel between the two countries.
Additionally, there are transport services including the AREX airport express train line, KTX–the country’s flagship bullet train line, as well as Korea Tour Card, Discover Seoul Pass, SAFEX (luggage storage and delivery card), Let’s Korail (rail pass), and more to ensure that visitors in South Korea can travel freely and conveniently.
* World-Class MICE Infrastructure
Whether you’re headed to Seoul for a conference or fancy working from Incheon, South Korea’s outstanding MICE infrastructure makes sure your business trip is a breeze. KTO India extends complete support to Indian MICE groups travelling to South Korea, by offering a smooth end-to-end experience–from visa facilitation to logistical assistance. Further, the country ranked second in the Union of International Associations (UIA) Global Meetings Statistics in 2021, attributed to its large-scale convention centres, luxury hotels, and super-fast global internet connectivity with 5G technology. There are a total of 19 regional entities specialised in MICE and 17 cutting-edge convention centres with international accreditation.
As the largest exhibition centre in the country, Korea International Exhibition Centre (KINTEX) in Goyang has 40 meeting rooms and 10 exhibition halls that span 1,08,556 square metres. The capital city Seoul is home to the COEX Convention and Exhibition Centre, one of Asia’s largest, with over 36,000 square metres of exhibition space, luxe accommodations, shopping malls, and cultural attractions. The Busan Exhibition and Convention Centre (BEXCO) is known for its impressive facilities and scenic coastal location. The eco-friendly Songdo Convensia in Incheon is another premier venue, designed to host large-scale conferences and exhibitions. With the cobalt-blue Northern Pacific stretching on the south and towering Hallasan Mountain in the north, Jeju Convention International Centre (JCIC) is the perfect pick if you are on a lookout for a scenic convention location.
* Unique Venues
KTO has been fostering the Korea Unique Venue program since 2017, offering 52 handpicked spaces, where you can feel the distinct concept of the city hosting your MICE event, while enjoying the indigenous charms of the region. These are not your typical MICE facilities like a convention centre or a business hotel, but a selection of unique venues–ranging from museums, temples, to folk villages, islands, and culture parks–that allows you to not only immerse in Korean tradition and culture, but also experience art, leisure sports, Korean Wave, natural scenery and more.
* Unforgettable Experiences
Sure, work trips mean serious business, but after long days of work, it is only fair to make some time for putting your feet up, slowing down, and exploring your destination du jour. And South Korea, a land of dynamic contrasts and unique experiences, is the perfect place to find the balance you seek on your business trips.
From visiting the K-star road at Gangnam in Seoul to a BTS Hybe Store tour to Hologram K-pop concerts, there’s a lot to do in case you wish to immerse in the global phenomenon of K-pop culture. If that’s not your thing, spend your days immersed in 5,000-year-old culture–stay in a temple or a traditional hanok guest house, visit all 16 UNESCO World Heritage Sites, or wear traditional hanbok and saunter around at your own pace in a historic monument or village. Once done, stop by a Korean-style spa for some much-needed R&R through dips in a hot spring and healing therapies.
* Delectable Cuisine
A major hotspot for food tourism, South Korea is the perfect place to experience the true authentic flavours of Korean cuisine that go beyond just kimchi and bibimbap. Korean cuisine, Hansik, is getting popular among gastronomes, including India, thanks to its delicious flavours, health benefits, and aesthetics. From the traditional gujeolpan (platter of nine delicacies), to the pop-culture inspired chimaek (chicken and beer) and Korean BBQ–make sure to indulge wholeheartedly. Also, with more than 100 Indian-friendly restaurants and a wide variety of vegetarian and vegan options, there’s something for everyone in South Korea.
Designed to effortlessly cater to all your MICE requirements, South Korea’s diverse offerings and immersive experiences promise to help you make the most of your business travel from India. Contact Korea Tourism Organization India (New Delhi) at [email protected], or visit the official website of Korea MICE Bureau (KMB) for further information.
Amazon Prime customers will be treated to a bumper selection of free games in July. Amazon Prime is best known for giving subscribers next-day delivery and access to hundreds of films and TV shows via Prime Video. There are, however, lots of lesser-known bonuses available with your subscription, including free games and in-game items on a monthly basis. The Amazon Prime Gaming line-up for July is looking particularly impressive, with more than 20 games available over the course of the month. While there are free games available every month, subscribers can access more games than ever in July, as Amazon gives away additional releases in the run up to Prime Day on July 16.
The free game giveaways have started early for July, as Deceive Inc, Tearstone, The Invisible Hand, Call of Juarez and Forager join the line-up.
That’s on top of a free code for the excellent Card Shark, which sees players attempt to outwit characters using a selection of card tricks in a compelling single-player adventure.
Other games available now include Heaven Dust 2 and Soulstice, the latter of which is described as a “coming-of-age dark fantasy story with fast-paced action”.
New games will join the service on July 3, when Wall World, Call of Juarez: Bound in Blood and stealth action game Hitman Absolution come to Prime Gaming.
It only gets better from here, as wonderful beat-em-up Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Shredder’s Revenge joins the line-up on July 11, alongside Star Wars Knights of the Old Republic 2, Alex Kidd in Miracle World DX and Samurai Bringer.
Developed by Obsidian, Star Wars Knights of the Old Republic 2 is an absolute classic, featuring a complex story full of choices that change the way the narrative plays out.
Three more games join Amazon Prime Gaming on July 18, including influencer sim Youtubers Life 2, as well as unique action game Maneater, which lets players control a shark.
Arguably the highlight of the month, however, is Baldur’s Gate Enhanced Edition, which includes the Tales of the Sword Coast expansion.
With Baldur’s Gate 3 proving so popular when it launched last year, this is your chance to explore the series’ roots and see where it all began.
Next month’s free game giveaways end on July 25, when Cat Quest II, Midnight Fight Express and Masterplan Tycoon all join the line-up.
Midnight Fight Express is a really entertaining action game, featuring a similar combat system to the Batman Arkham games, only with a much different viewpoint and graphical style.
The games will be available to download via a combination of the Epic Games Store, GOG and the Amazon App. Visit the Prime Gaming page to find out more.
Electric vehicle (EV) giant Tesla has been beaten to the reveal of an autonomous robotaxi by a small Croatian firm – albeit one with significant experience in building battery-powered cars.
While all eyes have been on Tesla ahead of its robotaxi unveiling on August 8, Rimac – the makers of the Nevera electric hypercar – announced the launch of Verne, its autonomous vehicle off-shoot.
Its yet-to-be named autonomous pod is planned to be its first vehicle in production, initially rolling out on the streets of Croatia’s capital Zagreb from 2026.
The company says it has “already signed agreements with 11 cities in Europe, [the] UK and the Middle East, and is negotiating with more than 30 cities worldwide, who want to become Verne partners.”
Verne, whose name pays homage to famed French science-fiction novelist Jules Verne, says the robotaxi uses Intel-owned firm Mobileye’s Drive autonomous technology platform, allowing Level 4 autonomous driving capabilities – one level short of full autonomy.
This is due to the presence of a switch – dubbed the Median – inside the cabin which is used to start and stop the ride, allowing occupants to have a small amount of control over the pod.
There’s no shortage of cameras and sensors on the pod’s exterior, which is devoid of traditional mirrors and windscreen wipers to allow for a more aerodynamic shape, increasing its driving range.
Inside, it’s a two-seat affair, with a step-through front end to make it easier for passengers who may have hopped in through one door to shuffle over to the other side.
As some limited-mobility members of the online community have noted though, there doesn’t appear to be space for wheelchairs.
Verne claims its research showed almost 90 per cent of rides required are for up to two people, negating the need for a Toyota HiAce-style van.
The company also boldly claims its pod has more space than a Rolls-Royce, even with a high 43-inch wide display screen sitting in front of its occupants.
Robotaxi users can make use of the booking app to even set their preferred temperature inside the pod, allowing it to be preconditioned for them before it arrives.
Unlike existing rideshare applications which can sometimes result in cancellations, Verne says its users can rest assured this won’t happen to them.
At this stage it’s unlikely that we’ll see Verne’s robotaxi on local roads, as Australia has yet to approve anything higher than Level 2 autonomous driving systems – which include adaptive cruise control and lane-change assistance – for local roads.
The new rule requires that NRIs, overseas citizens of India and resident Indians should not be in control of the applicant FPI.
Sebi tweaked guidelines for registration of FPIs pertaining to NRIs, overseas citizens of India and resident Indians as participant of such foreign investors
Sebi has tweaked the guidelines for registration of Foreign Portfolio Investors (FPIs) pertaining to non-resident Indians, overseas citizens of India and resident Indians as participants of such foreign investors.
Under the new rule, FPIs applying for registration need to ensure that the contribution of a single NRI or overseas citizen of India (OCI) or resident Indian in its corpus is below 25 per cent, according to a notification.
Further, at an aggregate level, the applicant FPI needs to ensure that their contribution in its corpus is below 50 per cent.
The new rule requires that NRIs, overseas citizens of India and resident Indians should not be in control of the applicant FPI.
“The contribution of resident Indian individuals shall be made through the Liberalised Remittance Scheme notified by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and shall be in global funds whose Indian exposure is less than 50 per cent,” Sebi said.
To give this effect, the Securities and Exchange Board of India (Sebi) has amended FPI rules that became effective from June 25.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
Namit Singh Sengar
Namit writes on personal finance, economy and brands. Currently contributing to News18.com as a Senior Sub Editor in the business vertical. Prior to t…Read More
In a dramatic turn of events, Bitcoin (BTC) is poised to hit a monumental $100,000 within the next 30 days, according to a leading cryptocurrency analyst. This shocking prediction has sent waves through the financial community. Yet, amidst this Bitcoin (BTC) frenzy, ETFSwap (ETFS), another prominent player, is capturing investor attention at an unprecedented rate. With its presale tokens being rapidly snatched up, ETFSwap’s remarkable utilities and innovative infrastructure are proving irresistible, driving speculation that it may eclipse Bitcoin’s (BTC) gains in the near term.
ETFSwap’s Exceptional Utilities And Features: The Investor’s Goldmine
ETFSwap (ETFS) is redefining the DeFi landscape with a suite of advanced features that cater to the sophisticated needs of modern investors. At the heart of its appeal is its AI-powered ETF Screener and ETF Tracker. Designed with cutting-edge AI algorithms, these tools provide highly accurate recommendations based on comprehensive big-data analysis. By leveraging historical data, market sentiment, and trend recognition, ETFSwap’s (ETFS) AI delivers predictive and sentiment analysis that is continuously refined with new data.
Investors are also drawn to ETFSwap’s commitment to integrating traditional finance with the decentralized realm of DeFi. The platform ensures tokenized assets are backed by real-world securities, collaborating with MiCa-compliant regulated investment banks. This blend of security and innovation allows the DeFi platform to offer leveraged trading up to 10x, making it a powerhouse in perpetual trading and market making.
It offers an unparalleled user experience with a user-friendly interface and robust security measures. The upcoming beta platform launch, expected in 30 days, has generated significant buzz. Its advanced trading tools provide real-time market data and allow users to manage risks flexibly with 24/7 market coverage. Investors have also been excited about ETFSwap’s future outlook.
The platform plans to launch its own ETF in 2025 and integrate upcoming Solana and Ripple ETFs, which many analysts predict will drive demand for ETFS tokens to soar, with some analysts projecting a 108x increase. The presale price of $0.01831 for ETFS tokens is remarkably affordable, making early investment a strategic move as prices are expected to spike to $0.03846 in the next stage.
Analyst’s Prediction: Bitcoin (BTC) To Hit $100,000 In 30 Days!
Renowned analyst CrediBULL Crypto has confidently forecasted that Bitcoin (BTC) could reach $100,000 within 30 days following its next impulse. Bitcoin (BTC) has been trading within a consolidation range for the past four months, creating uncertainty among investors. However, the CrediBULL Crypto analyst draws optimism from Bitcoin’s (BTC) previous impulse, which saw a 91% gain over 50 days, propelling the price from $38,514 to $73,805.
Despite this bullish outlook, the current market buzz is heavily tilted towards ETFSwap (ETFS). Investors are captivated by the platform’s innovative features and the momentum behind its presale. The potential for significant gains appears more promising with ETFSwap (ETFS), especially given Bitcoin’s (BTC) recent stagnation.
As Bitcoin (BTC) aims for the $100,000 mark, the ETFS presale continues to attract crypto whales and smart investors. The affordable entry price of $0.01831 presents an exceptional opportunity for substantial returns. ETFSwap’s (ETFS) groundbreaking features, including the AI-powered ETF Screener and ETF Tracker, as well as trading tools such as ETF Search and ETF Filter, leveraged trading options, and robust security, all position it as a frontrunner in the DeFi space.
Moreover, favourable market sentiments both from analysts, the approval of spot Ethereum ETFs, and the platform’s future outlook make ETFSwap (ETFS) a compelling investment. Investors who recognize the potential in the platform today stand to gain significantly, similar to the early adopters of Bitcoin (BTC) and Ethereum (ETH).
Conclusion: ETFSwap (ETFS), The Real Investment Deal
While Bitcoin’s (BTC) prediction by analysts to surge to $100,000 within 30 days is exciting, the broader investment community’s enthusiasm is firmly directed towards ETFSwap (ETFS). The platform’s innovative utilities, advanced features, and promising presale performance indicate a higher prospect of gains.
At a presale price of just $0.01831, which is set to rise in the next stage, now is the optimal time for forward-thinking investors to secure their financial future. As Bitcoin (BTC) gears up for a potential leap, ETFSwap (ETFS) is set to do even better, promising unparalleled returns for those who invest early.
Social media offers a volatile space for marketing.
The rules of engagement vary across platforms, as do the audiences and opportunities for brands. The platforms’ popularity ebbs and flows while new challengers emerge, hoping to disrupt the scene and steal the spotlight. Once seemingly stable and reliable, shared media outlets shift their business priorities and become inhospitable.
Nevertheless, social media remains an invaluable channel for delivering your stories, insights, and advice into the hands of content-hungry consumers. Success requires knowing how to approach those content conversations.
A content plan for social media gives you that understanding. It clarifies where to focus your efforts, how to create meaningful connections, and what results you can achieve.
Start by investigating platform options, auditing existing assets, and determining where they best align with the priority goals. Then, turn those insights into an actionable content plan for social media marketing that lets your team know where, when, and what to post.
This guide and content plan template for social media can make the planning process easier and the resulting efforts more impactful.
Make informed decisions
This social media content strategy planning process involves four steps:
Investigate your options: Evaluate prospective outlets to understand the user base, distinct engagement opportunities, and value proposition.
Audit existing assets: Identify distribution-ready conversations, assets that can be repurposed to enhance their appeal, and critical topic gaps to fill with new content.
Identify top opportunities: Map your use cases against prospective platforms to determine which ones best align with your marketing strategy, content goals, and brand values.
Establish procedures and guidelines: Ensure that your team is equipped to uphold your brand’s standards for quality conversations.
Let’s look closer at each step.
1. Investigate your channel options
Each platform’s unique characteristics and consumer preferences factor into its value proposition for content marketing. For example, your audience might be open to a dialogue with brands on X (formerly Twitter) but reserve Facebook for personal conversations.
Those distinct attributes affect the types of content conversations. Authoritative long-form content might play well on LinkedIn and Medium, while short-form videos, memes, and mashups get more play on Instagram and TikTok.
Critically evaluating the social landscape will prevent you from squandering resources on efforts unlikely to drive the desired results.
Use these questions to compare each platform’s audience makeup, profile types, conversation formats, and marketing potential.
Who uses this channel, and how do they use it?
Is it an essential channel for the target personas?
How much time, on average, do users spend here?
What are conversations and interactions like?
What content topics and formats get the most traction?
Do we already produce these types of conversations?
Do we have enough assets/resources to maintain a consistent presence?
Does the platform offer integrated creative tools to scale production?
How do brands engage and market here?
Do brands have different profile page options than other users?
Is there a verification system?
What options exist for boosting organic reach?
How does the platform treat backlinks and referral traffic?
What metrics does the platform provide?
Can we gain a competitive advantage?
Are our competitors active in this space?
What kinds of content/conversations do they share here?
Once you’ve analyzed the platform options, you’re ready to assess the available content.
2. Audit your social media assets
You’re likely familiar with the purpose of a content audit and how to conduct one. An audit in the content plan for the social media process clarifies the stories available and how to position them for optimal impact on the platforms. It can also help reveal topical gaps you can fill to gain a competitive advantage.
For an abbreviated content audit, Intero Digital’s Kelsey Raymond recommends focusing on these three components:
Inventory of existing assets and metrics relevant to your social media goals. These elements give a snapshot of the available content, current format, URLs, and performance.
Data analysis for each asset’s keyword ranking, organic traffic, calls to action, and bounce and conversion rates. Assets that performed well on your site are likely of interest to your audience and worth sharing with your social community.
Competitive and gap analyses. These assessments can pinpoint opportunities where your brand can lead the conversation or topical areas worthy of new asset creation.
3. Identify top social channel opportunities
With a short list of potential channels in hand, map your content assets to their most appropriate distribution channels. Remember to consider the content experiences expected by audiences, determine if you have the resources to meet those expectations, and evaluate the potential to deliver meaningful business results.
Answer these questions to prioritize the platforms. Your responses can also provide clues on how to position your content to compel the audience to act.
Will this channel help us meet our objectives?
Why does it make sense for our business to use it?
Does it offer something we’re struggling to achieve through other means?
What marketing goals will we pursue on this channel?
Does it fit with our editorial mission?
Do the platform’s policies and practices align with our brand vision and values?
Would our content be viewed as trustworthy and uniquely valuable or intrusive?
Is there potential to lead the conversation and/or fill an unmet audience need?
Do we have sufficient team resources to produce quality experiences?
Do our creative and community team members have the bandwidth and flexibility to manage our content activities on this channel?
Do we have the technical capabilities to produce content in the preferred content types and formats?
What results do we want to achieve?
What should we ask fans and followers to do after engaging with our content? Share it? Comment? Visit our site? Subscribe to our newsletter?
Does this channel support those calls to action?
Are community members likely to take those actions, or will we need to provide additional incentives?
Do we have the correct metrics, monitoring, and KPIs to quantify and report our results meaningfully to stakeholders?
If your responses don’t reveal a compelling opportunity to engage on that channel or if the platform’s environment isn’t suited to your brand’s distinct content vision, mission, and capabilities, reserve your team’s resources for channels that are a better fit.
4. Establish social media guidelines and procedures
Everybody responsible for posting the brand’s content on social media should understand and align with your social media guidelines. Documenting the rules of conduct and accepted procedures helps the team maintain consistent conversational, stylistic, and quality standards and deliver a trustworthy experience for your audience.
Refine your company style guide with your social personality and ensure its accuracy and precision. Include the correct use and spelling of unique terms, such as company trademarks, product names, and personnel.
B2B content marketing consultant Erika Heald recommends adding these details to your social media guidelines:
Brand’s social media purpose. Explain why your company exists on each channel and how your social content should support that purpose.
Asset locations. Give your team members shared, centralized access to the needed editorial assets and branding materials, includingcompany logos, article images, profile headers, and more. Keeping this information in one place increases production efficiency and the likelihood of staying on brand.
You should also outline sensitive topics or other issues to avoid discussing, as well as any legal or regulatory policies. You may include instructions for handling issues like:
Disclosures: Outline the required verbiage for promoting your content through sponsored posts or ad placements.
Rights management. Note the accepted processes for securing permission to publish copyrighted images on social and providing proper attribution for quoted source materials.
Use of proprietary insights and assets. Make it clear what materials are and are not approved for use in the brand’s social conversations.
Diversity and inclusivity. Provide details about your brand’s diversity, equity, and inclusion policies, such as using gender-neutral language or images that reflect the diversity of your audience.
Build your social media content strategy plan
Once you have the information to determine where, when, and how to distribute your social content, incorporating it into a plan is simple. Create a matrix of the channels that make the most sense for your brand and note engagement specifics. When all the fields are filled, you have a content plan for social media that can be easily referenced, updated, and shared throughout your organization.
In my experience, it can be helpful to outline as much information as possible in the initial plan so your team can reference it when new opportunities emerge or snap decisions need to be made. But it’s also OK to start simply and build on or refine the fields as you learn what’s working and what isn’t.
The recommended information in your content plan for social media includes:
Who we will reach: Persona(s) most active/engaged on this channel
Target goals/benefits: What this channel will accomplish; any unique opportunities that can’t be achieved elsewhere
Featured topics/content types: Subject areas and assets likely to resonate with this community
Ideal velocity: Frequency and time on this channel; how much time to monitor and contribute to relevant conversations
Formats: Content types proven successful or emerging formats that present a chance to own the conversation in that social space
Tone and rules of engagement: Conversation style and voice; special criteria or considerations to follow (e.g., “280 characters or less,” “avoid enabling videos to play automatically,” “emphasize visuals over text”)
Team resources: Roles/individual colleagues in charge of your brand’s social communities; other personnel authorized to post on the company’s behalf; whom to notify if questions arise or issues escalate
Call(s) to action: Messaging and link URLs for referral traffic
Key performance indicators: Metrics to gauge content performance against marketing goals
Consider adding this information as well:
Keywords and topic tags: Priority keywords in social posts for SEO purposes and relevant hashtags or topic tags to draw your target audience’s attention
Distribution partners: Relevant influencers, industry experts, and community members to mention (using the @ symbol) or hire to help amplify reach and engagement
Promotion opportunities: Paid advertising products and any other platform-specific offerings to strengthen a post’s performance
We created a customizable template you can use to make the process even easier. In the first column, list the platforms you’ve prioritized. Then, fill in the other columns with all the key details of your content plan (you’ll see a reference sample for Facebook is already filled in). Get your copy of the full spreadsheet (registration required).
Make your brand the life of the social media party
No matter how far and wide your business intends to extend its reach, successful content marketing distribution often comes down to having a strategic, systematic, and scalable approach. This model ensures that everyone works from the same social media blueprint, but it’s not the only way to get the job done. Let us know what processes you use to determine where, when, and how you share your content and spread your brand influence.
Updated from a February 2021 article.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Financial services company Motilal Oswal Financial Services Limited (MOFSL) has signed an MoU with IIM Mumbai to revolutionise financial and capital markets understanding at the campus through research, sustainable learning and development.
IIM Mumbai will deliver customised training programs for MOFSL executives and will participate in joint research and case writing.
Also read: Corporate profit to GDP hits 15 year high as input cost moderates
Motilal Oswal, MD & CEO of Motilal Oswal Financial Services Limited, said, “Our strategic partnership with IIM Mumbai is a significant step towards empowering our executives with critical management insights and skills as well as towards contributing to financial inclusion by way of academic intervention.”
Professor Manoj K Tiwari, Director of the Indian Institute of Management, Mumbai, said, “This collaboration will set a new benchmark and set a new standard to establish meaningful and purposeful knowledge sharing and actionable research related to the emerging domain of fintech and tech driven financial management between two like-minded partner”.
Which is the greatest rivalry in tennis? Older players might reminisce about the “fire and ice” contests between the cool-headed Bjorn Borg and the tempestuous John McEnroe; those a generation younger might rave about the all-American duels between Andre Agassi and Pete Sampras. After a two-decade-long era dominated by rivalries between Roger Federer, Rafael Nadal and Novak Djokovic, younger players are at last starting to shine. Carlos Alcaraz and Jannik Sinner, aged just 21 and 22, respectively, produce electric tennis—and have claimed four grand-slam titles between them since 2022. Do not be surprised if they meet again at Wimbledon, which starts on July 1st.
Yet these matchups look tame in comparison with the all-out war being waged between recreational players of tennis and those of pickleball—a sport that has gained widespread popularity in recent years, and which can be played on the same surface. In 2022 police in San Diego, California, had to be called to mediate a dispute when some pickleballers staged a takeover of a local tennis club. In Arlington, Virginia, a group called “Team Pickle-nah” leafleted the area around tennis courts due to be converted into pickleball ones, accusing pickleballers of hijacking courts, bullying children and urinating in public.
Steam is one of the most popular PC gaming platforms, selling more than 400 million total games in 2023, according to Statista. The digital PC gaming service boasts a massive catalog of over 76,000 titles. I first discovered Steam in college — until then, I’d never had my own computer, so the lure of PC gaming proved attractive. What began as a humble dozen games (like Team Fortress 2 and Half-Life) blossomed into a collection of over 220 titles, thanks mainly to Steam sales. (Please don’t ask me how many items from my library I’ve actually played.)
Whether you’re trying to save a few bucks on one of the latest big-name AAA games, want to add more indie games to your digital shelf or need to fill up your Steam Deck hard drive, here’s everything you need to know about Steam sales, including the Steam Summer Sale that started on June 27 at 10 a.m. Pacific Time (1 p.m. Eastern Time).
When are the next Steam sales?
There are four main Steam seasonal sales. The next Steam Sale — the Steam Summer Sale — runs June 27 through July 11, kicking off at 10 a.m. PT (1 p.m. ET) as revealed by a Tweet from Steam. Typically, the Steam Winter and Summer Sales last about two weeks, whereas the Spring and Autumn Sales last for one week, give or take.
Steam Summer Sale (June 27 to July 11, 2024)
Steam Autumn Sale (Nov. 27 to Dec. 4, 2024)
Steam Winter Sale (Dec. 19, 2024 to Jan. 2, 2025)
Steam Spring Sale (was March 14-21, 2024)
How often are Steam sales?
Steam Sales are pretty frequent, with at least one per month. While the big seasonal sales are quarterly — winter, fall, spring and summer — there are dozens of smaller sales or fests. Typically, these Steam discount days revolve around a particular theme, with lowered prices on titles within a certain genre, like fighting games or roleplaying games.
Here’s how I save money with Steam sales (and you can, too)
Take advantage of your wish list
Adding games to your Steam wish list is a great way to find out when they’re on sale.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
Adding games to your Steam wish list simplifies figuring out what to snag — or skip — during a sale. You can sort your wish list by discount, so finding the biggest savings is a breeze. Add a game to your wish list whenever you see one you like the look of but don’t immediately want to play. Then, during a Steam sale, pop in, sort by discount and see which prices have plummeted the most. Or, you can arrange your wish list in order of your most wanted titles, then choose what to buy that way during one of the upcoming Steam sales.
Use SteamDB to find the largest discounts
You can sort discounted titles from the Steam store front in SteamDB for quick perusal.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
SteamDB is an excellent source for uncovering deals. Its many filters let you sort attributes, including discount percentage, rating, price or reviews, making it a helpful Steam sales tracker. You can even narrow down a list based on platform — Windows, Linux or MacOS — and features like controller support. I’ve even used SteamDB to nab free games, like a no-cost copy of Tell Me Why. I typically hop into SteamDB during a Steam sale to look for hefty discounts on highly rated games. It’s worth checking SteamDB even outside of seasonal sales and fests if you want to expand your Steam collection.
Shop for older titles, indie games, DLC and complete catalogs
Often, newer AAA games get heavy markdowns — but because of their usually high price tags, even the discounted cost isn’t cheap. However, you can find wallet-friendly older games, indies or downloadable content. For instance, I picked up a copy of The Sum of All Fears for just $2, which wasn’t even during a Steam sale.
Complete publisher catalogs or franchise bundles save you a ton of money. I’ve seen the Activision Collection bundle — typically $900 — for as low as $355. While over $350 might not be pocket change, the per-title breakdown is pretty cost-effective when you’re getting 53 games. Similarly, I’ve seen the Call of Duty Franchise bundle for $443, a steep drop from its usual $1,010. You can often get DLC packs pretty cheap during Steam sales, which provides more in-game content to enjoy. On the other hand, these comprehensive bundles might lead you to overspend if you’re not actually planning on playing, say, every single Call of Duty game under the sun.
Check your other game libraries to make sure you’re not double-dipping
Although Steam is incredibly popular, it’s not the only source for digital game purchases. Check your other libraries on GOG, Epic, EA Origin and Xbox Game Pass, for instance, to ensure you’re not double-dipping. While you could buy Cyberpunk 2077 on Steam and GOG, you probably don’t need two copies.
Cross-shop deals on other platforms
While Steam is extremely popular, you can also find loads of competitive discounts at other outlets. IsThereAnyDeal lets you easily cross-shop.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
With many Steam alternatives, including GOG, Epic, Origin and Fanatical, you can find sweet discounts from several outlets. While you can — and should — check those individual storefronts, IsThereAnyDeal is a comprehensive source for savings. So you might notice a great deal on Skyrim from Steam, but it might be available at an even lower price at Epic at the same time.
Set a budget
Adding a bunch of games to your cart can be tempting, especially with prices slashed by 75% or more. However, lots of cheap games can still add up. I typically set a budget — whether it’s monetary or a limit on the number of games — and stick to that.
Don’t feel compelled to buy anything
The best way to save money is by not spending it in the first place. I know, it’s tempting to load up your cart with $5 or $10 games, which is nearly as gratifying as an in-game loot grab. But only buy what you’ll play now or soon after purchasing. While there are rare instances where games get delisted on Steam, chances are if you pass up on a sweet deal, it’ll still be available during the next Steam sale.
A complete list of Steam sale dates
Outside of Steam’s seasonal sales, there are different genre-themed sales or fests. Steam fests revolve around a genre or game theme. Here are the upcoming Steam fests for this year, along with examples of Steam games on sale you might find:
Fighting Games Fest (July 15-22): Punch down the prices on games that could include games like Street Fighter V and Dead Or Alive 6.
Tower Defense Fest (July 29-Aug. 5): Protect your territory — and wallet — by copping tower defense titles (think Ratropolis and Orcs Must Die 2) at lower-than-normal prices.
Rhythm Fest (Aug. 19-26): Games such as Beat Saber and Hi-Fi Rush will drop prices like they’re hot.
Space Exploration Fest (Sept. 2-9): Enjoy out-of-this-world savings games that blast you into outer space — maybe you can find Starfield and Mass Effect on sale.
Planes, Trains and Automobiles Fest (Sept. 16-23): Shift into low prices on games. Discounted titles could include Train Sim World 4 or Forza Horizon 5.
Turn-based RPG Fest (Sept. 30-Oct. 7): Turn down the costs for turn-based roleplaying games — Wildermyth or King Arthur: Knight’s Tale might be priced lower than normal.
Next Fest: October Edition (Oct. 14-21): Demos, developer chats and livestreams.
Halloween Sale (Oct. 28-Nov. 4): Score scary good deals. While horror games — think Amnesia: The Dark Descent or Resident Evil 4 — are the primary slashing “victims,” you can find deals on all genres.
Cooking Fest (Nov. 11-18): Sizzling savings on food-related games. Cheaper-than-normal titles may include Overcooked or Papa’s Freezeria.
Here are the past Steam sales from 2024:
Capitalism and Economy Fest (was Jan. 8-15)
Pirates vs. Ninjas Fest (was Jan. 22-29)
Next Fest (was Feb. 5-12)
Remote Play Together Fest (was Feb. 12-19)
Dinos vs. Robots Fest (was Feb. 26-March 4)
Deckbuilders Fest (was March 25-April 1)
FPS Fest (was April 15-22)
Farming Fest (April 29-May 6)
Endless Replayability Fest (was May 13-20)
Open World Survival Crafting Fest (was May 27-June 3)
Next Fest (was June 10-17)
When is the next Steam Next Fest?
There’s an upcoming Steam Next Fest running Oct. 28-21. The Steam Next Fest highlights upcoming game releases, featuring developer chats, free playable game demos and livestreams. Some of the most played demos from the June 2024 Steam Next Fest include Test Drive Unlimited Solar Crown, Once Human and Level Zero: Extraction.
How to get the most out of Steam once you’ve ravaged your wallet during a Steam sale
Once you’ve drained your bank account dry on games you’ll likely never play, there’s a lot more you can do with Steam, like sharing your library with friends or family, using Remote Play Together and adding non-Steam games. I suggest installing the Steam Link app on your phone, tablet or streaming device for playing your games away from your PC. You can also game on the go with the Steam Deck or another handheld gaming console like the Asus ROG Ally.
Channing Seideman, pictured with her service dog, Bishop, was diagnosed with epilepsy at 10 years old. Now, she said, “Bishop goes absolutely everywhere with me.”(Channing Seideman)
FAITHFUL COMPANION – Channing Seideman’s service dog, Bishop, brings her peace of mind and safety amid the uncertainty of daily epileptic seizures. The Ohio woman shares the heartwarming partnership with Fox News Digital. Continue reading…
‘BIG STEP FORWARD’ – A new drug has shown promise in slowing or preventing the progression of disease in patients with Parkinson’s. Continue reading…
SORRY, NIGHT OWLS – Going to bed after a certain time could lead to poorer mental health, a Stanford study found. Sleep experts share their reactions. Continue reading…
“We had expected that night owls who stayed up late would be OK, but they ended up being at a greater risk for developing mental health disorders than night owls who went to bed earlier,” one researcher said.(iStock)
EYES WIDE OPEN – A Chicago man received a kidney transplant while he was completely awake. Doctors weigh in on how surgeries without general anesthesia could transform the future of transplant care. Continue reading…
WAITING TO INHALE – For diabetes patients, a third type of insulin delivery has been shown to work just as well as injections or pumps, a new study found. Continue reading…
‘GIANT STEP FORWARD’ – The FDA has approved a new drug — Ipsen’s medication Iqirvo (elafibranor) — to treat autoimmune liver disease. Continue reading…
Primary biliary cholangitis (PBC) is a disease in which the immune system attacks and destroys the small bile ducts of the liver. (iStock)
ASK A DOCTOR – “Is it ever OK to take someone else’s prescription medication?” Continue reading…
SLOWING ALZHEIMER’S – In a breakthrough study, researchers identified a “protective gene” in one extended family that delays Alzheimer’s disease by several years. Continue reading…
MEDICAL MISINFORMATION? – A California physician believes the medical community is telling patients 10 key “lies.” He details two of the myths in an excerpt from his new book. Continue reading…
Dr. Robert Lufkin, pictured at left, was diagnosed with four chronic diseases, which inspired him to write a book, “Lies I Taught in Medical School.”(Dr. Robert Lufkin / iStock)
Chennai’s street food scene hasn’t just been shaped by short-lived Instagram trends but by waves of migration to a city that became one of India’s most vibrant commercial centres and port cities. From the frenetic streets of Triplicane and Mylapore to the beaches at Besant Nagar and the iconic Marina, each street food hub has its own story to tell. The lanes that run parallel to the Chennai Port offers Burmese influenced street food that reflect the wave of Tamils who moved to the city from Burma in the 1960s while the flavours of Rajasthan in the back alleys of Sowcarpet reflect the large presence of the Marwari community over a century in the area. There are few cities in India that offer the myriad street food flavours of Chennai. Also Read: Dining Out In Chennai? Here Are 10 Restaurants Perfect For Family Bonding
Photo Credit: iStock
Here Are 15 Must-Try Street Foods In Chennai:
1. Beach Treats at the Marina Beach
Chennai’s iconic Marina Beach is famous for its Chilli Bajji and Thenga Maanga Patani Sundal, a dish of chickpeas tempered with coconut and raw mango. The beach is also home to some of the best seafood stalls, like Sundari Akka Kadai, which serves the fresh catch of the day. Their fish curry rice and squid fry are both crowd favourites.
2. Tiffin and Filter Coffee at Mami Tiffin Stall
Tucked away in one of Mylapore’s alleys near the iconic Kapaleeshwarar temple, this popular local establishment is open throughout the day. It truly comes alive during tiffin time, offering popular snacks such as adai avial and Mysore Bonda served with invigorating filter coffee.
Where: Pitchu Street, Mylapore
Photo Credit: iStock
3. Shawarmas at Firdaus Cafe
One of the most popular establishments in the Triplicane area, near the Chepauk cricket stadium and the famous 18th-century Big Mosque, is Firdaus Cafe. Known for its excellent shawarmas, both the chicken shawarma and grilled chicken are highly recommended. Locals mention that they prepare 50 whole chickens daily on their rotisserie.
Where: Triplicane High Road
4. Maya Chats
The team at Maya Chats takes pride in their Jodhpur connection. This spot offers the closest experience to the Jodhpur version in Chennai. Street food enthusiasts line up not only for their signature onion kachori but also for their decadent sweet kachori, which has been featured in numerous slow-motion videos on social media feeds.
Where: Audiappa Naicken Street
Photo Credit: Ashwin Rajagopalan
5. Murukku Sandwich at S Chinnappa Sandwich Centre
One of the hubs for one of North Chennai’s most unique street food innovations is the murukku sandwich. “Murukku” (in Tamil) literally translates to twisted. This dish transforms the classic Mumbai sandwich into a bite-sized crunchy treat, where traditional Mumbai ingredients such as mint chutney and vegetable cuts are packed into crispy murukkus (or chaklis).
6. Bun Butter Jam at Gopaul Diary
Located close to the Madras High Court, this local legend dates back to the 1950s. Their fluffy buns feature generous quantities of jam and butter sourced from the famous butter-producing town of Uthukuli and are always served warm.
Where: Philips Street, George Town
7. Atho at Athoman
Atho is probably the dish that defines Chennai’s version of Burmese food. It’s actually a variation of a Burmese salad known as Khauk swe thoke. This wheat noodle salad is made with dried shrimp, cabbage, carrots, fish sauce, and finished with lime and fried peanut oil. The Chennai version omits the fish sauce and typically includes grated carrots, cabbage, fried onions combined with garlic oil, chili powder, and lime juice. Try it at popular establishments like Burma Food Atho Shop in Mannady or Athoman in Royapuram.
Where: MS Koil Street, Royapuram
Photo Credit: iStock
8. Mint Pakoda at Sri Karpagambal Sweets
This is one of the most popular food stops in the historic Mylapore area. Sri Karapagambal Sweets is best known for its mint pakoda and extra-large onion samosa.
Where: Sri Vinayaka Nagar Colony, Mylapore
9. The Legendary Egmore Sandwich
Originally called the Alsa Mall sandwich, this street food trend took off in the 1990s, coinciding with the rise of mobile sales and marketing executives needing quick, anytime food stops. Many of these stalls appeared around Montieth Road, near Alsa Mall, and this sandwich has been immortalized in popular Tamil blockbusters like Vikram. The best spot for these sandwiches now is probably Balaji Sandwich Stall, known for their chicken cheese and chili cheese toast.
10. Anmol Lassiwala
This camera-friendly ‘lassiwala’ is located close to Kakada Ramprasad, a popular spot known for their chaats and delicious badam milk. Anmol’s trademark creamy lassi with a hint of saffron is the perfect antidote after you’ve feasted on all the spicy chaats in the area.
Photo Credit: iStock
11. Kolkata Style Kathi Roll at Bayleaf OTG
Bayleaf has long been one of Chennai’s most popular restaurants for Kolkata cuisine. The restaurant’s grab-and-go offshoot (OTG stands for on the go) is probably the best spot in Chennai for a flaky Kolkata-style Kathi roll, which comes with an assortment of fillings including their popular chicken egg Kathi roll.
Where: Harrington Road, Chetpet
12. Rose Milk at Kalathi Newspaper Mart
It could be sheer nostalgia or Instagram-driven FOMO, but this decades-old newspaper mart is one of the city’s most visited food spots for its legendary, preservative-free rose milk, served in spill-proof plastic bottles. It’s not easy to locate, and parking is almost non-existent, yet it’s a popular stop on most food and culture walks in the Mylapore area.
Where: Sri Vinayaka Nagar Colony, Mylapore
13. Podi Dosa in T Nagar
The crispy ghee podi dosai, slathered with ghee and dusted with milaga podi or gunpowder, is one of Chennai’s street food champions. The T Nagar area hosts multiple establishments that serve this crispy dosa, such as Ravi Anna’s Kadai and Sapthagiri Tiffin Centre, located near the bustling Pondy Bazaar shopping district.
14. Sweet Poli at Venkteshwara Boli Stall West Mambalam
Poli, the Chennai version of Puran Poli, is sometimes spelled as Boli. Venkteshwara Boli Stall in the West Mambalam area is one of the best-known boli stalls in the city. Their piping hot polis run out quickly.
Where: Aryagowda Road, Mylapore
15. Popsicles at Nakku Popsicles
The Anna Nagar residential neighborhood has emerged as a bustling food and retail hub. This innovatively named ice cream cart (Nakku is the Tamil word for lick) in Anna Nagar has quickly become popular in the evenings for their signature popsicles, such as the Belgian chocolate popsicle.
The Balenciaga couture show opened with a meditation and ended with a storm cloud — one designed to disappear. That’s either a statement of faith in the future or a lot of hot air. Maybe both.
In place of the usual finale wedding gown, Demna, the brand’s mononymous designer, offered up 47 meters (155 feet) of the kind of black nylon normally used inside ball gowns wound round and round the model’s head and body like mist, with neither seams nor fastenings.
“Thirty minutes before the show, the dress didn’t exist,” Demna said backstage. After the show, it wouldn’t either. When you are talking about couture, where the hours of handwork that go into a piece contribute to what is often an outrageous price, and the result is meant to last forever, that’s blasphemy of the highest kind.
It’s also the next step in Demna’s quest to upend the hierarchy of value — what is precious, what is elegant, what is worth keeping (why you keep it) — and challenge the luxury status quo.
Before the disappearing dress, for example, there was a white evening gown made from old plastic bags that had been melted to create a sort of shiny dégradé effect, and one made of gold foil, scrunched around the body. Before those there were classic Balenciaga columns for society swans pieced together from strips of upcycled sweatshirts and soccer jerseys. And before that there were oversize concert Tees and sweatshirts that were actually hand-painted oils by the artist Abdelhak Benallou, featuring images of members of the Balenciaga atelier as a heavy metal band and lined — like the denim jackets — in thick Italian scuba satin to preserve their cocooning volumes.
Couture has always been about what’s on the inside, and invention, but this was taking it to the extreme: in silhouette and theory.
“Nobody really needs couture, to be honest,” Demna said. “To me, it’s an experience of clothes” — the ordering in the atelier, the handwork, the secret knowledge — “and I wanted to bring it even further to this idea.” Instead of Andy Warhol’s 15 minutes of fame, think of it as 15 minutes of fashion.
He was leaning into the concept that getting dressed is essentially, as he put it, “a performance.” And in the case of the ephemeral look, one that got awfully close to “The Emperor’s New Clothes.” That doesn’t make it any less entertaining or thought-provoking. Especially amid collections where performance of all sorts has been something of a trend.
Acting Out
It was there at Iris van Herpen, where the designer suspended her models in the middle of enormous plaster-covered canvases that she then hung on a wall next to additional artworks, turning the people into a living series of bas reliefs in organza, silk and lace and redefining the whole concept of wearable art.
There at Viktor&Rolf, where Viktor Horsting and Rolf Snoeren, the harlequins of fashion, engaged in their usual game of performance art, this time revisiting their 1998 show “Atomic Bomb” and transforming the human body into a variety of geometric compositions using what looked like very fancy nursery school building blocks. And it was the subtext of Giorgio Armani’s 89 variations on velvet and pearls at Armani Privé.
Well, what else are you going to wear to the theater?
Maybe one of the many 1950s-inspired sheaths at Schiaparelli, where Daniel Roseberry turned away from what he called his “meme-weaver” approach (remember the robot baby in his spring show, or the life-size animal heads of an earlier collection?), as well as the crutch of his signature gilded body parts, in favor of a focus on shape and suggestion. Shoulders were broad, skirts narrow, the effect often magnetic.
“The risk for me is there’s nothing here that’s meant to break the internet,” Mr. Roseberry said. (In fact, he forbade his team’s members from looking at their phones when they designed the collection.) The reward was more intimate drama.
A pale pink silk corset dress offered a play on Schiaparelli’s famous stiletto hat of 1937 (it was a Salvador Dalí collaboration), this time with a shoe cupping each breast, the heel like a warning spike about getting too close — except you couldn’t really tell what they were until you got close. A pair of black tuxedo pants was topped with a befeathered white shirt, like Odette and Odile in a single outfit.
Dressing Down
Still, no one addressed the subject of the role that clothes play in the performance of self quite as cleverly as Nicolas Di Felice, the artistic director of Courrèges, in his guest designer spot at Jean Paul Gaultier.
Rather than offer up his own “best of” parade of Gaultierisms (cone bras and tattoo shirts and marinières) like some of the guest stars who came before, he said in a preview that he instead had decided to focus on the more abstract question of what he thought made Gaultier special: That, in putting all sorts of bodies and individuals on his runways, the designer had offered a place and a means to “be who you are, and show who you are, and reveal who you are.”
In Mr. Di Felice’s case, that would be a very talented designer.
On the base of a rectangle and a corset (itself one of Mr. Gaultier’s signature garments; Madonna, anyone?), and with only hook and eye closures for both fitting and decoration, he built a carefully calibrated treatise in cloth on how we use clothes to reveal, or disguise, ourselves.
From the first look, an all-enveloping coat that swallowed the head, he slowly peeled away the layers, stripping off a slice of material here and replacing it with lace; dropping the shoulders there, so the torso of a slip dress puddled around the waist to expose the inner boning; undoing the hooks at a seam, to show a slice of skin. The metal closures glinted like diamanté under the lights, the last sleight of hand in a magic show in (yes) 15 minutes and about not just dress, but inner life. Presto, change-o.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Hi, I’m Dr. Lauren! Read my introduction to learn more about me and my two adventurous cats, Pancake and Tiller.
As a veterinarian, I tell people that one of the most important things you can do for a cat, is to ensure that they are microchipped. In fact, one of my cats once escaped while in the wilds of Alaska, and the only way I got her back, months later, was via her microchip. Miles away, cities away- the chip was her saving grace. She’d navigated the rugged Alaskan wilderness on her own, and without the microchip (or chip, as we often refer to it), would have had no way to communicate who she was, or where she belonged.
These days, many shelters won’t adopt cats out until they are spayed/neutered and microchipped. But those that come by cats through other means, such as finding a stray or adopting a kitten from a friend, know that chips are a key part of pet ownership. And with modern technology, they can now have multiple uses. Let’s take a look.
Microchips: What, How & Why?
Microchips are generally placed in the scruff of a cat, under the skin, but not in muscle. Arguably the best time to do this is under sedation or general anesthesia during the time they are being de-sexed, as the needle gauge (size) is rather large, and can be uncomfortable. The microchip itself is about the size and shape of a grain of rice, and often cannot be felt once implanted.
Microchips work passively: a handheld, battery-powered reader can scan a chip within a few inches of the chip, and read out a several-digit number. This number is then linked via a database to the cat owner’s information.
Microchips help keep cats like Pancake and Tiller safe
In clinics, I’ve had many stray cats brought in, with finders desperately wanting to reunite the stray cat with its family. The majority of these cats don’t have microchips, and those that do, often have chips that haven’t been registered, or the contact information is out of date. So, if you do get a cat with a chip, always remember to complete the additional registration steps, to link the microchip number to your contact information. And if you move or change any of your contact information, don’t forget to update the microchip, as well.
And, if you ever need to look up a chip, know that there are various databases that the chip can be registered with- it’s not like a car where each car is registered to a single state. Rather, it’s like deciding to order a pizza: multiple different restaurants, each with their own menu. The American Animal Hospital Association is making things easier, as they’ve compiled a database of all the microchip registries, which is a good starting point.
Legally, microchips are becoming compulsory, or required, in many places, which is a good turn of law. Recently, all of England now requires cats to be microchipped and gives owners a 30-day window to adhere. For the cats out there that cannot speak for themselves, I think this type of legislation speaks volumes: microchip your cat, so they can find their way home.
The first half of 2024 saw office leasing of 29.4 million square feet, driven by demand mainly in Mumbai and Bengaluru, buoying hopes that the year could end with absorption crossing 50 million square feet for the third year in a row.
The two cities accounted for over half of the total leasing activity in the major cities, driven by occupiers from sectors such as BFSI, Technology and Engineering & Manufacturing, a report by Colliers said.
However, during the quarter Chennai, Delhi-NCR and Pune saw a dip in leasing ranging from 39-41 per cent, while in the half year, the declines were in the range 17 to 31 per cent, indicating demand is not uniform across the country.
The leasing in the half year was 19 per cent higher from year ago, the report by Colliers showed. In the June quarter, which will end on the weekend, leasing was close to 16 msf across the top six cities, up 8 per cent year-on-year (y-o-y).
In the half year as well as in the second quarter, Bengaluru was the leader with leasing of 8.8 msf and 4.8 msf with robust growth of 33 per cent and 41 per cent.
Key players
The highest growth was seen in Mumbai, where leasing more than doubled in the quarter and first half. After a prolonged phase of steady demand, Mumbai has seen a significant 3.5 msf of leasing during the quarter, twice the levels as compared to Q2 2023, the Colliers report said, adding, “This is mainly attributable to strong demand from newly completed office supply during the quarter.”
“The demand for quality office spaces continues to surge, reflecting the confidence of occupiers and investors alike. Anticipated easing of global financial headwinds and continued resilience in domestic economy augurs well for sustained growth in India’s office market,” said Arpit Mehrotra, Managing Director, Office services, India.
New supply of office stock rose a modest 5 per cent y-o-y to 23 msf in the first half while over 13 msf of space was added in the June quarter, up 6 per cent on year.
The additions in supply in the first half came in only two cities – Hyderabad and Mumbai, while all other cities saw a steep decline. Mumbai saw the maximum surge in office supply.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
Sadržaj nastao u suradnji s: Deliiicije
UVIJEK rado svratimo u Deliiicije kako bismo istražili ponudu i upoznali se s novitetima. Nedavno smo posjetili njihovu novootvorenu trgovinu u centru Zagreba, na adresi Ilica 54, a u nastavku smo izdvojili sve što nam je zapelo za oko.
Azijska hrana marke Nissin – novost na policama
Tijekom našeg posjeta jedna zaposlenica upoznala nas je s najnovijim dodacima u ponudi – azijskom hranom marke Nissin. Ovaj japanski brend, osnovan 1948. godine, nudi široki izbor proizvoda autentičnih azijskih okusa koji su gotovi za čas.
Među novitetima su instant rezanci Nissin Soba od 92 grama (3.99 eura), dostupni u okusima chilli, teriyaki i classic. Tu su i aromatične instant juhe Nissin Cup Noodle od 64 grama (2.99 eura), s okusima poput kozica, piletine, spicy i govedine. Na koncu, stigle su i instant juhe s tjesteninom Nissin Ramen u pakiranju od 100 grama (1.99 eura), s okusima piletine, govedine i spicy.
Svi ovi proizvodi dolaze u praktičnim pakiranjima, savršenima za, primjerice, nošenje na posao ili putovanje. Bez obzira na to gdje se nalazite, možete uživati u brzom i ukusnom obroku. Pakiranja u obliku čaša posebno su praktična jer omogućuju jednostavnu pripremu i konzumaciju bez potrebe za dodatnim posuđem, čineći ih idealnim izborom za one u pokretu.
Ne propustite isprobati Adrijin ajvar
Govoreći o ukusnim proizvodima, nemoguće je ne spomenuti Adrijine ajvare, koji redovito završavaju u našoj košarici s dobrim razlogom. Ovaj ajvar se odlikuje bogatim i kremastim okusom i jedan je od najboljih koje smo probali. Ajvari su dostupni u dvije klasične varijante – blagoj i ljutoj. Možete ih pronaći u manjim teglicama od 270 g (6.99 eura) ili u većim od 580 grama (9.99 eura).
Otkrijte nagrađivana Adria vina
Marka Adria nudi raznovrsne ukusne proizvode osim ajvara, uključujući smokvenjake, kekse, bombonijere, praline, kao i vina. Posebno bismo izdvojili dva vina: Dingač (0.75 l, 12.99 eura) i Plavac mali Selekcija (0.75 l, 9.99 eura).
Sabatina, tradicionalni godišnji festival vina u Dalmaciji, gdje se ocjenjuju i nagrađuju najbolja vina iz regije, potvrdila je kvalitetu ovih vina kroz brojne nagrade.
Dingač je osvojio zlatnu medalju 2020. i 2023. godine te srebrnu medalju 2021. godine za kvalitetu proizvoda. Adria vino Plavac mali Selekcija nagrađeno je srebrnom medaljom 2020. godine i zlatnom medaljom za kvalitetu 2021. godine.
Savršeni par: roštilj i Jack Daniel’s umaci
Ljetni dani idealni su za roštilj, a Jack Daniels umaci pružaju savršen završni dodir svakom mesnom jelu. Dostupni su u dvije varijante: originalna i s dodatkom meda. Originalna verzija kombinira tamno smeđi šećer, bogate zrele rajčice, jabučni ocat i viski Jack Daniel’s Tennessee.
Jack Daniel’s BBQ Honey umak obogaćen je pravim pčelinjim medom i rajčicom te dodatno aromatiziran notama ananasa i tamarinda, uz lagani papreni završetak. Ovi umaci dostupni su u bočicama od 280 grama po cijeni od 6.99 eura te u većim bočicama od 553 grama, koje koštaju 9.99 eura.
Crni tartufi mogu dodati štih luksuza svakom obroku
Na policama trgovine pronašli smo i cijele crne tartufe u teglicama (25 g, 25.99 eura). Ova vrsta jestive gljive, koja raste ispod površine zemlje, izuzetno je cijenjena u kulinarstvu zbog svog jedinstvenog, bogatog, zemljanog okusa i mirisa.
Crni tartufi su idealni za obogaćivanje pojedinih jela, bilo da se posipaju po kremastom rižotu ili tanko naribaju na svježe pripremljenu tjesteninu. Njihov bogat i zemljani okus odlično se slaže čak i s jednostavnim jelima poput kajgane ili bruschette, podižući ih na višu razinu gurmanskog užitka.
La Bottega Della Torta – torte bez pečenja
U trgovini su nam za oko zapele biskvitne torte talijanskog proizvođača Chocolitaly – La Bottega Della Torta. Tijekom ljetnih mjeseci mnogi od nas izbjegavaju upotrebu pećnice, a s obzirom na to da rođendani, zabave i druga druženja ne prestaju ni tijekom visokih temperatura, gotove torte postaju idealno rješenje.
Ove torte dolaze s raznim ukusnim nadjevima, uključujući pistaciju te kombinacije poput mrkve i čokolade, banane i čokolade, limuna i đumbira i kakaa i marelice. Dostupne su u pakiranjima težine od 400 do 450 grama, s cijenama koje se kreću od 4.99 do 6.99 eura.
Jeste li već probali kekse McVitie’s Tartlets?
Brend McVitie’s, široko poznat po svojim Digestive keksima, također nudi i druge ukusne zalogaje dostupne na policama Deliiicija. Među njima ističu se prhki keksi dostupni u okusima čokolade, maline i limuna. Pakirani su u vrećicama od 100 grama, a cijene variraju od 0.69 do 1.59 eura, ovisno o odabranom okusu.
Zagreb, tak imam te rad
Pri izlasku iz trgovine krajičkom oka primijetili smo zlatni čokoladni medaljon s motivom Zagreba. Iza privlačne ambalaže krije se kremasta mliječna čokolada s 32% kakaa i 18% mliječnog udjela. S težinom od 58 grama (2.99 eura), ova čokolada je savršena za dijeljenje s nekim tko voli čokoladu i Zagreb.
Sponzorirani sadržaj donose Index i Deliiicije u skladu s najvišim profesionalnim standardima.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Salomón Rondón scored on a penalty kick in the 57th minute and goalkeeper Rafael Romo made the goal stand up with a diving stop on Orbelín Pineda’s penalty try 28 minutes later, giving Venezuela a 1-0 upset over Mexico in a Copa América group-stage game played before a sellout crowd of 72,000 at SoFi Stadium.
With the victory, Venezuela advances to the tournament semifinals while Mexico, a loser in four of its last six matches, needs a win over Ecuador on Sunday to avoid elimination.
Venezuela got the only goal in would need when Rondón rolled a right-footed penalty kick just inside the left post for his 42nd international goal. The goal was set up when halftime substitute Cristian Cásseres worked a give-and-go with defender Jon Aramburu that ended with Mexico’s Julián Quiñones tripping Aramburu in the box.
Brazilian referee Rafael Claus immediately pointed to the spot, and after a long pause Rondón, the Venezuelan captain, converted his try by sending Mexican keeper Julio González diving toward the wrong post.
Rondón beat González from the run of the play in the first half, but his left-footed shot from distance hit the far post and bounced harmlessly away.
Mexico had a chance to tie the score in the final minutes of regulation when Venezuelan defender Miguel Navarro was called for a handball. Claus confirmed the penalty through a video replay, but Pineda was unable to convert, with Romo diving to his right to push the low shot away.
Mexico outshot Venezuela 18-10, putting five of those tries on frame, but Romo was equal to the task, making five saves.
Mexico, playing at SoFi Stadium for the first time since winning the CONCACAF Gold Cup final there 11 months ago, was on the front foot for the most of the opening half, outshooting Venezuela 8-3. But it was unable to capitalize on that dominance when Santiago Giménez whiffed on a left-footed shot from the center of the box in the 19th minute.
Mexico was missing its top two goalkeepers in Guillermo Ochoa and Luis Malagón, captain Edson Álvarez and forwards Raúl Jiménez and Hirving Lozano to injury.
Driven by steep data usage and digital adoption, India is likely to see a five times rise in data centre capacity expansion in years to come, a new report said on Thursday.
The country requires an additional 1.7-3.6 GW (gigawatt) data centre capacity over and above the planned development of 2.32 GW (colocation) capacity.
It is estimated that India will be adding 464 MW of new colocation data centre capacity each year until 2028, according to the report by Cushman and Wakefield.India’s colocation data centre capacity stood at 977 MW across the top seven cities in the second half of 2023.
About 258 MW of Colo capacity came in 2023 alone.
“This is a formidable number and surpassed the capacity addition in 2022 which stood at 126 MW, indicating a 105 per cent year-on-year (YoY) growth,” the report mentioned.
“This exponential growth is driven by several factors, including increased data consumption due to widespread digital adoption and the use of data-intensive technologies.
An average Indian cell phone user consumes over 19 GB of data per month — the highest in the world.
The country is experiencing an exponential rise in adoption of internet services, smartphones, social media, and OTT channels.
Consequently, the demand for data centres is of high interest to transform India’s digital infrastructure.
“Both colocation data centres and cloud firm-owned data centres are being built at growing speeds over the last few years,” the findings showed.
While adding an average of 464 MW of Colo capacity each year until 2028 may seem like good delivery speed, India shall keep building more to capitalise on its digital transformation story, it added.
Over the next five years, India is likely to see fastest growth in penetration of smartphones, internet, OTT subscriptions, and social media usage.
Notre-Dame Cathedral in Paris is getting a modern makeover for its reopening in December, with designer furniture and colourful priestly vestments created by a top fashion designer. The 860-year-old cathedral has been undergoing a rapid reconstruction since being ravaged by fire in 2019. It is on track to reopen on December 8, and with less than six months to go, fire-blackened rubble has given way to gleaming stone.
Notre-Dame Cathedral prepares for grand reopening with modern makeover(Pixabay)
Archbishop of Paris Laurent Ulrich said he wanted to “welcome the whole world” as he revealed details of the new interior designs. Priests, archbishops, bishops and deacons will wear vestments created by aristocratic French designer Jean-Charles de Castelbajac — known to his celebrity pals as “JC/DC” — the man who came up with Madonna’s famous coat made of teddy bears.
Get ready to catch the final stages of the World Cup only on Crickit. Anytime, Anywhere. Explore now!
The 74-year-old was inspired by the immense gold cross in the cathedral’s choir, which was spared by the flames. His priestly outfits feature geometric patterns with sharp lines and primary colours reminiscent of Dutch painter Piet Mondrian. New massive bronze furniture — highly stylised and bringing to mind something from “Game of Thrones” — is being produced in southern France and should be installed in November, including a new baptismal font, altar and tabernacle.
Some 1,500 to 2,000 simple but comfortable chairs in light oak have been ordered for the faithful. The painted decorations of the chapels, seen in part by AFP, have regained their vibrant colours and should match seven new tapestries and six new stained glass windows to be installed after the reopening. Contemporary artists including Daniel Buren, Herve Di Rosa and Chinese-born Yan Pei-Ming are among the 110 competing to create the windows.
‘Spiritual experience’
Future visitors, which the diocese says will number 15 million a year — up from 12 million before the fire — will find the church a “strong cultural and spiritual experience”, said rector Olivier Ribadeau Dumas. Most key parts of the rebuilding have been completed, including the famous spire, all the wooden frames, the golden crosses and the cathedral’s rooster weather-vane.
State-of-the-art fire protection systems are due to be installed over the next few months, along with the eight restored bells for the north tower. The new great organ is also almost complete, the diocese said. Reservations to visit the cathedral — free of charge — will open a week before the December 8 reopening, favouring individuals over groups for the first six months.
The diocese said Notre-Dame will be able to accommodate 2,500 people at once and 40,000 per day. That is double the number at the Palace of Versailles, which is 10 times bigger, and 10,000 more per day than the vast Louvre museum in Paris, the diocese said.
PC gamers are counting down to the start of the Steam Summer Sale, which kicks off very soon. While we’ve already had summer sales from Epic, Sony and Nintendo, the Steam Summer Sale is something a bit special. That’s due to the sheer number of games on sale, and the size of the discounts available. Indeed, if your Steam wishlist is packed to the rafters and you’ve got money burning a hole in your pocket, then get ready for the biggest video game sale of the year so far. The 2024 Steam Summer Sale has a June 27 start date and a July 11 end date. It all kicks off at 6pm BST UK time, so maybe hold off just a little longer if you’ve got your eye on a particular game.
Valve explains more: “Now that we’re past the summer solstice, it’s time for us to announce the Steam Summer Sale!
“Starting this Thursday at 10am Pacific, check out thousands of sunny discounts, a brand new set of (seagull!) stickers, new profile goodies, and the return of the cat.”
As you can see from the post above, Steam customers can earn various bonuses during the event, including profile stickers and other digital goodies.
Of course, the real appeal are the discounts, and we already have a pretty good idea about what to expect on that front.
Indeed, a new Summer Sale trailer sheds some light on just a few of the games that will be reduced as part of the upcoming event.
As you can see from the video below, this includes atmospheric platformer Rain World and “Pokemon with Guns” adventure game Palworld.
Other games on sale include iRacing, Disney Dreamlight Valley, Supermarket Simulator and Kebab Chefs! Restaurant Simulator.
That’s on top of the recently released Manor Lords, as well as The Planet Crafter and Stellaris.
Finally, Valve has confirmed plans to discount the likes of Content Warning, Party Animals, Ultimate Chicken Horse, Roboquest, and the superb Batman Arkham Knight.
Interestingly, Valve will reportedly introduce a new category in the Steam Summer Sale, with “Deep Discounts” getting the spotlight.
Genesis has revealed its latest supercar concept, but don’t expect to be able to drive it… at least not in real life.
The Genesis X Gran Racer Vision Gran Turismo Concept not only has a long name, but it has also been developed for the Gran Turismo Playstation video game series – the fourth vehicle the brand has developed for the franchise.
Revealed at the Busan motor show in South Korea, Genesis has tied in the X Gran Racer VGT with its recently announced Magma line of performance vehicles.
X Gran Berlinetta and X Gran Racer Vision Gran Turismo concepts
It’s a modified version of the X Gran Berlinetta Concept, packing a front mid-mounted ‘race-spec’ version of the Lambda II V6 engine with Genesis’ electric supercharger technology.
The 649kW/1071Nm V6 is mated with a 500kW/305Nm electric motor for total system outputs of 1148kW and 1425Nm.
The X Gran Berlinetta concept is no shrinking violet, but the X Gran Racer turns it up to 11.
The most obvious change is the addition of an enormous carbon-fibre rear wing with integrated lighting, while Genesis has also fitted a larger front splitter and front canards, plus a more aggressive rocker panel treatment and ground effects.
There are active aerodynamic flaps plus a flat underbody design to reduce drag and improve high-speed stability.
As with the X Gran Berlinetta, the latest concept features Genesis’ traditional two-line lighting elements. Up front, the split-level lighting further diverges to form the illuminated outline of a crest-shaped grille.
Both supercar concepts are finished in bright orange paint, which contrasts with numerous carbon-fibre elements.
Inside, there’s a single-seat configuration with a steering yoke and a fully integrated roll cage.
Controls are incorporated into a structural divider under the instrument panel, while a panoramic display stretches across the dashboard to provide the driver with essential vehicle information.
The interior features extensive use of carbon fibre, while quilted padding is applied to areas the driver’s body will come into contact with.
The concept will be on display at the Busan motor show from June 28 to July 7, alongside the refreshed Electrified G80 and the Neolun concept revealed at this year’s New York motor show, among other Genesis models.
In addition to these supercar concepts, Genesis has previously revealed a trio of two-door grand tourer concepts, all wearing the X nameplate. Unfortunately, these have also yet to translate to production vehicles.
This move in a bid to curb fake and spam calls in the country.
Telecom companies first reportedly tested it in limited cities of Mumbai and Haryana.
The Telecom operators conducted limited trials of call ID presentation in Mumbai and Haryana, which were reportedly successful. Now this facility called ‘Calling Name Presentation’ (CNAP) will reportedly be implemented by Telecom operators nationwide soon in the coming months. In this, the caller’s name will be displayed based on the information filled in by the users in the KYC form while buying a SIM card. This move came after constant pressure from the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) and the Department of Telecom (DoT) in a bid to curb fake and spam calls in the country. The CNAP service will be similar to Truecaller. Telecom companies first reportedly tested it in limited cities of Mumbai and Haryana to understand the working and feasibility of this feature. The results of the testing were shared with the Department of Telecommunications, so that a practical decision could be taken about the proposed service. As per the Hindi Business, the telecom operators are given a deadline of July 15 to start the CNAP service.
The name of the person who filled in the form at the time of purchasing the SIM card will be visible when a call is made. In case of business calls, the name of the company will be displayed. Telecom companies also believe that this step will help in preventing cybercrime in the country. Apart from this, it will also help in preventing spam calls. Spam calls have become a big problem in the country. According to a survey by LocalCircles Study, 60 percent of people receive 3 spam calls in a day. Moreover, 90 percent of respondents admitted that they get spam calls despite being registered on the DND ( Do Not Disturb) list under the National Do Not Call Registry. Most of these calls are related to financial services and real estate as 54 percent were received from the former, while 22 percent were from the latter.
Till now, mobile users required the help of apps like Truecaller to receive the caller’s information. It posed a risk of mobile users’ data leak through third-party apps, as it asked for several permissions after installing it. It includes information like contacts, messages and photos saved on your mobile. In such a situation, after this decision of TRAI, you won’t need to install third-party apps.
Business Desk
A team of writers and reporters decodes vast terms of personal finance and making money matters simpler for you. From latest initial public offerings …Read More
After successfully concluding yesterday on a positive note, the cryptocurrency market has recorded a correction of 0.86% in valuation, with top tokens stuck near their respective crucial support levels. However, mid-cap altcoins have regained momentum by adding significant value.
Top altcoins such as Maker (MKR) and Kaspa (KAS) price have each recorded a surge of over 10% within the past day, indicating a rising interest of investors in these tokens. With the rising volatility in the crypto space, will KAS and MKR price hold their gains or lose momentum next week?
Maker Price Displays Increased Bullish Sentiment:
After trading under a bearish influence since April, the Maker price has regained momentum and added 8.71% to its portfolio with a change of +21.49% in its trading volume. Moreover, the altcoin has added 4.12% over the past week, indicating a rising bullish sentiment for the MKR price.
TradingView: MKR/USDT
The technical indicator, MACD, displays a rising pattern in its green histogram, indicating an increase in the buying pressure for the Maker price in the market. Moreover, the averages show a bullish jump, suggesting the MKR price will continue gaining value this week.
On the other hand, the Simple Moving Average (SMA) has successfully recorded a bullish crossover in its price chart of 1D time frame, suggesting a positive outlook for the Maker crypto in the coming time.
If the market continues to trade under a bullish sentiment, the MKR coin price will retest its resistance level of $2,536 over the upcoming weekend. However, in case of a trend reversal, the Maker crypto price will drop toward its crucial support level of $2,175.
KAS Price On The Verge Of Testing Its Important Resistance Level:
The Kaspa price continues displaying bullish sentiment by adding 11.70% to its portfolio within 24 hours. Moreover, the altcoin has jumped 20.83% within the past seven days and 27.37% over the past month. Notably, it has rewarded its long-term investors with a YTD return of 58.97%.
TradingView: MKR/USDT
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) records a significant uptrend toward its overbought range, highlighting an increase in the price action for the crypto token in the market. Further, the average continues to trade above the mid-point, suggesting a positive outlook for the KAS coin price in the coming time.
With the rising bullish sentiment, the Kaspa price may retest its important resistance level of $0.183 soon. Maintaining the price at that level will set the stage for the Kaspa (KAS) price to head toward its upper resistance level of $0.205 and achieve a new yearly high.
Conversely, if the bears overpowered the bulls, the KAS crypto will lose momentum and drop toward its support level of $0.162. Further, if the bears continue dominating the market, the Kaspa token will plunge toward a low of $0.140.
Embattled edtech Byju’s has settled with France-based Teleperformance Business Services, the Bengaluru Bench of National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) was told on June 26, a second relief for the company during the day.
The tribunal asked Teleperformance to file a memo saying it wished to withdraw the insolvency plea in view of the settlement for it to close the case.
Also read: Prosus writes off $493-m investment in Byju’s
MCA findings
This comes at a time when law enforcement agencies cleared the firm of financial fraud but found certain lapses in corporate government. The investigation by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs has uncovered lapses in Byju’s corporate governance but did not find evidence of financial fraud.
The year-long probe conducted by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, there was no evidence of activities like fund diversion or financial manipulation. However, the investigation did uncover governance lapses that have contributed to the company’s increasing losses.
In Feburary, NCLT issued notice to Byju’s on an insolvency plea filed by Teleperformance. According to Teleperformace, Byju’s agreed to pay the amount in three tranches — ₹1.5 crore in the first trance, ₹2 crore in the second and ₹2.2 crore in the final tranche.
Also read: NCLT directs Byju’s to maintain status quo, freezes funds raised via second rights issue
Other cases against BYJU’S
NCLT issued a notice in an insolvency plea filed by digital marketing firm Surfer Technologies against Byju’s. On February 28, another notice was issued on a plea filed by US-based non-bank loan agency Glas Trust Company LLC to admit the company to insolvency resolution process.
Byju’s is also fighting a legal battle with investors including investors, Prosus, General Atlantic, and Peak XV, which have sought to void a $200-million rights issue initiated in January by appealing to the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT).
Buying art can be a nerve-racking experience. But investors have long been able to console themselves with the thought that, if their purchase plummets in value, they will at least have something nice on their wall. Now they can also console themselves that they will have something to borrow against.
That is because there has been a boom in “art-secured lending”. Until recently this was only available to the wealthiest clients of private banks. In the past five years, though, auction houses and boutique lenders have become more involved. Deloitte, a consultancy, reckons that such outfits increased their lending by 119% over the period, compared with a 31% rise at banks. Last year non-banks doled out as much as $8bn against art and collectibles, or 23% of all such loans, up from 15% in 2019.
CNET recommends Spectrum as McKinney’s best internet service provider. In addition to providing service to almost 88% of the city’s population, according to the FCC, Spectrum offers some of the cheapest and fastest plans residents can find. However, if Spectrum isn’t an option at your address, AT&T Fiber and T-Mobile Home Internet are worth checking out for broadband.
We’ve also compared providers based on speed and cost in McKinney. If you’re shopping for the fastest service, AT&T Fiber’s 5-gigabit plan costs $225 monthly and includes unlimited data.
Providers like T-Mobile and Verizon will be your best bet if you want to pay the lowest amount possible for home internet. While those fixed wireless ISPs offer base plans at $50, similar to Spectrum and AT&T Fiber, eligible T-Mobile and Verizon mobile customers can receive a $15 to $20 monthly discount.
Best internet in McKinney, Texas, in 2024
McKinney internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Home Internet Read full review
DSL
$55
10-100Mbps
None
1.5TB
None
7.4
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$225
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Rise Broadband Read full review
Fixed wireless
$55-$75
25-100Mbps
$10 modem; $5-$15 router (optional)
250GB or unlimited
None, but required for some promotions
6.2
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
300-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $5 router (optional)
None
None
7.2
Speed of Light
Fixed wireless
$50-$130
10-50Mbps
Varies
None
Varies
N/A
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50 ($30 for eligible Go5G Plus and Magenta Max mobile customers)
72-245Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$45 with qualifying Verizon 5G mobile plans)
50-1,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (3 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in McKinney?
Provider
Starting monthly price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Spectrum Internet Read full review
$30
100Mbps
$5 (optional)
Speed of Light
$50
10Mbps
Varies
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($30 with eligible mobile plan)
245Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
300Mbps
None
AT&T Home Internet Read full review
$55
100Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
Rise Broadband 50Mbps Read full review
$55
50Mbps
$5-$15 (optional)
Show more (3 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How to find internet deals and promotions in McKinney
The best internet deals and top promotions in McKinney depend on what discounts are available during that period. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
How many members of your household use the internet?
McKinney internet providers such as Spectrum may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Many, however, including AT&T, T-Mobile and Verizon, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
Photo by Mint Images/Getty Images
Fastest internet plans in McKinney
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$225
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$125
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Verizon 5G Home Plus Internet Read full review
$70 ($45 with eligible mobile plan)
1,000Mbps
75Mbps
None
Fixed wireless
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines — and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email, streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities such as videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in McKinney
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. So what’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
But it doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, though we also factor in things such as price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and also consider real-world speed data from sources such as Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
Internet providers in McKinney FAQs
What is the best internet service provider in McKinney?
Spectrum’s wide coverage map, reasonable prices and speedy plans make it McKinney’s best internet provider. This cable ISP also ranks as CNET’s best cable provider for 2024, so it’s a reliable option for McKinney residents.
Is fiber internet available in McKinney?
AT&T Fiber is McKinney’s largest fiber provider, but select households may be able to access fiber connectivity through Point Broadband.
What is the cheapest internet provider in McKinney?
Spectrum offers the lowest cost plan at $30 for 100 Mbps. Four providers tie for the second cheapest service in McKinney: Spectrum, Speed of Light, T-Mobile and Verizon all offer base plans costing $50. However, eligible T-Mobile and Verizon mobile customers can receive a $15-$20 discount, meaning their internet may only cost $30-$35 monthly.
Which internet provider in McKinney offers the fastest plan?
McKinney’s fastest internet provider is AT&T Fiber, which offers 2,000Mbps and 5,000Mbps plans for $125 and $225 per month, respectively.
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Kidney transplants are not uncommon — the kidney is actually the most frequently transplanted organ in the U.S. — but a Chicago man recently received his in a highly unusual way.
John Nicholas, 28, was awake during the entire procedure, which was performed on May 24 at Northwestern Medicine Hospital. He was discharged the very next day.
Doctors administered a spinal anesthesia shot — similar to what is used for a Cesarean section — instead of general anesthesia, according to a press release from the hospital.
MASSACHUSETTS MAN DIES 2 MONTHS AFTER BECOMING FIRST PERSON TO RECEIVE SUCCESSFUL PIG KIDNEY TRANSPLANT
“This is the first case at Northwestern Medicine where a patient was awake during an entire kidney transplant procedure and went home the next day, basically making this an outpatient procedure,” said Satish Nadig, M.D., PhD, transplant surgeon and director of the Northwestern Medicine Comprehensive Transplant Center, in the release.
“Inside the operating room, it was an incredible experience being able to show a patient what their new kidney looked like before placing it inside the body,” he added.
John Nicholas, the patient, is pictured with his surgeons in the operating room after completion of the kidney transplant.(Northwestern Medicine)
“It was incredibly simple and uneventful.”
This type of “awake transplant” could reduce surgical risks and shorten the length of the patient’s hospitalization, doctors say.
“It was an incredible experience, being able to show a patient what their new kidney looked like before placing it inside the body.”
It could also increase access to care for patients who are considered high-risk or have phobias surrounding general anesthesia.
Ideal candidate
Nicholas’ surgery took about two hours, according to the hospital.
He was considered an ideal patient for awake surgery due to his young age, his otherwise good health and his “eagerness to participate,” per the release.
John Nicholas is pictured awake during his kidney transplant in late May.(Northwestern Medicine)
“It was a pretty cool experience to know what was happening in real time and be aware of the magnitude of what they were doing,” said Nicholas in a statement to Northwestern.
“At one point during surgery, I recall asking, ‘Should I be expecting the spinal anesthesia to kick in?’ They had already been doing a lot of work and I had been completely oblivious to that fact. Truly, no sensation whatsoever.”
PENNSYLVANIA MOM SEEKS ‘PERFECT MATCH’ BONE MARROW DONOR TO CURE DAUGHTER’S RARE DISORDER: ‘CRUCIAL NEED’
Although Nicholas did receive sedation for comfort, he said he was still aware of what was going on.
“Especially when they called out my name and told me about certain milestones they had reached,” he noted.
Nicholas, center, is pictured after surgery with Dr. Vicente Garcia Tomas, his anesthesiologist, at left, and Dr. Nadig, transplant surgeon, at right. (Northwestern Medicine)
Nicholas walked out of the hospital on May 25, the day after surgery.
With typical kidney transplants, the recipient remains in the hospital for two to three days.
Saved by a friend
Nicholas’ kidney issues began at age 16 when he was diagnosed with Crohn’s disease, the release stated.
FOUR TEXAS RESIDENTS FOREVER CONNECTED BY TWO KIDNEY DONATIONS IN DIFFERENT CITIES: ‘SUPERBLY TIMED’
After a few years of managing the condition with medication, his kidney function worsened and he required a transplant.
Nicholas’ mother originally planned to donate her kidney, but a breast cancer diagnosis prevented her from doing so, the hospital relayed.
Nicholas, at left, is pictured with his donor and best friend, Pat Wise, after surgery.(Northwestern Medicine)
It was Nicholas’ best friend from elementary school, 29-year-old Pat Wise in Alexandria, Virginia, who ultimately donated the life-saving kidney.
‘Another tool in our toolbelt’
Dr. Marc Siegel, clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Medical Center and a Fox News medical contributor, was not involved in the surgery but shared his input.
“My opinion is that in most cases, spinal anesthesia presents a reasonable alternative for those at high risk of general anesthesia complications,” Siegel told Fox News Digital.
Nicholas is pictured awake with his care team during his kidney transplant surgery.(Northwestern Medicine)
“Having said that, general anesthesia would be preferred whenever possible for major surgery like this,” said Dr. Siegel, “because control of the airway and breathing is essential, and is much easier if the patient is asleep and on the ventilator.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The doctors at Northwestern credit the patient for helping to advance the field of transplant medicine.
Nicholas, left, and donor Wise are pictured at a press conference after the surgery.(Northwestern Medicine)
“When John agreed to be the first known patient at Northwestern Medicine to undergo an awake kidney transplant and be discharged home the next day, he knew the benefits outweighed the risks, and … he’s now helping to move the field of transplantation forward,” said Vinayak Rohan, M.D., transplant surgeon at Northwestern Memorial Hospital, in the release.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“He is an extremely compliant patient who was in tune with his body and willing to push the envelope,” stressing that the patient had faith in the doctors and they, in turn, had faith in him.
Nicholas, center, is pictured with his entire care team. “He’s now helping to move the field of transplantation forward,” a surgeon said about the patient.(Northwestern Medicine)
The hospital now plans to establish the AWAKE Program (Accelerated Surgery Without General Anesthesia in Kidney Transplantation) for patients who want or need to pursue surgery without general anesthesia.
As we (happily) bid farewell to the scorching summer, there’s one thing we’re not ready to wait for until next year – mangoes! The ‘King of Fruits’ is a summer special loved by kids and adults alike. Easily available throughout the season, mangoes can be enjoyed whole or in various delicious forms like chutneys, pickles, fruit yogurts and ice creams. But is there a way to savour mangoes beyond summer? If this question has been on your mind, you’ve landed on the right page!
Here we bring you an easy, three-ingredient mango jam recipe that lets you enjoy the goodness of this fruit year-round. And the best part is you can store this homemade mango jam for up to two months! So, what are you waiting for? Here’s how to make mango jam at home!
Also Read: Looking For Another Mango Recipe? Make Dry Mango Kuzhambu In 30 Minutes
Photo Credit: iStock
Is Mango Jam Healthy?
Absolutely! This mango jam recipe is incredibly healthy and can be enjoyed daily. Made with minimal and natural ingredients, it’s packed with benefits. The star ingredient, mango, is rich in nutrients, especially vitamin C, which boosts immunity, improves iron absorption, and aids in cell repair and growth. Plus, the vitamin A in mangoes can enhance eye health and keep your skin youthful. The flavour of your mango jam depends on the type of mangoes you use, offering a delightful combination of sweet and tangy tastes.
How Can You Use Mango Jam?
Beyond spreading a generous layer of mango jam on your toast, there are many ways to enjoy it. Instead of giving your kids store-bought jam for school, use mango jam as a side dish in their daily tiffin meals. If you’re craving mango lassi but are out of fruit, add a dollop of mango jam along with other ingredients and blend. In the evening, pair your piping hot samosas with mango jam for a sweet and savoury treat.
How To Make Mango Jam At Home | Mango Jam Recipe
Digital content creator Nitya Hegde (@finefettlecookerys) shared an easy recipe for mango jam on her Instagram handle. Here’s how to make it:
Take four different varieties of mangoes for a robust flavour.
Wash, peel, and cut the mangoes into small cubes. Add them to a blender.
Add two tablespoons of sugar or jaggery to the mangoes. Blend into a smooth paste.
Pour the mango puree into a pan. Squeeze half a lemon into it. Mix well.
Cook the mixture on low heat for 15-20 minutes until you achieve the desired consistency. If needed, cook for another two to three minutes, but keep the flame low.
Once cooled, transfer the jam to an airtight container.
Watch the full video of the mango jam recipe here:
Also Read: Mango Mania All Year Round – 5 Ways You Can Keep Enjoying The Fruit Till Next Summer
Will you make this mango jam at home? Let us know in the comments below!
About Nikita NikhilMeet Nikita, a passionate soul with an insatiable love for two things in life: Bollywood and food! When she’s not indulging in binge-watching sessions, Nikita can be found behind the lens capturing moments or expressing her creativity through painting.
When I was 7, my grandmother told me she saw Halley’s comet in 1910. As a young woman in rural Tennessee, she was amazed. She explained it would return in 1986, when she’d be in heaven and I’d be a grown man. That was my first inkling, lovingly and mysteriously rendered, that all things change — and people we love pass away, though the stars appear to stay the same. In Seattle, 1986, I watched the comet scar the darkness, my grandmother’s memory burning bright within me. By the time Halley returns in 2061, I will have joined her in infinity. — T.S. Davis
Little Allies
My 10-year-old nephew and his friends were playing in the yard when my sister overheard them using the word “gay” as a put-down. She pulled my nephew aside: “You know Uncle Corey’s gay, right? Have you ever told your friends that?” In the school parking lot the next day, my sister overheard the same boys using “gay” pejoratively again. “Do you even know what that word means?” my nephew asked his friends. “I have a gay uncle and he’s awesome.” The boys didn’t respond, but a little girl standing nearby chimed in: “I have a gay uncle, too!” — Corey Gerard Lambert
Three Shots After it Was Over
I called you when I left the gynecologist. You, whom I’d been with for years until recently. We’d already started seeing other people. Yet we found ourselves together at Dr. Chiu’s office treating an S.T.D. one of us had given the other. While there, we were recommended a course of vaccines for HPV. Three shots over the course of the next nine months became our relationship’s post-mortem. You squeezed my hand as I flinched at the needle. I laughed at you for always forgetting your vaccine record. After, we rewarded ourselves with Dairy Queen and banter. — Lauren Lim
Accidental Thief
Today I came across a butter knife that we’d accidentally stolen from our wedding reception. My memories are not quite as vivid as they used to be, although I thought I’d be able to recall all of it. The one thing I’ll never forget is how I felt that entire day, excited and bursting with joy. I was the happiest woman on earth, without a care in the world, including no guilt for stolen things. I was stealing time and memories. — Mesa Fama
Results from three randomized clinical trials show safety and efficacy of a brexpiprazole-sertraline combination in adult patients with post-traumatic stress disorder.
The information is current and up-to-date in accordance with the latest veterinarian research.
Learn more »
Important Note:
Cats must always have access to fresh water. Catnip tea should only be offered as an occasional treat if your cat enjoys it, larger amounts can cause digestive upset. Seek advice from your veterinarian before offering your cat new foods and treats, as they may not be appropriate or safe for all cats depending on their age, underlying health or any medication they are on.
Sometimes, you want to spice up your kitty’s diet. After all, eating and drinking the same thing day in and day out must be boring, right? But you know you shouldn’t give your cat a ton of treats, and you know people food is definitely out of the question. So, how can you give your pet a nice change of pace when it comes to what they eat or drink?
With catnip tea! Wait, tea for cats? Yep. This tea is made with catnip (which we know most kitties adore) and offers your cat a refreshing alternative to plain, boring water (which should entice them to drink more). You can make catnip tea in a variety of ways (not all of them are exactly tea), but no matter how you make it, your cat should be thrilled with the drink.
The 6 Easy Recipes for Catnip Tea for Cats
1. Catster Recipe – Simple Catnip Tea
Simple Catnip Tea
As the name of this recipe indicates, this is the simplest, most basic form of catnip tea that you can make. It only involves two ingredients and only takes a few minutes to complete! When it comes to the catnip, it’s advisable to start with a small pinch first to see if your cat likes the tea. If they do, you can add another pinch next time.
Prep Time 2 minutesmins
Cook Time 5 minutesmins
Total Time 7 minutesmins
Course Anytime
Cuisine Drinks
Pot or kettle
Mug or bowl for serving
1cupWater
1pinchDried or fresh catnip
Boil water
Add catnip to a mug or bowl
Once the water has boiled, pour it over the catnip
Let the tea steep for 3 minutes
Let the tea cool, then serve to the cat
2. Honey, The Cat’s Dipped The Nip Again (Catnip Tea)
Image Credit: Benyamin Bohlouli, Unsplash
This fun recipe spices up the original catnip tea recipe above with the addition of chicken broth. Catnip tea alone might make your kitty go wild, but add some tasty chicken broth, and you’ve got a drink sure to delight even the pickiest of felines. Choose chicken broth that is specifically made for cats.
Calories:
0 kcal.
Number of Servings:
4
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients:
1 cup warm water
3 tsp dried or fresh catnip
1/4 tsp instant powdered cat-safe chicken broth (no or low sodium, no onions or garlic)
Instructions:
Place the water in the container.
Add the other ingredients.
Shake until broth is dissolved and catnip has tinted the water green.
Serve 1/4 cup to your cat.
Refrigerate the leftovers.
Warm the leftovers just a touch before serving.
3. Iced Catnip Tea
Image Credit: StockSnap, Shutterstock
Iced catnip tea is essentially the original recipe, just with ice. Or rather tea that has been strained over ice, in this case. Going with iced catnip tea saves you waiting for the tea to cool down and ensures your kitty doesn’t burn their tongue!
Calories:
0 kcal.
Number of Servings:
4
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients:
17 oz water
2–3 tsp organic catnip
Ice
Instructions:
Boil water, then remove from heat.
Add catnip and let brew for 5 minutes.
Strain the tea over ice using the sieve.
Serve the tea to your cat.
4. Catnip Tea Ice Cubes
Image Credit: cottonbro, pexels
If your kitty isn’t digging catnip tea in a bowl, or you just want to make things more fun for them, you can make catnip tea ice cubes! These fun frozen treats are perfect for hot days and are a great way to add extra water to your cat’s day.
Calories:
0 kcal.
Number of Servings:
12
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients:
Amount of hot water your ice cube tray will hold
1 tsp dried catnip for every 8 oz of water used
Instructions:
Measure how much water your ice cube tray will hold, then boil it.
Add 1 teaspoon of catnip for every 8 ounces of water and stir.
Let the tea cool.
Pour into an ice cube tray and freeze.
Serve to kitty.
5. Catnip Ginger Tea
Image credit: Pixabay
Is your cat suffering from an upset stomach? Then, this catnip ginger tea may help soothe their tummy. Ginger has been used traditionally to help with vomiting and nausea, although too much ginger and catnip can have the opposite effects.
Calories:
0 kcal.
Number of Servings:
12
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients:
1 tsp dried catnip
1 tsp goat milk (or Cat Milk)
1/2 cup hot boiling water
Dash of ginger (roughly 1/2 cm of ginger root)
Instructions:
Take the ginger root and cut roughly 1/2 centimeters off.
Slice ginger into tiny pieces.
Place ginger pieces and catnip into a tea diffuser.
Place the diffuser into hot water and wait about 6 minutes.
Add a dash of goat milk or Cat Milk, let cool to room temperature, and serve to your cat.
6. Champagne Tastes Catnip Tea
Image Credit: Nennieinszweidrei, Pexels
This catnip tea recipe is supposed to be for humans, but with a couple of mild tweaks, you can easily make it cat-friendly. Simply leave out the sugar and honey and ditch the lemon. Then, for the herbal variation, add a cat-friendly herb, such as basil!
Calories:
0 kcal.
Number of Servings:
4
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients:
Few pinches of fresh or dry catnip
2 cups water
A couple of basil leaves or other cat-friendly herbs
Instructions:
Rinse the catnip and herbs.
Boil the water.
Add the catnip to the pot and muddle with the back of the wooden spoon.
Add the herbs.
Steep for 10 to 15 minutes.
Strain using a sieve.
Let cool and serve to the cat.
Conclusion
Making catnip tea for your cat is a fun way to get them to drink more and let them enjoy the “high” of catnip. Making this kind of tea is incredibly simple and only takes a few minutes to complete; plus, you can make tons of variations to the most basic catnip tea recipe! So, if your kitty is a big catnip fan, try one of these recipes and see how much they enjoy it.
Featured Image Credit: TarasBeletskiy, Shutterstock
The market for business parks in Kolkata has picked up in the last couple of years and real estate major Ambuja Neotia Group has received a good response to its upcoming project in the city.
The group, led by Harshavardhan Neotia, is currently developing a business park, christened as Ecospace Business Towers, which will have a super built-up area of around 4.50 lakh square feet.
Pioneering in the business parks space in Kolkata, the city-based Ambuja Neotia Group had set up Ecospace Business Park, which became operational in 2014. With 20-acre of land area, it is a large format multi-tenanted business park designed to offer work-life balance through nature infused workspaces. The business park has around 20 lakh square feet of super built-up area.
Commercial launches
Apart from big business parks, the group has also launched three commercial buildings– Ecostation, Ecosuite and Ecocentre. All these are operational.
“All these parks are either leased out or sold. The one under construction (Ecospace Business Towers) is fully sold. We have got a good response. Generally, the market has picked up in the last couple of years,” Ambuja Neotia Group Chairman Harshavardhan Neotia told businessline.
On the initial vision behind launching Ecospace Business Park around 10 years ago, Neotia said, “As we had a decent scale, we tried to bring in a lifestyle element to some of the common facilities – like sporting facilities, conferencing facilities and assembling facilities. People usually have long hours at work and may not have time once they go back home to play sports or take care of their businesses. So, at business parks these facilities would be available in the office premises that they can avail.”
According to him, demands for business parks in other major cities like Mumbai and Bengaluru are much higher, but such parks in Kolkata are “much more affordable”.
“With occupation certificate of a greenfield project at Salt Lake Sector V getting delayed, the city saw no new supply in the first quarter (Q1 2024). After robust supply addition in the previous year, the pipeline for the current year is low at around 0.8 msf (million square feet) though it is expected to pick up substantially in 2025 with a number of projects under development,” according to a report on office space in Kolkata by Cushman & Wakefield.
“Headline office vacancy rate edged down by 30 basis points on a quarterly basis, maintaining its downward trajectory witnessed over the past several quarters. Vacancies across Salt Lake Sector V and Rajarhat are likely to decline further in the upcoming quarters given higher occupier preference for projects in these prime IT corridors,” the report added.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LJETNA sniženja već su počela u nekim trgovinama, a s njima su stigle i uobičajene scene koje prate ovo uzbudljivo razdoblje. Jučer, dok smo obavljali šoping, posjetili smo jedan popularan dućan u splitskom trgovačkom centru, gdje nas je dočekao prizor koji će vjerojatno postati svakodnevica u narednim tjednima.
Ovakvi prizori su česti
Unutrašnjost trgovine bila je u neredu. Police i kabine bile su pretrpane, a odjeća raznih vrsta, od majica do hlača i haljina, bila je razbacana svuda po trgovini, što po policama, što po vješalicama, ali i na podu. Ovakvi prizori su česti kada počinju sezonska sniženja jer mnogi kupci jedva čekaju priliku za obnovu garderobe po nižim cijenama.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ako planirate u šoping, vrijedi imati na umu da će trgovine vjerojatno biti pune i da će biti potrebno nešto više strpljenja pri razgledavanju i isprobavanju odjeće. No, uz malo sreće i strpljenja, moguće je pronaći dobre ulove i osvježiti ormar za ovu sezonu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
As legendary sportscaster Al Michaels would say, you can’t make this up. Or maybe you can.
NBC Sports announced Wednesday that it will use the voice of Michaels, re-created using artificial intelligence, in a personalized daily recap of Summer Olympics events delivered to NBCUniversal’s Peacock streaming service subscribers.
Peacock users will be able to sign up and choose their favorite events. The information will be used to create “Your Daily Olympic Recap on Peacock,” a customized program of video highlights narrated by Michaels’ AI voice likeness. Most users will even be addressed by name in the recap.
The recaps will be assembled from hundreds of NBC Sports-produced clips each day. They will run for around 10 minutes, showing moments from the prior day along with a look ahead to what fans can expect to see on NBC in prime time. Up to six users per Peacock subscription can get recaps.
The AI re-creation of Michaels, 79, was trained by his past appearances on NBC Sports broadcasts. Michaels was in the booth for 16 seasons of NFL “Sunday Night Football.” He was a daytime anchor for NBC’s Olympics coverage in 2010 and 2012.
Michaels, who is currently the lead play-by-play announcer on Amazon’s “Thursday Night Football,” is also the voice of one the most famous Olympics moments in history. He forever defined the U.S. hockey team’s win over the Soviet Union at the 1980 Winter Games in Lake Placid, N.Y., with his phrase, “Do you believe in miracles?”
The Brentwood resident said he believes in AI.
“When I was approached about this, I was skeptical but obviously curious,” Michaels said in a statement. “Then I saw a demonstration detailing what they had in mind. I said, ‘I’m in.’”
NBC Sports expects to create and distribute nearly 7 million personalized versions of the daily recap over the course of the Games, which run from July 27 through Aug. 11.
NBCUniversal will provide 5,000 hours of live Olympics coverage from Paris, where up to 40 events will be happening concurrently each day across its broadcast and cable platforms. Every event will be streamed live on Peacock.
Gupshup, a leading conversation cloud, has announced India’s first conversational buyer app on the Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC) network, according to a press release. The announcement was made at the flagship event Conversations 2024 in Delhi. This latest innovation is said to enable buyers to use a WhatsApp-based conversational UI to discover, browse, and buy products from sellers across the ONDC network, without needing to download any other mobile app.
In future iterations, Gupshup has claimed that it will also offer this product capability to its enterprise customers that want to integrate conversational commerce into their chatbots.
Beerud Sheth, CEO, Gupshup said, “India’s diverse population uses different mobile tools, varied languages, and possesses different levels of tech-savvy. But they all know how to chat via WhatsApp. Delivering conversational experiences via the messaging app is the only way to reach everyone. Gupshup’s Buyer App on ONDC brings the vast commerce network to users nationwide, usable in any language, quickly and easily. This will truly transform digital commerce on a population scale in India.”
The company claims that more than 650 million Indians are presently active on social media and messaging platforms however, only 30 per cent of the users shop online. The new innovation is set to change this user pattern.
“Gupshup Conversation Cloud makes it easy for businesses to build rich conversational commerce experiences with AI-powered natural language interactions, in any language, over text and voice, with deep personalization, across the entire customer lifecycle. This ONDC Buyer App is the perfect demonstration of the significant impact of conversational experiences and the unique ability of Gupshup’s platform to enable them”, said Gaurav Kachhawa, Chief Product Officer at Gupshup.
As of now, the Buyer App is in Beta stage and will initially have limited availability, allowing users to order food and beverages on WhatsApp. Customers will be able to share their location over chat, browse sellers close to them, order food, and make payments right from WhatsApp. Support for additional conversational channels such as Google RCS and Voice will also be added soon. This is going to allow merchants and businesses looking to participate in the ONDC eCommerce ecosystem to leverage the Gupshup ONDC Commerce Platform and speed up their time to market.
ONDC is a collaborative initiative that brings together various merchants and brands on a unified digital commerce platform. This interconnected network was developed by the Indian government’s Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade. The primary goal of ONDC is to foster an open and inclusive e-commerce ecosystem in India.
The doors of the famed Kamakhya Temple, closed for the last four days on the occasion of Ambubachi Mela, opened on Wednesday morning with devotees thronging the seat of Shakti cult.
Devotees throng Kamakhya temple to offer prayers after the doors of the temple re-open for devotees after the four day Ambubachi Mela, in Guwahati on Wednesday. Kamakhya Temple reopens after Ambubachi Mela, devotees throng sacred Shakti cult shrine (ANI Photo/Pitamber Newar)
The temple doors were symbolically closed for four days as it is believed that Goddess Kamakhya undergoes her menstrual cycle during this period.
The rituals associated with the opening of the temple were held on Wednesday night. The doors of the shrine, however, were opened for devotees on Thursday morning, an official of the Kamakhya Devalaya said.
The annual Ambubachi Mela commenced on June 22 amid elaborate security arrangements. More than 25 lakh people visited the fair since its beginning, an official of Kamrup Metropolitan district said.
The Ambubachi Mela, held on the temple premises during this period, is a major event in the tourism calendar of the state.
The administration had made camp facilities for 5,000 people at Kamakhya railway station and for 12,000-15,000 others in Pandu port on the banks of the river Brahmaputra.
Police personnel, volunteers, private security guards and others have also been engaged to ensure security of the Mela, officials said.
During the Ambubachi festival, it is also believed that Mother Earth menstruates.
This story has been published from a wire agency feed without modifications to the text. Only the headline has been changed.
Ever since the box office and chart topping success of Hugh Jackman’s The Greatest Showman movie and soundtrack, fans have been waiting for a stage musical version.
And now an official circus show has been announced inspired by the Hollywood blockbuster.
Come Alive! The Greatest Showman Circus Spectacular is set to open in London this autumn.
The attraction’s website teases: “THIS IS THE MOMENT YOU’VE WAITED FOR… ‘COME ALIVE!’ is the brand new CIRCUS SPECTACULAR heading to London this autumn.
“Featuring all the hit songs from the blockbuster movie. SO TELL ME, DO YOU WANNA GO?”
So how do Greatest Showman fans get tickets? That information is yet to be revealed.
However, you can sign up to be the first to hear on the official website located here.
You’re looking at the cheapest version of Skoda’s flagship SUV in Australia – for now.
It’s the Skoda Kodiaq, and given it was released in 2016, it’s not surprising the Czech manufacturer is looking to switch things up with a new generation on the way this year.
The current model was treated to a mid-life update in 2022 that largely focused on improving tech functionality rather than upgrading looks – but it left some nicer safety kit as an optional extra on base models.
Still, the Kodiaq has remained one of Skoda’s top-sellers in Australia, second only to the Kamiq with 1555 examples sold in 2023.
On test here is the entry 2024 Skoda Kodiaq Style, which has all the same bones as its more expensive siblings but misses out on some of the nicer things like lane assist and a surround-view camera.
WATCH: Paul’s video review of the MY22 Kodiaq RS
It still has a turbocharged engine and four-wheel drive system like the rest of the range, and it’s competitively priced in a packed segment that is growing every year.
Does the ageing Czech still have what it takes to compete with newer overseas competition, or should you wait for the new Kodiaq to touch down?
How does the Skoda Kodiaq compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Skoda Kodiaq against similarly sized vehicles.
Skoda
Kodiaq
How much does the Skoda Kodiaq cost?
There are three Kodiaq models available in Australia, and the base Style on test here is priced at $56,490 drive-away.
Model variant
Drive-away price
2024 Skoda Kodiaq Style
$56,490
2024 Skoda Kodiaq Sportline
$56,490
2024 Skoda Kodiaq RS
$76,890
Skoda is currently offering a run-out discount on the middle Sportline variant that matches its price with the Style, as it gears up for the arrival of the SUV’s next generation in November this year.
To see how the Kodiaq Style lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the Skoda Kodiaq like on the inside?
It’s by no means an uncomfortable or unsightly interior, but the Kodiaq is starting to feel its age alongside flashy new rivals.
The seats are upholstered in a combination of leather and what Skoda calls “Suedia”, and with lumbar support they’re comfortable to sit in for long periods of time despite being a little wide and flat. That is, once you get them adjusted.
Despite asking more than $55,000 drive-away, this base Kodiaq lacks any form of power adjustment for the front seats. In addition to the typical levers, there’s a knob at the base of the seatback that adjusts the reclining angle.
It took me a second to find, and front passengers complained it was more difficult than powered adjustment or a lever.
Once you’re in and comfortable, you’ll be able to take in the stylish simplicity and sheer spaciousness of the cabin.
There’s loads of room all around, and you definitely won’t be cramped in the front row. While it presents well, the interior ambience would benefit from the addition of the black headliner fitted to the more premium Kodiaqs.
In front of the driver is a very well-proportioned and good-looking steering wheel. It features sporty, ergonomic sculpting and is wrapped in quality perforated leather.
The buttons and rolling dials on the wheel are of good quality and feel nice to use, while the rest of the cabin’s controls fall easily to hand and work as they should. There are physical buttons and knobs for the climate control in the middle, and the headlights are controlled by a Volkswagen-sourced selector to the right of the wheel.
They say with age comes wisdom, and the Kodiaq proves it to be true with its simple climate controls that mean you don’t have to wrestle a touchscreen if you want to change your fan speed or adjust the temperature.
A downside is the inclusion of gloss-black trim elements, which can scratch easily and are hard to keep clean. It’s not really about how much of it there is, but rather where it’s been placed.
It’s all over the car’s key touch points – the climate controls, on the spokes of the steering wheel, and it covers the entirety of the wireless phone charger’s sliding cover. That cover also feels flimsy, with more play than we’ve come to expect from Volkswagen Group products.
There’s an actual gear shifter in a conventional configuration, and the centre console box is reasonably sized. It’s covered by a soft-touch lid that slides to reveal two central cupholders, though they are on the smaller side.
Flip the removable cupholder insert and you instead get a coin tray; an example of the classic Skoda touch designed to differentiate the Kodiaq from the related Tiguan Allspace.
Between the dashboard’s plastic cladding (which is swapped for a carbon-fibre appearance in higher trim models) you’ll find the Kodiaq’s 9.2-inch infotainment screen, which is somewhat dated in appearance and small by today’s standards.
At least everything on the screen is where you’d expect – it doesn’t take a rocket scientist to switch from satellite navigation to radio, or from vehicle settings to smartphone mirroring. The only thing that would make it easier to navigate would be a couple of physical buttons in place of the touchscreen ones for ‘menu’ and ‘home’.
Wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto are included standard across the Kodiaq range and worked reliably in our week with the car, and it’s nice to get a wireless charger too. My phone did get quite hot after having sat on it for an hour’s drive though, which is common to most brands.
Your alternatives are limited to two USB-C outlets in the front and a 12-volt outlet in the rear, so passengers will need to come prepared if they need to charge up.
Behind the wheel is a 10.25-inch instrument screen, which is logically laid out and can show different displays with a variety of information.
If you don’t like one display, chances are you’ll find another look in there that suits better.
Flanking the screen are two vertical light gauges for water temperature and fuel level. Some rivals have more modern looking fonts and graphics, but none can match the sheer range of options you get here – with a map between the dials a particular highlight.
There’s a third stalk on the steering wheel for the adaptive cruise control (ACC). Unlike Volkswagen, Skoda has stuck with this arrangement even in the new Kodiaq – which takes some getting used to if you were expecting wheel-mounted buttons.
From my driving position I couldn’t see the whole stalk, so I had no idea how to adjust the set distance to the car in front while using ACC.
Turns out there’s a multi-position switch on top, which is obstructed by the steering wheel’s left spoke. It’s the sort of thing you’d learn quickly if you owned the car, but took a moment to figure out and adjust to.
A similar switch is used to adjust the speed of the intermittent wipers, and interacting with it is more fiddly than necessary. A conventional rotating selector would’ve been fine.
Stepping up and into the back is easy thanks to the Kodiaq’s large doors and high roofline. Once seated, there’s plenty of space all around regardless of how tall you are.
Seating in the middle row is firm but spacious, and it’s appointed with two vents and a centre fold-down armrest with cupholders which are probably only good for coffee cups or small plastic bottles.
Those seats slide to reveal the third row, which can be unfolded using the pull strap. Keep in mind there’s really not much room here because even if it’s a seven-seater, the Kodiaq doesn’t have massive dimensions.
As such, the third row is the compromise. For comparison, the Kodiaq’s body is around 100mm shorter and 20mm narrower than both a Santa Fe and a Kia Sorento.
It’s fine if you need to move a lot of people a short distance, but it’s not an ideal arrangement for adults on longer trips. Space in the second row becomes compromised if you’re utilising all seven seats and want to slide the bench forward, too.
There are two ISOFIX anchors on the outer second-row seats, as well as three top tether points.
The boot is where the Kodiaq’s interior comes into its own, as it boasts one of the most spacious cargo areas in its segment.
At 765L with the third row folded, it’s smaller than only the chunkier GWM Tank 500 (795L) and Isuzu MU-X (1119L). That means you won’t be limited for what you can fit, though space is severely compromised if the third row is up – as is the case in rivals.
With both rear rows folded down, the space opens up to a maximum 2005L, matching the largest measured capacities of the Sorento (1995L) and Jeep Wrangler (2050L).
Unlike most of its competition, though, the Kodiaq settles for a space saver spare in lieu of a full-size alloy.
Dimensions
Skoda Kodiaq Style
Length
4697mm
Width
1882mm
Height
1681mm
Wheelbase
2790mm
Boot capacity (VDA)
270L (3rd row up) 765L (3rd row folded, to seatback) 2005L (all seats folded, up to roof)
To see how the Kodiaq Style lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
There’s one powertrain shared across Kodiaq Style and Sportline variants, and they both come with all-wheel drive as standard.
Model
Skoda Kodiaq Style
Engine
2.0-litre 4cyl turbo
Power
132kW @ 6000rpm
Torque
320Nm @ 1400rpm-3940rpm
Transmission
7-speed dual-clutch automatic
Driven wheels
Four-wheel drive
Weight
1855kg (tare)
0-100km/h
8.4 seconds
Fuel economy (claim)
8.2L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
8.0L/100km
Fuel tank size
58 litres
Fuel requirement
95 RON
The 2025 Kodiaq is set to include a boosted 2.0-litre engine with 150kW, which will better align it with Skoda’s European specifications.
To see how the Kodiaq Style lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
How does the Skoda Kodiaq drive?
Once you get moving, the Kodiaq hits its stride. It’s smooth, quiet, and has plenty of power to get you by.
MY22 Kodiaq Style shown
Pressing the start/stop button (located where a key barrel would’ve been) fires up the engine with a typical cold idle, but it doesn’t produce any notable racket and dies down quickly as it gets up to temperature.
Despite being the cheapest Kodiaq available, it’s comfortable on the move with little road noise entering the cabin. Small bumps aren’t a worry, and even bigger imperfections on the road won’t unsettle the car in any meaningful way.
The steering is also very light at low speed, which means it isn’t cumbersome or tiring behind the wheel. The feel is also consistent as you speed up, and at higher speed the Kodiaq feels sure-footed.
At low speed the Volkswagen DSG behaves as expected of dual-clutch transmissions. It’s easy to be caught out if you’re coming from an older vehicle or a car with a more conventional torque converter arrangement when you first hop behind the wheel.
That’s not to say it doesn’t work well, but it does have a unique feel in first and second gear as it revs up from a stop but doesn’t move away all that fast. It doesn’t take long to dial into how it feels, and the tune in the Kodiaq is pretty friendly around town.
High-speed cruising is definitely a strength, as once you’re above third gear the shifting of gears is almost imperceptible. Tied in with the refined on-road cabin experience, it makes for very comfortable driving once you’re out of town.
The turbocharged engine has enough punch to either get you moving or quickly accelerate past another vehicle, although there are times where it feels a bit like a small heart powering a big car.
As good as it is in other areas, it sometimes needs a moment to kick down when you put your foot down. That means it’s not as quick on its feet as I’d like it to be, but then again it is a seven-seater and that kind of response is perfectly fine for the average punter.
However, once it does find the right gear, the engine is very capable of getting the hefty Kodiaq up to speed without much sweat. It’s reassuring to know it can do it, regardless of whether or not you’ll actually need it to.
In terms of its physical size on the road, the Kodiaq isn’t all that big. At least not for a seven-seater.
If you’re used to a small hatchback or city car it’ll naturally feel different, but compared to other cars of a similar size the Kodiaq sits well within its lane on the highway. It rarely feels like it’ll be too big for a space when parking, too.
That means it’s easy for someone unfamiliar with the car to get in and drive compared to something like a Tank 500, MU-X, or Kluger. It doesn’t take a lot of getting used to, and you’ll quickly feel confident on the road.
It could definitely benefit from some of the driver assistance features offered as standard in the more expensive Kodiaqs, though.
Lane-keep assist would tie in well with adaptive cruise control, while a surround-view camera would make it easier to navigate in tight spaces – both form part of pricey optional packages.
The features it does have – like auto-hold and automatic stop/start – work well, with the latter in particular very consistent in shutting down the engine promptly as you come to a stop and then restarting it smoothly when it’s time to set off.
If you don’t want any of that, there are big, clearly marked buttons on the centre console to turn those features off on a whim.
What do you get?
Three trim levels are available in the Australian Kodiaq range.
Standard equipment on the Kodiaq Style:
19-inch alloy wheels
9.2-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
Wireless phone charger
Satellite navigation
10.25-inch Virtual Cockpit digital instrument cluster
Power-folding, auto-dimming, heated side mirrors
Adaptive cruise control
Dual-zone climate control
Keyless entry and start
Power tailgate
Automatic headlights and wipers
Door edge protectors
Leather-trimmed sport steering wheel
Leather upholstery
Privacy glass, rear window sun blinds
LED headlights
LED daytime running lights
Fog lights
LED rear fog lights
Tablet holders on front seat backs
Kodiaq Sportline adds:
20-inch alloy wheels
Alcantara/leather sports seats with silver stitching
Matrix LED headlights*
Headlight cornering and poor weather function*
Gear shift paddles*
Power-adjustable driver’s seat*
Drive mode selection
Progressive steering
Kodiaq RS adds:
Leather-trimmed sports seats with RS logos
Heated front and rear seats*
Ventilated front seats*
DAB+ digital radio
Red brake calipers
Carbon-style interior trim
Panoramic sunroof
Adaptive dampers
Off-road mode
Tri-zone climate control*
12-speaker Canton sound system*
Hands-free tailgate operation
Surround-view camera*
*Available for the Style as part of an optional package
Is the Skoda Kodiaq safe?
The Skoda Kodiaq does not have a current ANCAP safety rating, but it did achieve a five-star rating in 2017 which expired for vehicles sold from 1 January, 2024.
Standard safety equipment includes:
9 airbags
Driver and front passenger airbags
Driver’s knee airbag
Front and rear side airbags
Front and rear side curtain airbags
Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)
Adaptive cruise control
Driver attention monitoring
Reversing camera
Front, rear parking sensors
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic assist – with braking
Multi-collision brake
Kodiaq RS adds:
Lane assist*
Lane assist with adaptive lane guidance*
Traffic jam assist*
Automatic parking assist*
Emergency assist*
*Available for the Style as part of an optional package
How much does the Skoda Kodiaq cost to run?
Skoda offers a seven-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty across its range. It’s an appealing proposition and can be transferred to a new owner if the car is sold before the warranty is up.
Every new Skoda purchase includes a complimentary one-year roadside assistance membership, and servicing your vehicle at a Skoda dealership will grant you up to 12 months of roadside assistance.
If you have a depleted existing roadside assistance membership at the time of service, Skoda will automatically top it up to 12 months.
The company also offers prepaid service packs, which vary in price between models. For a new Kodiaq, the five-year, 75,000km service pack will cost you $2900, while the seven-year, 105,000km plan is $3350.
Like the warranty, service packs are also transferrable when you sell your car, and you can purchase ‘top-ups’ if you want to extend your prepaid servicing. For example, if you want to top up from five years to seven years for your Kodiaq, it’ll cost an additional $1300.
If you don’t want to go for a prepaid service pack, services will come at 12 month or 15,000km intervals. Prices are outlined for the first seven years of Kodiaq ownership.
Service interval
Price
1yr or 15,000km
$459
2yr or 30,000km
$898
3yr or 45,000km
$459
4yr or 60,000km
$1568
5yr or 75,000km
$459
6yr or 90,000km
$898
7yr or 105,000km
$459
Total
$5200
CarExpert’s Take on the Skoda Kodiaq Style
While the Style is by no means a bad car, the fact it’s the same price as the Sportline coming into the end of its life makes the base grade harder to recommend.
For the most part it’s got enough tech to keep you comfortable, and wireless charging and smartphone mirroring are certainly a nice bonus allowing you to get in and go without fuss.
It still has a small screen with a somewhat dated display, though, and there’s a lack of more charging options in the rear even as the Kodiaq range gets more expensive.
Safety features and drive modes are also missing on this spec and it’s disappointing they’re only included if you choose to add optional extras at the time of purchase.
Given they’re included as standard on the most expensive option, I’d want more of it to trickle down the range on the next-generation Kodiaq.
The on-road experience is definitely where the Style shines, mostly because it’s pretty much the same under the skin as the other Kodiaqs.
It’s smooth, quiet, and the DSG is second-to-none at high speed. In a pinch, the engine has plenty of power to pull you through and doesn’t complain while doing so.
The Style is good on fuel too, which never goes amiss in the context of how expensive everything is these days. If you’re in need of a seven-seater and it has to be European, it’s hard to look past the Kodiaq – even in its base setup.
It’s definitely well worth going for the same-price Sportline or even the flagship RS, though, as they add that little bit of spice that takes this car from good to superb – no pun intended.
MORE: Buy a Skoda Kodiaq MORE: Everything Skoda Kodiaq
A Reuters report claims that Foxconn has been excluding married women from assembly jobs at its Sriperumbudur iPhone assembly plant in Tamil Nadu.
Reports of Foxconn Rejecting Married Women From Jobs: The Labour Ministry says the state government is the appropriate authority for the enforcement of Equal Remuneration Act, hence the report has been sought.
In response to media reports alleging that married women are being barred from working at Foxconn’s Sriperumbudur iPhone assembly plant, the Ministry of Labour and Employment on Wednesday, June 26, sought a detailed report from the Tamil Nadu government’s labour department.
“Section 5 of the Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 clearly stipulates that no discrimination shall be made while recruiting men and women workers. As the state government is the appropriate authority for the enforcement and administration of the provisions of this Act, the report has been sought from the state government,” the Ministry of Labour & Employment said in a statement.
Additionally, the office of the Regional Chief Labour Commissioner has been directed to provide a factual report to the Ministry of Labour & Employment, Government of India, according to the statement.
A Reuters report claims that Foxconn, a key manufacturer of Apple devices, has been excluding married women from assembly jobs at its Sriperumbudur iPhone assembly plant in Tamil Nadu. This practice contradicts the codes of conduct for both companies, which explicitly prohibit discrimination based on marital status.
The Reuters investigation, published on June 25, revealed that Foxconn discriminates against married women by rejecting their job applications, citing their “greater family responsibilities compared to unmarried counterparts” as the reason.
The report mentioned the case of two sisters in their 20s, Parvathi and Janaki, who traveled to the Foxconn plant in March 2023 after seeing job ads on WhatsApp. Upon arrival, a security guard asked them if they were married. “We didn’t get the jobs as we both are married,” Parvathi recounted, according to the Reuters report.
Even the auto-rickshaw driver who took them to the facility warned them that married women were not hired, according to the report.
“Ministry of Labour and Employment has taken note of various media reports claiming that married women are not being allowed to work at Foxconn India Apple iPhone plant. In light of these reports, the Ministry has requested a detailed report from the Labour Department of the Tamil Nadu Government,” according to the official statement on June 26.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
MicroStrategy has executed another $800 million BTC buy, doubling down on its strategy to amass as much Bitcoin (BTC) as possible. This massive purchase has triggered millions of dollars in inflows in a new Bitcoin ETF token, ETFSwap (ETFS). The ETFS cryptocurrency is the native Bitcoin ETF token of the ETFSwap ecosystem, which enables the buying and trading of tokenized Exchange-Traded Funds.
ETFSwap (ETFS) Records Millions Of Dollars In Inflows From Institutional Investors
MicroStrategy’s $800 million BTC buy comes as no surprise to the crypto community as the company has publicly revealed its intentions to increase its Bitcoin (BTC) holdings continually. However, this recent purchase may have triggered significant FOMO from investors, pushing them towards ETFSwap to invest in its Bitcoin ETF token, ETFS.
ETFSwap (ETFS) has recorded millions in inflows in its public sale as thousands of users are massively accumulating its Bitcoin ETF token. The presale has just been running for a few weeks, however, in that short time, more than $2 million have been raised and over 300 million tokens were bought by institutional investors.
As a decentralized platform, ETFSwap (ETFS) allows users to swap crypto assets for tokenized institutional ETFs. This platform has been making waves in the crypto market, driven by the massive growth of the ETF market and the introduction of newly discovered asset classes like Spot Bitcoin ETFs and Ethereum Spot ETFs.
ETFSwap (ETFS) sets itself apart from traditional ETF platforms due to its integration of advanced Artificial Intelligence (AI) powered ETF trackers and screeners. These AI-based tools help provide the best ETF suggestions for investors to generate maximum returns.
By collaborating with MiCa-compliant regulated investment banks, ETFSwap (ETFS) can utilize blockchain technology to facilitate decentralized transactions and automated ETF trading. This platform also offers permissionless and borderless trading services, ensuring users from diverse parts of the world can have access to various commodities through the institutional ETFs available on its innovative platform.
Besides its cutting-edge trading tools, ETFSwap (ETFS) also provides customizable trading strategies for users and access to excellent liquidity via its market-making expertise. This platform aims to democratize access to the ETF market, as such it has revealed plans to launch its own ETF by 2025. This provides users the opportunity to diversify their assets into a lucrative investment venture backed by a Bitcoin ETF token with high liquidity and significant profit potential.
Investors can gain access to ETFSwap’s soon-to-be-launched ETF and its advanced trading platform by investing in its Bitcoin ETF token during its ongoing presale stage. As demand for the Bitcoin ETF token rises and more capital pours into ETFSwap, the value of ETFS is expected to rise significantly. Currently, the price of the Bitcoin ETF token is $0.01831, however, by the next presale stage the token is projected to rise to $0.03846.
American Business intelligence company, MicroStrategy, has made another substantial Bitcoin (BTC) purchase amidst the cryptocurrency’s declining value. Michael Saylor, the founder of MicroStrategy, revealed in an X post on Thursday that the company has acquired an additional 11,931 BTC, valued at $786 million.
Saylor disclosed that the company had used the proceeds from convertible notes and excess cash to buy 11,931 BTC at an average price of $65,883. As of June 4, 2024, MicroStrategy now holds a total of 226,331 BTC, acquired for $8.33 billion at an average of $36,798.
MicroStrategy has also disclosed plans to continue its Bitcoin (BTC) buying operation. Earlier this month, the company announced plans to offer $700 million in convertible senior notes to qualified institutional buyers. The proceeds from this sale will be used to purchase more Bitcoin (BTC) and substantially increase the company’s holdings.
Conclusion: MicroStrategy BTC Buy Spurs Demand For Bitcoin ETF Token
MicroStrategy’s massive BTC buy comes at a time when investors’ demand for tokenized ETFs continues to rise. The market’s heightened interest in ETFs has led to massive demand for ETFSwap’s Bitcoin ETF token, ETFS. Investors looking to access innovative ETF markets can now do so through ETFSwap (ETFS). Its presale is open to all investors eager to buy ETFS tokens early and capitalize on its projected surge in value.
Stuart Butler is a trained rocket scientist turned content marketing rock star.
Though the career as a rocket scientist didn’t stick, he applied what he learned to a 20-plus-year career in marketing. Now, as chief marketing officer of Visit Myrtle Beach, Stuart wants to disrupt not only the destination marketing space but ALL of marketing.
And it seems to be working.
Stuart and his team created Traveling the Spectrum, a heartwarming, unscripted six-part video series following three families living with autism as they go on vacation (in Myrtle Beach, of course).
A deal with a well-known streaming service is expected to be announced soon. But for now, you can watch the trailer embedded here.
From the storytelling to the marketing strategy to the distribution plan, Stuart is doing something he believes few marketers are willing to do: Set their brand ego aside, stop controlling the message, and realize that great content always puts authenticity first.
You can watch my interview with Stuart here or read on to learn more about the project and his marketing philosophy.
Leaning into the media company model
“We want to try things that people haven’t tried before and do them in a new way,” Stuart says.
When Stuart started three years ago, he knew times were changing. Destination marketing organizations like Visit Myrtle Beach spent most of their budget on paid media. But, as he learned running a B2B agency in the hotel space, paid media was becoming less effective because consumers increasingly rejected advertising, starting with adding pop-up blockers to their browsers. On top of that, platforms like Google and Facebook had increasingly become the gatekeepers of content and raised their advertising prices.
But Stuart had a plan. He believed the best path forward was building their audiences through owned media — what he calls “branded entertainment.”
“Instead of selling to people, we wanted people to make their own decisions, have their own thoughts and feelings; to influence their behaviors so that they chose to come to Myrtle Beach as a destination instead of being told to [come],” Stuart says.
With that philosophy in mind, Stuart tackled the creation of a reality cooking competition show called “Chef Swap at the Beach” to highlight the 2,000 restaurants and amazing culinary scene in Myrtle Beach. The show featured two local chefs who swapped kitchens and created a surprise meal for a panel of judges. It now airs on the Cooking Channel and other streaming networks and has just released its second season.
Stuart says “Chef Swap at the Beach” was more successful at elevating the Visit Myrtle Beach brand in terms of media coverage and audience value than any of its paid marketing projects to date.
They also learned that by following two simple rules — entertain and help the audience — people will not only listen, but they will tell their friends and come back.
The success of Chef Swap helped Stuart get buy-in for other projects, but it still took a while. He spent the first six to 12 months on the job educating his co-workers and Visit Myrtle Beach’s board of directors on the changing media landscape. (This is where he says his background in physics helped, as he knew how to deconstruct a problem to the first principles.) He knew it was a big leap to convince them to rely less on paid media and invest in owned media projects.
“We really were very methodical in building the bricks and the scaffolding around the argument,” Stuart says. “We wanted to do it in a way that was comfortable for people, that was digestible.”
So, he started by asking them to commit 10% of the budget to a few test projects for owned media. It worked. And it helped Stuart get buy-in for his passion project, Traveling the Spectrum, which he calls the culmination of a three-year strategy to move from conventional marketing to a more progressive view.
Storytelling is the heart of marketing
Myrtle Beach is best known for its 60 miles of beautiful sunny beaches, amazing attractions, and award-winning restaurants. But people may not know that the area is a pioneer in autism-friendly travel.
In 2016, Champion Autism Network (CAN) declared its hometown of Myrtle Beach as the first autism-friendly certified destination in the United States. The Myrtle Beach International Airport, in conjunction with CAN, opened the Quiet Room, where families can soothe a child during a meltdown. It became a model for airports around the world.
With that groundwork laid, Stuart’s team set out to create awareness that Myrtle Beach is an inclusive, welcoming place to visit for autistic families and people with neurodiversity. Inspired by the reality show Love on the Spectrum, the Myrtle Beach marketers came up with the concept to highlight the good, the bad, and the meltdowns experienced by these families with members on the autism spectrum.
Stuart had a clear vision for the project. “We don’t want this show to be about Myrtle Beach. We want it to be about the challenges of traveling with autism. We don’t want to be saying to people, ‘Come to Myrtle Beach because we’re sensory-friendly.’
“We want to be spreading the message that 87% of families who have a kid on the spectrum don’t travel. And we think that’s an injustice that needs to be solved. We’re going to have more impact on the world if it doesn’t look to be a promotion from a destination.”
Stuart tapped the Philadelphia-based The Workshop Content Studios, which had worked on Chef Swap, to develop Traveling the Spectrum. The series takes viewers behind the scenes and showcases the unique experiences of exploring sensory-friendly travel at Myrtle Beach. The show includes three families — the Tilks, including Max, age 28, from Michigan; the Gielinks, including Brayden, age 14, from Ohio; and the Hills, including Mikko, age 2, from Texas.
“It’s going to change the world. It’s going to change the way people see autism. It’s going to show that there are degrees of the spectrum,” Stuart says. “It’s going to show that people can be a part of the solution by showing a little more empathy and a little more understanding to people who are different than themselves.
“And I think it’s something that the community in Myrtle Beach is going to be really proud of because it shows that we’re very welcoming and hospitable.”
Stuart’s team is also working on other innovative, non-promotional ways to tell the story that Myrtle Beach is an autism-friendly place. They worked with author Lynda Farrington Wilson on a children’s book — “Splish, Splash, Squawk! Finding Joy in a Sensory-Friendly Vacation.”
They also have a podcast, “Life’s a Beach … And Then You Die,” that tells stories of human experiences, including those on the autism spectrum. The multiplatform strategy ensures a consistent message. But to Stuart, it’s all about one thing.
“I believe that the marketers are storytellers. I believe that a job is to shine a light on the positive story that exists, whether it’s a business, a service, or whatever we’re trying to promote. And so, in this case, it’s really easy because we can tell real stories of real people.”
Measuring success
But how will Visit Myrtle Beach measure the impact of Traveling the Spectrum?
Stuart says he thinks Myrtle Beach will attract more than its fair share of travelers who will realize they can travel despite the challenges. And it seems to be working. Stuart says people are finding out organically that Myrtle Beach is behind the Traveling the Spectrum project and are spreading the word. The tight-knit autism community shares resources with each other.
“When you can sort of tap into an audience that is that communal, it sort of accelerates the adoption. And so, we’ve seen that word of mouth, which is always going to be the most powerful form of marketing,” Stuart says.
That word-of-mouth marketing appears on The Traveling Spectrum website, which shows that over 870,000 visitors support its message, just below its social-media share buttons.
Between YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram, the trailer for Traveling the Spectrum has been viewed more than 750,000 times. Media mentions have gone through the roof.
Stuart says looking at those core KPIs alone shows that the series is a home run even before it hits the streaming platform. And while he believes Traveling the Spectrum will result in a tangible increase in travel, especially for the most valuable first-time visitors, to Myrtle Beach, he thinks it will do something even better.
“It’s going to change the perception of who Myrtle Beach is. People are going to look at us in an entirely different light. It’s going to elevate our brand to this level that we’ve never seen before,” Stuart says.
“Some of that’s measurable, some of it’s not. But even before the show (has) launched, we’re very, very happy with the results we’ve gotten. And once it’s launched, I think it’s just going to be next level.”
If you’d like to help spread the word about the Traveling the Spectrum movement, visit the website, sign the pledge, and share across your social platforms (or through word of mouth).
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Corporate Affairs Ministry (MCA) on Wednesday made it clear that the proceedings initiated by it under the company law against EdTech major Byju’s are still on going and that no final conclusion should be drawn in this matter at this stage.
“There have been recent reports claiming that Byju’s has been cleared of financial fraud in an ongoing investigation by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA). It is categorically clarified that such reports are factually incorrect and misleading,” MCA said in statement.
This MCA statement came in the wake of a media report on Wednesday stating that MCA has uncovered lapses in Byju’s corporate governance but did not find evidence of financial fraud.
In the cartoon “SpongeBob SquarePants”, Mr Krabs, purveyor of krabby patty hamburgers, is a frequent and ruthless price-gouger. He can get away with it since he has no competition, save for the unappetising Chum Bucket. McDonald’s, a fast-food chain that flips real-world hamburgers, can only dream of Mr Krabs’s pricing power. It has been forced into a fast-food price war.
Since June 25th Americans hungry for a deal have been able to get a sandwich, fries, chicken nuggets and soft drink under the golden arches for just $5. Burger King, a rival fast-food chain, is matching the offer with a $5 meal deal of its own. The two are following in the footsteps of Wendy’s, which is temporarily adding an ice cream to its long-standing Biggie Bag combo. Starbucks, seemingly determined to protect its reputation for high mark-ups, is pricing a sandwich and a coffee at $6. McDonald’s calls this the “summer of value”; economists call it deflation. However labelled, the development is heartening for both consumers and Federal Reserve officials, who hope to reduce interest rates before the year is out.
Need a new mattress this summer? You are in luck. Fourth of July sales offer some great discounts on mattresses, and this year’s deals are no exception. Leesa, a popular online mattress brand, makes quality beds for both hot and temperature-neutral sleepers. I’ve had the pleasure of testing all the Leesa mattresses, and here’s why you should take advantage of one of my favorite cooling mattresses being 30% off right now.
In addition to its popular foam mattress, the Leesa Original, Leesa has two main lines of beds. Its Chill line of cool-to-the-touch mattresses includes the Studio Chill, Oasis Chill, Sapira Chill and Legend Chill. Its hybrid innerspring line includes the Original Hybrid, Sapira Hybrid, Reserve Hybrid, Legend Hybrid, Plus Hybrid and Natural Hybrid.
The Leesa Sapira Chill stands out to me because it’s a pillowtop mattress that’s not too dense. By this, I mean that the pillowtop is fluffy and comfortable, and I don’t feel it pushing up against me. Instead, I like that I sink into it a little bit, but not so much that I feel stuck. It’s both supportive and pressure-relieving. This is the perfect balance for me as a combination sleeper. When I flip from my side to my stomach, I don’t feel much resistance from the mattress. As someone who often sleeps hot, the cooling cover is also a great touch.
I find the Sapira Chill so comfortable because it has four layers of foam on top of the Zoned Support Layer of coils. This is one more layer of foam than the Oasis Chill, another popular bed in the chill lineup. The Sapira is the only bed from Leesa to come in three firmness options: Plush, Medium-Firm and Firm. I think the Sapira will appeal to most, especially hot sleepers.
If you buy a Leesa mattress during this Fourth of July sale and then decide it isn’t right for you, don’t worry. Each Leesa mattress comes with a 100-night risk-free trial. There’s also free, no-contact shipping and a 10-year warranty.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
A California doctor wants people to know that, in his view and experience, the medical community doesn’t always tell patients the truth.
Dr. Robert Lufkin, a physician and father of two young children, has been diagnosed with four chronic diseases — the same ones that claimed his father’s life.
Inspired by his own medical struggles, Lufkin decided to write a book exposing what he calls “medical lies” that contribute to the risk of chronic disease in the U.S. – some of which he says he himself once taught as a professor at UCLA and USC.
MEN’S ENERGY AND VITALITY PLUMMETS FOR 6 REASONS. BOOST IT BACK UP THIS WAY
While Lufkin is critical of the medical establishment, he pointed out that he is also still part of it himself.
“I’ve written hundreds of peer-reviewed articles and 10 textbooks, and also have the honor and privilege of teaching doctors and other health care professionals, as well as seeing patients,” Lufkin told Fox News Digital during an interview.
Dr. Robert Lufkin, pictured at left, was diagnosed with four chronic diseases, which inspired him to write a book, “Lies I Taught in Medical School.”(Dr. Robert Lufkin/iStock)
His own diagnoses, Lufkin said, “woke him up” to the flaws in the medical system.
First, he developed a type of arthritis called gout.
“Next, I developed hypertension, which practically half of adults have,” he said.
“Unless we address the metabolic cause … the diseases will only continue to get worse and worse.”
Then came pre-diabetes, followed by dyslipidemia — “which is sort of abnormal blood lipids.”
The doctor noted that he’s actually a “big fan” of Western medicine in general — “I think it’s transformed our lives and made the world a better place,” he said — but that in the 21st century, a “new class of diseases” has posed a challenge.
Dr. Robert Lufkin, a physician and father of two children, said Western medicine has “made the world a better place,” though he warns of widespread misinformation.(Dr. Robert Lufkin)
“The diseases were present before, but now they’re exploding,” he said.
These include obesity, diabetes, hypertension, cancer, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer’s disease and even mental illness, Lufkin said.
NURSES SPEAK OUT: ‘WHAT I WISH I’D KNOWN BEFORE ENTERING THE PROFESSION’
“Up to 80% of our resources are now spent on these chronic diseases.”
The problem, according to the doctor, is that the tools that were so effective in the 20th century — “the pills and surgeries” — might save lives in the moment.
But they only address the symptoms of these chronic diseases — not their root causes.
In his book, “Lies I Taught in Medical School,” Lufkin claims that medical professionals tend to propagate 10 major misconceptions.(Dr. Robert Lufkin)
“There’s a common metabolic cause that underlies most of these diseases,” Lufkin said.
“And unless we address the metabolic cause, the pills and surgeries will not. The diseases will only continue to get worse and worse.”
‘The 10 lies’
In his book, “Lies I Taught in Medical School,” Lufkin claims that medical professionals tend to propagate 10 falsehoods.
He listed these situations and includes separate chapters on them in his book, labeled this way:
1. The Metabolic Lie: “Metabolism Is Just the Body’s Way of Digesting Food”
2. The Obesity Lie: “To Lose Weight, Just Exercise More and Eat Less”
3. The Diabetes Lie: “Sugar is Harmless, Other Than Causing Weight Gain and Tooth Decay”
4. The Fatty Liver Lie: “There Is No Treatment for Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease”
5. The Hypertension Lie: “High Blood Pressure Is Best Treated with Drugs”
8 BAD HABITS THAT MAKE YOU AGE FASTER, ACCORDING TO EXPERTS
6. The Cardiovascular Disease Lie: “Statins Are a Good Choice to Prevent Heart Disease”
7. The Cancer Lie: “Most Cancer Is Caused by Accumulated DNA Damage”
8. The Alzheimer’s Lie: “Alzheimer’s Disease Is a Progressive, Untreatable Disease Caused by Beta-Amyloid Accumulation”
9. The Mental Health Lie: “Metabolism Has Little Effect on Mental Health”
10. The Longevity Lie: “Aging Is the Inevitable Result of Accumulated Wear and Tear”
“In each chapter,” said Lufkin, “we go through each of those chronic diseases that determine our life span — and we talk about what the lies are and what the truth is.”
The doctor then presents a plan for making healthier lifestyle choices.
In his book, Dr. Lufkin also shares recommendations for healthy lifestyle choices to help prevent disease.(iStock)
“We talk about the nutrition, sleep, exercise, stress and how we can craft our own lifestyles to reverse those diseases,” he said.
In the excerpt below, Lufkin explains the first two of these “lies.”
Read an excerpt from ‘Lies I Taught in Medical School’
The Obesity Lie: ‘A Calorie Is Just a Calorie’
Dr. Robert Lufkin: We are now experiencing the worst global epidemic of obesity in history. Statistics show that 42.5% of adults age 20 and over are obese, and 73.6% are at least overweight.
Almost half of Americans are now obese, and most are overweight. Obesity is unhealthy and a marker for metabolic dysfunction, which manifests as hypertension, diabetes, heart attack, stroke, Alzheimer’s, cancer and other chronic diseases.
“We are now experiencing the worst global epidemic of obesity in history.”
Our understanding of the causes of this epidemic and the approaches to treating it is based on a simple lie: that “a calorie is a calorie,” implying that obesity is caused by eating too many calories.
“Obesity is unhealthy and a marker for metabolic dysfunction, which manifests as hypertension, diabetes, heart attack, stroke, Alzheimer’s, cancer and other chronic diseases,” a doctor writes in his book.(iStock)
As a physician, I know from personal experience that I can make anyone gain weight or fat just by giving them extra insulin. This is seen in both type 1 and type 2 diabetics as soon as they begin taking extra insulin as a medication.
To put it another way, calories are necessary, but not sufficient to drive obesity. Insulin is required. Obesity is not just a calorie problem; it’s an insulin problem.
If all foods stimulated insulin equally, then a calorie would just be a calorie. That’s not a lie. But all foods don’t trigger insulin the same way.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
The truth here is that in order to lose (or gain) weight, the most important thing is not the number of calories consumed, but rather the types of calories that affect insulin levels and direct our bodies to store energy as fat.
As every rancher knows, to fatten livestock, simply feed them large amounts of refined carbohydrates that will turn on insulin and drive energy storage into fat.
Feeding livestock fatty foods will not have the same effect.
The Diabetes Lie: ‘Sugar is Harmless, Other Than Causing Weight Gain and Tooth Decay’
We are currently at the beginning of the worst diabetes epidemic the world has ever known. Ten percent of American adults have type 2 diabetes, and about 38% have prediabetes. This means that for the first time in history, 48% — or nearly half the population — have the same metabolic disease!
“We are currently at the beginning of the worst diabetes epidemic the world has ever known,” Dr. Robert Lufkin writes in his new book. (iStock)
The diabetes lie declares that the best way to treat type 2 diabetes is with insulin.
Giving insulin will help control the immediate effects of too much glucose in the blood by telling our cells to remove that blood glucose and store it as fat.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
However, it will also raise the body’s overall insulin levels, worsening insulin resistance, the underlying cause of type 2 diabetes. Additionally, elevated insulin levels drive other chronic diseases.
“Many people would rather take a pill or a shot instead of changing their lifestyles.”
Our health care system is sadly much more optimized to deliver prescriptions for insulin and other drugs for managing type 2 diabetes than giving instructions on how to reverse it by changing our nutrition to avoid the causes.
To be fair, many people would rather take a pill or a shot instead of changing their lifestyles. But most people don’t know how powerful and effective lifestyle choices can be.
Plus, there is some evidence to show that merely improving glucose control with drugs, such as insulin or pills, might not prevent some of the long-term complications these patients all face.
There are also financial incentives. In 2013, sales of insulin and other diabetes drugs reached $23 billion, according to data from IMS Health, a drug market research firm.
That was more than the combined revenue of the National Football League, Major League Baseball and the National Basketball Association.
Chicken lovers, get ready for a delicious surprise. McDonald’s India – North and East’s latest Chicken Surprise burger is making its entry just in time during the summer holidays. Launched at an entry-level price of INR 65/-*, a-la-carte (original price INR 69/-) and INR 99/-, as part of the 3-piece meal, Chicken Surprise burger is a feel-good, affordable delight for chicken lovers. To promote the new Chicken Surprise burger, the brand has launched a 360-degree marketing campaign focused on announcing the launch of the Chicken Surprise burger and Chicken Surprise Meal that will be under the umbrella of McDeal@ INR 99/-. The campaign is targeted at GenZ emphasizing the brand’s role in making feel-good affordable chicken – that is generally perceived as expensive – available for everyone.
Leading the campaign is a TVC that narrates a light-hearted, insightful story showcasing how McDonald’s continues to be a preferred hangout destination for Gen Z, especially for the ones with shoestring budgets. With the new Chicken Surprise on the menu, value-conscious chicken lovers have a new reason to celebrate. The TVC features a young group of 5-7 friends in a McDonald’s restaurant – with one of them wearing a birthday cap. They are in front of the ordering counter and signal him to order, expecting a birthday treat for the whole group. He gulps, looks around and in a small (feeble) voice asks, “Kya Khaaoge?” (What would you like to eat?) All his friends respond in unison and say, “Chickaaaaaaaannnnnnnn”, expecting chicken meal(s). This is where a worried frown is seen on his face (thinking that treating his friends with chicken meals will probably not fit his budget). He soon gets relieved after noticing the Chicken Surprise Meal @ INR 99/- on the menu. He then confidently announces, “Aaj bhai ka budday hai, sabke liye CHICKEN SURPRISE MEAL” (it’s your friend’s birthday, everyone will get chicken treat).
This real-life birthday party scene highlights the latest addition of Chicken Surprise Meal to McDeal starting @ INR 99/- at McDonald’s (India – North and East). McDeal starting @INR 99/- now includes a choice of a burger out of Chicken Surprise or Veg Surprise or McAloo Tikki, served with regular fries and regular Coke – all for an affordable price of just INR 99/-.
Adding Bollywood dazzle to the table, filmmaker Karan Johar expressed his excitement on social media. He announced the launch of the new Chicken Surprise meal at McDonald’s India – North & East, surprisingly priced at INR 99. Karan’s charismatic and witty commentary has fans and foodies eagerly anticipating the new Chicken Surprise burger, which is expertly crafted to deliver a simple yet classic flavour in every bite.
Talking about the launch of Chicken Surprise burger, Rajeev Ranjan, Managing Director, McDonald’s India – North and East, said, “At McDonald’s India – North & East, we are passionate about understanding evolving tastes and needs of our customers through our menu innovations. We are committed to offering exciting customer-centric, high-quality McDonald’s food and experiences. Our new addition – Chicken Surprise burger offers an irresistible choice for chicken lovers with flavourful, juicy chicken taste and the signature crunch they love.”
Tastefully crafted with high-quality ingredients, the Chicken Surprise burger comes with a succulent crispy golden chicken patty nestled between a soft, toasted bun and generously topped with chipotle sauce, and shredded onion. Customers also have the choice to personalize their burger by opting for whole wheat bun, double patties, and additional toppings** of their choice such as lettuce, tomato, and cheese slice to elevate their dining experience. With Chicken Surprise burger, McDonald’s India – North and East has added yet another scrumptious and delicious option to its extensive chicken offerings that include Chicken McNuggets, Chicken McWings, Butter Chicken burger, McSpicy Chicken burger, McChicken burger, Chicken McGrill burger, Chicken Maharaja Mac and Spicy Chicken wrap.
The new Chicken Surprise burger is a perfect option for a quick and delicious meal on the go or can be relished at the nearest McDonald’s restaurant (except pure-vegetarian restaurants) or through McDelivery (Swiggy, Zomato or Magic Pin), or through takeaway, or drive-thru.
Every McDonald’s product undergoes rigorous quality inspections at various stages- from sourcing to processing to serving in restaurants. Specifically, McDonald’s chicken products are subjected to nearly 64 stringent quality tests from farm to fork to ensure top-notch quality and taste. *Introductory price. Limited time offer. **Additional charges may be applicable
Earlier this month Virginie Viard, the creative director of Chanel, the second-largest luxury brand in the world by sales, left the house. She had been in her job for approximately five years — ever since the 2019 death of Karl Lagerfeld, her mentor and the brand’s former designer, with whom she had worked closely for decades.
Though critics (including this one) had generally disliked her work, which was awkward and seemed to equate shorts with fresh ideas, brand management had always declared its loyalty to her, and the revenue kept going up: to almost $20 billion last year. The break seemed abrupt and unexplained. One week Ms. Viard was showing her cruise collection in Marseille, France; a few weeks later, she was gone.
According to Bruno Pavlovsky, the president of fashion at Chanel, Ms. Viard did not have anything to do with the couture show held this week. Instead, it was designed, a news release said, by the “Fashion Creation Studio.”
Whether that is true or not — three weeks is an awfully fast turnaround for a 46-look handmade collection, even with 150 people working in six ateliers, as the release stated — the result was even more mediocre than what Ms. Viard had produced. That’s saying something, given the most memorable feature of her last couture was that every look was paired with shiny white tights.
And it revealed, as much as anything, why a designer matters, what the real impact of Ms. Viard’s (brief-ish) tenure may be, and why the question of who gets the job next has become the single most popular subject of conversation alongside the runways — even more than complaining about the road closures for Olympic preparation or fretting about the coming elections in France and the United States.
For while the venue for the couture show was new — the ornate Opéra Garnier, home of the Paris Opera Ballet, rather than the usual glass-crowned Grand Palais — the clothes looked old.
Officially inspired by the experience of the 19th-century theater, which Chanel has long supported, the designs seemed more like a checklist of familiar Karl-isms, minus the Wharholian imagination that used to dress up his shows with airplanes and supermarkets, turning even his clunkers into Pop Art. So, yup, there were glinting bouclé suits with boxy knee-length skirts and decorative tassels; sweeping taffeta opera capes paired with tiny bodysuits; tutu-esque little black dresses; and some weird forays into what the brand called “lacquered jersey” and fancy sweatpants. There were a lot of puffed long sleeves, the kind with the whiff of historicism that Mr. Lagerfeld favored, a lot of taffeta bows and a meringue of a wedding dress. It was like Chanel by way of St. John.
Continuity is all fine and dandy, but when it turns into treading water, it can drag you down.
The problem with both this collection and, indeed, what Ms. Viard did before, is that they didn’t reflect a key part of the Lagerfeld legacy. One Mr. Lagerfeld himself summed up when he said, “Chanel is an institution, and you have to treat an institution like a whore — and then you get something out of her.”
That’s an egregious statement (he was given to them), but the point Mr. Lagerfeld was making was that he succeeded because he refused to genuflect to the history of the brand. He came in and kicked the double Cs off their pedestal, and the result was thrilling. (It was also what led to Tom Ford at Gucci, John Galliano at Dior and so on.) Someone needs to do it again, only this time around, do it to the Lagerfeld-shape sacred cow.
The opportunity is so enormous — the platform so big, resources so deep, brand recognition so connected with aspiration and chic, and design vocabulary so endlessly mutable — it was incredibly frustrating to watch Ms. Viard fail to seize it. Not to exploit all that possibility seemed almost irresponsible; a betrayal of the chance that had been handed her, and that, rumor had it, pretty much every other designer under the sun desired. It’s partly why the disappointment with her work was so sharp, the reactions often verging on the edge of angry.
After Ms. Viard left, there were some who thought the pile-on came from misogyny, but I don’t think that’s true; I think it was simply a response to the stalled nature of her clothes. She had five years to move forward, which is more than many designers get these days. But every time a collection showed signs of promise, such as her last ready-to-wear with its lithe Croisette silhouettes, the next one would go right back to souvenir shop, head-scratching norm.
(Though I also don’t think it’s true that it was the chorus of social media criticism that led to her departure. The echo chamber of fashion on Instagram and X and TikTok may be loud, but when you are talking about a multinational corporation, in the end it’s about moving product.)
Maybe that was what Chanel wanted. Maybe Ms. Viard didn’t have a choice. Chances are, no designer is ever going to have the same carte blanche and blank checks and lifetime employment deal that Mr. Lagerfeld had. Budgets have shrunk and control has gone back to management and when those changes happen they are very hard to reverse.
But the current situation would suggest that the powers-that-be at the brand have realized, at least, that Ms. Viard did more to render Chanel minor than most people could have imagined possible.
That may, in the end, be her greatest legacy: underscoring the need for a point of view. For someone to offer a new idea about women and their place in the world and who and how they want to be. That is, after all, how Chanel began.
There are not many brands with the power and influence to create seismic change in fashion. Chanel is one of them. Here’s hoping that is what happens next.
In an interview with Pharm Exec Associate Editor Don Tracy, Pedro Valencia, VP, Solid Tumor Pipeline Strategy & Execution, AbbVie, discusses how AbbVie is advancing the development of bispecific biologic therapies in both solid tumors and blood cancers.
You can’t help but notice the Sphynx Cat. They are so different from what we may usually think about how these animals should look. While they appear hairless, they’re not. Their coats are more like a short and soft down. The breed standard allows all colors and patterns. Hence, we have the blue Sphynx Cat. This cat may be a solid color or other variations like tortoiseshell or tabby. Let’s learn a bit more about them down below.
Breed Overview
Colors:
Blue, cream, brown, black, white, gray
Suitable for:
Active families looking for a low-shedding cat
Temperament:
Loving, intelligent, affectionate, outgoing
Other noticeable traits include the cat’s large ears and lemon-shaped eyes. Their skin has a wrinkled appearance, which makes them seem even more exotic. The breed is relatively new compared to others, such as the ancient Egyptian Mau. The blue Sphynx is an outgoing and vocal animal, and this kitty will thrive in an active household.
Blue Sphynx Cat Characteristics
Energy
+
A high-energy cat needs a lot of physical and mental stimulation to keep healthy and happy, while a low-energy cat needs minimal physical activity, but still needs mental stimulation. When choosing a cat, It’s important to ensure their energy levels match your lifestyle.
Trainability
+
Cats that are easy-to-train are more willing and skilled at quickly learning prompts and actions with minimal training. Harder-to-train cats are usually more stubborn or aloof and require a bit more patience and practice.
Health
+
Certain cat breeds are more prone to various genetic health problems, and some more than others. This doesn’t mean that every cat in those breeds will have these issues, but they do have an increased risk, so it’s important to understand and prepare for any additional needs they may require.
Lifespan
+
Due to their size or potential genetic health issues of a specific breed, some cats have shorter lifespans than others. Proper nutrition, exercise, mental stimulation, and hygiene also play an important role in your cat’s lifespan and quality of life.
Sociability
+
Some cat breeds are more social than others, both towards humans and other cats and animals. Cats that are more social have a tendency to rub up on strangers for scratches or jump on laps for cuddles, while cats that are less social shy away, hide, are more cautious, and even potentially aggressive. No matter the breed or gender, it’s important to socialize your cat and expose them to many different situations.
The Earliest Records of the Blue Sphynx Cat in History
Accounts of hairless cats have existed since the early 1800s. However, these weren’t the cats that we now know as the blue Sphynx. The breed’s history begins later in the 1960s in Ontario, Canada. A genetic mutation resulted in a hairless feline. Early enthusiasts soon discovered the inheritance pattern.
Domestic cats have 38 chromosomes, one of which is the sex pair. The others determine different features of the animal. Each parent contributes one copy or allele to each gene. If the trait is dominant, only one of the two causes the characteristic to be present in the offspring. The shorthand is AA for two dominant alleles and Aa for one dominant and the other recessive. For a recessive trait to manifest, each parent must contribute the “a” version of the gene, making it aa.
Hairlessness is an aa characteristic. Mendelian genetics tells us that 25% of the offspring would be AA. Another 50% would be Aa, with aa making up the last 25%. Since it’s dominant, 75% of the young would have hair. Only 25% of the kittens would be hairless. That’s the bottleneck that affected the proliferation of the blue Sphynx.
Enthusiasts bred the hairless cats with other ones, including the Devon Rex. This breed has the dominant version of the hairless trait, and it took several generations to develop the Sphynx. Infertility is a problem that can occur with hairlessness, further complicating the breed’s start.
How the Blue Sphynx Cat Gained Popularity
Cats differ from dogs by the many jobs the latter filled. Canines served functional roles at first before selective breeding, which led to diversification in the work the animals did and the conformation of desirable standards. You can probably guess the Sphynx became a sensation even in the days before social media and viral videos.
The development of the breed was a joint effort between North American and European breeders. The goal was to build a diverse gene pool to reduce the chances of harmful hereditary and congenital conditions passing on to subsequent generations. That was imperative to earn formal recognition and to propel the popularity of the breed.
Formal Recognition of the Blue Sphynx Cat
The Cat Fanciers’ Association (CFA) and Fédération Internationale Féline (FIFe) formally recognized this breed in 2002. The International Cat Association (TICA) recognition came later in 2005. Formal recognition meant the creation of standards for the breed to give judges a framework for evaluating the cats in the show ring.
The CFA faults cats that can’t be handled or have hair. The FIFe has specific color groups. TICA disqualifies aggressive animals and those that are too small. The Sphynx is a sleek yet muscular animal. The cat is also known for their engaging personality, which is written into the breed standard of all organizations.
Image Credit: Tomas Salac, Shutterstock
Top 3 Unique Facts About the Blue Sphynx Cat
1. The Blue Sphynx Cat Is Not Egyptian
Although the animals look like their namesake, the original breeding stock is from Canada and Minnesota.
2. The Sphynx Is the CFA 10th Most Popular Breed
Pet owners have fallen head over heels in love with the Sphynx. This honor isn’t a surprise to those who know this kitty.
3. Research Has Shown the Blue Sphynx Prefers the Company of People to Other Cats
Personality has a genetic factor. Researchers found that the Sphynx wasn’t particularly sociable with other cats. Instead, they prefer to be with people. It’s one of the most endearing traits.
Image Credit: Alla_Che, Shutterstock
Does the Blue Sphynx Cat Make a Good Pet?
The blue Sphynx is the epitome of a people-oriented cat. They love attention and will make an excellent choice for an individual or family who wants their kitty to be part of the household. We don’t recommend this breed for anyone who can’t give them the interaction they need. That’s true of any intelligent cat. They must have mental stimulation and enrichment for their well-being.
The other consideration involves the Sphynx’s health. The animal has a heightened risk of cardiovascular disease. Therefore, you should only get a pet from a seller who conducts the recommended pre-breeding screening of their stock. DNA testing is available for some conditions. You must also monitor your pet’s heart health since problems can develop later in life.
The blue Sphnyx is a playful and energetic feline. This kitty will welcome visitors, but they may also get into trouble if they’re bored. These animals are a commitment on several fronts. Understanding your responsibility is imperative with this cat or any pet.
Conclusion
The blue Sphnyx is a striking animal with a larger-than-life personality. These cats love people and want to be a part of the action. Pet owners must understand that this cat breaks the mold for what you may think of these felines. They are curious and intelligent, making mental stimulation vital for their overall well-being, but you will have a very fulfilling relationship with your kitty if you can provide it.
Featured Image Credit: Joanna Zaleska, Shutterstock
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PREGLEDALI smo kataloge poznatih maloprodajnih trgovina u Hrvatskoj i izdvojili najbolje akcije i proizvode po dobrim cijenama. Lidl, Kaufland, Eurospin, Konzum, Plodine, Spar i Interspar možete pronaći u svim većim mjestima u Hrvatskoj, a ispod možete vidjeti našu šoping-listu za ovaj tjedan.
Lidl
Lidlov katalog vrijedi od ponedjeljka, 24.6., do nedjelje, 30.6., ili do prodaje zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih popusta potrebna vam je mobilna aplikacija Lidl Plus.
Kaufland
Kauflandov katalog vrijedi od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do prodaje zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih dodatnih popusta potrebna vam je Kauflandova kartica.
Eurospin
Katalog Eurospina vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7., ili do isteka zaliha. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Konzum
Konzumov katalog vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7., ili do prodaje zaliha. Za pojedine popuste potrebna je MultiPlus kartica. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Spar
Novi katalozi Spara i Interspara vrijede od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do prodaje zaliha za prehrambene namirnice, kozmetiku, proizvode za osobnu higijenu i sredstva za čišćenje. Pojedini popusti vrijede samo u trgovinama Spar i Interspar, ovisno o dostupnosti proizvoda na akciji u tim trgovinama. Aktualne kataloge možete prolistati ovdje.
Tommy
Tommyjev akcijski katalog vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7. Možete ga prolistati ovdje.
Plodine
Katalog Plodina vrijedi od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do isteka zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
There figured to be at least one benefit to Shohei Ohtani being reduced to a one-way star while he recovers from Tommy John surgery this season, one that Dodgers manager Dave Roberts hinted at in spring training.
With Ohtani, who spent four of his six seasons in Anaheim as a starting pitcher and designated hitter, focused almost exclusively on offense, could he be an even more lethal slugger than he was in 2021 and 2023, when he won American League most valuable player awards with the Angels?
The numbers say yes.
Ohtani led off Tuesday night’s game against the Chicago White Sox with a home run, he walked and scored on Freddie Freeman’s third-inning homer, and he drove in the eventual winning run with a two-out single in the fourth to help push the Dodgers to a 4-3 victory at Guaranteed Rate Field.
Bobby Miller was roughed up for three runs and four hits in two innings, but six relievers — Michael Peterson, Yohan Ramirez, Anthony Banda, Blake Treinen, Daniel Hudson and Evan Phillips — combined for seven scoreless innings, as the Dodgers reached the halfway point of the season with a 50-31 record.
Ohtani, who signed a 10-year, $700-million deal in December, has been the clear pacesetter in a star-studded lineup, leading the major leagues in batting average (.320) and the National League in slugging percentage (.634), on-base-plus-slugging percentage (1.032) and home runs (24).
He also has 21 doubles, 60 RBIs, 63 runs and 99 hits and is on pace to surpass his 46-homer, 100-RBI season in 2021 and his 44-homer, 95-RBI season in 2023.
“I think it’s unquestionable that I’m able to recover properly because there’s less of a workload,” Ohtani said in Japanese. “Plus, as I pile up experience year after year, I’m growing as a hitter. I think that’s leading to good results.”
Roberts sees that growth not only in the power Ohtani has produced but the plate discipline he has shown.
“I think Shohei understands that when you show you can control the strike zone, take balls, even in hitters’ counts, that a lot of special things happen,” Roberts said. “In years past, he had a big tendency to chase because he likes to swing. But when you [lay off bad pitches], you earn pitches in the strike zone.”
Ohtani gave the Dodgers a 1-0 lead in the first inning when he drove a 2-and-2 curve on the outer half of the plate from Chris Flexen for a leadoff homer that right fielder Tommy Pham got a glove on but was not able to secure above the wall.
Ohtani was halfway to second when he realized he might have missed first base, so he returned to touch the bag before continuing his trot.
“I didn’t know whether I stepped on it or not,” Ohtani said, “so I went back just in case.”
It was the ninth straight game for Ohtani with an RBI, tying a franchise record held by five players and last achieved by Roy Campanella in 1955.
The lead didn’t last long. Miller, making his second start after sitting out two months because of a shoulder injury, walked Pham to open the bottom of the first and piped a first-pitch fastball to Andrew Benintendi, who crushed a two-run homer to right field for a 2-1 White Sox lead.
Luis Robert Jr. reached on an infield single, and Eloy Jimenez smoked an RBI double to left for a 3-1 lead. Gavin Sheets flied out to center for the first out on Miller’s 21st pitch.
Miller won an 11-pitch battle against Paul DeJong, striking out the White Sox shortstop with a 98-mph fastball, and he got Korey Lee to pop out, but he needed 38 pitches to complete the inning. Miller gave up a single and walked two in a scoreless second and, with his pitch count at 60, was pulled in favor of Peterson to start the third.
“He just didn’t have a feel,” Roberts said of Miller. “You could see he was searching all night, and his stuff just wasn’t really sharp [enough] to put guys away. The changeup was a ball out of hand. The slider was rolling up there. And the fastball, when he did make some good throws with it, they were spoiling them. …
“I’m satisfied he’s healthy, but I’m just not satisfied with the execution or the sharpness of his secondary pitches.”
It was the second shaky start in The Second City for Miller, who grew up in McHenry, Ill., about 60 miles northwest of Chicago, and had 30-35 family members and friends in attendance Tuesday night.
Miller gave up five runs and four hits in 1 ⅔ innings against the Cubs in Wrigley Field on April 5. In two starts in Chicago, Miller has given up eight runs and eight hits, including two home runs, in 3 ⅔ innings for a 19.63 ERA, with four strikeouts and five walks.
A homecoming king, he is not.
“The shoulder feels great, my body feels great, but maybe sometimes I’m trying a little too hard out there,” Miller said. “Even the good pitches today, it seemed like they had a lot of good takes. They fouled off a lot of pitches, which caused my pitch count to get really high and to be taken out earlier in the game.”
But the Dodgers’ offense took Miller off the hook and the bullpen bailed him out, with Peterson covering two innings and Treinen going 1 ⅓ innings.
“Seven [scoreless] innings from pretty much everyone except for [Alex] Vesia and [Ryan Yarbrough],” Freeman said. “A lot of guys had to be perfect, and that’s hard to do, but they stepped up. We only scored four tonight, and they made it count. You gotta give credit to the bullpen. That’s why we won.”
Ohtani and Freeman had their fingerprints all over the victory as well. The Dodgers tied the score 3-3 in the third when Ohtani walked and Freeman went with a sinker away and drove an opposite-field two-run homer to left.
Gavin Lux walked with one out in the fourth, took third on a Miguel Vargas single to left, giving the reserve outfielder hits in each of his last nine starts, and scored on Ohtani’s RBI single to right for a 4-3 lead.
“I don’t know what more we can really say about him,” Freeman said of Ohtani. “He’s an amazing player. You never know how a first year is gonna go on any team, but I mean, sometimes you just gotta step back and just appreciate a player like this.”
Teo is back
Teoscar Hernández returned to the team Tuesday afternoon after traveling to the Dominican Republic for the funeral of his 94-year-old grandfather, Pedro Perez, who died on Sunday morning. The outfielder was not in the lineup for Tuesday night’s game but was available to pinch-hit.
“I was close with him for my whole life, and he just loved, loved, loved baseball,” Hernández said of his grandfather, who was in failing health. “He was a really big fan. But he was getting sicker and sicker, so at some point, we were waiting for it. But I think now he’s in a better place. More peace.”
Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2024 Event Schedule: In what comes as an official confirmation, Samsung has announced its Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2024 event to take place on July 10 at 6:30 IST. The event, which is the second edition, will be held in Paris, France. The event will be live-streamed via Samsung’s official YouTube channel and other social media platforms.
Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2024 Event: Check the Link
Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2024 Event: Devices to be launched
The event is likely to witness the unveiling of next-generation foldable smartphones, Galaxy Z Fold 6 and Flip 6. Additionally, Samsung may also introduce its much-awaited Galaxy ring and Galaxy Watch 7 series.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 6 The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 6 may feature the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 chip, along with a 3700mAh battery.
If rumours are to be given heed, the device will boast a 50MP primary sensor. The brand might also surprise users with a larger screen size, compared to what was offered in Galaxy Z Flip 5.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 6 It is expected that Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 6 will don a sleeker profile with a titanium frame. It will be powered by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 processor. This device is supposed to come with AI features along with some camera upgrades.
Samsung Galaxy Watch 7 Ultra: The event might also see the introduction of Samsung Galaxy Watch 7 Ultra. The device can come in three colour variants, including Titanium Beige, Titanium Gray, and Titanium Silver.
Samsung Galaxy Ring: Having lured users with teasers on several occasions previously, the wait might just be over as Samsung is likely to remove the curtains from the Galaxy Ring. Speculations suggest that it will be launched in three colours and nine different sizes. This much-anticipated wearable is likely to be equipped with health monitoring features blood flow monitoring, sleep tracking, ECG sensors, among others.
Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2024 Event: Samsung and the Paris connection
It is noteworthy that since Samsung is associated with the Paris Olympics, it intends to use this mega stage for product announcements. Earlier, Samsung Electronics, a Worldwide Olympic and Paralympic Partner, announced its official theme for the Olympic and Paralympic Games Paris 2024, ‘Open always wins’, Samsung Newsroom reported.
It’s almost time for Sony to unveil the next wave of free PS4 and PS5 games joining the PlayStation Plus Essentials line-up in July 2024. The highlight of the month for PS Plus subscribers like myself, the next batch of PS Plus freebies will be officially announced at 4.30pm BST UK time on the afternoon of June 26. Typically consisting of three PS4 and PS5 games, the new titles will be available to download less than a week later on the morning of July 2. This means you have another week to redeem the current line-up of PS Plus Essentials, which include SpongeBob Squarepants: The Cosmic Shake, AEW Fight Forever and Streets of Rage 4. Even though Streets of Rage 4 is an excellent game, subscribers will be hoping for a higher-profile selection of games, so fingers crossed Sony steps it up a gear in July.
If the latest predictions are anything to go by, July 2024 could be a better month in terms of new releases.
One of the games with the most picks on the Reddit predictions thread is Call of Duty Vanguard, which feels like a solid choice for PS Plus.
Sony has secured Call of Duty games in previous summer months, which is why Vanguard is proving popular with fans.
Vanguard takes players back to WW2, featuring a campaign set in Europe, Russia and North Africa. It also comes with 20 multiplayer maps, and an extensive Zombies mode developed by Treyarch.
“Rise on every front: Dogfight over the Pacific, airdrop over France, defend Stalingrad with a sniper’s precision and blast through advancing forces in North Africa,” reads the official description.
“The Call of Duty franchise returns with Call of Duty: Vanguard, developed by Sledgehammer Games, where players will be immersed in visceral WWII combat on an unprecedented global scale.”
Other games with multiple predictions include Like a Dragon Ishin! which is a fantastic single-player game set in Japan’s Edo period.
Regular picks such as Resident Evil Village, Forspoken, Dead Island 2 and Sonic Frontiers also appear multiple times.
Likewise, there are also picks for the likes of Hades, Cult of the Lamb and even Suicide Squad: Kill the Justice League.
Rocksteady’s live service superhero game definitely needs a shot in the arm, so a PS Plus release would actually make a lot of sense.
“Join the newly “recruited” members of Amanda Waller’s infamous Task Force X (aka the Suicide Squad), Harley Quinn, Deadshot, Captain Boomerang and King Shark, as they set out on an impossible mission to Kill the Justice League.
“Drop into an expansive and dynamic open-world Metropolis ravaged by Brainiac’s invasion and terrorized by the heroes who once protected it.”
Needless to say, Daily Express will be back with any leaks, as well as the official announcement, so keep checking back for the latest information.
Mazda Australia has previewed its expanded range of more upmarket SUVs, with our country to be the first and only market globally to offer the CX-60, CX-70, CX-80 and CX-90 concurrently.
The preview at the National Gallery in Canberra marks the first time all four Large Architecture-based SUVs have been displayed together publicly.
The CX-70 and CX-80 are due in Australia by the end of 2024, while the CX-60 and CX-90 were launched here in 2023.
As to how these similarly styled, mechanically related vehicles differ from each other, Mazda Australia managing director Vinesh Bhindi explained they all play “their own distinct role”.
“Whether it’s the pursuit of life’s passions in the CX-70, the family focus of the CX-80, the lap of luxury in the CX-90 or the CX-60’s embodiment of Mazda Premium technology, our commitment to an all-hybrid model range also opens up a wealth of new opportunities for Mazda owners to fully enrich their life in motion,” he said.
Put simply, the two-row CX-60 and its three-row CX-80 counterpart are narrower, and designed for markets like Japan and Europe.
The two-row CX-70 and three-row CX-90, which share the same body as each other, are wider and developed with the North American market in mind.
As to why we are getting all four, Australia is a major market for Mazda and we’ve often received a mix of vehicles.
For example, the discontinued CX-8 was developed for the Japanese market and the CX-9 for North America, but despite both being classified as large SUVs and offering three rows of seating, we received both.
Though the CX-9 is gone and the CX-8 is in runout mode, that doesn’t necessarily simplify the Mazda lineup.
Once the rollout of its new Large Architecture-based models is complete, Mazda will have one light SUV (the CX-3), one small (the CX-30), two mid-sized (CX-5, CX-60), and three large (CX-70, CX-80 and CX-90).
It has refrained from marketing its new Large Architecture models as ‘luxury’ SUVs, despite their rear/all-wheel drive underpinnings, choice of inline six-cylinder petrol or diesel and plug-in hybrid four-cylinder powertrains, and pricing that pushes them further towards the likes of Lexus and Volvo.
What is the Mazda CX-70?
The CX-70 shares its body with the CX-90, but features some minor design tweaks and does without a third row of seating.
It measures 5100mm long, 1971mm wide and 1736mm tall on a 3120mm wheelbase.
While the CX-70 will offer turbocharged petrol six-cylinder and plug-in hybrid four-cylinder drivetrains in North America, the new SUV will offer turbocharged 3.3-litre inline-six petrol and diesel options in Australia from launch, like the CX-90.
The plug-in hybrid hasn’t been confirmed for our market. This teams a 2.5-litre petrol engine with a more powerful electric motor and larger li-ion battery pack.
Outputs for the CX-70 diesel haven’t been confirmed, but in the CX-90 this engine produces 187kW and 550Nm.
As is the case in the CX-60 and CX-90, the six-cylinder engines will be mated to Mazda’s 48V M Hybrid Boost system.
This features a small lithium-ion battery and electric motor to extend the fuel-saving stop-start system’s speed range as well as turn the engine off while coasting, in addition to assisting the combustion engine under load.
Expect an eight-speed automatic transmission and rear-biased all-wheel drive as standard. While the CX-60 is offered in some markets like Japan with rear-wheel drive, the CX-90 is AWD-only in the US and the CX-70 will likely mirror that strategy.
Inside, there’s an available Red Nappa leather option, which isn’t currently offered by its stablemates.
What is the Mazda CX-80?
The CX-80 measures 4995mm long, 1890mm wide and 1710mm tall on a 3120mm wheelbase, making it 250mm longer and 24mm higher on a 250mm longer wheelbase than the CX-60.
Mazda’s local division has also confirmed the CX-80 will be available with three distinct powertrains: mild-hybrid inline six-cylinder turbo-petrol and turbo-diesel powerplants, as well as a four-cylinder plug-in hybrid.
Like the CX-8 and CX-9 before it, as well as the related CX-90, the CX-80 will be available with a conventional three-seat rear bench or two captain chairs with a centre console, in addition to a flat-folding third row of seats.
Confirmed details for the Australian market thus far include Mazda Connected Services accessible in conjunction with the new MyMazda App – debuting shortly on the new MX-5 sports car – as well as a new Trailer Hitch View “which uses the centre display and advanced graphics to help position the vehicle relative to a caravan or trailer”.
The CX-80 will also debut some extended driver assistance functionality when it lands Down Under, including a new Unresponsive Driver Support feature (also coming to the CX-70), head-on collision mitigation for the AEB system, as well as head-on traffic avoidance assist for the emergency lane-keeping function.
Shivalic Power Control IPO: Check Subscription Status, GMP Today.
Unlisted shares of Shivalic Power Control Ltd are trading Rs 175 higher in the grey market, expecting a 175 per cent listing gain from the public issue
Shivalic Power Control IPO: The initial public offering (IPO) of electric panels maker Shivalic Power Control Ltd, which is going to be closed today, June 26, has so far received a whopping response. The IPO was opened for public subscription on June 24.
Till 12:27 pm on the final day of bidding on Wednesday, the Rs 64.32-crore IPO received 89.67 times subscription, garnering bids for 38,26,28,400 shares as against 42,67,200 shares on offer.
The quota for non-institutional investors got subscribed 103.65 times while the category for retail individual investors (RIIs) fetched 129.82 times subscription. The QIB received 8.92 times subscription.
Shivalic Power Control IPO: Allotment And Listing Dates
The Shivalic Power Control IPO will be closed on June 26 and its allotment will likely be finalised on June 27. Its listing will take place on the NSE SME on July 1.
Shivalic Power Control IPO: Price and Lot Size
The price band of the Shivalic Power Control IPO was fixed at Rs 95 to Rs 100 per share.
Investors need to apply for a minimum of 1,200 equity shares and in multiples thereof. Hence, the minimum investment by retail investors would be Rs 1,20,000 (1,200 (lot size) x Rs 100 (upper price band)).
Shivalic Power Control IPO GMP Today
According to market observers, unlisted shares of Shivalic Power Control Ltd are trading Rs 175 higher in the grey market as compared with its issue price. The Rs 175 grey market premium or GMP means the grey market is expecting a 175 per cent listing gain from the public issue. The GMP is based on market sentiments and keeps changing.
‘Grey market premium’ indicates investors’ readiness to pay more than the issue price.
Shivalic Power Control IPO: More Details
Shivalic Power Control IPO is entirely a fresh issue of 64.32 lakh shares. Its price band is set at Rs 95 to Rs 100 per share.
Shivalic Power Control Limited, which was founded in 2004, manufactures electric panels. The product portfolio of the company includes PCC Panels, IMCC Panels, Smart Panels, MCC Panels, DG synchronisation panels, Outdoor panels, HT Panels up to 33KV, VFD Panels, Power Distribution Boards, Bus Duct and LT & HT APFC Panels.
Industry leaders such as L&T, Siemens, Schneider Electric, and TDK authorize the company to manufacture fully type-tested panels as per IEC 61439 – 1&2, IEC 61641, and IS1893.
Shivalic Power Control’s revenue increased 44.03 per cent and profit after tax (PAT) rose 309.78 per cent between the financial year ending with March 31, 2023 and March 31, 2022.
Corporate Capitalventures Pvt Ltd is the book running lead manager of the Shivalic Power Control IPO, while Skyline Financial Services Private Ltd is the registrar for the issue. The market maker for Shivalic Power Control IPO is Ss Corporate Securities.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
The crypto market has recorded a consolidated price action after trading under a bearish sentiment for over a week, giving its investors a sign of relief. However, the altcoin leader, Ethereum Price, continues its struggle to surpass the $3.4K mark, resulting in top altcoins recording a price similar trend.
Furthermore, Ethereum’s Layer-2 (L2) project, the Polygon price has continued to display a negative price action, highlighting a rising disinterest of investors in this crypto token. With the increasing market volatility, will Polygon (MATIC) price make a comeback or plunge to new lows?
Polygon Price Hints A Bullish Reversal?
Amid increased bearish sentiment in the cross-border market, the MATIC price has dropped 1.21% within the past 24 hours with a plunge of 33.42% in its trading volume. Further, the Polygon token has lost 21.99% within the past 30 days and has erased 42.24% in valuation this year.
TradingView: MATIC/USDT
Furthermore, the Polygon coin price has formed a triangle pattern in the 1D time frame and has continued to trade within it since mid-March. Moreover, the altcoin is on the verge of breaking the pattern, the outcome of which is unpredictable.
With a trading price of $0.5597, a circulating supply of 9,874,443,895 MATIC, and a total supply of 10 Billion MATIC tokens, the Polygon crypto has successfully secured the 19th position in the global cryptocurrency list with a market capitalization of $5.535 Billion.
MATIC Market Sentiments:
The Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD) has recorded a constant decline in the red histogram, indicating increased price action for MATIC crypto in the market. Moreover, the averages record a high possibility of a bullish convergence, suggesting a potential bullish outlook.
On the other hand, the technical indicator, SMA is on the verge of experiencing a positive crossover, highlighting an increase in the buying and selling pressure for the Polygon token in the crypto space.
Will Polygon Reach $1 In 2024?
If the market regains momentum, the MATIC coin price will start trading under a bullish sentiment and test its resistance trendline of the triangle pattern. Maintaining the price at that level will boost the Polygon price toward its upper resistance level of $0.690 in the coming time.
Conversely, if the bears continue to dominate the bulls, the MATIC price will plunge toward its crucial support level of $0.50 during the upcoming weeks.
In recent years, the trend of Indian youth migrating abroad for higher education has witnessed a significant surge. This phenomenon has been on a steep upward trajectory, with over 7.65 lakh students moving abroad for studies in 2022 alone.
Even before the Covid-19 pandemic, the numbers were already high, with student migration surpassing 500,000 in 2018 and reaching 586,000 in 2019, as per the Bureau of Immigration (BoI) statistics.
Jamie Beaton, CEO of Crimson Education, explains some of the emerging trends among Indian students migrating for higher studies. Beaton has studied at several prestigious institutions, including Harvard and Stanford Universities, the University of Oxford, Yale Law School, and Princeton University.
His academic focus has encompassed finance, applied mathematics, and business administration, among other fields. His company, Crimson Education, is a university admissions support company with a vision to equalise university admissions across the globe. Excerpts from an interview:
Also read: NEET-PG exam postponed due to integrity concerns; NTA’s DG replaced
What are the current trends among young Indian students applying to Ivy League universities in the USA and the UK?
In the US, top universities such as Harvard have significantly increased their financial aid offerings. This has encouraged students to consider studying in Ivy league colleges or universities. Concurrently, Indian students are increasingly pursuing a broader array of Advanced Placement subjects.
Moreover, a growing number of Indian students are engaging in rigorous research projects during high school; these initiatives will help them to seek admissions in Ivy League universities. It will help students develop advanced research skills and familiarity with cutting-edge academic work.
Consequently, top universities are adjusting their admissions strategies, with institutions such as Harvard, Yale, and Princeton admitting fewer students early and waiting to assess the complete applicant pool.
This contrasts with other top 50 universities that are increasingly utilising early decision rounds to admit more students. Following the disruption caused by Covid-19, the SAT has regained prominence in the application process, with high scores continuing to play a crucial role, particularly for Ivy League admissions where average scores for applicants are notably high.
Could you outline some of the prevailing trends in course selection and among students from India applying to universities in the USA?
In the US, universities like Duke, Vanderbilt, and Stanford are now as competitive as Ivy League institutions, reflecting a trend towards broader university choices.
Similarly, schools such as Johns Hopkins and the University of Chicago are rivalling Ivy League acceptance rates, enhancing their appeal among Indian applicants. There’s also a growing interest in liberal arts colleges.
In academic disciplines, there’s been a surge in applications for artificial intelligence majors. Programmes on computer science, finance, engineering do have a huge demand. Students from Tier 2 and Tier 3 cities in India, like Coimbatore and Tiruchi, are increasingly gaining admission to top US universities, including Ivy Leagues.
What is the trend among students applying to study in the top universities in the UK and Australia?
In the UK, the Russell Group universities such as Oxford, Cambridge, LSE, Imperial, UCL, and King’s College London remain popular among Indian students. Preferred programmes include medical school, law school, and PPE (Philosophy, Politics, and Economics), with UK universities offering specialised degrees appealing to students.
Meanwhile, in Australia, Indian students are primarily applying to leading medical schools like University of Monash, UNSW, and the University of Sydney.
What are the key criteria for Ivy League admissions that Indian students should focus on?
Academics hold substantial weight, constituting 40 per cent of the evaluation process. This encompasses performance in rigorous external exams such as school board exams, IB, A-levels, AP, and SAT scores. High achievement in these standardised tests are crucial for admissions.
Extracurricular activities and leadership are equally vital, accounting for 30 per cent of the admissions criteria. Ivy League institutions seek well-rounded individuals who have demonstrated commitment and excellence across various extracurricular domains throughout grades 9 to 12.
Additionally, entrepreneurial leadership, such as initiating personal projects or ventures like a podcast with extensive interviews, showcases innovative thinking and initiative beyond academic excellence.
The remaining 30 per cent of the evaluation process hinges on essays and interviews, where applicants have the opportunity to distinguish themselves on a personal level. Some of the Ivy League institutions also conduct interviews with the alumni of the institution to check if they are the right candidate for the course and universities.
Also read: Rahul Gandhi accuses PM Modi of ‘psychologically’ collapsing as public outcry rises over exam irregularities
Watch professionals play poker, and one of the first things to strike you is how often they fold when the game has barely begun. Rounds of Texas Hold’em, a popular variant, start with each player being dealt two cards and then deciding whether to bet on them. Amateurs are more likely to proceed than not, while pros fold immediately up to 85% of the time. Naturally this does not mean that high-stakes casinos are frequented by the timid. It is simply that most hands are too likely to lose to be worth betting on, and the pros are better at judging when this is the case.
Investors usually dislike gambling comparisons. Yet at a recent conference held by Norges Bank Investment Management, which oversees Norway’s oil fund of $1.6trn, a packed hall sought to learn from a former poker pro. Annie Duke was there to talk about quitting decisions, a topic on which she wrote the book (“Quit: The Power of Knowing When to Walk Away”). Ms Duke argued that many factors stack the deck against people considering quitting, pushing them to act irrationally. That applies to poker players wondering whether or not to fold—and also to investors considering whether to exit a position.
Need the answers for the June 26 New York Times Connections puzzle? To me, Wordle is more of a vocabulary test, but Connections is more of a brainteaser. You’re given 16 words and asked to put them into four groups that are somehow connected. Sometimes they’re obvious, but game editor Wyna Liu knows how to trick you by using words that can fit into more than one group.
And do you also play Wordle? We’ve got today’s Wordle answer and hints too.
We’ve also got today’s answer and some general tips for Strands, a new game from the Times that’s still in beta.
Read more: NYT Connections Could Be the New Wordle: Our Hints and Tips
Hints for today’s Connections groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest, yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Time to salute.
Green group hint: Charge it.
Blue group hint: Customers want it.
Purple group hint: Don Draper’s passion.
Answers for today’s Connections groups
Yellow group: Army ranks.
Green group: Place to plug something in.
Blue group: Consumer desire, collectively.
Purple group: ____ ad.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections answers?
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is army ranks. The four answers are captain, general, major and private.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is place to plug something in. The four answers are jack, outlet, port and socket.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is consumer desire, collectively. The four answers are appetite, audience, demand and market.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is ____ ad. The four answers are attack, personal, pop-up and want.
How to play Connections
Playing is easy. Winning is hard. Look at the 16 words and mentally assign them to related groups of four. Click on the four words you think go together. The groups are coded by color, though you don’t know what goes where until you see the answers. The yellow group is the easiest, then green, then blue, and purple is the toughest. Look at the words carefully, and think about related terms. Sometimes the connection has to do with just a part of the word. Once, four words were grouped because each started with the name of a rock band, including “Rushmore” and “Journeyman.”
You have reached your maximum number of articles. Log in or create an account FREE of charge to continue reading.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
The United States surgeon general is declaring gun violence a national public health crisis.
Surgeon General Vivek Murthy issued an advisory on Tuesday stating that firearm-related violence and its immediate psychological ramifications on victims and bystanders has severely compromised public health.
“Today, for the first time in the history of our office, I am issuing a Surgeon General’s Advisory on firearm violence,” Murthy said in a video announcement. “It outlines the urgent threat firearm violence poses to the health and well-being of our country.”
SUPREME COURT UPHOLDS FEDERAL GUN BAN FOR THOSE UNDER DOMESTIC VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS
U.S. Surgeon General Dr. Vivek Murthy released a special advisory on firearm violence on Tuesday, calling gun-related incidents a public health crisis.(Nathan Congleton/NBC via Getty Images)
“As a doctor, I’ve seen the consequences of firearm violence up close and the lives of the patients that cared for over the years,” the surgeon general continued. “These are moms and dads, sons and daughters, all of whom were robbed of their physical and mental health by senseless acts of violence.”
The advisory states that 54% of adults in America have experienced a firearm-related incident. These experiences with firearm violence include individuals who have been threatened with a gun (21%), lost a family member in a gun-related death (19%), witnessed a shooting (17%), and been wounded by a firearm (4%).
The 54% figure also includes adults who have fired a gun in self-defense (4%). The gun-related death statistic includes those who committed suicide via firearm.
The report noted different demographics are affected in different ways by gun violence.
Black individuals suffer the highest rate of gun deaths. American Indians, Alaskan Natives, elderly white people, and military veterans are at the highest risk suicide by firearm.
“Beyond these precious lives that are lost to firearm violence, there are wider ripples of harm to those who are injured, who witnessed the incidents, who live in urban and rural communities where such violence takes place, and who constantly read and hear about firearm violence,” Murthy stated.
MARYLAND GOVERNOR SIGNS BIDEN-INSPIRED BILL ESTABLISHED ‘CENTER FOR FIREARM VIOLENCE PREVENTION’
Murthy wrote in the report that the direct casualties of gun violence are compounded by psychological ramifications inflicted on victims and bystanders.(Tom Williams/CQ-Roll Call, Inc via Getty Images)
He added, “The collective trauma and fear that Americans are experiencing is contributing to the mental health challenges that we are facing today. Nearly 6 in 10 U.S. adults say they worry about a loved one being a victim of firearm violence.”
The public advisory on firearm-related violence is the first document of its kind released by the Surgeon General’s Office.
I love South Indian food so when I got to know that Eros Hotel New Delhi was hosting a limited-time South Indian food festival, I just could not miss it. Deccan Express, the South Indian Food Promotion at Blooms in Eros Hotel New Delhi Nehru Place brought forth a wide array of popular dishes from the region, each better than the other. Eros Hotel keeps organising such food festivals to introduce their patrons to different regional cuisines that they might not get to try otherwise. Whenever I went to these festivals, I always came back with a happy heart and an even happier tummy. This one was no different.
The one thing I look forward to (and shamelessly enjoy) is the warm hospitality that I am always greeted with the moment I step in. Eros Hotel New Delhi feels like home with such care and attention from the staff, and not to forget the delicious food that makes my visits even better.
The Deccan Express food festival let me enjoy the authentic and fantastic flavours of South Indian cuisine. I was served one dish after another and it turned out to be a big meal that my mind thought wouldn’t be able to finish but surprisingly, my stomach actually did!
It started with a platter of starters like Chettinad Chicken, Raw Banana Chips, Chicken 65, Chicken Lollipop, Gobhi 65 and pakodas. I loved Gobhi 65 and Chettinad Chicken. Paired with the refreshing chutneys, the delicious first course worked up my appetite for more.
Then came Surmai Fish and Ragi Puttu. I was delighted by the fish preparation. So simple but so tasty. The Ragu Puttu was a little bland for my taste but since this is how it is served, no complaints. But I absolutely loved the podi idli. It was flavoured just right and was super tasty.
Time for the main meal – South Indian thali! The thali had everything I desired. Tomato rice, rasam, parpu dal, carrot beans poriyal, Chettinad biryani and raw banana masala – a hearty meal with flavours on point.
But the best was yet to come. You guessed it right – the desserts!
The dessert platter had Mysore Pak, Paal Payasam and Besan Laddoo. All three were delicious but Paal Payasam won my heart.
Kudos to Chef Bhaskar for preparing such a wonderful South Indian feast. I cannot go back to Blooms, Eros Hotel New Delhi for more such food adventures.
Jennie Suk, 27, has gotten really into wearing blush in recent months, inspired by videos from TikTok influencers and celebrities, like the singer Sabrina Carpenter, whose dewy, flushed cheeks have become her calling card.
Drawing from her personal arsenal of about 25 blushes, Ms. Suk says she enjoys experimenting with layers of different creams and powders for a rosy glow.
“A couple years ago, I probably only had one or two blushes — I would rarely use it,” said Ms. Suk, who lives in Houston and works in social media for a veterinary services company. “Now I can’t leave the house without blush on.”
She found herself using more and more products, until someone finally pointed out that she might be using a bit too much. On social media, this affliction — not being able to tell, empirically, how rosy is too rosy — has jokingly become known as “blush blindness.”
“I first realized that I kind of had blush blindness when I walked into my sister’s house and she was like, ‘Oh, did you get a facial? Because your face is so red,’” she recalled.
Being called out for having blush blindness has women like Ms. Suk reconsidering how much of the product they are wearing. (It is a spinoff of another TikTok trend, eyebrow blindness, in which users post self-deprecating photos of their old eyebrow styles.)
Gone are the days of powdery blushes one might associate with her mother or grandmother. Blush products have exploded in popularity in recent years, thanks in part to new, creamier liquid formulations like those from Rare Beauty, the makeup brand founded by Selena Gomez. Last year, Rare Beauty was reported to have sold 3.1 million units of its liquid blush product.
Laney Crowell, the chief executive of the beauty brand Saie, told The New York Times in an email that her company sells a blush every 30 seconds. “On social media, blush is definitely the new accessory,” Ms. Crowell added.
It was a Rare Beauty blush that made Celine Blumenthal, a rising junior at Yeshiva University in New York City, realize she may be overdoing things.
In a phone interview, she remembered her mother making a comment about the bright shade: “She was like, ‘I’m telling you right now, you’re going to look back that the orange color doesn’t suit you at all. It looks bad.’” Ms. Blumenthal exchanged the product for a different shade.
On TikTok, Ms. Blumenthal posted several photos of her previous pink-cheeked looks and identified herself as a “victim of blush blindness.”
Toni Bravo, a beauty content creator in Los Angeles, attributed the rise in popularity of blush to a cultural shift away from “being afraid of color.” And she said that blush has become a widespread beauty trend could also make it feel more approachable.
“People who might have been afraid of using blush or figuring out how to use it are realizing that there’s all these different kinds of blushes, there’s all these different kinds of shades, tones, finishes, textures,” Ms. Bravo, 24, said. “There’s really something for everyone.”
But as is the case with anything that relies on human perception, blush blindness is highly subjective, Ms. Bravo added.
In a recent video, she responded to a commenter who accused her of wearing too much blush by applying even more.
“I think it’s all just a taste thing,” she said. “I think some people are just not used to bright or bold blushes, especially on deeper skin tone.”
Ms. Bravo is not alone in ignoring what the internet masses have to say about her makeup. Rachel Carlisle, 27, has grown a small following on TikTok for posting videos where she applies her makeup step by step, including a copious amount of blush as a base layer under the rest of her products. Ms. Carlisle, who lives in Biloxi, Miss., and works in health care consulting, said she liked the warm, sun-kissed effect of this blush style.
Commenters often accuse her of trolling, but Ms. Carlisle said her intentions were earnest.
“When people first started doing at-home contour, everybody made fun of that. They made it sound like that was absolutely insane,” Ms. Carlisle said. “But look at it now. I feel like it’s going to be like that.”
Investment is expected to fund a new fill and finish manufacturing facility to enhance production of injectable treatments for obesity and chronic diseases.
If you’re hosting a cat-themed cocktail party soon, you’ll need some tasty beverage recipes to serve at your gathering. Why not stick with the feline motif and serve your adult party guests some cat-themed drinks? Read on to find nine delicious and memorable cocktails you should absolutely be whipping up for your cat-loving guests.
The 9 Cat-Themed Cocktail Recipes
1. Catster Recipe – Strawberry Moscow Mew
Catster Recipe – Strawberry Moscow Mew
The Moscow Mule is a classic cocktail featuring vodka, ginger beer, and lime juice. Despite its name, it actually originated in America in the 1940s and not Russia. It’s traditionally served in a copper mug as copper conducts temperature, taking on the beverage’s temperature as it’s poured into the glass. The mug keeps it cold and frosty while also simultaneously enhancing the flavor of the vodka.
Our Moscow Mew recipe takes the traditional cocktail and adds some fresh strawberries for a delicious, fruity twist purr-fect for summertime.
2ouncesvodka
4ouncesginger beer
5fresh strawberries
½pclimejuiced
Ice
Cut off the stems of your strawberries, and then wash and dry them.
Add the berries and the juice from half of a lime to your copper mug.
Using your muddler, firmly press and twist the fruit and the juice together.
This Tom Cat Old Fashioned recipe is the most complicated (and time-consuming) one on our list, but the end result is a fantastic vintage cocktail. Originally developed in the 1800s, the Old Fashioned is a classic drink all bartenders need to know how to craft.
This particular recipe requires you to make house bitters, which is a two-week process, so give yourself plenty of time before your cat-themed party to prepare it.
Number of Servings:
2
Difficulty Level:
Advanced
Ingredients
2 ounces gin
2 ounces mezcal
1 ½ ounces dry sherry
1 ½ ounces sweet vermouth
8 drops of house bitters
Dehydrated grapefruit slices
3 orange, 1 lemon, and 2 grapefruit peels
2 ½ cups overproof rum
2 cinnamon sticks
1 star anise pod
4 cardamom pods
¼ tsp nutmeg
Ice
Equipment
Cocktail shaker
Coupe glasses
Oven
Baking sheet
Parchment paper
Sterilized glass jar
Pot
Fine-mesh sieve
Cheesecloth
Funnel
Small bottle with an eye dropper
Instructions:
To make the house bitters:
Preheat your oven to 225°F. Line your baking sheet with parchment paper and arrange two-thirds of the orange peels and all prepared grapefruit peels onto the sheet.
Bake until fully dehydrated, approximately 30 minutes, and allow to cool to room temperature.
In your sterilized glass jar, combine the dehydrated peels with the rum, lemon peels, cinnamon sticks, star anise pods, cardamom pods, and fresh nutmeg. Put on a tight lid and shake the mixture vigorously.
Store in a warm place near a window for up to 2 ½ weeks (or until the desired flavor is achieved).
Transfer the contents of the jar to a pot and simmer over medium heat for five minutes. Allow to cool to room temperature, and then strain the liquid through a sieve with two layers of cheesecloth.
Transfer the liquid to a small bottle with an eye dropper and keep it in a cool, dry place.
To make the cocktail:
Combine the sherry, vermouth, bitters, and gin in your cocktail shake. Fill with enough ice to reach the lip of the shaker and shake vigorously.
Put a few ice cubes into your coupe glasses.
Strain the shaker contents into the glasses and garnish with grapefruit slices.
3. Meowgarita
Image Credit: Victor Moussa, Shutterstock
Margaritas—oh, sorry, meowgaritas—are a versatile drink with a history shrouded in mystery. No one knows for sure where the cocktail originated, though it’s most likely to be a product of the United States-Mexico border region.
Classic margs are made with tequila, triple sec, and lime juice, so that’s exactly what you’re going to find in this recipe. However, you can jazz up your cocktail by adding some frozen berries to the blender.
Number of Servings:
4
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
Crushed ice
1 ½ ounces tequila
Juice from two limes
Splash of Triple-Sec
1 tbsp sugar
5 ounces strawberry puree
Instructions:
Combine all of your ingredients in the blender and puree until smooth.
The Tipsy Cat cocktail may not have the cult-like following of the old-fashioned or the margarita, but this refreshing martini beverage shouldn’t be passed by so quickly. Cathead Honeysuckle vodka adds a sweet and delicate flavor, while the elderflower liqueur adds a fresh, fruity taste with notes of pear, peach, and grapefruit.
Number of Servings:
1
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
1 ½ ounces Cathead Honeysuckle vodka
¾ ounce elderflower liqueur
3 slices of fresh cucumbers
2 slices of fresh lemon
Club soda
Equipment
Muddler
Cocktail shaker
Martini glass
Instructions:
Add the elderflower liqueur, cucumber, and lemon slices to your cocktail shaker and muddle them together.
Pour in the vodka and double-strain the mixture into your martini glass.
Splash in some club soda and garnish with a cucumber and lemon slice.
The Cheshire Cat from Alice in Wonderland is one of the most instantly recognizable feline-inspired characters. Mischievous and unpredictable, the Cheshire Cat acts as a guide for young Alice as she adventures through Wonderland. This cocktail takes the fun, stripy color scheme of the Cheshire Cat and adds some adult flair with cherry and strawberry vodka, as well as blue Curaçao.
Number of Servings:
1
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
1-ounce cherry vodka
½ ounce strawberry vodka
1-ounce blue Curaçao
½ ounce grenadine
2 ounces Sprite or 7-Up
Purple sanding sugar
Lemon
Ice
Equipment
Small plate or bowl
Large serving spoon
Shaker
Glass
Instructions:
Prep your glass by rubbing a lemon wedge along the rim. Pour your sanding sugar onto a small plate or in a bowl, and dip your glass in the sugar.
Add your cherry and strawberry vodkas with the grenadine to a bartender shake with a few ice cubes. Shake well.
Fill your prepped glass ¾ full with ice, and top with the vodka mixture.
Rinse out your shaker.
Add the blue Curaçao and Sprite or 7-Up, and shake well to combine.
Hold your large serving spoon upside down above your vodka-filled glass and slowly begin pouring your 7-Up/blue Curaçao mix on top. If you do this slowly enough, the two colors will not mix, giving you that Cheshire cat-inspired color scheme.
6. Black Cat Cocktail
Image Credit: 5PH, Shutterstock
This Black Cat Cocktail offers a sweet and fizzy combination of vodka, lemon-lime soda, blackcurrant juice, and blue Curaçao. It’s super simple to whip up, and its unique and tasty flavor profile is something you have to try yourself to believe.
Number of Servings:
1
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
3 ounces 7-Up or Sprite
1 ½ ounces vodka
1-ounce blue Curaçao
1-ounce blackcurrant juice
1 tbsp of fresh lime juice
Blackberries or lime wedge
Equipment
Martini shaker
Spoon
Martini glass
Instructions:
Combine soda, vodka, blue Curaçao, and juice into a martini shake.
Stir to combine the ingredients.
Pour liquid into a martini glass and garnish with a few blackberries or a lime wedge.
The Tom & Jerry is a classic holiday cocktail with origins dating back to the early 1800s. It may not be named after the cartoon cat-and-mouse duo, as it appears as if it is the drink that inspired the name of the cartoon.
This cocktail certainly involves some preparation, but the result is a rich, decadent, and comforting beverage, perfect for sipping around the fire on Christmas.
Number of Servings:
12
Difficulty Level:
Advanced
Ingredients
6 eggs, separated into whites and yolks
½ tsp cream of tartar
4 tbsp butter
½ cup powdered sugar
½ tsp ground nutmeg
¼ tsp ground cloves
1 tsp ground cinnamon
1 tsp vanilla extract
1-ounce dark rum
1-ounce cognac
Hot milk
Equipment
Stand mixer
Bowl
Spatula
Glass or mug
Whisk
Instructions:
To make the Tom & Jerry batter:
Whip the egg whites and cream of tartar in your stand mixer until stiff peaks form.
In a separate bowl, whisk the egg yolks and butter until combined.
With the spatula, fold the yolk mix into the egg white. Be careful so as not to knock out the air. Add in the vanilla extract, nutmeg, cloves, and cinnamon, and fold gently to incorporate.
Cover and refrigerate the batter until ready to serve.
To make the beverage:
Place a heaping tablespoon of the batter into each mug.
Add in the rum and cognac.
Top with hot milk, whisking carefully while pouring.
The resulting drink should be foamy and well-combined.
This cocktail is similar to White Russians in ingredients, though the proportions and consistency differ a bit. Not to mention the adorable drawn-on chocolate syrup and cherry cat face, which is what sets The Cat’s Meow apart from a White Russian.
Number of Servings:
1
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
1 ½ ounces Kahlua
1 ½ ounces Stolichnaya vodka
3 ounces whipping cream
Ice
Chocolate syrup
½ maraschino cherry
Instructions:
Pour the Kahlua, vodka, and ice into your blender and blend until thickened.
Pour liquid into your martini glass.
Place your half maraschino cherry in the middle of the glass to act as a nose, and draw on the whiskers with your chocolate syrup.
Note: If you’re watching your caloric intake, replace the whipping cream with skim milk.
This delicious, creamy, cold brew-containing concoction from Cointreau was apparently inspired by the 2019 film Cats. It comes together quickly, and the bitter and sweet orangey mixture of the Cointreau offers a bright, crisp, and citrusy taste that pairs nicely with the cold brew.
Number of Servings:
1
Difficulty Level:
Easy
Ingredients
¾ ounce Cointreau
4 ounces cold brew
½ ounce heavy cream
5 ounces mezcal
¼ ounce simple syrup
1 dash cinnamon
Orange sugar, for rimmer
Orange twist
Instructions:
Add the liquid ingredients and dash of cinnamon into a shake tin filled with ice.
Shake vigorously and strain into an orange sugar-rimmed highball glass.
Top your beverage off with an orange “cat tail” twist.
Final Thoughts
A cat cocktail party is a fun and memorable theme your party guests will be talking about for a long time. Any (or all) of the nine cat-themed cocktail recipes above will certainly make your soiree an event worth remembering.
Bengaluru-based Sattva group is on the verge of signing an agreement with Bain Capital to set up a platform that would develop built-to-suit assets that will be managed by Colive, a coliving provider in which it has a majority stake, top officials of the real estate developer said.
Both Bain Capital and Sattva would be bringing in equity into the platform, but Sattva group officials declined to give more details, saying that these were still being finalised.
Also read: Unlocking Opportunities: Hedonova’s Perspective on REITs in India’s Real Estate Landscape
Bain Capital is likely to bring in more capital into the venture, the shareholders agreement for which would be finalised in the next 3-4 weeks, Shivam Agarwal, VP, Strategic Management, Sattva group said. “We will be buying land or doing joint developments and build the properties for Colive to manage,” he explained.
Separately a term sheet has also been signed to get Bain Capital as a partner for Colive.
Coworking plans
The group is also thinking in terms of monetizing its investment in flex space provider Simpliworks, in which it has a 50 per cent stake, through an initial public offering but these plans are still fluid.
It currently manages 3.8 million square feet of space across 8 cities and that will expand to 4.5 msf by the end of FY25. Shivam Agarwal said discussions are on to either get a partner in now in a pre-IPO transaction or go straight in for an IPO. “We are in discussions with bankers to assess that… we are still a little bit away from concretising it,” he said, adding that the company had a sizeable portfolio for a public offering.
Also read: Brookfield REIT Q4 Results: NOI jumps 89%; buys 50% stake in assets from Bharti group
Growth plans
The Sattva group currently has a total constructed portfolio of 80 msf of which commercial is 45 msf and residential 35 msf. Another 88 msf is in various stages of construction and in the pipeline.
In the current fiscal year, the company plans to launch residential projects of an area of 21 million square feet in Bengaluru, Hyderabad, and Mumbai, with most of it being in Bengaluru where more than six projects will be launched this year. In Mumbai, the company is making its entry and will also acquire land parcels for 1.5 msf of launches.
Also read: Brookfield India Real Estate Trust acquires 50% stake in Grade A assets from Bharti Enterprises
In the commercial segment it has projects of over 13 msf under construction and coming up in Bengaluru, Hyderabad, Chennai, and Pune.
The company has a capex of ₹12,000-14,000 crore lined up over the next 2-3 years and has estimated pre-sales worth ₹6000-6500 crore in FY25, compared to ₹3500 crore last year.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PREGLEDALI smo kataloge poznatih maloprodajnih trgovina u Hrvatskoj i izdvojili najbolje akcije i proizvode po dobrim cijenama. Lidl, Kaufland, Eurospin, Konzum, Plodine, Spar i Interspar možete pronaći u svim većim mjestima u Hrvatskoj, a ispod možete vidjeti našu šoping-listu za ovaj tjedan.
Lidl
Lidlov katalog vrijedi od ponedjeljka, 24.6., do nedjelje, 30.6., ili do prodaje zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih popusta potrebna vam je mobilna aplikacija Lidl Plus.
Kaufland
Kauflandov katalog vrijedi od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do prodaje zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih dodatnih popusta potrebna vam je Kauflandova kartica.
Eurospin
Katalog Eurospina vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7., ili do isteka zaliha. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Konzum
Konzumov katalog vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7., ili do prodaje zaliha. Za pojedine popuste potrebna je MultiPlus kartica. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Spar
Novi katalozi Spara i Interspara vrijede od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do prodaje zaliha za prehrambene namirnice, kozmetiku, proizvode za osobnu higijenu i sredstva za čišćenje. Pojedini popusti vrijede samo u trgovinama Spar i Interspar, ovisno o dostupnosti proizvoda na akciji u tim trgovinama. Aktualne kataloge možete prolistati ovdje.
Tommy
Tommyjev akcijski katalog vrijedi od četvrtka, 27.6., do srijede, 3.7. Možete ga prolistati ovdje.
Plodine
Katalog Plodina vrijedi od srijede, 26.6., do utorka, 2.7., ili do isteka zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
She was exhausted after shattering a knuckle at WrestleMania 35. Finally in her hotel bed after surgery, Rousey had a cross-country flight to Los Angeles in five hours.
Then inspiration struck. The former UFC champion and then-WWE superstar had been trying to work on a screenplay, but had only come up with a one-line synopsis: “Two wanted assassins with an unwanted pregnancy learn that giving life is harder than taking it.”
“Do you ever get an idea in your head and you’re laying in bed and then you won’t let yourself go to sleep and you keep repeating it in your head over and over so you don’t forget it by the morning?” Rousey said during a phone interview with The Times.
Sleep never came for Rousey, who typed all five hours in her hotel room and continued on the flight.
Five years later, that screenplay idea is now set to be a graphic novel. A Kickstarter campaign launches July 25 for “Expecting the Unexpected,” a Rousey-written 160-page book with illustrations by award-winning comic artist Michael Deodato slated to be published next year by Artists Writers and Artisans.
Through the Kickstarter campaign, fans will have 30 days to order the book, with access to a variety of special offerings, including limited and signed editions, variant artwork, bonus pages and the opportunity of being drawn into the novel as a character.
The story revolves around a notorious hitwoman who goes by the code name Mom, because she wears a fake baby bump filled with weapons. After she sleeps with a fellow assassin, however, Mom becomes pregnant for real and has to come to terms with the notion of becoming a parent … with a bounty on her head.
Ronda Rousey kisses the head of her daughter, La’akea Browne, in 2022.
(Courtesy of No DNB Productions)
In an early look at the novel, provided by AWA, one thing becomes clear upon first view of Mom, with her long hair pulled back in a tight ponytail, muscular arms, white tank top and some very familiar-looking facial expressions:
Mom is Rousey.
“I’m particularly pleased with how I captured Ronda’s essence in the Mom character — her mannerisms, personality, and even her laughter,” Deodato said.
The lead male character’s name is Hapa, the nickname of Rousey’s husband, former UFC fighter Travis Browne. Their first child together, La’akea Browne, was born in 2021.
“It really is our story — even though it didn’t really happen,” Rousey said, adding with a laugh, “ I didn’t really go on a spree of fighting all these people.”
Ronda Rousey and Travis Browne attend the Kids’ Choice Sports Awards on July 19, 2018, at the Barker Hangar in Santa Monica.
(Willy Sanjuan / Invision / Associated Press)
She explained: “The whole story is just the story of me and my husband. Our journey trying to get pregnant, having a baby, our becoming parents — you know, the process from when you become pregnant to when you accept the task of being a parent. … When you actually come to that realization and live up to it is I think a process that isn’t really covered in anything I’ve really seen so far. That was kind of a personal journey that was really important to us.”
Rousey was 21 when she became the first American woman to win an Olympic medal in judo, taking home bronze from the 2008 Beijing Games. She became a superstar as a mixed martial artist, winning six UFC women’s bantamweight title bouts before retiring from MMA in 2016. Rousey remained in the spotlight as a professional wrestler, becoming a WWE triple-crown winner before retiring last year.
By 2019, Rousey had appeared in numerous movies and TV shows, but never a leading role. She wrote ‘Expecting the Unexpected” hoping to be the star, but realized she was too unproven.
That’s when she landed upon the idea of a graphic novel, a literary form she had become “a closet nerd” for as an adult.
Writing the script was just the start. .
“This has a lot of action sequences in it,” she said, “I wrote all the choreography for it in the script and I actually had to film them and perform the choreography with a couple of friends of mine in a wrestling ring.”
Deodato, the comic artist, then turns it into illustrations.
It’s a lot of work, but Rousey said she’s enjoying the process.
“I originally intended on this being a movie, but I really think that this is the way it was always meant to be, as a graphic novel. Maybe that’s the path that I was meant for more, to be a graphic novelist,” Rousey said.
Ronda Rousey works out July 15, 2015, at Glendale Fighting Club in Glendale, Calif.
(Jae C. Hong / Associated Press)
All that said, if presented with the opportunity, would Rousey be willing to turn her graphic novel back into a screenplay?
“Twist my arm and I’ll do it,” she laughed.
“But I’m also so happy with where I’m at. I don’t see this as a stepping stone, I see this as a new path that I never dreamed would be available to me, and I’m enjoying the scenery more than I ever thought was possible.”
iPhone 16 Leaks: There are multiple conjectures about the forthcoming iPhone 16. However, some recent leaks have predicted that the much-talked-about handset from the house of Apple will undergo a potential design overhaul. The latest leaks have shared some expected glimpses of the potential design of iPhone 16 showing that the smartphone will consist of a shutter button and an upgraded camera module. As per the report, a dedicated shutter button will make a comeback in the iPhone 16, which was not given in the recent iPhones. This shutter button is expected to be supported by the haptic engine, which will provide a more spontaneous camera experience to users.
iPhone 16 Leaks: Vertical camera layout with 3D video recording
Reports suggest that the new handset will not feature the diagonal dual-camera layout, which was given in the iPhone 15 and first launched in the iPhone 13. Apple’s iPhone 16 is expected to include a vertically loaded camera system, which will support 3D video recording. The 3D video recording feature is a novel feature, which is exclusively available for the pro model Apple smartphones. Additionally, the flash unit of the iPhone 16 is predicted to be relocated and will be located out of the camera constellation, which will appear to be similar to the iPhone X layout.
iPhone 16 Leaks: Shutter button
Users will be able to focus on a subject easily with a soft tap on the shutter button and then with the secondary tap, they will be able to capture the picture. This new prediction has challenged the earlier rumours about Apple eliminating all the accessible physical buttons. Recent leaks have also revealed another obvious design update in the camera arrangement of the forthcoming iPhone 16.
iPhone 16 Leaks: Usual display size and other expected internal updates
Rumours suggest that the iPhone 16 and iPhone 16 Plus will have the same usual screen sizes as their forerunners, providing 6.1-inch and 6.7-inch 60Hz OLED screens correspondingly. Speculations are doing the rounds that these new handsets will include a toned-down type of the A17 Pro processor, possibly combined with 6GB or 8GB of RAM and 128GB of basic memory.
iPhone 16 Leaks: Mute Switch Button
The upcoming Apple iPhone 16 is predicted to feature the action button which was launched in the iPhone 15 Pro model handsets for the first time. This personalized button will be swapped by the old-style mute switch, which will provide more control over the specific tasks.
Though the above-predicted updates have been confirmed by the recent leaks that are doing the rounds on the internet, the final layout of the forthcoming iPhone 16 may be something different.
I was invited last week by Puneet Chhatwal, CEO of Indian Hotels (the Taj Group) to Udaipur where around 25 members of the Taj’s senior management were holding a strategy meeting. One evening, after the executives had discussed strategy, they listened to three of us — MK Lakshyaraj Singh of Udaipur, whose family owns the Lake Palace, Ajimon Francis of Brand Finance and me – talking about the hotel industry from our perspectives. (Also read: The Taste by Vir Sanghvi: Discover the top pizza chefs and restaurants in Naples making waves globally)
What makes a great hotel great? In frame: The Taj Lake Palace in Udaipur.
I said all the things I have often said here — how, from the days of Jamsetji Tata, the Taj has stood for the triumph of Indian excellence etc. — so I won’t bore you with a recap of my intervention.
Get ready to catch the final stages of the World Cup only on Crickit. Anytime, Anywhere. Explore now!
Lakshyaraj had lots to say but what I found most interesting was his description of his family’s connection with tourism and hospitality. His grandfather, the late Maharana Bhagwat Singhji, was one of the smartest and most sophisticated maharajas of his time. (And remember that till 1970/1, when Indira Gandhi abolished titles, he was what was called a ‘ruling maharaja’.) He was a friend of my father’s and on the governing council of my school, so even though I was very young, I was able to see him up close and admire his style and wit.
It was the late Maharana’s idea to hand the Lake Palace over to the Taj Group. The family had first tried running it on its own but the Maharana had finally decided that it needed professional management.
The Lake Palace was the first professionally-run palace hotel in Rajasthan (the Rambagh in Jaipur then followed) and the Maharana put his faith in the Taj (which consisted, in those days, of just the original Mumbai hotel) only because of the regard he had for the management and for the Tatas.
It was a wise decision. The Lake Palace may well be the most beautiful hotel in the world. The Taj has run it extremely well for decades. And the late Bhagwat Singhji’s descendants have worked tirelessly to turn Udaipur into a great global destination. It is a tradition that Lakshyaraj has enriched with his own efforts.
As you may have read, a study by Brand Finance, a global group, has found that the Taj is the world’s strongest hotel brand. That evening, Ajimon Francis of Brand Finance announced that, in the Indian section of the survey, the Taj had come number one of all Indian brands across all categories. (Amul was second.) As the Indian Hotels share price had touched a historic high that day, the mood of the Taj executives was deservedly ebullient.
I was not particularly surprised by Brand Finance’s fundings. But, I asked, Ajimon, what did the Taj — or any hotel company, for that matter — have to do to remain at the top of the game in the years ahead?
Some of the things he said were interesting and significant because he was basing his recommendations on consumer surveys.
Technology: Hotels talk big about technology but very few recognise how important a factor tech has become in influencing guest decisions. Over the next few years, guests will refuse to stay in a hotel, however nice it is, if it does not meet the technology standards they are looking for.
Part of this is about internet speed and strength. Though all hotels will feed you lots of nonsense about how fast their internet is, I have lost count of the number of Indian hotels I have stayed at where, even though the general manager assures me that his technology is perfect, the WiFi signal drops in one corner of the hotel, where the signal regularly slips entirely and where speeds are never as high as they claim. All too often I go off hotel WiFi because my normal roaming connection is so much faster.
Also, the guys they send to your room to fix the WiFi when you complain are often useless and don’t even accept that there is a problem — and neither do their bosses. It is a cruel thing to say but I guess good tech people don’t join hotels. If you were a bright IT engineer would you join an IT company or a hotel? The answer is obvious.
There are other problems that hotels seem unable to fix. It doesn’t cost much to install plug points at convenient spots. Many five-star hotels don’t have enough plug points by the table or the bedside — both fairly obvious locations. They don’t even have adaptor plugs and the right sorts of chargers (for I Pads and I-Phones, for instance).
We always say, and hotel managers agree, that technology should now be a given, like hot water or air conditioning in a hotel room. But it remains an empty maxim.
Image: Ajimon made another point which had not occurred to me. The old model of a hotel company just hiring a PR agency or even a social media agency is past its sell-by-date.
Sure, there is room for agencies but you can’t entrust your image solely to them.
We live in an age of personal social media. Every single person who stays in your hotel is an influencer because he or she will probably post something on Facebook, Instagram, Twitter or some other platform.
Pay attention to those posts. They will have much more influence and credibility among that person’s circle than any of the paid posts that hotels pay large sums of money to social media agencies for. The paid posts will come from the agency’s pet influencers who often have large numbers of fake followers whom they have bought. People see through all that now. The paid post is less and less effective.
Treat social media as an in-house project. Respond to every guest. Get your own employees to use their social media accounts to respond to guests and to enhance the image of your hotel.
For instance, if a guest posts that he enjoyed a meal at one of your restaurants, don’t wait the stipulated number of hours for your social media agency to send its own robotic thank you. Get the restaurant manager or the chef to respond from their personal accounts. That makes so much more difference. Similarly, if there is a complaint about housekeeping, get the head housekeeper to respond with an apology and a promise to address the complaint.
Complainers will also become less vicious if you follow this approach. People find it easy to rail against a hotel. But when they find they are dealing with an actual person, they are far better behaved.
Service: Indian hotels pride themselves on their service. And that’s great. But our hoteliers’ sense of what constitutes great service has not changed in 20 years. In the same period, however, guest profiles and expectations have changed enormously.
When he was CEO of the Taj, Raymond Brickson once explained, at a hotel conference where I was chairing his session, that foreign hotel managers who came to India often took time to understand that their Indian guests had different expectations of service from westerners.
Nearly every Indian guest came from a home where there were at least three members of domestic staff (including the driver). When they came to a hotel, they expected the same level of instant attention. Foreigners, on the other hand, found too much service and attention to be intrusive.
Ajimon suggested that even Indian guests were now no longer people who enjoyed being served by vast numbers of full-time domestic staff at home. And younger people did not like to be mollycoddled.
It would be foolish for Indian hotels to give up on service, which is one of India’s USPs. But perhaps the time has come to strike a balance. Meet the guests’ needs as soon as possible. But don’t overwhelm them. Don’t impose on them. Don’t violate their privacy. Sometimes they just want to be left alone.
The Future: Does this sound too western? More technology. More social media. And less service?
Perhaps. But I have a feeling that this is the shape of things to come.
Back in 1969, Sean Connery’s Goldfinger director Guy Hamilton and James Bond movie producer Harry Saltzman teamed up for a World War II epic.
Battle of Britain would recreate the 1940 British air campaign of the same name, during a crucial point in the fight against the Nazis.
Hitler had conquered France and was seeking a peace settlement with Great Britain, following the Allied evacuation from Dunkirk.
The German dictator sent in his Luftwaffe planes over the channel hoping to convince the new Prime Minister Winston Churchill to agree to this during their “darkest hour”.
However, from July to October 1940, the Royal Air Force and the Royal Navy’s Fleet Air Arm defended the British Isles preventing Operation Sea Lion; Hitler’s planned invasion.
The new-generation MG 3 has introduced petrol-electric hybrid tech, and I was pretty impressed by the MG 3 Hybrid+ Essence I reviewed recently.
WATCH: Paul’s review of the MG 3 Hybrid+ Essence
But if you want to save a bit of money – $4000, in fact – you might actually be better off going for the standard petrol versions of the MG 3.
There are still two models to choose from, and while they are considerably pricier than the existing MG 3, it’s new from the ground-up including the engine, design, tech, and more.
I drove the 2024 MG 3 Essence for a week – here’s what I thought.
How does the MG3 compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the MG3 against similarly sized vehicles.
MG
MG3
How much does the MG 3 cost?
As mentioned earlier, there are four options in the new MG 3 range in Australia.
Model Variant
$RRP
2024 MG 3 Excite
$23,990
2024 MG 3 Essence
$25,990
2024 MG 3 Hybrid+ Excite
$27,990
2024 MG 3 Hybrid+ Essence
$29,990
Prices exclude on-road costs
To see how the MG 3 lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the MG 3 like on the inside?
I said in my previous review the improvement to the interior is massive, and I stand by it after spending another week in one of these cars.
Hybrid+ Essence shown
The digital screens – a 10.25-inch unit for multimedia, and a 7.0-inch screen for the driver info display – look smart and add a heap of wow factor to the cabin.
The infotainment screen has an array of buttons below for some quick controls – i.e. volume up/down, a home key, A/C on/off, front and rear demister buttons, and a fan-speed button – but you still don’t get a temperature or fan toggle. Those incremental adjustments still need to be made through the screen.
The menus take some learning, including the MG Pilot safety tech screen which you might want to get to grips with. More on that when we get to the drive experience.
As you would expect, there is Apple CarPlay and Android Auto smartphone mirroring, but disappointingly it’s still a wired setup and there’s also no wireless phone charger, either. Satellite navigation is standard, however. I think those priorities might have been the wrong way around…
In my opinion the steering wheel feels too big for the size of the car and the interior space, and the controls on the steering wheel are gloss black plastic, and they attract fingerprints and smudges.
Those controls are a bit tricky, too – the steering wheel icon is the cruise control button, and you need to hit the little ‘pages’ icon on the right side to dive into the driver info screen using the arrow trigger, otherwise you will be skipping songs or turning up/down the volume.
But you can adjust other elements with those buttons too, such as the fan speed and temperature for the A/C. So, maybe that’s the justification for not having those buttons?
However, if you have Apple CarPlay connected (and presumably Android Auto) that shortcut system doesn’t work, and during my testing the fan control button didn’t work when smartphone mirroring was active either. A software glitch that can be ironed out, maybe – but it’s annoying.
Hybrid+ Essence shown
Petrol models get a traditional gear selector instead of the rotary dial that’s found in the hybrid, and you still get a pair of cupholders, a sliding tray section that hides another spot for loose items between the front seats.
There’s a comfy centre armrest and bottle holders in the doors as well. But the plastics are all on the hard and shiny side, meaning things can move around and rattle about.
The seats offer good comfort and decent adjustability for people of different shapes and sizes, but there is a hard edge to the plastic surround near the cushion, which might lead to a bum bruise or two. You get tilt adjust for the steering column, but annoyingly, it doesn’t have reach.
My test car featured black trim, which isn’t quite as visually appealing as the lighter trim in the hybrid test car I had, but there’s still a mix of fake leather and cloth which is nice enough, and I like the crosshatch design finishes on the dash, which are reminiscent of the last version.
Hybrid+ Essence shown
One omission I can’t cop is the lack of an auto-dimming rearview mirror – annoying for those drive a lot at night!
But there is a USB-A port in the mirror housing for a cleanly installed dash cam. That’s in addition to USB-A and USB-C ports below the infotainment screen for charging and connectivity.
Choose the Essence grade and you get a small opening sunroof – which certainly makes the cabin feel a bit more airy, as the black finish interior includes a very dark headlining.
Back seat space is very good for a car of this size – my 182cm/6’0” frame was able to slide in behind my own driving position with respectable knee and toe room. Headroom is also good, but taller peeps might need to watch their noggin getting in and out.
Three small adults across the back is a possibility, but three child seats might be a stretch. My three-year-old daughter’s forward-facing child seat was able to slot in with enough room for her to swing her legs a bit, and still fit an adult in the seat ahead. And yes, there are outboard ISOFIX points and top-tethers for all three rear seats.
Lovely to see there are directional air vents in the back too, a USB-A port for charging devices, as well as map pockets and bottle holders in the doors; but no centre armrest.
The boot has been upsized compared to the last model, with 293 litres of cargo capacity with the seats up. There’s a lamp and shopping bag hook in the boot, too.
And, in a plus for those who value a spare, there’s a space-saver under the floor of the petrol models – not the case for the hybrids, which make do with a tyre repair kit.
Dimensions
MG 3
Length
4113mm
Width
1797mm
Height
1502mm
Wheelbase
2570mm
Boot space – seats up
293L
Boot space – second row folded
983L
Kerb weight
1199kg – MG 3 1308kg – Hybrid+
Maximum towing capacity
500kg
To see how the MG 3 lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
Petrol versions of the MG 3 feature a new 1.5-litre petrol engine driving the front wheels.
Technical Specifications
MG 3
Engine
1.5-litre 4cyl petrol
Engine power
81kW – 6000rpm
Engine torque
142Nm – 4500rpm
Transmission
CVT
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
Fuel consumption – claim
6.0L/100km
Fuel type
91 RON
Fuel tank
45 litres
CO2 emissions – claim
139g/km
It’s not a carryover unit, despite the same capacity and similar outputs, according to MG. There’s a continuously variable transmission (CVT), which replaces the old four-speed auto.
Fuel consumption has dropped as the new engine runs on the Atkinson cycle, and the official combined cycle figure is 6.0 litres per 100km (previously 6.7L/100km).
On test I didn’t quite see that good of a number. My average across a couple of hundred kays of mixed driving, including freeway, open road as well as urban traffic jams, I saw 7.9L/100km. I was not impressed by that.
At least it no longer needs 95 RON premium unleaded like the outgoing car version. That said, while the MG 3 petrol can run on 91 RON the Hybrid+ retains the requirement for premium fuel.
To see how the MG 3 lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
How does the MG 3 drive?
The new MG 3 is a big improvement in broad terms, and the petrol model is a pretty decent proposition, if not as exceptional as the hybrid.
The 1.5-litre four-cylinder engine is hardly a firecracker, and there will be some buyers out there that won’t like the fact it has shifted to a CVT automatic instead of a traditional torque converter gearbox.
But the reality is the CVT used here is actually pretty good, with a relatively hushed nature to it – one of the main arguments against CVTs is that they can be droney and noisy, and while there is some of that ‘elasticity’ to the way the car accelerates at times,
It’s not as zippy as the hybrid, but it gets along with a decent level of urgency, responding well to sudden stabs of the accelerator when you’re already at pace. At a standstill or in slower moving situations, there’s a bit more play to the acceleration, and it’s not quite as thrusty. The CVT has eight ‘shift’ points so it never gets too raucous.
But also worth noting is a little bit of lag when you’re parking – if you’re doing a reverse-parallel move, for instance, you might find that there’s a minor hesitation if you quickly shift between R and D (or D and R), meaning you might feel like you’re driving on your tippy-toes a bit.
The braking is a bit more surefooted though, with a decent response to the pedal. It certainly has a tad more confidence in the controllability of the pedal than the hybrid, which has more of an ‘airy’ quality to the top of the pedal travel.
The fact the new MG 3 has a longer wheelbase and a wider track makes it feel more planted on the road surface, and it rides with more comfort and better control than the last model, too.
It’s not the most supple suspension for a small car, but it does have a certainty to it when it comes to handling lumps and bumps at speed or in urban driving. Sharp edges can upset progress a little, but it’s far more mature to drive than the last MG 3.
The steering is let down most by a wheel that’s too large for the size of the car, in this reviewer’s opinion.
It takes away that feeling of nimbleness you might expect in a tiny little car like this, though the steering action is still predictable and it is simple enough to park. It just feels like you have to manhandle the car a bit too much for something so urban-focused.
The safety systems are a ‘like it or lump it’ option. I didn’t like the emergency lane keep system, which I switched off for most drives because it can be a bit pushy and it also dulls the feel on-centre at freeway pace.
The speed-sign recognition system is also irritating, though not as bad as some other more incessant beepy tech (looking at you, Hyundai and Kia).
Beyond that, the camera system that reads speed signs seems to think 110km/h, as is common on freeways around Sydney, is actually 70km/h. A few other brands have this issue (Mazda, for example), and it is annoying.
There is some road noise to contend with at highway pace as well, so for commuters hitting the open road often that could be a consideration.
But again, more broadly, it is a significantly more enjoyable car than the model it replaces.
What do you get?
The MG 3 range is split into base-model Excite and top-spec Essence grades, with a few minor differences between the petrol and hybrid versions.
MG 3 Excite standard equipment:
16-inch alloy wheels
Space-saver spare wheel
Halogen headlights
LED daytime running lights
Auto headlights
Rear fog light
Push-button start
Six-way manual driver’s seat adjustment
Four-way manual passenger’s seat adjustment
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
MG Pilot ADAS suite – details in safety section below
MG 3 Hybrid+ adds:
No spare wheel – tyre repair kit
Auto climate control
Dial type gear selector
Drive modes
Pedestrian warning sound – external speaker
MG 3 Essence adds (over Excite):
Projector LED headlights
Keyless entry system
Rain-sensing wipers
Sunroof
Fake leather and cloth trim
Leather steering wheel
Sunglass compartment
Rear map pockets
Front centre armrest
Satellite navigation
DAB digital radio
Connected mobile services (iSmart compatibility)
360 degree surround-view camera system
Is the MG 3 safe?
The new-generation MG 3 is a very different machine to its predecessor when it comes to safety tech.
The last one didn’t have any active safety gear, but this one is comprehensively equipped with an array of advanced safety features. However, keep in mind that at the time of publication, this remains unrated by Euro NCAP or ANCAP.
Standard safety features include:
6 airbags
Dual front
Dual front-side
Dual side curtain
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Lane departure warning
Lane keep assist
Emergency lane keep assist
Adaptive cruise control
Intelligent cruise assist
Traffic jam assist
Steering, acceleration, braking assistance
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic alert
Intelligent speed assist
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
Tyre pressure monitoring
Essence models add:
Hybrid models add:
Pedestrian warning system – external
How much does the MG 3 cost to run?
MG offers a seven-year, unlimited kilometre warranty for its range in Australia, and there’s a seven-year roadside assistance plan included too.
2024 MG 3 service pricing:
Service Interval
MG 3
MG 3 Hybrid+
1 year, 10,000km
$234
$235
2 years, 20,000km
$323
$349
3 years, 30,000km
$352
$341
4 years, 40,000km
$536
$628
5 years, 50,000km
$409
$492
CarExpert’s Take on the MG 3
The MG 3 petrol isn’t nearly as efficient as the new Hybrid+, but for those who can’t spend the extra $4000 or are happy with the more familiar petrol powertrain, it could still be a solid small car choice.
The improvements to tech and safety gear have made this a more complete city car than it ever was.
And while some of those driver assistance systems may annoy some buyers, there’s a lot to like about this little car even if it doesn’t have as little a price this time around.
Reuters reported Foxconn discriminates against married women by rejecting their job applications, because of their greater family responsibilities compared to unmarried counterparts as the reason.
The report revealed that the smartphone manufacturer systematically excluded married women from job opportunities at its main iPhone assembly plant
Foxconn, a key manufacturer of Apple devices, has been excluding married women from assembly jobs at its flagship smartphone plant in India, Reuters reported. This practice contradicts the codes of conduct for both companies, which explicitly prohibit discrimination based on marital status.
A Reuters investigation report published on June 25 revealed that Foxconn discriminates against married women by rejecting their job applications, because of their “greater family responsibilities compared to unmarried counterparts” as the reason.
‘Post-marriage Issues’
The report revealed that the smartphone manufacturer systematically excluded married women from job opportunities at its main iPhone assembly plant in Sriperumbudur, near Chennai, Tamil Nadu. The world’s largest contract electronics maker justified this by claiming that married women have “more issues post-marriage.”
As per the report, this was confirmed by numerous former and current employees from over a dozen Foxconn hiring agencies across India, many of whom spoke to the news agency on the condition of anonymity.
‘Reasons for Discrimination’
Agents and Foxconn HR sources cited family duties, pregnancy, and higher absenteeism as reasons for not hiring married women at the plant. Additionally, many noted that the jewellery worn by married Hindu women could interfere with production.
The ban is not absolute. Three former Foxconn HR executives told Reuters that the Taiwan-headquartered manufacturer is relaxing its policy of not hiring married women during high-production periods when it faces labour shortages. In some cases, hiring agencies assist female candidates in concealing their marital status to secure jobs, Reuters found.
S. Paul, a former human resources executive at Foxconn India, said that the hiring rules were verbally communicated by the company’s executives to its Indian hiring agencies.
“Risk factors increase when you hire married women,” Paul told Reuters.
Foxconn typically avoids hiring married women due to “cultural issues” and societal pressures, explained Paul, who left the company in August 2023 for a higher-paying role at a consulting firm.
Paul added that the company’s view was that there were “many issues post-marriage,” including that women “have babies after marriage.”
In response to inquiries from Reuters, Apple and Foxconn acknowledged shortcomings in their hiring practices in 2022 and stated that they had taken steps to rectify the situation.
However, all the discriminatory practices documented by Reuters at the Sriperumbudur plant occurred in 2023 and 2024. The companies did not address these instances, nor did they specify whether any of the lapses in 2022 involved the hiring of married women.
Ornaments & Concealing Status
Near the Foxconn plant in Sriperumbudur, a road junction just over a mile away serves as a meeting point for recruiters and candidates. Many job seekers travel with their families from remote villages, and if selected, they are expected to begin work promptly.
During the usual hiring season, if a married woman manages to secure an interview, Foxconn officials are vigilant for noticeable metal ornaments, as reported by a current and a former Foxconn HR executive. Those found wearing such ornaments are subsequently turned away, with explanations given that there has been a misunderstanding or that recruitment is currently on hold, according to these individuals.
Namit Singh Sengar
Namit writes on personal finance, economy and brands. Currently contributing to News18.com as a Senior Sub Editor in the business vertical. Prior to t…Read More
Despite Bitcoin’s recent decline towards the $58K level, the meme coin sector has maintained its momentum. Many top meme coins preserved their volatility during the sharp market drop, as they are generally less affected by market declines. Notably, Dogecoin’s price has rebounded from its recent low due to increased accumulation. Currently, DOGE is targeting a breakout above its resistance lines.
Dogecoin Sees Comeback in On-chain Signals
In the past 24 hours, Dogecoin experienced significant liquidations as traders on both sides faced losses due to increased market volatility. According to Coinglass, the total liquidations for Dogecoin exceeded $1.6 million, with short positions accounting for nearly $1 million of that total.
The recent market downturn has led to a massive increase in large transactions involving Dogecoin. Data from IntoTheBlock shows that, over the same period, Dogecoin saw an impressive $1 billion in large transaction volume, which corresponded with a 6.6% rise in its price.
The large transaction metric jumped from the low of $731 million, suggesting that whales took interest in the meme coin market following a loss in Bitcoin and leading altcoins.
Large transactions often exceed $100,000. The “Large Transactions Volume in USD” from IntoTheBlock tracks the total value of such transfers, indicating daily activity by major investors like whales and institutions. A spike in this volume signals intense buying or selling activity.
For Dogecoin, the large transaction volume reached 8.45 billion Dogecoin in the last 24 hours, marking a 37% increase.
Accompanying this data, the Netflow metric reveals that holders were actively accumulating more DOGE during the market correction. A shift towards the negative region in the Netflow metric indicates withdrawals from exchanges, signaling a strong “buy the dip” trend for Dogecoin.
This metric shows that approximately $21 million worth of Dogecoin (173 million DOGE) was removed from exchanges, decreasing the selling pressure on the meme coin over the past 48 hours.
What’s Next for the DOGE Price?
Dogecoin price declined heavily from its consolidated range of $0.125, resulting in a steep decline below Fib channels. However, the price took support near $0.114 and triggered a rebound later as buyers showed increased confidence. As of writing, DOGE price trades at $0.126, surging over 8.6% in the last 24 hours.
Should the price hold below $0.12, it will suggest that the bears have gained the advantage. This scenario may trigger a decline towards the psychological support at $0.10. Although the bulls will attempt to halt the downward movement at this point, a continued bearish dominance could push the price down to $0.08.
Conversely, this bearish outlook could be negated if the price continues to surge from its current position and surpasses $0.14. Such a move might lead to a rally reaching the 50-day SMA at $0.165, potentially keeping the DOGE/USDT pair within the $0.17 to $0.2 trading range.
A long time ago (so long ago that Nickelback still had hits), my marketing leader would ask me what value my brand-building programs added to the business.
My answer to him was always the same: “Good things.”
Halfway through 2024, brands are desperate to make every piece of content catch their audiences’ attention. That’s no easy task in the “For you” feed era.
But chasing short-term attention and performance too often comes at the expense of the long game — building and deepening brand trust.
Brands often default to the short-term view because they understand the associated metrics (pageviews, click-throughs, comments, etc.). Associating performance measures with brand-building is much more challenging.
I see this all the time with my clients. There’s the nonprofit that desperately wants to measure its brand impact on stakeholders. There’s the AI startup trying to measure how its content affects its audience share with its competitors’ buzzword-filled treatises. There’s the enterprise brand trying to maintain its relevance in an evolving industry.
Yet, despite the measurement difficulty, brand awareness remains the most common content marketing goal mentioned in CMI’s B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends research year after year.
In that way, brand awareness is like exercise. We know it’s good for long-term health. But the incremental changes that result are hard to spot.
And that makes brand-building programs difficult to justify in a performance-driven culture.
Everything’s a vanity metric
When you think about it, aren’t brand awareness metrics “vanity metrics” by definition? After all, we’re asking the world, “How attractive do you think we are?”
Anyway.
It’s not that brand-marketing metrics don’t exist. Myriad articles, classes, best-practice guides, and tech products claim to help you associate transactional data with brand value.
Most of these encourage marketers to look at the growth of direct traffic, earned media coverage, social media share, or even brand-recall surveys to measure the increase of our brand value.
But here’s the problem: Anyone who has argued for more money for brand marketing (or content marketing as a lever to build a brand) will tell you those metrics won’t get you far.
And the pushback is warranted. More traffic doesn’t prove the brand has more unaided or aided recall. It could mean a content piece suddenly ranked well for an unbranded search term.
Here’s an example: About three years ago, I noticed a significant bump on my consulting website (contentadvisory.net). “Ooh, my brand is growing!” I thought.
But when I investigated, I found that most of that traffic went to an 8-year-old blog post that suddenly ranked for the phrase “purple duck meaning.”
I still don’t know why that phrase suddenly went viral, but people searching for it weren’t interested in whatever that blog post was about or my consulting services. (Google it at your own risk.)
So, more traffic doesn’t always indicate that brand value or trust has grown. The traffic could have everything to do with a topic but nothing to do with your brand. It also could mean people are scrutinizing your digital content because they don’t trust your brand.
Put simply, many of those vanity metrics may have nothing to do with increasing or decreasing the brand’s value. And, ironically, some may run counter to it.
But if transactional metrics aren’t optimal, how do you build a better business case for brand marketing?
Transactions are easy; triggers are hard
Before we get too far, I should note that there are plenty of ways to measure whether brand-building with content is working.
The key is to put an objective behind the effort, get stakeholders to agree on the measurable objective, and then design for testable measurability.
In other words, you need to measure your fitness level first, then get everyone to agree on your fitness assessment and how much change would equal “good progress.” Then, you can design an exercise plan to improve your fitness level.
For example, an enterprise financial services organization client wanted to increase brand trust among its existing investors and financial advisors. To measure the increase, we first conducted a trust survey to compare trust in that brand with trust in the brand’s competitors and mainstream news media outlets that covered financial services.
One year later, we conducted the same study again. This time, we surveyed the same kind of audience but added a segment of the brand’s customer base — subscribers to their blog and thought leadership platform.
The organization performed better than its competitors, so its branding efforts (such as TV, print, and online ads) worked. And the subscriber segment ranked my client’s brand as more trusted than some mainstream financial news sources.
“Hold on,” I hear you saying. “You proved that brand-building with content was working, but the question may still be, ‘So what? What value does that provide for the business? What happens as a result?’”
That’s when you answer, “Good things.”
You might still frustrate that CFO. But it’s a meaningful answer.
By spending some percentage of your effort working on the brand, you will build trust. And trust is bankable goodness that may express itself in many ways. You may not capture every granular transaction that comes from it, but good things will happen.
Think of it this way. Could you measure precisely how much running on the treadmill, taking your vitamins, or getting enough sleep contributed to your fitness improvement in any given week? Probably not.
But what happened after you decided to invest a portion of your overall effort in your long-term health? Good things.
You can easily measure more traffic, more votes, more engagement, and more downloads. Measuring transactions isn’t hard. But, measuring the trigger that motivated the transaction is complex.
Accept ‘good things’
People have spent their careers building business systems for consistency. They’re trained to laser-focus on eliminating operational conflicts and anything that hinders consistent, predictable, harmonious processes.
And many view measurability as a foundation for that predictability. The old saying, “If you can’t measure it, you can’t manage it,” comes from this thinking. This trope sometimes morphs into the idea that if you can’t measure it, it doesn’t count. And that’s nonsense.
I’ve learned over 32 years of marriage that doing good things for my wife provides good things in return. I could easily measure the transactions, but I don’t. How could I connect them to the value of the good things I get in return?
Think for a moment about the love you have for someone special in your life. Maybe it’s your partner, mom, dad, children, or even a dog. How much love is there? Have you measured it lately? If you can’t measure it, it doesn’t count, right?
Sometimes, the most accurate answer to the question of what comes from brand-building activities is simply: “Good things.”
Yes, more revenue, more savings, better customers, more trust, more brand equity, and more profitability. But you’re just not going to try and quantify it.
So, how much brand-building should you do?
My answer? Enough. Do enough, and good things will happen.
Updated from a May 2022 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Jaro Education has declared bonus and dividend to its shareholders.
The Board of Directors of Jaro Education has recommended a bonus in the ratio of 1:3 (one equity share for every three held) shares held by the shareholder.
The board has also announced a dividend of ₹10 per share for the financial year ended March for its eligible shareholders.
Sanjay Salunkhe, CMD, Jaro Education, said the institution will declare its audited results in a couple of weeks and file the DRHP after that.
Jaro Education’s journey is underscored by its sustainable growth trajectory, driven by an increase in partnerships with Tier-I institutions, in India and overseas, as well as geographic expansion, increase in student enrolments, more programs per Institute and fee hikes, per a statement.
Also read: Prosus writes off $493-m investment in Byju’s
In FY24, the company provided online education to about 28,800 learners for post-graduate degrees and up-skilling courses, it said.
Founded in 2009, Jaro Education provides over 250 management, technology, and techno-functional programs in collaboration with top reputed institutes, including Massachusetts Institute of Technology – Institute for Data, Systems, and Society (MIT IDSS), The Wharton Interactive (an initiative of The Wharton Business School, University of Pennsylvania), Rotman School of Management (University of Toronto), IIM in Ahmedabad, Kozhikode, Mumbai, Indore and Tiruchirappall among others.
Twenty years ago Joshua Cooper Ramo, a consultant, first wrote about the “Beijing consensus”. The Washington consensus of financial liberalisation, floating currencies and openness to foreign capital was, he posited, a damaged brand. China was pioneering its own approach to development based on principles of equality, innovation and a relentless focus on sovereignty and national security. This would appeal to lots of developing countries.
In the years since, China’s leaders have mostly denied any ambition to export a state-led model of development. But they are sometimes more brazen. Last year, for instance, Xi Jinping argued in a speech to Communist Party officials that the country’s economic model “breaks the myth that modernisation equals Westernisation”, and that its growth was expanding “choices for developing countries”. Leaders past and present in the developing world—from Pakistan’s Imran Khan and Malaysia’s Mahathir Mohamad to Brazil’s Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva and South Africa’s Cyril Ramaphosa—have expounded the benefits of at least some aspects of the model. And since Mr Cooper Ramo first wrote about the Beijing consensus, the Chinese economy has quadrupled in size in real dollar terms, boosting the country’s diplomatic and military sway.
Overwatch has brought back its most in-demand cosmetic, and it’s helping charity at the same time. That’s right, Pink Mercy is back — and there’s a new skin with a gilded twist.
Overwatch 2 season 11 started June 20, following the Mirrorwatch theme of season 10 with an action-packed Sentai-inspired battle pass theme. As usual with Blizzard’s multiplayer online shooter, we’ve got a new battle pass, a new balance patch and a new season of ranked play to start grinding. There’s no new hero this season, but we are getting another Push map, which brings the total up to four.
Season 11 also brings new hero mastery courses, mythic store options and a new Kiriko shop skin. Here’s what to know about the latest Overwatch 2 season.
The new Rose Gold Mercy skin gives the hero a shiny, strawberry blonde look.
Blizzard
Get the Pink Mercy skin, support cancer research
One of the most coveted skins in Overwatch has been the Pink Mercy skin — a limited-time cosmetic from 2018 that supported breast cancer research. After years of fans begging Blizzard to bring back the skin, the cosmetic is finally back in the shop.
You can buy the old Pink ($15) and new Rose Gold ($20) skins, and 100% of the proceeds go to the Breast Cancer Research Foundation. It’s a good look for the game, and I hope it’s the start of more charity items in Overwatch 2. Note that you can’t use coins — you have to buy the skins directly, and you’ll have through July 7 to get them.
Overwatch season 11 battle pass
If you saw the Super Sentai Genji skin and wished everyone could get that treatment, season 11 was made just for you. The new season is themed around Ultrawatch — the game’s colorful take on Power Rangers — with Genji, Cassidy, Sojourn, Ana and Wrecking Ball getting themed skins. There’s also be a lifeguard theme in the battle pass, including skins for Junkrat and Lucio, and other skins available in the shop.
Sojourn is ready to face off against the forces of evil in her Ultrawatch form.
Blizzard
New mythic skin
The heroes of Ultrawatch aren’t just fighting against any old villain — they’re facing off against Mythic Calamity Empress Ashe. The leader of the Deadlock Gang trades in her cowgirl hat for a very Rita Repulsa headdress and some dark magic. As a reminder, mythic skins have been taken off the battle pass and now exist exclusively in shops where you can spend mythic prisms, which you can earn in the premium battle pass or buy directly from the shop.
Ashe is my main damage character, so I’ve got high expectations for her mythic skin.
Blizzard
New mythic weapons
Not interested in the Mythic Ashe? Hold onto your mythic prisms until midseason and spend them on an all-new type of item: mythic weapons. Everyone’s favorite Crusader is getting the first mythic weapon, called Bound Demon — an axe-like hammer that glows like lava and has special fiery effects for earning final blows.
Vanquish your foes with the first mythic weapon.
Blizzard
New map: Runasapi
We got a fourth Push map this season, and this one shows off Illari’s home in Peru. The season 11 blog post says we’ll get to see the Inti Warrior Historical Museum and Monument, which pays tribute to the group that trained Illari before she became the sole survivor.
This Runasapi area shows off a tragic piece of Illari lore.
Blizzard
Other new stuff
There are a few other changes happening in season 11:
The game added new hero mastery courses for Kiriko and Soldier:76.
Our cries have finally been heard: The glass is gone from Colosseo.
Weekly challenges are easier, and you can catch up if you miss a week.
The devs adjusted matchmaking to better handle narrow and wide groups.
Fine, take my money.
Blizzard
For more games coverage, check out how to get started with Valorant’s console beta and find the best online games to play with friends.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
Most of us have, at some time or another, asked a friend or family member for some over-the-counter medicine to treat a headache or an upset stomach, as the dosage and directions are fairly universal.
But is the same protocol appropriate when it comes to taking someone else’s prescription medication?
The resounding answer from medical doctors is an emphatic “no.”
MEDICINE CABINET MUST-HAVES: 9 ESSENTIALS EVERY HOUSEHOLD SHOULD HAVE ON HAND
There are specific reasons why.
“Taking someone else’s prescribed medication can be very harmful,” LaTasha Perkins, M.D., a family physician at Medstar Georgetown University Hospital in Washington, D.C., told Fox News Digital.
Doctors agreed that sharing prescription medications with others is a bad idea.(iStock)
“You need to take only your own medicine and not someone else’s, because so much goes into figuring it out.”
Numerous considerations are involved in prescribing medication to a patient, Perkins said — including health status, medical history and blood work — which can be completely different from one person to the next.
Even if you take the same medication as someone else, the other person may be on a different dose of it, the doctor noted.
TRAVELING INTERNATIONALLY? IT COULD BE ILLEGAL TO BRING ALONG THESE MEDICATIONS, ACCORDING TO A PHARMACIST
“A lot of medications also look and sound the same, so you have to take what was specifically prescribed to you,” she cautioned.
Numerous factors go into prescribing medication to a patient, including health status, medical history and blood work, according to doctors.(iStock)
Drug interactions present another concern.
“If you’re taking vitamins or any other medication that may interact with a prescription medicine, that should be taken into account when tailoring your prescription,” Perkins said.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Allergies are yet another key consideration, the doctor warned, as some people are allergic to the additives in medications.
“There’s a reason the medication is prescribed — because it’s personalized to each individual based on a variety of health factors,” Perkins said.
The consequences of sharing prescription medication — which is never a good idea — can range from severe allergic reactions to medication interactions and overdosing, one doctor warned.(iStock)
Chad Weston, M.D., a physician with Novant Health Oceanside Family Medicine & Convenient Care – Brunswick in Shallotte, North Carolina, agreed that taking a medication prescribed to a different individual, even for seemingly similar symptoms, can be harmful and have unintended consequences.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“These consequences range from severe allergic reactions to medication interactions and overdosing, causing damage to organs such as the liver and kidneys,” he said in an interview with Fox News Digital.
Instead of seeking symptom relief by taking someone else’s medication, you should see a doctor to get an accurate medical diagnosis and prescription, Weston advised.
Instead of seeking symptom relief by taking someone else’s medication, you should see a doctor to get an accurate medical diagnosis and prescription, a doctor advised.(iStock)
In the event that you’re traveling and don’t have your medicine with you, Perkins said the best thing to do is call your doctor.
“If you don’t have your medicine, we can call it into a pharmacy wherever you are,” she said.
In an initiative to promote healthier living among people, the Karnataka health department has recently issued a notification ordering prohibition on use of artificial colours in preparation of the kebabs sold in the market. State Health Minister Dinesh Gundu Rao took to his official handle on X (formerly Twitter) to make the announcement. He further stated that food vendors violating the rule will have to face “serious action including 7 years of jail time and a fine of up to Rs. 10 lakhs”.
According to Dinesh Gundu Rao’s post, the State Government took the decision after testing 39 samples of eight kebab variants in laboratory. Each of the samples were said to contain artficial colours – sunset yellow and carmiosine – which may cause adverse health issues.
Also Read: Rajasthan Authorities Find Some MDH, Everest Spices “Unsafe”: Report
Find the detailed post here:
Considering the safety of our citizens, Karnataka Government has banned the usage of artificial colors in Veg, Chicken and Fish Kebabs.
Recently, 39 samples of Kebabs were subjected to tests in the laboratory and 8 variants of kebabs were found to have harmful artificial colors… pic.twitter.com/0N1EmVNQCM— Dinesh Gundu Rao/ದಿನೇಶ್ ಗುಂಡೂರಾವ್ (@dineshgrao) June 24, 2024
In no time, the news took the internet by storm, with people from different walks of life welcoming the decision with open arms. They also shared their suggestions to make the move yet more effective.
“Sir, this is a very good initiative. Do you have any portal to complain about those restaurants who use artificial colour. Also, please deploy your team to raid in all the ambur biryani and kabab shops,” a person wrote.
Another comment read, “This is a good citizen centric order that will be effective with regular checks by officials. Will BBMP officials check wedding/party halls that are illegally running kitchens on a catering license? They are catering to crowds while operating in unhygienic and unsafe conditions.”
A third comment read, “Good decision. Please also ban usage of plastic sheets for making idli and supply of hot lunch and dishes in plastic trays and cans.”
“Good move, but why ban only on kebabs? Why not in all food items? I am sure it’s been used in all other foods like sweets, ice creams, gravies, fried rice etc. In my opinion, it should be banned for all food items,” a person suggested.
“Sir, please ban these artificial colours completely, instead of banning it on particular dishes!” another comment read.
Earlier in March, Karnataka Government prohibited use of food colouring agent, Rhodamine-B, which was widely used in foods like gobhi manchurian and cotton candy. According to Dinesh Gundu Rao, “Stringent action will be taken against restaurants that are found to be using such chemicals for food preparation,” reports PTI.
The line of Hailey Bieber fans snaked up Greene Street in Manhattan and wrapped around the block, but many were never going to get what they really wanted: a selfie with Ms. Bieber.
“I love the Bieber family, Bieber franchise — I’m here for it!” exclaimed Haleigh Francis. Like hundreds of others who descended on SoHo on Monday, Ms. Francis was hoping to be among the first to experience the “pocket-sized” pop-up put on by Ms. Bieber’s popular makeup and skin care brand, Rhode.
At 11 a.m., Rhode opened its doors to the public, who were invited to buy tubes of peptide lip balm for $18 apiece or a set of six mini-blushes for $130, among other skin care items.
Inside the tiny storefront, employees wore the Los Angeles girl uniform: a form-fitting white tee, semi-baggy jeans and black loafers. The walls were painted a glossy caramel shade, and mirrors emblazoned with the brand name covered the walls. Outside, a baby-pink Cosmic Bliss ice cream truck distributed samples of Strawberry Glaze, Ms. Bieber’s signature ice cream flavor, fashioned after her signature Erewhon smoothie.
With her Gen Z bona fides and the all-important aura of celebrity, Ms. Bieber, 27, a model and socialite who founded Rhode in 2022, is carving out a niche within the crowded, billion-dollar cosmetics and skin care industry. In some ways, the pop-up is an extension of previous experiments by the brand, like a touring photo booth.
“With Rhode, I’m always looking for new ways to reach our customers,” Ms. Bieber said in a phone interview. “I speak so much about how Rhode is a whole world that we’re creating. As a brand, we’re always wanting to bring people into the world of Rhode in fun and immersive ways.”
Ms. Bieber visited the shop the night before, when Rhode hosted a preview event for friends and skin care influencers, but she decided to skip the first day.
“I’m obviously pregnant right now, so I wanted to just do what I was the most comfortable with and kind of just let people go and have their own experience,” she said, adding, “I am being a little bit more protective of my energy and space and time right now.”
“My energy is going to growing this baby,” she said.
Close to 1,000 fans had lined up at the door by 6 a.m. for the pop-up’s first day. (It is expected to continue through July 3.)
Matthew Angeles, 20, traveled from Dover, N.J., and then waited for five hours to make his way into the shop. The space was small, but there was room enough to display seven blushes and four tinted peptide lip balms at stations spaced throughout the store. Fans stopped to take selfies as they applied products and some took photos of one another. The moment Mr. Angeles walked in the store, he reached for what he had waited so long to try: the Pocket Blush in a peachy shade called Sprinkle that was created strictly for the New York pop-up.
“I definitely wanted to try that,” Mr. Angeles said, while tugging on his Reneé Rapp tote. “I haven’t been able to get my hands on those, and I kind of wanted to test those out, see what I like.”
Marisa Darlene, 22, found out about the pop-up from social media. She arrived at 127 Greene Street at 8:30 in the morning. By 1 p.m., she was still at the back of the line.
“I was super excited to come out and knew I’d be waiting in a long line,” Ms. Darlene said. “I like the excitement a pop-up brings. It’s just so fun to make friends in line. This is so cool.”
Even with all the excitement, however, there was one thing that could burst Ms. Darlene’s bubble: if Ms. Bieber did not show.
“I would be kind of disappointed because there’s so many people here,” said Ms. Darlene, a student at the Fashion Institute of Technology. “I mean, I don’t even know if she expected the turnout to be this big, but I feel like that’d be nice for her just to pop by to see her fans, you know?”
A gaggle of teens from Westchester — one pointed out she was from Brooklyn — stood in front of Ms. Darlene in line. All were established fans of the Rhode skin care line.
“It is very tween makeup,” said Stella DiStasio, 17. “It’s more minimalistic, and all of the packaging is just very … aesthetic.” (Although Ms. DiStasio was the de facto spokeswoman for the group, several said the word “aesthetic” in unison.)
A teenage attendee named Arrens Osorto demonstrated the flushed look that Rhode has made its calling card. He was at the back of the line, with a full face of blush.
“I’m really excited to see Hailey Bieber and all her makeup products from Rhode,” he said smiling shyly from the back of the line. “I think she’s inside!”
This reporter did not have the heart to tell him that Ms. Bieber was not, in fact, at the shop.
The Selkirk Rex Longhair is a charming, medium-sized cat most known for their curly coat and friendly personality. These cats break the negative stereotype of cats being aloof and distant. They love being around people and are quick to form strong bonds with their family members.
Selkirk Rex Longhairs make wonderful companion pets and can be well-suited for first-time cat owners and families with children or other pets. Here’s everything you need to know if you’re interested in caring for a Selkirk Rex and want to find out if this breed is the right fit for you.
Breed Overview
Colors:
Black, blue, chocolate, cinnamon, cream, cream-tabby, fawn, lavender, red, red tabby, white
Suitable for:
Families with children, multi-pet homes, elderly
Temperament:
Easygoing, gentle, friendly, affectionate
Selkirk Rexes come in longhaired and shorthaired varieties. The most notable difference with Selkirk Rex Longhairs is that they tend to have bushier tails and fluffier faces than their shorthaired counterparts. They really look like stuffed animals with the softest coats, and it’s nearly impossible to resist petting them. Fortunately, these cats love to cuddle with their favorite people and don’t mind getting plenty of pets.
Selkirk Rex Longhair Characteristics
Energy
+
A high-energy cat needs a lot of physical and mental stimulation to keep healthy and happy, while a low-energy cat needs minimal physical activity, but still needs mental stimulation. When choosing a cat, It’s important to ensure their energy levels match your lifestyle.
Trainability
+
Cats that are easy-to-train are more willing and skilled at quickly learning prompts and actions with minimal training. Harder-to-train cats are usually more stubborn or aloof and require a bit more patience and practice.
Health
+
Certain cat breeds are more prone to various genetic health problems, and some more than others. This doesn’t mean that every cat in those breeds will have these issues, but they do have an increased risk, so it’s important to understand and prepare for any additional needs they may require.
Lifespan
+
Due to their size or potential genetic health issues of a specific breed, some cats have shorter lifespans than others. Proper nutrition, exercise, mental stimulation, and hygiene also play an important role in your cat’s lifespan and quality of life.
Sociability
+
Some cat breeds are more social than others, both towards humans and other cats and animals. Cats that are more social have a tendency to rub up on strangers for scratches or jump on laps for cuddles, while cats that are less social shy away, hide, are more cautious, and even potentially aggressive. No matter the breed or gender, it’s important to socialize your cat and expose them to many different situations.
Selkirk Rex Longhair Kittens
Image Credit: Jaroslaw Kurek, Shutterstock
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are rarely found in animal adoption centers. They’re most commonly found through a breeder. One of the best ways to find reputable Selkirk Rex breeders is by searching through The International Cat Association (TICA) breeder registry. It can be challenging to find a Selkirk Rex breeder, as there aren’t very many located in the US. So, it’s best to be prepared to get put on a waitlist and make travel plans if you want to purchase a Selkirk Rex Longhair.
As kittens, Selkirk Rex Longhairs are quite playful and affectionate. They’ll like having a rotation of different toys that they can play with without getting bored. They’ll most likely prefer toys that they can play with you, such as wand toys.
Selkirk Rex Longhairs aren’t the most energetic breed, but you can still expect kittens to have spurts of energy. Some may even wake up in the middle of the night to run around and expend pent-up energy before going back to bed.
Selkirk Rex Longhair Origin & History
Selkirk Rexes are a relatively new cat breed, with the first Selkirk Rex kitten appearing in Montana in 1987. She was an accidental discovery and wasn’t developed from intentional, selective breeding. This kitten was the only one in her litter to have a curly coat, and she was eventually adopted by breeder Jeri Newman and was named Miss DiPesto. Miss DiPesto became the foundation cat for Selkirk Rexes, and all Selkirk Rexes can be traced back to her.
Selkirk Rexes have been developed by breeding American Shorthairs, Persians, Himalayans, Exotic Shorthairs, and British Shorthairs as their outcrosses. The breed was officially recognized by TICA in 1992 and the American Cat Fanciers Association in 1998.
Temperament & Intelligence of the Selkirk Rex Longhair
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are known for their easygoing and gentle temperaments. They’re medium-energy cats that enjoy playing with their family members and cuddling afterward. They’re not needy, but they do prefer human companionship over being alone. It’s common for Selkirk Rex Longhairs to be napping or lounging in the same room as their owners while they work or do chores. If you work from home, it’s best to set up a cat bed near your workstation so that your Selkirk Rex Longhair can keep you company.
Since Selkirk Rex Longhairs are social, they do best in homes where they won’t be left home alone for long hours at a time. They’re also more likely than other cat breeds to enjoy living with another feline companion or other pets in the home.
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are intelligent, but they’re not the most enthusiastic learners. Their interests won’t be in learning new tricks or games. They really just prefer being with people and are more interested in showing and receiving affection.
Image Credit: Heidi Bollich, Shutterstock
Are These Cats Good for Families?👪
The Selkirk Rex Longhair is a considerable breed for families with children. These cats are friendly and social, and they often have patience for young children. Early socialization will also help Selkirk Rex Longhair kittens grow confident around children.
While Selkirk Rex Longhairs are typically good with children, it’s still important to teach children how to interact appropriately and respectfully around cats. Children must learn to avoid touching cats’ faces, paws, and other sensitive areas and know when a cat wants to be left alone.
Does This Breed Get Along With Other Pets?
Selkirk Rex Longhairs aren’t known to be temperamental and aren’t likely to be picky about their housemates. They won’t mind being the only pet in the home, but they can learn to live harmoniously with other cats and dogs in the home. Just make sure to introduce them to other pets gradually so that they can get used to each other at a comfortable pace.
Things to Know When Owning a Selkirk Rex Longhair:
Food & Diet Requirements
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are generally healthy cats who don’t typically require specialized diets. They usually do just fine eating high-quality cat food. You can ask your cat’s breeder or your veterinarian for food recommendations. Keeping up with your Selkirk Rex Longhair’s veterinary appointments will also help you ensure you’re feeding them the correct portion sizes.
When feeding your Selkirk Rex Longhair, it’s best to schedule two to three meal times a day rather than free-feeding them. Scheduled meals will help you keep better track of how much food your cat’s eating, and it can prevent overfeeding and underfeeding.
Exercise🐈
Selkirk Rex Longhairs will benefit from about 30 minutes of exercise per day. As a social breed, it’s natural for their favorite form of exercise to be playing with people. They’re not the most energetic cats, so it’s best to exercise them when they have bursts of energy, which typically occur in the morning and evening. If you’re having a challenging time engaging your Selkirk Rex Longhair, you can try using a treat dispenser toy to entice and encourage them to get moving.
Even though Selkirk Rex Longhairs aren’t very active, it’s still important to make sure they get enough exercise every day. Selkirk Rex Longhairs that don’t get enough exercise are at higher risk of excessive weight gain, diabetes, and heart disease.
Training🧶
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are mellow cats that won’t really get themselves into too much trouble. They also learn how to use a litter box rather quickly and without much assistance.
Because Selkirk Rex Longhairs enjoy engaging with people, they can develop a hobby of learning new tricks. They’ll also benefit from learning to play with treat-dispensing toys and puzzles. Adding enrichment activities to your Selkirk Rex Longhair’s daily schedule can help prevent behavioral issues, including boredom, depression, and separation anxiety.
Grooming✂️
Selkirk Rex Longhairs have moderate grooming needs due to their uniquely curly hair. They shed moderately, but their hair tends to get trapped in their coat rather than fall out. Therefore, they must be brushed regularly to ensure their coat doesn’t get tangled or matted. It’s best to use a wide-tooth comb to pick up loose hair and brush through their coat without messing up their curls.
Selkirk Rex Longhairs can benefit from getting bathed occasionally to remove dead hairs and freshen up their coats. Make sure to use high-quality shampoo that’s free of harsh chemicals. Shampoo with a gentle formula will prevent your Selkirk Rex Longhair’s skin and coat from drying out and causing itchiness and irritation. You can also schedule grooming appointments to keep their coats clean and healthy.
Health and Conditions🏥
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are generally healthy cats, but as with any purebred cat, they can be predisposed to certain genetic conditions.
Minor Conditions
Excessive weight gain
Hip dysplasia
Serious Conditions
Polycystic kidney disease
Progressive retinal atrophy
Hypertrophic cardiomyopathy
Male vs Female
Male Selkirk Rex Longhairs may grow to be slightly larger than females. The sex of the cat doesn’t determine distinct personality traits, as both males and females tend to be mellow, affectionate, and gentle.
You may notice more differences with cats that have been spayed or neutered versus intact cats. Intact cats will engage in mating behaviors and are more likely to urine mark, become territorial, and try to roam. It’s highly recommended to spay or neuter your cat if you don’t intend to breed them, as this will help reduce stray cat populations.
3 Little-Known Facts About the Selkirk Rex Longhair
1. Some Selkirk Rex Longhairs won’t have curly hair.
Not all Selkirk Rex Longhairs have curly hair. While thorough breeding has increased the number of kittens that develop curly hair, there’s still a slim chance that some Selkirk Rex Longhairs will end up with straight hair. Sometimes, Selkirk Rex Longhair kittens will develop curls when they get older.
2. The best way to tell if a Selkirk Rex Longhair kitten will have curly hair is by looking at their whiskers.
Selkirk Rex Longhair kittens can be born with straight hair and have their curls develop as they grow older. One of the best ways to predict if a kitten will have curly hair is to examine their whiskers. Selkirk Rex Longhairs have both curly hair and whiskers, and their whiskers tend to curl before the rest of their coat. So, it’s possible for a kitten to have a straight coat and curly whiskers, and the coat will eventually start to curl as they grow into adults.
3. Selkirk Rex Longhairs are the only cat breed named after a person.
Many cat breeds are named after locations and cultures, such as Siamese Cats, Balinese Cats, and Abyssinian Cats. The Selkirk Rex Longhair is the only cat breed named after a specific person. Selkirk Rexes were named after Jeri Newman’s stepfather.
Image Credit: fotata, Shutterstock
Final Thoughts
Selkirk Rex Longhairs are friendly and playful cats that enjoy human companionship. They’re relatively easy to care for and are a good breed for first-time cat owners. The only particular need to be mindful of is coat maintenance. These cats do have more extensive grooming needs and require regular brushing and maintenance to keep their coats free of mats and tangles.
Overall, Selkirk Rex Longhairs are a good fit for people who work from home or don’t have reasons to be consistently outside of the house. Selkirk Rex Longhairs don’t like being home alone for extended periods of time. They’re affectionate companions with a lot of love to give and will enjoy keeping you company at any time of day.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LJETO je stiglo, a s njim i novi mirisni trend. Ove sezone parfemi s notom trešnje službeno preuzimaju titulu mirisa ljeta, donoseći sa sobom slatku, voćnu aromu koja savršeno utjelovljuje bezbrižnost toplih dana.
Trešnja sa svojom sočnom slatkoćom i blagom kiselkastom notom pruža idealnu ravnotežu između svježine i bogatstva. Ovaj miris budi uspomene na ljetne večeri, piknike u parku i opušteno uživanje u sezonskom voću.
Ako tražite parfem koji će odražavati vašu osobnost ili želite istražiti nešto novo i intrigantno, parfemi od trešnje su definitivno vrijedni istraživanja. U nastavku smo izdvojili neke koji su trenutačno u trendu.
Lost Cherry Toma Forda je vrlo popularan parfem s trešnjom. Čim ga pomirišete, shvatit ćete i zašto. Iako je sladak, ima i note gorkog badema, sandalovine i cedrovine, koje ga balansiraju.
Glavne note uključuju crnu trešnju, badem, ružu, jasmin sambac, sandalovinu, vetiver i cedrovinu.
Stora Skuggan Thumbsucker je miris koji je predstavljen 2020. godine, namijenjen kako ženama tako i muškarcima.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
U gornjim notama Thumbsuckera dominiraju med i narcis. Srednje note parfema obuhvaćaju trešnju i ljubičicu, dodajući voćne i cvjetne nijanse koje doprinose dubini i bogatstvu mirisa. Bazne note uključuju gorki badem, pčelinji vosak i himalajski cedar, stvarajući slojevitu i zemljanu bazu.
Kayali Lovefest Burning Cherry savršen je izbor za ljubitelje toplih, drvenastih mirisa trešnje. Ovaj miris kombinira slatke note trešnje i maline s toplinom pralina i drvenog pačulija.
Lovefest Burning Cherry sadrži note trešnje, maline, bergamota, pralina, palo santa i pačulija.
Proizvođač Juliette Has a Gun lansirao je novi parfem od trešnje koji je brzo postao omiljen među mnogima. Ovaj miris je savršen za ljeto, spajajući svježinu i čistoću prikladnu za svakodnevno nošenje na poslu, ali također ima dovoljno mošusnih i orašastih nota za večernje izlaske.
Ključne note uključuju trešnju, ružičasti papar i jasmin, što doprinosi kompleksnosti i dubini mirisa.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Olympic champion Athing Mu‘s hopes for a repeat came crashing down on the backstretch of the first lap of the 800-meter final at U.S. track and field trials Monday.
Racing in the middle of the pack, Mu got tangled up with a bunched group of runners and went crashing to the ground and rolled onto her back, her bright pink shoes flailing toward the sky.
Mu got back to her feet and finished but was more than 22 seconds behind the winner, Nia Akins, who ran 1 minute, 57.36 seconds.
The 22-year-old from New Jersey was choking back tears as she headed quickly off the track and through the tunnel after the race. She did not immediately come through the media area for interviews.
The Olympic trials was her first meet of the year after dealing with injuries all season. She looked to be in good form in her first two rounds, but was out of the running in the final before the first 200 meters.
It was Exhibit A of the unforgiving format of the U.S. trials, where the top three finishers make the Olympic team and resumes and past performances mean nothing. Mu could still go to Paris as part of the U.S. relay pool; she was a key part of America’s gold-medal win in the 4×400 three years ago in Tokyo.
After winning NCAA, national, world and Olympic championships all before turning 21, Mu won a bronze medal at worlds last year and, afterward, conceded she needed a break from all the pressure, social media and other demands that came along with being tagged as one of track’s great new stars.
In interviews leading into this week’s meet, she said she had rediscovered her love for the sport and was looking forward to the quest to become a back-to-back champion.
She has dominated this distance thanks, in part, to a long, loping stride, and that might be what cost her in a race where she came in as the favorite.
Mu was racing on the outside in a tightly bunched pack and looked to be veering to her left toward Juliette Whitaker when she tripped and went tumbling, leaving three runners behind her flailing as they jumped over her.
She’s hardly the first athlete to have this happen. One of the more memorable and heartbreaking moments on this track came eight years ago in the same event, when Alysia Montano, looking to return to the Olympics, got tripped up in the homestretch and stayed down on the track crying.
Anna Hall’s comeback
Mu’s 800 was a stark contrast to that run by heptathlete Anna Hall less than half an hour earlier.
Hall won her 800 — the seventh and final event in the two-day heptathlon — to win the title and make the Olympics. It came three years after a stumble over the hurdles cost her a spot at the Tokyo Games, and a mere six months after knee surgery made her question if she could get back in time for Paris.
She, too, was crying after her race as she headed to the stands to hug the greatest American in that event, two-time Olympic champion Jackie Joyner-Kersee.
“I’m almost in shock,” Hall said. “This year has been so hard. And falling in 2021. The journey to get here has been so much harder than I imagined.”
Other drama
There was drama elsewhere on a busy night that included six finals.
The women’s 5,000-meter race came down to a .02-seconds difference with Elle St. Pierre finishing in 14:40.34 to barely beat Elise Cranny. Both are going to the Olympics.
Also, Vashti Cunningham, who had a combined 13 straight U.S. indoor and outdoor titles coming into the week, needed to win a jump-off for third to make her third Olympic team.
Waiting game
Quincy Wilson, 16, finished sixth in the 400-meter final with a time of 44.94, his third sub-45 race in three tries at the trials.
Now, he will wait to see if the U.S. track team calls on him to be part of the relay pool.
“All I know is I gave everything I had,” he said. “I can’t be too disappointed. I’m 16, and I’m running grown-man times.”
Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G New Colour Variant Launch Details
– What: Xiaomi is releasing a new Scarlet Red version of the Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G in India. – When: The launch is set for June 25. – Availability: This new variant is expected to be available on Flipkart and Amazon.
Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G launch date in India: After the launch of the Olive Green colour variant a few days back, the Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G gets another addition to its family with similar specifications but a dashing new look. The Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G Scarlet Red edition will not only boast an aesthetically pleasing new color but also a 6.67-inch AMOLED screen with a 1.5K resolution, a 120Hz refresh rate, and a peak brightness of 1,800 nits. It is powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 7s Gen 2 processor.
According to reports, the device will be available in three storage variants – 8 GB + 128GB/256GB and 12 GB + 256GB.
The smartphone is expected to feature a 5,100mAh battery with 67W fast charging support.
For photography, it includes a rear camera setup with a 200MP main sensor with OIS, an 8MP ultrawide lens, and a 2MP macro lens. The device is likely to come with a 16MP camera on the front for selfies and video calls.
The device is expected to run on Android 14 out of the box and will be equipped with dual stereo speakers with Dolby Atmos support.
Redmi Note 13 Pro 5G New Colour Variant: Expected Price
The pricing for the 8GB/128GB base model is expected to be Rs 25,999 and the 8GB/256GB variant is priced at Rs 27,999 while for the 12GB of RAM and 256GB of storage costs Rs 29,999.
A travel influencer, Mike O’kennedy, shared a video on Monday that has quickly gained a lot of attention on Instagram. In it, Mike lists the top five Indian states one should travel to. While some popular ones do make the list, there were a couple surprise entries too. And surprisingly, most viewers agreed with his assessment. (Also read: If you can’t beat the Chandigarh heat, escape it: From Barot to Karol Valley, scenic destinations for a quick getaway)
Himachal Pradesh and Kerala made it to the list of best 5 Indian states to visit.
Mike ranks Kerala at fifth spot, Goa at fourth, Himachal Pradesh at third, Ladakh at second and Nagaland at first. Watch his video here:
Get ready to catch the final stages of the World Cup only on Crickit. Anytime, Anywhere. Explore now!
Feeling inspired by Mike’s list? Here’s some info about each of these states to help you plan your next trip:
Kerala
Kerala, often heralded as “God’s Own Country,” is a serene escape in southern India known for its lush landscapes and tranquil backwaters. Ideal destinations include the misty hills of Munnar, the wildlife-rich Periyar National Park, and the picturesque beaches of Kovalam. The region’s beauty is accentuated by its tropical climate, with balmy weather prevalent most of the year. Culinary adventurers should savour the local cuisine, highlighted by seafood, coconut-based curries, and the iconic Kerala Sadya served on banana leaves. Visiting Kerala offers a blend of relaxation, natural beauty, and gastronomic delights, making it a perfect vacation spot.
Goa
Goa, India’s coastal paradise, is famous for its vibrant beaches, historic Portuguese architecture, and spirited nightlife. Key attractions include the bustling Baga Beach, the serene Palolem Beach, and the architectural marvels of Old Goa like the Basilica of Bom Jesus. Goa’s tropical climate ensures warm, sunny days ideal for beach outings and exploration. The region’s cuisine, a blend of Indian and Portuguese influences, features seafood, spicy vindaloos, and the beloved Bebinca dessert. Whether it’s adventure, relaxation, or cultural exploration, Goa offers a diverse and exhilarating vacation experience for all types of travellers.
Himachal Pradesh
Himachal Pradesh, nestled in the northern part of India, is a haven for nature lovers and adventure seekers alike. This picturesque state is renowned for its stunning landscapes of snow-capped mountains, lush valleys, and flowing rivers. Key destinations include the serene town of Manali for its breathtaking vistas and adventure sports, the quaint village of Kasol known as a backpacker’s paradise, and the culturally rich city of Shimla with its historic British architecture. The climate varies from cool to cold, making it perfect for trekking and skiing. Local cuisine highlights include thukpa, momos, and the hearty madra. Himachal Pradesh promises a refreshing retreat with a blend of thrill and tranquility.
Ladakh
Ladakh, set in India’s northernmost region, is a stark yet stunning landscape of high-altitude deserts, serene monasteries, and turquoise lakes. Renowned places include the magnetic allure of Pangong Lake, the rugged passes of Khardung La, and the serene environs of Hemis Monastery. The beauty of Ladakh lies in its raw, untouched natural vistas and the unique Tibetan-Buddhist culture that pervades it. The weather is predominantly cold, especially from November to March, making summers the best time to visit. Local cuisine, with Tibetan influences, includes warming dishes like thukpa and momos. Ladakh offers a profoundly tranquil and introspective travel experience, ideal for those seeking both adventure and peace.
Nagaland
Nagaland, in India’s northeast, is a vibrant mosaic of tribal culture, lush landscapes, and rich history. Known for its colourful festivals like the Hornbill Festival, which showcases the traditions and crafts of the local tribes, Nagaland is a cultural treasure trove. Key attractions include the historic village of Khonoma, known for its sustainable practices and greenery, and the bustling town of Kohima, which offers insights into WWII history at the Kohima War Cemetery. The climate is moderate throughout the year, ideal for exploring. Traditional Naga cuisine, characterized by smoked meats, bamboo shoots, and fiery chillies, offers a bold culinary adventure. Nagaland is a unique blend of historical significance and natural beauty, offering an off-the-beaten-path travel experience.
Celine Dion opens up about her recent health struggles in a new and candid documentary. Released on Tuesday (June 25), I Am: Celine Dion gives fans a raw and honest behind-the-scenes look at the iconic superstar’s struggle with a life-altering illness.
The inspirational film serves as a love letter to her fans and highlights the music that has guided Dion’s life while also showcasing the resilience of the human spirit. In December 2022, the All By Myself singer, 56, revealed that she had been diagnosed with a ‘very rare neurological disorder’ and subsequently cancelled her world tour.
“It’s not hard to do a show, it’s hard to cancel a show,” Dion says in the film’s trailer. “I’m working hard every day but I have to admit it’s been a struggle. I miss it so much.”
Dion suffers from Stiff Person Syndrome (SPS), an autoimmune disease that can cause muscle stiffness and painful spasms. Now the Canadian singer is opening up in the film directed by Oscar-nominee Irene Taylor, whose credits include HBO doc Trees, and Other Entanglements.
Fans will follow her journey as she attempts to retrain her voice to eventually get back to performing. Dion is best-known as the ‘Queen of Power Ballads’ and is revered the world over for her recognisable vocals on hits like The Power of Love and Titanic theme My Heart Will Go On.
I Am: Celine Dion is available to stream with an Amazon Prime subscription and is free for those who sign up to an Amazon Prime 30-day trial. Prime usually costs £8.99 a month or £95 a year and comes with a host of benefits like next day delivery, Amazon Music Prime, Deliveroo Plus and free delivery on HelloFresh orders for a year, but members can try all this for 30 days without paying a penny.
Amazon also offers Prime Video without the added Prime benefits for £5.99 a month which includes top titles including Clarkson’s Farm and documentaries like Federer: 12 Final Days and Manchester United’s 99.
Alternatively, offers a range of new shows, including and . TV fans can get the equivalent of two months free with an annual subscription to Disney’s Premium or Standard plans, while those that prefer to pay monthly can do so from £4.99 a month.
The manager of BMW’s hydrogen program hopes to put a hydrogen fuel cell electric vehicle (FCEV) into production within a matter of years, pending an upcoming decision by the brand on the future of its hydrogen program.
The Bavarian carmaker is currently touring its iX5 hydrogen development car across the globe, with the hope of putting a production FCEV to market by the end of the decade.
But there’s no guarantee that you’ll ever see a hydrogen-powered BMW in showrooms, as the brand is still yet to commit to hydrogen passenger cars with a decision on the technology to be made later this year.
BMW general manager of hydrogen technology Dr Jürgen Guldner says, however, that all the pieces are in place for a production model to launch by 2030.
“We haven’t decided which car but we are prepared to launch a vehicle still within this decade,” Dr Guldner told CarExpert.
“Once we have made the decision we have to develop the car which will take a few years, then we’ll make a decision which markets are ready to take up to technology.”
BMW won’t disclose any information about the potential debut hydrogen model, but it’s feasible that the iX5 development car could be in line for a production run.
Based on the X5 SUV, the iX5 is powered by a hydrogen fuel-cell powertrain consisting of two carbon-fibre-reinforced plastic (CFRP) hydrogen tanks that can store up to 6kg of hydrogen under 700 bar of pressure; a fuel cell producing 125kW; and an electric motor and a battery pack.
Total system output is 295kW, while refuelling takes less than five minutes and BMW claims a driving range of over 500km.
If not a production version of the iX5, the first hydrogen BMW remains likely to be an SUV. Dr Guldner confirmed that the powertrain featured in the iX5 development car can also be carried over to other models.
Just don’t go expecting a hydrogen-powered 1 Series or 5 Series any time soon, as a rollout across the model range isn’t likely until later next decade.
“A rollout would come later, in the 2030s because it’s a long-term project,” Dr Guldner added.
“We’ve been working as BMW on hydrogen for 40 years… it’s not unusual for us that something takes a few decades.
“We’re just looking at the right point in time to launch.”
As for where a BMW FCEV will be sold, there are several markets that have the infrastructure and/or ambition to support hydrogen passenger cars.
A network of hydrogen refuelling stations exists in the US state of California, while the EU is set to mandate the installation of hydrogen refuelling infrastructure at all urban nodes and positioned at intervals of every 200km, commencing in 2030.
Fewer than 10 operational hydrogen refuelling stations are scattered across Australia, but Dr Guldner sees a lot of potential Down Under.
“Hydrogen is ideal for Australia because you have a lot of solar and wind so you can use produce a lot of hydrogen for export, but why not use it too?” said Dr Guldner.
“You also have long travel distances and metropolitan areas where electric charging at scale could be an issue.
“All the ingredients are there.
“All the countries that have sufficient infrastructure are potential markets for us. There’s a lot of places that already have infrastructure like California, Europe will have an infrastructure, Japan, Korea, China, and there’s a lot of countries that are interested in building an infrastructure like Australia.”
MORE: BMW will decide if hydrogen lives or dies this year
Once the 1.4-kilometer flyover is completed, Road No 56 will become signal-free.
The Public Works Department (PWD) has completed 90 percent of the construction of the Apsara-Anand Vihar Border flyover. According to reports, the flyover is said to open by next month. Approval to transplant trees has yet to be received. The deadline for completion of the flyover, along with the elevated corridor, subway, and side ramps, was extended from December 2023 to April 2024. Now, the deadline is June-July. The project was launched two years ago with the aim of reducing congestion on one of the city’s busiest roads. Once the 1.4-kilometer flyover is completed, Road No 56 will become signal-free. Reports suggest, with the new flyover, people in Ramprastha Colony, Vivek Vihar, and Shrestha Vihar will no longer face traffic congestions.
Work started in 2022:
The project was planned for 2019, but its start was delayed due to the pandemic. In October 2022, CM Arvind Kejriwal and Speaker Ram Niwas Goyal laid the foundation stone. Officials said that the forest department had received a complaint that some trees had been cut illegally at the site, after which the work was halted. Even after various meetings between the PWD and forest officials for the past few months, there has been no progress. About 75 trees have been identified and selected for transplantation.
Waiting for green clearance from the forest department:
Reports say, the status of green clearance is the same as it was a few months ago. There has been no progress on that front, but the work on the flyover is getting completed. As per latest report, the flyover could be opened to the public next month. The flyover near Surya Nagar is under construction, and the main elevated portion is largely complete.
Business Desk
A team of writers and reporters decodes vast terms of personal finance and making money matters simpler for you. From latest initial public offerings …Read More
The Bitcoin price has been disappointing many but the major action over the weekend has been in altcoins. Recently, there was a drop to a new low in the altcoin market. Last week, this potential scenario was discussed extensively, and despite little movement over the weekend, a major shift occurred in the last 12 hours. Looking at the top 10 coins in the last 24 hours, Bitcoin has dropped more than six percent and Ethereum also is trading in the red zone.
Last week, the price action and location in the altcoin market were analyzed, noting that the initial bounce might suggest a reversal, but it’s typically not the real bounce. But is now the time for the real bounce? Solana has gained nine percent and Toncoin, Dogecoin and Cardano have also gained four percent each. Chainlink has gained seven percent and Pepe has surged more than 10 percent.
It was speculated that the market might be very close to or at the bottom and there were also talks that a final drop would spook the market. Analyst Dami Defi wrote on X, “BTC dumping but altcoins pumping. I’ve seen this before. BTC dominance going down means liquidity flowing into altcoins. BTC dominance saw a -2% drop in past 24hrs. Total 3 is also holding local support nicely and looking for a reversal. Is altcoin season about to start?”
Michael Van De Poppe said, “Relatively strong bounce on #Bitcoin from the range lows. Altcoins are up even more since that level. Bitcoin dominance starts to fall slightly, through which the Mt. Gox even starts to get priced in.”
Relatively strong bounce on #Bitcoin from the range lows. #Altcoins are up even more since that level.
Bitcoin dominance starts to fall slightly, through which the Mt. Gox even starts to get priced in. pic.twitter.com/b8qhVaX20V
— Michaël van de Poppe (@CryptoMichNL) June 25, 2024
However, now, as the market has held at the recent lows, it is crucial to monitor stability throughout the day, looking for a potential bottom formation and a upward movement.
The CBI is gearing up to take up comprehensive investigation into country-wide reports of deep-rooted racket in the conduct of National Eligibility-cum-Entrance Test-Undergraduate (NEET-UG) examination 2024, as the students protest intensify seeking accountability of people playing with their future.
Also read:NEET-PG exam postponed due to integrity concerns; NTA’s DG replaced
Opposition parties have also said that they will raise the serious issue in the opening session of Parliament after the swearing in of newly elected MPs get over on Tuesday and after both the Houses resume normal business.
The CBI’s multiple teams reached out to Patna in Bihar and in Godhra, Gujarat, to probe into allegations of leak of papers and other irregularities in the NEET exam conducted by the NTA.
There is another case being probed by the local police in Latur, also in Gujarat and three more in Jaipur, Rajasthan, said the CBI sources. The Rajasthan High Court on Monday issued notice to the NTA and the Centre, asking it to respond to petitioners’ demand of cancellation of the NEET exam on similar charges of irregularities in the conduct of the entrance test.
The High Court scheduled the hearing in the matter on July 10, two days after the Supreme Court is set to take up similar petitions, including those seeking cancellation of the NEET-UG 2024 exam and a court-monitored investigation.
Agency sources said it’s in the process of taking ‘comprehensive steps’ after the Union Education Ministry announced on Saturday that it was seeking a CBI probe into the alleged malpractices in the conduct of the NEET-UG examination on May 5 in pen and paper mode. The results of the NTA conducted exam were announced on June 4.
High-level committeee
The Union Education Ministry has also constituted a high-level committee of experts headed by a former chief of the ISRO ‘to ensure transparent, smooth and fair conduct of examinations through National Testing Agency (NTA).’
The central agency will file multiple FIRs on the basis of cases forwarded by respective States or on the orders of courts that want investigations by it since those behind the paper leak and other malpractices in the carrying out examinations across centres appear part of a large design.
The Economic Offence Unit (EOU) of the Patna police, which had been investigating the matter before the Centre ordered a CBI probe, has arrested 18 people in connection with the case. On Sunday, the CBI filed an FIR to probe malpractices in the conduct of the exam.
The EOU officials said they have collected evidence during the course of probe such as pieces of the burnt question paper recovered from a house in Patna, mobile phones of those arrested, SIM cards, laptops, post-dated cheques and reference questions papers provided by the NTA.
A CBI team reached Godhra city in Gujarat’s Panchmahal district on Monday to take over the case registered by the Godhra police on May 8 under various Indian Penal Code sections, including criminal conspiracy, cheating and criminal breach of trust. The police are probing charges against five persons for trying to help 27 candidates clear the NEET exam for a sum of Rs 10 lakh each.
Also read:NTA DG Subodh Singh removed amid NEET, NET controversy
So far, the police have arrested those five persons — Tushar Bhatt; principal of a school, Purshottam Sharma; Vadodara-based education consultant Parsuram Roy and his aide Vibhor Anand; and alleged middleman Arif Vohra — in the case registered on May 9.
The CBI is also likely to register disproportionate assets (DA) cases against public servants found to be involved in the nation-wide racket.
In April a New York fried-chicken shop went viral. It was not the food at Sansan Chicken East Village that captured the world’s imagination, but the service. Diners found an assistant from the Philippines running the till via video link.
The service is provided by Happy Cashier, which connects American firms with Filipino workers. Chi Zhang set up the business after his restaurant failed during the covid-19 pandemic. He says that overseas workers also answer phone calls and monitor security-camera footage—doing so at a fraction of the cost of locals.
Look out, Wordle and Connections, here comes Strands. Like those two games, Strands is a New York Times online word game. Right now, Strands is only in beta, so it doesn’t yet show up in The New York Times’ Games app. You need to go directly to the game. And because it’s in beta, meaning it’s still being tested, it might be improved before it’s fully released. I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story.
Strands reminds me of those old-fashioned Word Find books they used to sell in every grocery-store checkout lane. You’re given a grid of letters, but unlike the Word Find books, no list of words. That’s what makes the game fun — and frustrating.
And if you’re reading this, you probably need some help with the June 25 Strands puzzle, so here we go. Warning: Scroll down too far and too fast and you’ll see spoilers.
Need more answers? Here’s the answer for today’s Wordle, and here are the answers for today’s Connections.
Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far
Hint for today’s Strands puzzle
Today’s Strands theme is: Frame game.
But if that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Lebowski’s sport.
Clue words to unlock in-game hints
Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints, but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:
These are the answers that tie in to the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you’ve got all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the non-spangram answers:
Today’s Strands spangram is BOWLING. To spell it out, start with the B that’s three letters down on the far left.
Steeeeee-rike!
Screenshot by Gael Fashingbauer Cooper/CNET
How to play NYT Strands
1. Use today’s theme to look for words relating to that topic. See one? Drag or click the letters in order. Click on the last letter twice to submit your guess. If you’ve found a theme word, it’ll light up in blue and stay that way.
2. Other words you find are considered hint words that give you clues to the theme words. Find three hint words (they must have at least four letters each), and the game will reward you by showing you a theme word. But if you can’t unscramble it, find three more hint words, and the game will highlight the theme word’s letters in order.
3. Hunt for the spangram, a special theme word that spans the entire puzzle, though it could flow across, or top to bottom. It summarizes the puzzle theme.
4. When you’re done, you’ll have used every letter on the board in either a theme word or spangram. Theme words fill the entire board and do not overlap.
Plus special access to select articles and other premium content with your account – free of charge.
By entering your email and pushing continue, you are agreeing to Fox News’ Terms of Use and Privacy Policy, which includes our Notice of Financial Incentive.
Please enter a valid email address.
For the more than three million people in the U.S. who are living with epilepsy, the uncertainty of the next seizure’s appearance can create dangerous situations.
Now, for many people with the neurological disorder, specially trained service dogs have helped provide safety and peace of mind.
In a recent study published in Neurology, service dogs were found to reduce seizure frequency by 31% while also dramatically improving mental health and quality of life.
VETERANS WITH PTSD GET ‘SIGNIFICANT’ BENEFITS FROM SERVICE DOGS, FIRST NIH-FUNDED STUDY FINDS
Channing Seideman, 30, is one of those patients whose life has been changed by a dedicated service dog.
Born and raised in Aspen, Colorado, Seideman — who now lives in Milford, Ohio — was just 10 years old when she received her epilepsy diagnosis after having two major seizures.
Channing Seideman, pictured with her service dog, Bishop, said he’s given her peace of mind amid her daily epileptic seizures.(Channing Seideman)
“Like any kid, I had big dreams of what I wanted to be when I grew up,” she said in an interview with Fox News Digital.
“I wanted to be a doctor, and I wanted to go to the Olympics and ride horses — and then I got diagnosed and life took a turn.”
LOYAL DOG SAVES CAMPER’S LIFE AFTER RUNNING MILES FOR HELP: ‘NO WORDS’
Dealing with epilepsy during middle school was a struggle, Seideman said.
Having always been a straight-A student, Seideman said she saw her grades plummet to straight Fs.
“Middle school is kind of a blur, to be honest — we were just starting the medication combinations, and my seizures were becoming more and more frequent,” she recalled.
“At the time, I wanted nothing to do with epilepsy, so the idea of having a service dog next to my side wearing a vest that said ‘epilepsy’ … was kind of scary.”
High school was also a challenge, she said.
“Finding my place was difficult. So I really leaned hard on sports, horseback riding in particular, and animals.”
New best friend
Given Seideman’s love of animals, her parents thought she might be interested in a service dog — but at age 15, she was hesitant at first.
“At the time, I wanted nothing to do with epilepsy, so the idea of having a service dog next to my side wearing a vest that said ‘epilepsy’ — making this disease visible — was kind of scary for me.”
Bishop, pictured here with his owner, is Seideman’s second service dog. “It was smooth sailing,” she said of the process.(Channing Seideman)
Her parents convinced her to put her name on the list, since there was a long wait time.
In Nov. 2010, Seideman was selected for a service dog.
The family traveled to Canine Assistants in Alpharetta, Georgia, to take part in a training “boot camp” with Seideman’s first service dog, Georgie.
Canine Assistants places service dogs with people who have a variety of conditions, primarily epilepsy.
“Nobody cares about the epilepsy. They just really like my dog.”
Thanks to a long-running partnership with UCB — a Belgian biopharmaceutical company committed to helping those living with epilepsy and rare seizure disorders — Canine Assistants is able to place dogs at no cost to the patients.
“Two weeks later, Georgie was on the flight home with us, and a couple of days later, she was at school with me,” Seideman said.
DOG RESCUED AFTER BEING CHASED OFF ‘STEEP CLIFFSIDE’ BY RACCOONS: VIDEO
“I was wondering, ‘Is this going to make this disease more visible, or is it going to be a life-saver?’ And it turned out to be a life-saver.”
Seideman’s fears of the disease being magnified were unfounded.
“It became, ‘Channing who?’” she joked. “Now it was all about this cute and amazing dog.”
Jennifer Arnold, founder of Canine Assistants in Georgia, has been pairing patients with service dogs for 32 years. She said earlier is better: “There’s really no reason to wait.”(Canine Assistants)
Jennifer Arnold, the founder of Canine Assistants in Georgia, said there is often a hesitation among young people to get a service dog, as “nobody really wants to stand out.”
Said Arnold, “You just want to fit in, and it feels like the dog’s going to make you not fit in.”
She has been working with service dogs for over 30 years, she told Fox News Digital.
SHOCKING MOMENT CAUGHT ON VIDEO: DOG OWNER HELPS CHOKING PET AS DOCTOR GIVES HEIMLICH TIPS
“But as Channing said, ‘Nobody cares about the epilepsy. They just really like my dog.’ The attention that she was getting was completely positive.”
When it comes to introducing service dogs to their owners, Arnold said, earlier is better.
“There’s really no reason to wait,” she said.
“Bishop goes absolutely everywhere with me,” said Seideman, pictured here with her current service dog. When he needs to, he alerts her by placing his paws on her and looking intently at her face, she said.(Channing Seideman)
The dog’s mere presence changes the dynamics in a family for the better, according to Arnold.
Even so, the sensing of oncoming seizures and alerting an owner is the most important part of the service dog’s job.
Service dogs were found to reduce seizure frequency by 31% in a recent study.
“Some dogs wake up at night and check on their people while they sleep,” Arnold said.
“They get nervous — they just want to be sure their owner is OK.”
Having a service dog also lowers the owner’s stress level, Arnold noted.
MISSING DOG IN VIRGINIA CAPTURED AFTER 6 MONTHS ON THE RUN: ‘ALMOST LOST HOPE’
“This results in a significant reduction in the number of seizures that patients have, because stress is a trigger,” she said.
“So just having the dog with you reduces the number of seizures you have, which is pretty magical in itself.”
The dog can also help by protecting its owner during a seizure if it occurs in public, and going to find help if needed.
‘The dogs pick the people’
The team at Canine Assistants is skilled at determining which dog will likely do well with which person, Arnold said.
“But the bottom line is, people think they’re going to get to pick their dog, but it’s the exact opposite,” she said.
“The dogs pick the people.”
“People think they’re going to get to pick their dog, but it’s the exact opposite,” said Jennifer Arnold, the founder of Canine Assistants in Georgia.(Canine Assistants)
In a typical scenario, Arnold said, Canine Assistants may have four dogs in a camp that have the skills needed for a particular individual.
“The first three might greet the person politely, but the fourth dog might run in, like, ‘Where have you been? I’ve been waiting for you for so long,’” Arnold said.
“That’s what we call ‘a tab A in a slot B,’” she said. “You see it and it’s just done.”
‘GENTLE GIANT’ DOG, AT 250 POUNDS, EATS AN ENTIRE CHICKEN DAILY AS OWNER SPENDS NEARLY $5K A YEAR ON FOOD
After Seideman’s first dog passed away, there was a nine-month period before she was matched with another dog.
During that time, she said, she and her parents realized how much they’d come to rely on Georgie.
“My parents were back to feeling panicked, listening for the ‘thud alert,’” she said. “If they heard a thud upstairs, they would worry it was me falling.”
Seideman, added, “They didn’t realize how much that extra set of ears, extra set of paws, had been doing.”
“In addition to bringing peace of mind, the dogs make epilepsy approachable to the public,” said Seideman, pictured with her service dog, Bishop.(Channing Seideman)
It was a big relief when Seideman was placed with her current dog, Bishop.
“It was pretty much smooth sailing,” she said. “Now, Bishop goes absolutely everywhere with me. Our bond is set in stone.”
To anyone considering getting a service dog, Seideman said she highly recommends it.
WOMAN DISCOVERS HER DOG IS ALIVE AND UP FOR ADOPTION AFTER ‘PUTTING HIM DOWN’
“In addition to bringing peace of mind, the dogs make epilepsy approachable to the public,” she said.
Epilepsy tends to carry a stigma, Seideman said — which is rooted in fear and misunderstandings.
“For example, one of the myths is that there’s only one type of seizure — the big, scary kind where you go unconscious, turn blue, convulse and foam at the mouth,” she said.
“In addition to bringing peace of mind, the dogs make epilepsy approachable to the public.”
Another myth, Arnold added, is that people should put something between the teeth of the person having a seizure to prevent them from swallowing their tongue.
“It is a very bad thing to do,” she warned — and it “could have significantly damaging consequences.”
Having the dog with the person helps to provide a sense of comfort, Seideman said — “something that people can ask questions about, something they can approach. It makes the public comfortable.”
‘He lets me know’
These days, Seideman said she continues to have seizures daily.
Although she has had about 60-70 of the more major episodes — known as tonic-clonic seizures — since her diagnosis, most of them are smaller.
“I have seizures where I may kind of space out and daydream, which is an absence seizure,” she said.
SERVICE DOG BY HER SIDE, TEXAS TEEN WINS MISS DALLAS PAGEANT DESPITE EPILEPSY, AUTISM
“I also have seizures where I may have a jerk in the face, a mild clonic jerk, which can be scary if I’m crossing a street.”
That’s where Bishop comes into play, she said, as he senses what’s happening and stops her from crossing into the street.
“Some people get warnings before a seizure, like an aura,” Seideman said. “I don’t get that warning. I get Bishop. He lets me know.”
Seideman, who lives on a farm in Ohio, enjoys riding horses as her service dog monitors her and helps keep her safe.(Channing Seideman )
On the family’s 100-acre farm, while Seideman is caring for her horses, Bishop may suddenly come running to check on her, seeming to sense that something is amiss.
“He has this instinct, and will stop whatever he is doing to check on me.”
Bishop alerts Seideman by jumping up and placing his paws on her — “It’s almost like he’s standing, so we’re face to face.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“It’s as if he’s saying, ‘Something’s going on. Pay attention to me.’”
She said, “I may not be having any seizures that I know about, but I could be having subclinical seizures that are only detected by a machine. So I always take Bishop’s word, because Bishop knows — he doesn’t make mistakes.”
Although the wait list for service dogs is long, Arnold of Canine Assistants encourages people to apply.
“He has this instinct, and will stop whatever he is doing to check on me.”
“It’s not just first come, first serve,” she said. “Every applicant is evaluated based on how much the dog can do physically, socially, emotionally and medically, and how appropriate the placement is for the dog.”
She added, “Those factors are equally weighted with how much the dog can do to help.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Canine Assistants has also started testing a new in-home education program, called Handle With Care, that helps people raise and train their own service dogs.
“We’ve cracked the code and we know how to do this, so it’s crazy for people not to have the help they need.”
“The need is just tremendous,” Arnold emphasized. “And I can’t imagine being a mother whose child needs a dog but isn’t able to get one.”
The best part of Arnold’s job, she said, is when she gets to call a family and tell them they’ve been selected.
If you love burgers, you’re likely seen frequently at fast-food chains offering them, ordering them at cafes, or even making them at home. A juicy patty-whether meat or vegan-sandwiched between two buns with cheese, veggies, and your favourite sauces can be the perfect snack or a satisfying meal. Have you ever wondered who came up with the idea of a burger? And come to think of it, how is a burger different from a sandwich? Where does the name ‘burger’ even come from? Let’s answer all these questions and more as we sink our teeth into the delicious layers of food history.
Who Invented The Burger?
Most food historians agree that the modern burger, as we know it, was invented in the United States. However, pinpointing the one inventor of burger is not as challenging as finding a burger joint in your neighbourhood. There are several fascinating theories and stories surrounding the invention of burgers. Here are some of the key possible inventors:
1. Charlie Nagreen, also known as “Hamburger Charlie,” claimed to have sold the first burger in 1885. At a fair in Outagamie County, he reportedly flattened a meatball and placed it between two slices of bread to make it easier for fairgoers to eat.
2. According to legend, Louis Lassen invented the burger in 1900 at his restaurant in Connecticut. He placed a beef patty between two slices of bread, adding cheese and condiments, creating the first “hamburger sandwich.”
3. Oscar Weber Bilby, a cook in Oklahoma in 1891, originally made a famous pork sausage sandwich. When he ran out of pork, he substituted a beef patty, creating a “hamburg steak sandwich.” Also Read: Food Trivia: Who Invented Frozen Food? Join Us In The Interesting Journey Into The History
Where Does The Term ‘Burger’ Come From?
‘Burger’ is a shortened form of ‘hamburger,’ which came first. So, no, a burger with ham doesn’t make it a hamburger. Hamburgers are what started it all, eventually leading to the wide variety of burgers we enjoy today-cheeseburgers, chicken burgers, vegan burgers, and more.
As for the name ‘hamburger,’ it originates from Hamburg, Germany, renowned for its beef, particularly minced or ground beef dishes. In the late 19th and early 20th centuries, German immigrants brought seasoned ground beef patties to the US. Dishes like the hamburger steak gained popularity, especially at county fairs and festivals, where vendors served cooked ground beef patties between slices of bread for easy eating on the go. Legend has it that this dish eventually became known as the “hamburger sandwich” or “hamburger.”
Burger Vs Sandwich: Is There Any Difference?
While most people don’t confuse burgers with sandwiches, describing the differences between the two can be challenging. In essence, a burger can be considered a type of sandwich, like a sub or Panini. The main distinction lies in a burger having a grilled patty between two circular buns, while a sandwich can vary in fillings and shapes.
Why The World Loves Burgers
What makes the burger so popular, continuing to evolve as a timeless classic? Here are a few reasons why burgers are everyone’s favourite:
1. Convenience
Burgers are easy to eat on the go and quick to prepare. The rise of fast-food chains offering burgers has further fueled their popularity.
2. Affordability
Compared to other meats, burgers are relatively inexpensive. A burger or two can provide a delicious and filling meal without breaking the bank.
3. Versatility
The possibilities for burger customization are endless. Regardless of your taste preferences, you can tailor the ingredients and flavours to suit your liking.
4. Cultural Significance (In The US)
The burger has become a symbol of American culture and identity, firmly establishing itself as an iconic part of American cuisine. Also Read: Food Trivia: Why Are Strawberries Considered Romantic?
The next time you bite into a burger, savor not only the delicious ingredients but also the fascinating historical layers that have shaped our favourite comfort food!
For the last few summers in East Hampton, N.Y., many people have gotten up early in hopes of glimpsing Jay-Z on one of his early morning walks amid the shingled mansions of moguls such as David Zaslav, David Geffen and Ron Perelman.
But this season, the world’s most successful rapper has seemingly been upstaged by a new star in town: a wild American flamingo that has drawn hundreds of spectators in recent weeks.
It apparently made its way to this moneyed enclave of celebrities, plutocrats and tourists last month, taking up residence in Georgica Pond, a brackish coastal pond that lies between East Hampton and Wainscott. First to spot the wayward bird was Cathy Blinken, an Amazon Web Services senior marketing manager who spends time on the pond with her husband, David Blinken, a first cousin to Secretary of State Antony J. Blinken.
Ms. Blinken promptly called The East Hampton Star, which sent a reporter and photographer to break the story of the creature’s arrival. In the coming days, those who visited Georgica Pond to see the vagrant flamingo for themselves ended up disappointed. The bird had flown.
Days later, a flamingo with identical plumage was seen sunning itself roughly 200 miles away, on the shores of Cape Cod Bay in Massachusetts. It seemed that the bird might be one of those highfliers who, after surveying various summer outposts of the Northeast, had determined that Cape Cod was preferable to the scenic splendor of the scene-obsessed Hamptons.
But on June 9, Pietro Cicognani, an East Hampton architect, spotted the bird and made a call to The Star, which quickly published a follow-up to its scoop.
Jim Colligan, an avid birder who used to serve as a councilman on nearby Shelter Island, helped spread the news of the flamingo’s return. On Tuesday he found himself riding in the car of another area resident, Steven Spielberg, to catch a glimpse of the village’s principal attraction.
As Mr. Spielberg drove, Mr. Colligan directed him to a sandy pathway surrounded by partridgeberry vines and onto an inlet near the end of West End Road, not far from the former home of Kelly Klein, the ex-wife of Calvin Klein. From there, it was easy to spot the flamingo in the pond. This was less because of its distinctive plumage and more because of its stilt-like legs, which enabled it to walk the shallows with the gait of a Louboutin-clad supermodel.
The flamingo went into a routine that looked like a jig — it bent its right leg, then its left, then its right again. After that, it lowered its head into the water to dig up algae and invertebrates from the floor with its hooked beak. On the other side of the pond, nearly a dozen birders stood with binoculars and cameras.
More gawkers showed up as the week went on. Kerry Lyons, a day-tripper from Westchester County, N.Y., nearly doubled over when she was informed that there was a flamingo in the pond.
“Really?” she said. “Shut up!”
A birder in a Hawaiian shirt invited Ms. Lyons to look through his telescope, and her doubts were replaced by questions about how on earth it had gotten there.
“Did it take a wrong turn?” she asked.
According to Jerry Lorenz, a marine biologist and the director of research for Audubon Florida, the wrong-turn theory is indeed plausible.
In a phone interview, Mr. Lorenz said that Hurricane Idalia, which swept into Florida in August 2023, may have had something to do with the bird’s arrival in the Hamptons. To escape the storm, flocks of flamingos flew north, leading to rare sightings of the brightly colored creatures in Kentucky, Ohio, Pennsylvania and Virginia.
Most of those birds went back to where they had come from. But it is not uncommon for a flamingo to break off from a flock, either because it is disoriented or because its pals get killed, Mr. Lorenz said. A few mavericks, he noted, may simply decide to go exploring.
“There are examples of a flamingo hanging out by itself for years,” Mr. Lorenz said, going on to tell the tale of Peaches, a flamingo who spent years living the single life at the St. Marks National Wildlife Refuge in the Florida Panhandle, rejecting multiple flocks before making some friends after last year’s hurricane season.
“Then it left with them,” he said.
Flamingos are found throughout the world, from tropical regions to the Andes in South America. They get their distinctive hue from the carotenoid pigments in the crustaceans and algae that make up their diet. Tough and sturdy, they can fly as fast as 40 miles per hour, according to the American Bird Conservancy.
They tend to make news when they escape their usual habitats. In 1964, The New York Times reported on a flamingo sighting in Niantic, Conn. An African flamingo that escaped a zoo in Wichita, Kan., in 2005 was still generating headlines in 2022, when it was spotted in Port Lavaca, Texas. Pink Floyd, a flamingo that escaped an aviary in Salt Lake City, lived in the Great Salt Lake for part of each year from 1988 to 2005.
The Hamptons flamingo has managed to establish friendly relations with some longtime residents of Georgica Pond — a flock of sometimes ornery swans.
“He gets along with them,” said Lars Svanberg, a surfing instructor who was eyeing the flamingo as swans swam circles around it. “They’re all hanging out together!”
Mr. Lorenz, who has studied photos and videos of the flamingo in Georgica Pond, said it was in no immediate need of intervention from rescue groups.
“That’s a healthy bird,” he said. “It’s flying just fine. It’s feeding just fine. Leave it alone.”
Approval of Wakix marks the first time a non-scheduled treatment option for excessive daytime sleepiness has been approved for patients ages 6 years and older.
Hi, I’m Christopher! Read my introduction to learn more about me and my silly Russian Blue cat, Olga.
Aggressive cats sometimes guard their resources when they live in multi-pet homes, and they can prevent other felines from using the litter box or eating their meals. Although resource guarding and other undesirable behaviors can be addressed with training and veterinary assistance, some cats are protective over more than just their food, toilet area, and toys.
The Canine Advantage
Using dogs as reliable protectors is an ancient practice that still exists today, but can we rely on our housecats to protect our families and property? In most cases, I would say, “No!” If humans had been more involved in selectively breeding cats with desirable traits thousands of years ago, we could rely on larger felines to attack burglars, recover illegal drugs, rescue lost humans, and remove explosives.
Dogs are easier to train for those tasks because they’re more eager to please humans, and working breeds have a long history of serving them. Most cats are more likely to hide when their owners are threatened, but there are exceptions; some risk their lives to save other animals and humans.
I’m the new efficiency expert; work harder!
Life-Saving Kitties
You may have seen videos of cats protecting small dogs from coyotes or drawing enraged dogs away from their owners so they can get to safety. I prefer those clips to the ones of cats playing the piano, and they make me wonder whether Olga would protect me in a life-or-death situation. She’s a guard cat in some ways, but her idea of protection is much different than mine.
I don’t expect her to repel a home invasion or chase a porch pirate into oncoming traffic, but she protects me from pests. A flying insect’s life expectancy plummets when it enters my home because of the gray panther prowling around.
I’m impatiently awaiting my supper.
Pest Control
Like most healthy cats, Olga is a light sleeper. She springs to action if she hears or senses a housefly or other bug in her territory. Her impressive eye-to-paw coordination allows her to catch flies in midair, sometimes using two paws.
I don’t think she’s protecting me exactly; most felines enjoy hunting insects and other small creatures because of their instincts but not out of their love for their owners. However, flies and other insects carry diseases, and when fewer pests inhabit your home, you’re less likely to have an infestation or get sick.
Olga the Watch Cat
Sometimes, Olga alerts me with a grunt when someone pulls into the driveway. If she’s sleeping, she may not react until there’s a knock on the door, but she usually comes to me if someone or something approaches my house. When she hears a helicopter in the distance, she jumps up and runs to the window.
Do you think the helicopter will land on our house?
Unlike fireworks, she’s not afraid of helicopters, but the sound irritates her, and instead of running away, she stares at the sky and paws at the windowpanes. Our cats protect us in some ways, even if they aren’t as skilled as dogs. I’m confident that Olga, like Sam the Shetland Sheepdog in Lethal Weapon 2, will alert me in time to escape a helicopter attack.
Birla Estates Pvt. Ltd., a wholly-owned subsidiary of Century Textiles and Industries, and the real estate venture of the Aditya Birla Group, has announced expanding its presence in Pune with a land acquisition in Manjri, Pune.
The land parcel is spread across 16.5 acres with a development potential of approximately 32 lakh sq ft and an estimated revenue potential of ₹2,500 crore.
K. T. Jithendran, MD & CEO at Birla Estates said, “Pune is a strategic market for us and this acquisition is a step towards our ambitious growth plans. The Pune Sholapur corridor is transforming at a rapid pace and we intend to enhance living standards in Manjri by delivering meticulously designed homes that seamlessly integrate contemporary architecture with thoughtfully chosen amenities.”
Shares of Century Textiles & Industries stock traded at ₹2,315.10 on the NSE, higher by 4.39 per cent as of 1.15 pm.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
JEDNA od stvari koja mnogima zadaje glavobolje kad je riječ o online kupovini je moguć povrat robe. Uvjeti se mogu razlikovati od trgovine do trgovine, a na tapeti se nedavno našao modni brend Abercrombie & Fitch. Tiktokerica Alexi (@artsialexi) imala je velikih problema s povratom novca, a ispostavilo se da nije jedina.
“Ovo se dogodilo velikom broju ljudi”
“Isprobala sam što sam naručila, a ono što mi nije pristajalo sam vratila u fizičku trgovinu u Chicagu. Nisam dobila potvrdu na papiru, ali u aplikaciji je vidljivo da sam vratila odjeću”, ispričala je. Iako je povrat novca trebao stići nakon 3-5 radnih dana, nije ga dobila ni nakon 11 dana, o čemu je obavijestila trgovinu.
Na to joj je rečeno da im pošalje dokaz o povratu s popisom predmeta koje je vratila, te da pričeka 2-3 radna dana zbog daljnje obrade. “Ovo se mnogima dogodilo. Provjerila sam, nisam sama”, rekla je.
Pričekala je, no još uvijek nije dobila povrat. Kad je ponovno nazvala Abercrombie, rečeno joj je da njezin slučaj uopće nije proslijeđen na daljnju obradu, no da će sada biti. “Ovo je smiješno”, rekla je.
Alexi je na kraju kontaktirala sa svojom bankom i pokrenula postupak povrata plaćanja. Nakon toga su joj se javili iz Abercrombieja s isprikom: “Potvrđujemo kako vaš povrat nije pravilno obrađen. Zato ne vidite povrat na svojem računu. Još ne znamo zašto se to dogodilo”. Još jednom su joj obećali povrat u roku 3-5 radnih dana te su joj dali 30% popusta na sljedeću narudžbu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
“To je lijepo od njih, hvala, ali se nadam da čitaju komentare na moje objave jer se ovo dogodilo velikom broju ljudi, moj slučaj nije jedinstven”, prokomentirala je Alexi. “Ako kupujete tamo, pazite da čuvate račun i provjerite stanje svojeg računa”.
Kakvi su uvjeti u Hrvatskoj?
Abercrombie & Fitch nema fizičku, već samo online trgovinu u Hrvatskoj, tako da povrat u fizičku trgovinu nije moguć. Kako biste vratili kupljenu robu i ostvarili povrat novca, možete je izvršiti poštom. Prema uputama na službenoj stranici, prvo je potrebno najaviti povrat putem online obrasca, odabrati prijevoznika robe i iskoristiti dobivenu naljepnicu na povrat.
Tvrtka ne prihvaća povrate ili zamjene bez računa ili potvrde o narudžbi. Zamjena robe je bez naknade, a za povrat se naplaćuje naknada od 5 eura (koja će biti naplaćena od iznosa povrata). Na obradu povrata robe pričekat ćete tri tjedna, a na povrat novca čekat ćete 3-5 radnih dana. Uvjeti povrata robe online isti su diljem svijeta, uz različit iznos naknade.
Više je ljudi komentiralo kako je imalo problema s povratom robe u Abercrombie: “Nisam dobila svoj povrat tjednima”, “Upravo sam im se javila jer sam vratila odjeću u trgovinu prije više od tjedan dana i još mi nisu vratili novac”, “Ovo se dogodilo mnogim ljudima”, “I meni se to dogodilo”, “Prave se glupi i tvrde da su izvršili povrat”.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu?
Zach Neto has four tattoos on his left arm. The one that really catches your eye is the collage toward the bottom of the arm, with a lion roaring atop its kingdom.
“This,” Neto said, pointing to the tattoo, “is just my journey.”
The Angels’ shortstop is a son of Miami, so the lion overlooks Miami Beach. The date of his major league debut is part of the tattoo, as is the Major League Baseball logo.
“For me finally making it,” he said.
The camel represents his college mascot. And the lion?
“I always see myself as a lion,” he said. “King of the jungle.”
For an Angels team that has been lost in the wilderness for a decade, Neto is anchoring himself as king of the infield.
Neto, 23, is in his second major league season, two years removed from his last game for the Fighting Camels of Campbell University. Of the 39 players selected in the first round of the 2022 draft, three have made the majors. One is back in the minors, one is on the injured list, and neither one has a positive WAR.
And then there is Neto, one among a pride of prospects trying to establish themselves as the Angels use this season to determine which young players can help them return to glory.
“No, no, no, no,” Angels manager Ron Washington said. “He has established himself.”
The Angels’ bummer summer could get worse, if they trade veterans — including pitcher Tyler Anderson, their only healthy and effective starter, and outfielder Taylor Ward, their No. 3 batter — for desperately needed prospects.
But that would be in the service of their future, in which they hope to build around Neto and catcher Logan O’Hoppe.
Neto this season has become the second shortstop in franchise history to hit 10 home runs before the All-Star break, joining Jim Fregosi, who did it in 1970. With his next stolen base, Neto would become the first Angels infielder with 10 homers and 10 stolen bases before the break since All-Star third baseman Troy Glaus, in 2000.
Angels shortstop Zach Neto’s strong play has helped him earn plenty of favorable comparisons in only his second season in the majors.
(Wally Skalij / Los Angeles Times)
In their 64 seasons, only one Angels shortstop has hit more than 14 home runs in a season: Fregosi, who did it 54 years ago, 59 years ago, and 60 years ago.
Neto is batting .250 with a .732 OPS, in the same ballpark as Anthony Volpe of the New York Yankees, at .271 with six home runs and a .742 OPS. Volpe has more than four times as many All-Star votes primarily because (a) he plays for the Yankees and (b) he plays for the first-place Yankees.
But Volpe, a defending Gold Glove winner, also has a superior WAR because he gets on base more often and because he ranks, at least according to publicly availabledefensive metrics, as a premier defensive shortstop again this season. Those metrics do not love Neto.
“Day to day, I see him playing his butt off,” Washington said. “I don’t care about the metrics.”
Washington compared Neto to Dansby Swanson, a two-time All-Star he coached in Atlanta. In his second season, Swanson batted .232 with six home runs.
“Growing up, I have always looked up to Mike. Being able to share the same locker room and field and hear his thoughts, it’s a dream come true.”
— Zach Neto, on playing alongside Angels star Mike Trout
“Dansby wasn’t what Dansby is when he first got here,” Washington said. “It took some work.
“He reminds me of Dansby in the way he controls things out there.”
Mark Gubicza, the Angels’ broadcaster and 14-year major league pitcher, said Neto’s instincts and anticipation reminded him of Hall of Famer Cal Ripken Jr.
Anderson compared Neto favorably to Trevor Story, his former teammate with the Colorado Rockies, who batted .239 and struck out 191 times in his second season. Story emerged as an All-Star, and Anderson believes Neto can too.
“I don’t care if he hits .195. You want him at shortstop every day,” Anderson said. “His defense is that good.”
ESPN last week considered the question of which shortstop a team would want over the next five years. The top two picks were the marquee youngsters: MVP contenders Bobby Witt Jr. of the Kansas City Royals and Gunnar Henderson of the Baltimore Orioles. Volpe ranked eighth.
Angels shortstop Zach Neto throws to first base against the Dodgers on Friday.
(Wally Skalij / Los Angeles Times)
“You could say it’s confidence. You could say it’s cockiness. Whatever you want to say. It’s just the way I carry myself every day. I just go out there and try to have fun.”
— Zach Neto, on his on-field demeanor
Of the 15 shortstops mentioned — three of which currently play in the minor leagues — Neto was not one of them.
The way Neto would tell it, that would be just the latest in the pile of chips atop his shoulder. You might not know it from watching him play, though.
“I like to have a lot of fun out there,” he said. “You could say it’s confidence. You could say it’s cockiness. Whatever you want to say. It’s just the way I carry myself every day. I just go out there and try to have fun.”
That is how they do it in the 305 area code.
“Being born and raised in Miami, it’s kind of a reputation down there,” Neto said.
The perennial high school powers courted him, he said, but only after he emerged as a prep star. He declined to transfer.
The big-time college programs wooed him, he said, but only after he emerged as a star at Campbell. He declined to transfer.
The big-time agents pursued him, he said, but only when it became evident he would be a million-dollar draft pick. He turned them down and stayed with the low-profile hometown agent who had helped place him in college summer leagues.
And, when he signed with the Angels, he reminded his parents he had promised to get his college degree and pledged he would get it done one day, no matter how long baseball might keep him away from the classroom.
“It’s more of a loyalty thing for me,” Neto said.
Zach Neto is confident he’ll be playing at shortstop when the Angels finally make the postseason again.
(Wally Skalij / Los Angeles Times)
That makes him appreciate Mike Trout all the more. The best player in franchise history twice passed up free agency to stay in Anaheim, where the home team last won a postseason game 15 years ago, the same year Trout was drafted.
“Growing up, I have always looked up to Mike,” Neto said. “Being able to share the same locker room and field and hear his thoughts, it’s a dream come true.
“He could have had the opportunity to go to any other team, and he stuck with his loyalty and his word in trying to build something here. That’s just what I’m all about. I really appreciate that from him. I am grateful to be able to join him for this ride to change something here.”
So, when the Angels finally return to the playoffs for the first time since 2014, you will be the shortstop?
Bould, the homegrown audio brand, has partnered with Ford Mustang for the launch of its latest product line including Torq, Dash, and Derby Black. According to the company, these products draw inspiration from the bold and dynamic aesthetic of the Ford Mustang.
The company claims that these earbuds offer up to 100 hours of uninterrupted playtime, dual device pairing for seamless connectivity (exclusive to Derby and Dash), boult amp app support and Bluetooth 5.4 with Blink & Pair for swift pairing.
These devices support lightning Boult fast charging for quick charging and have ZEN Quad Mic ENC technology that guarantees crystal-clear voice quality in any environment.
“Experience enhanced bass and immersive sound with 13mm drivers powered by BoomX Technology, and ultra-low latency for optimal gaming performance with 45ms ultra-low latency Combat Gaming Mode. Proudly crafted in India these earbuds are IPX5 water-resistant, making them ideal for active lifestyles. Intuitive touch controls and voice assistant integration further enhance usability, ensuring a premium audio experience for all users,” the company said.
According to the company, all three earbuds – Torq, Dash, and Derby Black – carry the inherent Mustang design language, embodying the powerful Mustang DNA.
“We are absolutely thrilled about our collaboration with Mustang to introduce this exclusive product line to the market,” expressed Varun Gupta, Co-founder at BOULT.
“This partnership truly underscores our unwavering dedication to pushing the boundaries of audio technology, all while paying homage to Mustang’s esteemed legacy of excellence. The opportunity to join forces with a company of Mustang’s calibre, renowned for its technical expertise and global experience, promises to significantly enhance our capabilities and elevate our offerings to new heights. At BOULT, innovation is at the heart of everything we do. We are committed to continuously introducing new product categories and pioneering designs that resonate deeply with our consumers,” he added.
Torq, Dash, and Derby Black are now offered at introductory prices of Rs 1,299. These can be purchased on Amazon, Flipkart, and on official website, www.boultaudio.com at MRP of Rs 5,999.
Last year, The Beatles topped the UK chart with their final song, Now and Then, featuring the recorded singing of John Lennon.
Before that, the Fab Four hadn’t hit No 1 since 1969’s The Ballad of John and Yoko.
And now a Paul McCartney Beatles classic could well hit the top spot in the UK singles chart this summer.
Coral bookmakers have announced that Hey Jude has gone from 8-1 to 2-1 after being adopted by England football fans as their anthem for the 2024 Euros.
McCartney wrote the 1968 single to comfort Julian Lennon, John Lennon’s eldest son after his father left his mother for Yoko Ono.
Coral’s John Hill said: “It appears as though Hey Jude is this summer’s adopted England anthem, just as Sweet Caroline was at the last European Championship. After the success Jude Bellingham has had on the pitch, we have seen a wave of support in our betting on the Beatles song topping the official singles charts this summer.”
Upon its release, Hey Jude was 1968’s top selling single in the UK, US, Australia and Canada. Considered one of the greatest songs of all time, it has sold around eight million copies over the years.
The updated Kia Sorento now has a hybrid option – but spoiler alert, it’s still in very short supply.
This is the new 2024 Kia Sorento GT-Line HEV AWD, which is part of the facelifted range and serves as the flagship until the Sorento Plug-in Hybrid returns.
Priced from a little over $73,000 before on-road costs, the updated model is a few thousand dollars dearer than before – and supply is still pegged around 20 units per month, unfortunately.
Still, the top-spec Sorento Hybrid is around the same money as a mid-tier Toyota Kluger Hybrid. The related Hyundai Santa Fe Hybrid has just arrived with better supply and a wider range of variants, but a more polarising design.
Key upgrades as part of the mid-life refresh include a fresh exterior design, as well as an updated interior and an enhanced technology suite. The hybrid drivetrain, meanwhile, is unchanged.
Should you be getting in the queue for one of these electrified Kias, or are you better off looking at other options?
How does the Kia Sorento compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Kia Sorento against similarly sized vehicles.
Kia
Sorento
How much does the Kia Sorento cost?
Like the petrol and diesel range, prices are up as part of the 2024 refresh.
Model Variant
$RRP
2024 Kia Sorento GT-Line HEV FWD
$70,330 (+$3580)
2024 Kia Sorento GT-Line HEV AWD
$73,330 (+$3580)
Why haven’t we listed the V6 and diesel variants? Well the hybrids aren’t subject to national drive-away pricing and therefore the price differences aren’t consistent between States and Territories.
However, based on recommended retail pricing (i.e. before on-road costs), the Sorento HEV FWD commands a near-$5000 premium over the equivalent V6 FWD, same for the HEV AWD versus the equivalent Diesel AWD.
As was the case pre-update, the Sorento Hybrid is only available in top-spec GT-Line guise due to its limited supply. Kia Australia says it’s working with the factory to increase allocation, but the car is sourced from the factory that supplies the Sorento HEV for Europe, North America and the Korean domestic market.
To see how the Kia Sorento lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What is the Kia Sorento like on the inside?
If you’ve sat in an updated Sorento GT-Line, it’s pretty much the same here.
Save for energy flow graphics and a dedicated hybrid menu in the infotainment system and cluster, it’s otherwise the same as a Sorento GT-Line in V6 or diesel flavours.
That means you get a nicely trimmed cabin with Nappa leather upholstery, lashings of gloss black, and brighter silver tones, and it’s all nicely put together and has an upmarket look and feel to it.
Even the base Sorento S scores a 12.3-inch touchscreen with Kia Connect, and higher grades get embedded satellite navigation with real-time traffic updates. Wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto are also standard across the board, as is DAB radio.
The GT-Line gets the upscale twin 12.3-inch array which effectively gives the Sorento the same full digital cockpit as the larger all-electric EV9.
There’s also a 10-inch head-up display with better graphics, and can project turn-by-turn navigation prompts from third-party mapping apps from smartphones. There’s a digital rear-view mirror on the flagship too.
Kia’s latest software features here, bringing wireless smartphone mirroring across the range (yay!) and Kia Connect for connected navigation, over the air software updates, and remote functions including cabin pre-conditioning, and more.
Higher grades offer extended functionality too, such as surround camera snapshots on the GT-Line, and you can control the vehicle’s windows GT-Line models with auto up/down functionality.
All of this is accessed via the Kia Connect smartphone app. We’ve tried these features in other Kias, and they’re handy once you get it all set up. The Bose 12-speaker premium audio system is also good, with crisp audio and punchy bass.
Comfort and space up front are pretty good, with plenty of nooks and crannies to store your phones, wallets, and keys. There’s a big shelf under the centre stack for your phone, toothed cupholders, and several bins and cubbies – though the door pockets will only fit smaller bottles.
The GT-Line offers a wireless phone fast charger. Worth noting is some of the cubbies aren’t felt or rubber lined so harder items can rattle around a bit.
Another new feature of the Sorento is the touch bar that serves as a climate control panel and virtual hard controls for the infotainment system. We’ve seen this on the EV6 and Sportage; unlike some touch-based controls the Kia ones work much like conventional switchgear.
As before, the GT-Line gets a slew of luxury features like heated and ventilated front seats, as well as a heated steering wheel and manual rear sunshades. A panoramic sunroof is again reserved for the flagship, and it’s a great feature if your kids like to look up at the sky while in the car.
Not much has changed in the rear other than some new seat designs and new USB-C ports on the seat backs in higher models, but there’s still plenty of goodness in the second and third rows.
Adults easily fit behind adults in the second row, even three abreast without it being too much of a squeeze. The third row is one of the more practical for the segment, though it’s not as good as the Palisade or Carnival and the curtain airbags only cover that second window – and therefore technically don’t offer full three-row coverage.
The Sorento is also very kid-friendly, with five top-tether and four ISOFIX anchors meaning you can fill up the rear two rows with child capsules if you need the space. The second row has a one-touch entrance function too to make getting in and out of the rearmost seats easier.
The third row itself remains one of the best in class, with enough room for average-sized adults for shorter journeys and more than enough space for kids. Disappointingly, the Sorento doesn’t get a proper third zone of automatic climate control like numerous rivals do.
Rounding out the rear amenities are a fold-down centre armrest with cupholders, net-type map pockets behind the front seats, cupholders, and bottle holders in the doors themselves, as well as a 12V outlet behind the centre console. GT-Line models also feature heated outer second-row seats.
Regardless of which Sorento you choose, there’s a full-size alloy spare wheel under the boot floor as well. Props to Kia for continuing to offer this, which no doubt will be a key point of difference to many buyers.
Dimensions
Kia Sorento HEV
Length
4815mm
Width
1900mm
Height
1700mm
Wheelbase
2815mm
Boot capacity
179-1995 litres
Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM)
2580kg – FWD 2640kg – AWD
To see how the Kia Sorento lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
What’s under the bonnet?
As before, it’s a 1.6-litre turbocharged hybrid drivetrain underneath the skin.
Technical Specifications
Kia Sorento HEV
Engine
1.6L 4cyl turbo HEV
Power
169kW
Engine torque
350Nm
Transmission
6-speed auto
Driven wheels
FWD or AWD
Kerb weight
1951kg – FWD 2014kg – AWD
Fuel economy – claim
5.4L/100km – FWD 5.7L/100km – AWD
Fuel economy – observed
6.8L/100km
Fuel tank size
67 litres
Fuel requirement
91 RON
CO2 emissions
122g/km – FWD 129g/km – AWD
Emissions standard
Euro 5
Maximum tow capacity
1650kg – braked
To see how the Kia Sorento lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool.
How does the Kia Sorento drive?
The combustion-only Sorento range is already good, and the HEV adds an electrified powertrain into that mix.
Overseas model shown
With a small turbocharged engine and an electric motor built into the six-speed automatic transmission, the Sorento HEV requires little learning curve to get accustomed to its driving characteristics.
The Sorento HEV will often start in silence, but on cold starts the petrol engine fires up shortly after with the buzzy, muted tone this unit has in other Hyundai-Kia products. It sometimes sends slight vibrations into the cabin, but it’s far from harsh.
Being mated to a conventional auto and not a dual-clutch, as well as having an electric motor fill the void that would normally be turbo lag, the Sorento HEV actually gets off the line quite smoothly.
Compared to something like a Kluger Hybrid, which uses an e-CVT, you might need to get used to the shifting between cogs, but otherwise it’s pretty conventional. You’ll find it doesn’t stay in EV mode much during acceleration unless you’re really feathering it or rolling at slow speeds in stop-start traffic.
The Sorento HEV is clearly pitched at those that rarely venture onto the open road, with its hybrid system doing its best work in town. The gearing sees the 1.6-litre engine spinning at about 2000rpm at 100km/h. By comparison, the V6 and diesel will be far less stressed on the freeway thanks to their eight-speed ‘boxes.
It’s also evident in the indicated fuel consumption. Our week ended with an indicated readout of 6.8L/100km which is good for this size of vehicle given we mainly drove to and from the office in peak hour with high traffic, though it’s still a bit up on the brand’s 5.7L/100km claim. Spend more time on the highway and you’ll see sevens.
Technically the electric motor acts as a launch gear and reverse, so you could consider it a seven-speeder, but the final drive appears a touch short to really make this a proper all-rounder. If you spend more time on the freeway, the diesel even without idle stop-start will do better numbers than the more expensive hybrid.
Otherwise it’s all pretty much standard Sorento, as with the mid-life update both the Sorento HEV and PHEV have been given the same ride and handling tune as the wider range, which wasn’t the case previously. As you’d expect, the Sorento HEV handles with accuracy and confidence, with a lovely balance between comfort and engagement.
The updated model feels nicely tied together to mask its size, and is a little softer in its damping to add an extra layer of compliance over undulations and harder hits.
The Sorento HEV barely has any added weight compared to the equivalent petrol or diesel. While Kia Australia doesn’t quote 0-100km/h times, the UK division quotes 8.7 seconds for the Sorento Hybrid, with the PHEV reducing that to 8.4 seconds. According to British specs, the diesel is almost half a second slower.
It doesn’t feel as outright punchy as the V6, nor as effortlessly torquey as the diesel. It splits the two in terms of performance and refinement, adding the electrified low-speed drive as a bonus while also achieving diesel-like economy for the most part.
Insulation from road and wind noise is good, and the new Santa Fe arguably pushes the game forward again with its very clear focus on premium rivals in terms of presentation and ambience.
The array of driver assistance systems works well, as we found in the core range. Highway Driving Assist combines adaptive cruise and lane centring for a semi-autonomous highway driving experience, and works well if for the odd confusion in freeway construction zones or if a vehicle suddenly cuts you off.
Blind Spot View Monitor bolsters the standard blind-spot and rear cross-traffic assist features by showing you a live side camera feed every time you indicate, and the surround camera with 3D view likewise increases visibility.
If there’s one complaint, it’s the annoying beeps and bongs of the Speed Limit Assist default to on and can be quite annoying even if they’re quieter than previous iterations. Best to add the shortcut to the assistance menu to the star-labelled button on the steering wheel.
What do you get?
The Sorento HEV is exclusively offered in flagship GT-Line trim, meaning it comes fully loaded.
Sorento HEV GT-Line highlights:
19-inch alloy wheels
Full size spare wheel
12.3-inch digital instrument cluster
12.3-inch infotainment touchscreen
Blind Spot View Monitor
Remote Smart Parking Assist
Parking Collision Avoidance Assist – Reverse
Quilted Nappa leather-appointed seats
Digital centre mirror
Suede headliner
Interior mood lighting
360-degree surround view monitor
Heated, ventilated front seats
Heated second-row seats – outer
Panoramic sunroof – powered
Kia Connect
Over the Air (OTA) updates
Read our price and specs breakdown for the petrol and diesel Sorento range here.
Is the Kia Sorento safe?
The new Sorento carries over the pre-update model’s five-star ANCAP safety rating, based on Euro NCAP tests.
The Sorento managed an adult occupant protection score of 82 per cent, child occupant protection score of 85 per cent, vulnerable road user protection score of 63 per cent, and safety assist score of 89 per cent.
Standard safety features include:
7 airbags incl. front-centre
Adaptive cruise control
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Car detection
Pedestrian detection
Cyclist detection
Junction assist
Blind-spot assist
Driver attention alert
Highway Driving Assist (HDA)
Adaptive cruise incl. stop/go
Lane Following Assist
Navigation-based
Lane Following Assist
Lane keep assist
Intelligent Speed Limit Assist (NEW)
Parking sensors front, rear
Rear cross-traffic assist
Reversing camera
Safe Exit Warning
Tyre pressure monitoring
Kia Connect features include:
eCall
Remote lock
Remote climate control
Vehicle tracking
Vehicle status monitoring
Voice assistant
Destination send to vehicle
Real-time traffic updates
Valet parking mode
It’s worth noting the updated Australian range doesn’t pick up more airbags like Korean models, which get rear-side inflators and a driver’s knee airbag – bringing the total to 10.
Local models also appear to miss out on the ‘reverse guide lamp’ that’s similar to the rear lights offered by Genesis models.
How much does the Kia Sorento cost to run?
The Kia Sorento lineup is covered by a seven-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty. High-voltage battery and motor components for electrified models are covered for seven years or 150,000 kilometres.
Scheduled maintenance is required every 12 months or 10,000 kilometres – whichever comes first. Kia models with turbocharged petrol engines have shorter mileage intervals than naturally aspirated petrols and turbo-diesels.
Interval
Sorento HEV FWD
Sorento HEV AWD
12mth/10,000km
$352.00
$352.00
24mth/20,000km
$732.00
$732.00
36mth/30,000km
$426.00
$426.00
48mth/40,000km
$1062.00
$1098.00
60mth/50,000km
$396.00
$396.00
72mth/60,000km
$882.00
$882.00
84mth/70,000km
$695.00
$695.00
Total
$4545.00
$4581.00
CarExpert’s Take on the Kia Sorento
The Sorento Hybrid remains a solid option for families wanting to reduce their emissions, if you can get your hands on one.
While the Australian-market diesel continues with older Euro 5 emissions systems, the HEV is easily the cleanest way to get around. If you’re spending more time in town, it’ll outdo both the V6 and oiler for fuel consumption.
It’ll take some time to make up the $4000-$5000 premium over the equivalent V6 and diesel, and the lack of national drive-away pricing means that initial deficit could be wider from the get-go. But, if you’re not only buying for the fuel savings and just general reduction of impact and perhaps future resale, it could be the better bet.
There are a few things going against it, however. High relative consumption on the highway is one, which I imagine will only get worse with seven on board. As noted earlier, regular highway stints or plans to tow would make the cheaper and more readily available diesel a better option.
Very short supply is the other huge grey cloud. You could be waiting a very long time for one. It won’t be subject to FBT exemptions like the upcoming PHEV will be – which if you’re leasing, could make the plug-in more attractive.
Finally, there’s the fact the new Santa Fe Hybrid does the same things but offers a wider range of variants and better supply (starting from $15,000 less), as well as a more power (172kW v 169kW). It may have looks that polarise, but it has a newer version of the same mechanicals underneath.
That all said, the Sorento stacks up well still against the Toyota Kluger like-for-like, and will no doubt be a very capable family chariot for those lucky few that can get one in their driveway. Hopefully upcoming emissions regulations in Australia open up more supply Down Under.
Click the images for the full gallery
MORE: Buy a Kia Sorento MORE: Everything Kia Sorento
The Securities Appellate Tribunal (SAT) has stayed a Sebi order that restrained former PTC India chairman and managing director Rajib Kumar Mishra from being a director in a listed entity for six months in a matter pertaining to corporate governance lapses.
Following the order passed by markets regulator Sebi on June 12, Mishra ceased to be the chairman and non-executive director of PTC India Financial Services Ltd (PFS) and CMD of PTC India Ltd.
PFS, promoted by PTC India Ltd, is a non-deposit-taking NBFC classified as an infrastructure finance company.
Giving interim relief to Mishra SAT in its order on Friday, said, “The operation of the impugned order shall remain till the next date of hearing subject to deposit of 50 per cent of the penalty amount by the appellant with the Sebi within two weeks.
The markets regulator, through its order, prohibited Mishra from “holding any position of director or key managerial personnel in any listed company or any intermediary registered with Sebi or associating himself with any listed public company or a public company which intends to raise money from the public or any intermediary registered with Sebi, in any capacity, for a period of six months” for corporate governance lapses at PFS.
Also, Securities and Exchange Board of India (Sebi) slapped a fine of Rs 10 lakh on him.
Apart from Mishra, the watchdog prohibited the company’s former MD and CEO Pawan Singh from holding the post of director in any listed company for two years and also imposed a penalty of Rs 25 lakh on him.
In its order, Sebi had noted that Pawan Singh had “grossly misused” his position as the MD and CEO of PFS to prevent Ratnesh from joining as whole-time director (finance) and chief financial officer (CFO), which was approved by the company’s board. Further, Mishra was acting “as a willing accomplice of Singh”, the regulator said.
“The role of Noticee 2 (Mishra) in flouting the norms of corporate governance in this matter is well established,” Sebi had stated in its order.
(This story has not been edited by News18 staff and is published from a syndicated news agency feed – PTI)
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to markets, economy and companies. Having a decade of experi…Read More
